


ier eT LS ogg Bie rw aie Pain a as ws Mongou apes PENT once open aan UM Pee RAR ARS UA RO 





LIBRARY 


OF THE 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


Class 





Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/shortgrammarofgr00roberich 


A SHORT GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


BOOKS BY PROF. A. T. ROBERTSON. 


Critical Notes to Broadus’ Harmony of the Gospels. Price of 


the ‘Harmony 2.5. doc esis) etapa aes lee ate re sere eae $1 50 
Life and Letters ofijotin A. Broadus’ ¢s .52-. 4005s tee eee $1 50 
Teaching of Jesus Concerning God the Father ................ $0 75 
The Student’s Chronological New Testamen? .................. $1 00 
Keywords in the Teachingof Jesus: ..<:..5....osstaueee eee $0 50 
Syllabus for New Testament Study 35... 2 42> en eee $0 90 
Epochs in the Life of Jesus .00:..2n6 .<cioiese eee ee eee $1 00 
A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament ..........--.... $1 50 
Epochs in the Life of Paul... 0.02. 26422. 0c sane ee $1 25 


These books can be had through A. C. Armstrong & Son. 


A SHORT GRAMMAR 


—OF THE— 


GREEK NEW TESTAMENT 


FOR STUDENTS FAMILIAR WITH THE ELEMENTS OF GREEK 
—BY— 


ACT ROBERTSON, -A; M., D:-2D:, 


Professor of New Testament Interpretation, Southern Baptist 
Theological Seminary, 


LOUISVILLE, KY. 





Kai ra BiBdia, padiora tas peuBpavas.—2 Tim. 4:13. 


A. C. ARMSTRONG & SON, 
3 & 5 West {8th Street, Near 5th Avenue, 
NEW YORK. 
$909. 


Copyright, 1908, 


By A. T. ROBERTSON. 


Second Printing, May, 1909. 


TO W. B. ROYALL, D. D., 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK 
IN 


WAKE FOREST COLLEGE 


TRUE GREEK AND TEACHER 


=) 


Pr 


ss” 


Rages 


> 


7 
ia 


a we 


aa 


Y 


eS 





a 





+ 


0 
L 


he 





¥ 








~ > a 


PREFACE. 


I have been a teacher of the Greek New Testament for twenty 
years and a student of Greek for thirty. But time is a poor meas- 
ure of one’s real interest in the Greek tongue if he is a Greek 
lover, a true Philhellene. This noble tongue contains no treasure 
comparable to the New Testament. We could much more easily 
give up Plato and Demosthenes than John and Paul. I count % 
a privilege and a joy to help young ministers to a right apprehen- 
sion of the Greek New Testament. At bottom exegesis is gram- 
matical. That is not all of exegesis, but it is the true beginning. 

A few years ago I published a little Syllabus of New Testament 
Greek Syntax for the use of one of the Greek classes here. The 
book was used in a number of other institutions also. I desire 
now to replace it by a more extensive and comprehensive discus- 
sion of the field of New Testament grammar and yet not one too 
long. During the years, in fact quite recently, I have received 
numerous requests for a New Testament grammar not so element- 
ary as Huddilston, Green, or Harper and Weidner, and yet not 
so minute and exhaustive as Winer, Blass, or Moulton. The 
man who has studied the old Greek does not wish to take up a 
primer, though he may not be ready for the more critical minutiz 
of a book like Winer. New Testament grammar is taught the last 
year in most of the colleges and is begun also the first year in the 
theological seminaries. It is just this definite and unoccupied 
field (the last year in college and the first in the seminary) that 
this Short Grammar seeks to enter. There is here an unfilled 
place in American educational method. I have written a number 
of chapters of a larger grammar of the Greek New Testament 
on the scale of Winer which I shall finish as rapidly as I can. 


v1 PREFACE. 


But that need will also be met by Moulton’s New Grammar, of 
which the brilliant Prolegomena has already appeared, not to men- 
tion Blass’s able work also. Schmiedel and Schwyzer are likewise 
at work on a complete revision of Winer, a portion of which has 
appeared. Winer-Moulton and Winer-Thayer still have a sale 
and deserve it. Rademacher also has in hand a N. T. Grammatik. 
The prospect therefore is good for plenty of the larger grammars in 
the future. But this intermediate type of grammar is a practical 
necessity and an urgent one. Three types of New Testament 
grammars are needed: a beginner’s grammar for men who haye 
had no Greek training, an advanced and complete grammar for 
scholars and more critical seminary work, an intermediate handy 
working grammar for men familiar with the elements of Greek both 
in school and in the pastorate. The busy pastor needs the Short 
Grammar. The text of this Grammar is that of Westcott and Hort 
with constant use of Nestle and Tischendorf. It is a satisfaction 
to note how commonly the excellent critical text of Nestle agrees 
with that of Westcott and Hort. 

The plan of the present grammar is determined by the object in 
view. Condensation is practised as much as possible with clear- 
ness. The paradigms are not given, having been already acquired 
by the student, but brief discussions of the New Testament varia- 
tion in forms occur. Hadley and Allen’s Grammar or Goodwin’s 
Grammar can be used for review of the forms. There is little criti- 
cism of the views of different grammarians. The space is reserved 
chiefly for the positive presentation of the main points of New 
Testament grammar. The effort is made to put the chief facts in 
such a way as to enlist the interest of well prepared men who 
know Attic Greek. 

This grammar is written after much study of modern methods 
in philology and research. The author acknowledges his debt to 
Dr. Adolph Deissmann and Dr. J. Hope Moulton in particular who 
have inaugurated a new era in New Testament grammatical study. 
The results of modern study of comparative grammar, modern 
Greek, the inscriptions, the papyri, ete., are kept constantly in 
mind, Ihave not been able, for lack of space, to draw largely on 


PREFACE. vil 


these treasures by way of illustration. But my interest in the new 
method of grammatical study goes back to the days when I first 
heard John A. Broadus, ‘‘vir doctissimus’’ (Gregory, Prolegom- 
ena, Vol. III., Nov. Test. Graece, p. 1266), teach New Testament 
Greek from the point of view of comparative philology. He so 
taught it because of his work with Gessner Harrison, of the Uni- 
versity of Virginia, who was lecturing on Bopp’s ideas when they 
were novelties in America. I owe more to that impulse than to all 
else. For ten years I have been planning a Greek New Testament 
Grammar, and now I send this one forth as a commission in a 
sense from my great predecessor here. 

I cannot hope to have made no errors. I have said what I saw 
and have not hesitated to put things differently from the current 
grammars if truth led me on. I shall appreciate notice of errata 
for future editions or suggestions that will make the book more 
useful for the purposes had in view. 

I call this A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament rather 
than of New Testament Greek. We can no longer treat the Greek 
of the New Testament as a dialect or a patois or least of all asa 
sacred language unlike anything else on earth. It is merely the 
vernacular xowy of the first century A. D. written by men of varied 
culture, but all touched by the Spirit of Christ and familiar with 
the LXX. Greek and most of them show knowledge of the Aramaic 
of the time. Most of the writers were Jews. But it is not Hebrew 
Greek. It is the Greek of a group of books, not a separate dialect.” 

I cannot recount here my obligations to the many writers whose 
works I have consulted. In the larger grammar detailed acknowl-: 
edgment will be made on every page, but here I must content my- 
self with a general statement. Where it seemed necessary I have 
taken pains to mention a few authors by name. I shall never 
forget some months in 1905 spent among the grammatical treasures 
of the Bodleian Library of Oxford and later in the British Museum 
nor the many courtesies I received. But this grammar does not 
claim to be wholly original. If it were, it would not be true. 
And yet I hold no one else responsible for the views expressed in 
it. It will not be in vain if students can by this means be led into 


viii PREFACE. 


a fuller and deeper knowledge of the riches of Christ. Tatra pedera, 
ev tovtos tof.—I. Tim. 4:15. 


A. T. ROBERTSON. 
Louisville, Ky., 1908. 


PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 


It is only seven months since the first edition of this Gramma 
came from the press. It is now the text-book in many American 
institutions of learning and many more will introduce it in the 
Autumn. It is published in Great Britain by Hodder & Stough- 
ton. An Italian translation is in process of publication from the 
press of Libreria Editrice Fiorentina, Florence. Scholars of the 
first rank in many parts of the world have welcomed the book as 
filling a long felt want. 

The errata especially in the Bibliography were more numerous 
than ought to have been the case. I gratefully acknowledge sug- 
gestions of this nature from Rey. Prof. H. A. Kennedy, D. D., of 
Toronto, Rey. Prof. J. H. Farmer, D. D., of Toronto, Rey. Prof: 
Alexander Souter, D. D., of Oxford, Rev. George Milligan, D. D., 
of Murthly, Scotland, Rey. Prof. Ebrard Nestle, ID. D., of Maul- 
bronn, Germany, Rey. Prof. A. Debrunner, Germany, Rey. Prof. 
B. C. Deweese, of Lexington, Ky., Rev. J. C. C. Dunford and 
Rev. Prof. W. O. Carver, D. D., of Louisville. I have tried to free 
this edition from errors, but I do not claim perfection. I shall 
still welcome notice of further errata for future editions. 

The general plan of the Short Grammar imposes upon it neces- 
sary limitations which are clearly recognized by critics. The 
structure of the work is justified by the purpose in view. Some 
minor changes occur in this edition. I take this oc¢asion to salute 
with best wishes all toilers in the sphere of New Testament 
Grammar. 

May, 1909. A. 'T. ROBERTSON. 

Since completion of the plates for this edition, arrangements 
have been made for a German edition of the Grammar, 


A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY. 





Abbott, Johannine Vocabulary (1905). 

Abbott, Johannine Grammar (1906). 

Bevier, Brief Greek Syntax. 

Blass, Philology of the Gospels (1898). 

Blass, Grammar of New Testament Greek (1905). 
See also Kuehner-Blass. 

Boatti, Grammatica del greco del Nuevo Testamento (1908). 

Boisaeq, Les dialectes doriens (1891). 

Brugmann, Grundriss der Vergleichenden Grammatik (1892, 
1901). ; 

Brugmann, Griechische Grammatik (1900). 

Brugmann, Comparative Grammar (Wright’s tr., 5 vols., 1895). 

Brugmann, Kurze Vereleichende Grammatik der Indo-german- 
isechen Sprachen (1904). 

- Burton, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of New Testament 
Greek (1893). 

Buttmann, Grammar of New Testament Greek (1880). 

Cary, Introduction to New Testament Greek. 

Claflin, Syntax of Boeotian Dialect Inscriptions (1905). 

Clapperton, First Steps in New Testament Greek. 

Clyde, Greek Syntax (1876). 

Conybeare and Stock, Selections from the LXX. with Grammar 
(1905). 

Croenert, Memoria Graeea Hereulanensis (1903). 

Cremer, Biblico-Theological Lexicon of N. T. Greek (1892). 

Curtius, Greek Etymology (1886). 

Dalman, The Words of Jesus (1902). 

Dalman, Grammatik des juedisch-paliistinisehen Aramiisch 
(1895). 


x A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY, 


Deissmann, Bible Studies (1901). 

Deissmann, Licht vom Osten (1908). 

Deissmann, New Light on the New Testament (1907). 

Deissmann, Philology of the Greek Bible (1908). 

Delbrueck, Die Grundlagen der Griechischen Syntax (1879). 

Delbrueck, The Study of Language (1882). 

Delbrueck, Vergl. Syntax d. indog. Sprachen (1893-1900). 

Dieterich, Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der Griechischen 
Sprache (1898). 

Donaldson, New Cratylus (1859). 

Farrar, Greek Syntax (1876). 

Gildersleeve, Syntax of Classical Greek, Part I. (1900). Part IT. 
in press. 

Giles, A Short Manual of Comparative Philology (1901). 

Goodwin, Greek Grammar (1894). 

Goodwin, Greek Moods and Tenses (1889). 

Green, Handbook of the Grammar of the Greek New Testament 
(1904). 

Gregory, Prolegomena. Tischendorf, Novum Testamentum 
Graece (1894). 

Hadley and Allen, Greek Grammar (1895). 

Harper and Weidner, Introductory New ‘Testament Greek 
Method (1888). 

Harrison, Greek Prepositions (1858). 

Hatch, Essays in Biblical Greek (1892). 

Hatzidakis, Einleitung in die Neugriechische Grammatik (1902). 

Heine, Synonomik des Neutestamentlichen Griechisch (1898). 

Heinrici, Der litterarische Charakter der neutest. Schriften 
(1908). 

Helbing, Grammatik der Septuaginta. Laut- und Wortlehre, 
(1907). 

Hirt, Handbuch der Greichischen Laut-und Formenlehre (1902). 

Hoffmann, Die Griechischen Dialekte (1891-1898). 

Hoole, Classical Element in the N. T. (1888). 

Hort, Appendix (Vol. II.) to Greek N. T. 





A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY. Xl 


Huddilston, Essentials of New Testament Greek. 

Jannaris, Historical Greek Grammar (1897). 

Kennedy, Sources of New Testament Greek (1895). 

King and Cookson, Principles of Sound and Inflexion, ete. 
(1888). 

Kroll, Geschichte der Klassischen Philologie (1908). 

Kuehner-Blass, Ausfuehrliche Grammatik Erste Teil 2 Bde 
(1890, 1892). 

Kuehner-Gerth, Ausfuehrliche Grammatik Zweite Teil 2 Bde, 
(1898, 1904). 

Mayser, Grammatik der Griechischen Papyri. Laut- and Wort- 

lehre (1906). 

Meillet, Introduction 4 1’ ‘Etude Comparative des Langues Indo- 

européennes (1908). 

Meister, Die Griechischen Dialekte (1882, 1889). 

Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften (1900). 

Meltzer, Griechische Grammatik: Bd. I., Formenlehre; Bd. IL., 

Bedeutungslehre und Syntax. 

Meyer, Jesu Muttersprache (1896). 

Monro, Homeric Grammar (1891). 

Moulton (J. H.), Grammatical Notes in Expositor (1901), and 
Classical Review (1901, 1904); Characteristics of N. T. 
Greek, Expositor (1904). 

Moulton and Milligan, Lexical Notes on the Papyri, Expositor 
(1908, Ve 

Moulton (J. H.), Introduction to N. T. Greek. 

Moulton, Prolegomena to Grammar of N. T. Greek, third edition 
(1908). 

Moulton (J. H.), The Science of Language (1903). 

Moulton (W. F.) and Geden, Concordance to the Greek Testa- 
ment (1897). 

Mueller, Historische Grammatik der Hellenischen Sprache 
GBS 

Mutzbauer, Die Grundbedeutung des Konjunktiv und Optativ 
und ihre Entwicklung im Griechischen (1908). 








Xl A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Nachmanson, Laute und Formen der Magnetischen Inschriften 
(1903). 

Nageli, Der Wortschatz des Apostels Paulus (1907). 

Nestle, Novum Testamentum Graece (1906). 

Oertel, Five Linguistic Lectures (1901). 

Pallis, H NEA AIA@HKH (1902). 

Preuschen, Vollstindiges griechisch-deutsches Handworterbuch 
zu den Schriften des Neuen Testaments und der ibrigen 
urchristiichen Literatur (1908, ——). 

Reinhold, De Graecitate Patrum Apostolicorum, ete. (1898). 

Riemann et Goelzer, Grammaire Comparée du Gree et du Latin 
(1397, 1901). 

Rutherford, The New Phrynichus (1881). 

Sandys, A History of Classical Scholarship, Vols. I, II, III (1906, 
1908). 

Sayee, Principles of Comparative Philology. 

Schleicher, Vergleichende Grammatik (1876). 

Sehmid, Der Atticismus, ete., 4 Bde (1889-1897). 

Sehwyzer, Grammatik der Pergamenischen Insechriften (1898). 

Simeox, Language of the New Testament (1890). 

Simeox, The Writers of the New Testament. 

Smyth (H. W.), The Greek Dialects (1894). The Tonie. 

Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine Period 
(1870). 

Stahl, Kritisch- historische Syntax des griechischen Verbums 
(1907). 

Sterrett, Homer’s Iliad (1907). Excellent sketch of the Dialect 
of Homer. 

Sweet, History of Language (1900). 

Swete, Introduction to the Old Testament in Greek (1900). 

Thayer, Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (1887). 

Thieme, Die Inschriften von Magnesia am Maeander und das 
Neue Testament (1906), 

Thompson, A Greek Grammar for Schools. New edition (1907). 

Thompson, The Greek Tenses in the New Testament (1895). 


A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY. Xlll 


Thumb, Die Griechische Sprache im Zeitalter des Hellenismus 
(1901). 

Thumb, Handbuch der Neugriechischen Volksprache (1895). 

Tischendorf, Novum Testamentum Graece. 2 Vols. Editio 
octava (1869, 1872). 

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament (1890). 

Vincent and Dickson, Handbook of Modern Greek (1887). 

Viteau, ‘Etude sur la Gree du Nouveau een (Le Verbe, 
1893; Sujet, 1896). 

Voelker, Syntax d. Gr. Papyri, I. (1903). 

Votaw, The Use of the Infinitive in Biblical Greek (1896). 

Wackernagel, Die Griechische Sprache (Die Kultur der Gegen- 
wart. Teil 1, Abt. 8, 1897). 

Wellhausen, Einleitung in die drei ersten Evangelien (1905). 

Westcott and Hort, Greek New Testament. 

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar (1891). 

Winer-Moulton, many editions. 

Winer-Schmiedel (and Schwyzer), only partly done. 

Winer-Thayer, many editions. 

The various editions of the Greek papyri and many of the in- 
scriptions can be consulted in the various libraries in America 
and abroad. The library of this institution has a eet full 
set of this ever growing line of books. 

The titles of the most important editions of inscriptions and 
papyri are given here: 

Archiv fiir Papyrus forschung, Wilcken. 

Audollent, Defixionum Tabellae (1904). 

British Museum Papyri, F. G. Kenyon, (1893, 1898). 

Cauer, Delectus inscriptionum Graecarum (1883). 

Cooke, North Semitic Inscriptions (1903). 

Corpus Papyrorum Raineri (1895). 

Dittenberger, Orientis Graeci Inscriptiones Selectae (2 vols., 
1893). 

Florence Papyri (1905). 

Gaertingen und Paton, Inscriptiones Maris Aegaei (1903, 1908). 


X1V A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Geneva Papyri (1896, 1900). 
Goodspeed, Greek Papyri from the Cairo Museum (1902). 
Grenfell and Hunt, Amherst Papyri (1901, 1905). 
Grenfell and Hunt, Fayum Towns and their Papyri (1900). 
Grenfeli and Hunt, Hibeh Papyri (1906). 
Grenfell and Hunt, Oxyrhynchus Papyri (1898, ——). 
Grenfell and Hunt, Tebtunis Papyri (1901, vk 
Griechische Urkunden (Berlin Papyri, 1895, ae 
Hicks and Hill, Greek Historical Inscriptions (1901). 
Inscriptiones Graecae (Berlin) run from 1873 to 1908, XIV 
Vols. 
Kern, Die Inschriften von Magnesia am Maeander (1900). 
Letronne, Recueil des inscriptions greeques et latines de 
]’ ‘Egypte (1882). 

Mahaffy, Petrie Papyri (1891). 
Michel, Recueil d’ inscriptions greeques (1900). 
Paris Papyri (1865). 
Paton and Hicks, Inseriptions of Cos (1891). 
Solmsen, Inseriptiones Graeeae (1905). 
Turin Papyri (1826). 

For further list see Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 251 ff.; Mayser, 
Grammatik d. griech-Pap., 8. vii. ff. 








TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


aro LOMMCLONYs y= oe cs > oi aaiaialat sis ia = nm ateixio\s se = ois iain) <iees/a 2/4 ses 2 
Chapter I—The Modern Method of Linguistic Study ..............-- 3 
lee hesoldmcontrastedswath: ihe emeware acter tele are cle iain holes) « 3 
2. Evolutionary principle of language ............-..--++.--- 3 
Sy (Gita ei Mls scoadoucscopa ss oc ocormoudduococnSdo poe doL 3 
4. Over emphasis on the literary Attic ..............--.+---- 4 
5. Office of ‘the grammMarial <2. 0... 006 sone ee eee ssiie cece ene 4 
G ‘in Ciradie Gipmithooins So 5ecadoccdosabauucsHoeoUeeaoo OCC 4 
Chapter II.—What is the Greek of the New Testament ............--- 5 
1. The papyri discoveries ......-.....-.c eee een cece sseeeee 5 
2. New Testament in the vernacular ..............-...-.--:- 5 
3. Backward light from Modern Greek vernacular ..........-. 5 
4, The literary and the vernacular Kxowy ......------+-+++++: 6 
5. The xowy and the older Greek ............+-+++++eeeee es 6 
6. Greek of the New Testament not translation Greek, not as a 
THD 4 caesocavotoonacdass Sunoco UDUD Oamunann om osooudC 6 
7, “bits Staritine sumihen, Sasqcsocac opuop sue dooaeo oC uoococooS 6 
G5 Ubi Iain sinibneer saqendocoqodene Soo poe lore UCD acoonood a 
9. The Christian contribution ........0.-..sscecececcescorees 7 
10S ndividual’ characteristics 2.2.2... .- > «eer == 2- 20 if 
lena? IDL hyankie Avo com ao aoobeonnmoot op oa cqoseoUpeC ono orU coop Oooue $ 
Chapter III.—Orthography, Accent, Pronunciation, Punctuation ....... 10 
ieee Orthooraphiy i. 2. .ceiniate sacle oe a eee nos a claeial= emia niae == a 
(a) Difficulties of external evidence ............+-.+--- (a 
iyi erties eee ae aes alain oil msi ninle wininia e'sim ia © iu! 
(oye eiaision cy) esos ooo fs cg eee sie eee imei sslslaies os 2s 12 
Cat Ore satss es phases ofa eet shal <aye 1a = “Ln amcinieig ia deinle clelue oes + 12 
Ge ee Want raciianlicg) Salsa e are ictd cielo om resacie nm wisnl's ain a sees 12 
(f) Rough breathing .....-....-..-0- eee ce cece eee eee 12 
(g) Prothetic vowel ......-..--2--eeeeeeee cece ce eects 12 
(h) Proper mames <2. 0. 6. cece ce ec cece eee ees 12 
(i) Help from papyri ....-..-.e eee eee eee rere ee ceeee 12 


> 


xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS, 

Se PCOONG Cin kg do's <u dG Re BePL Seine epee eee 13 
(a) Old ‘scorn of ‘accent’... 3:6. acs ae eeeenee ee 13 

(b). Evidence ‘of ‘mecent:-:5 <. 25. s- sau auscee reer eeewes 13 

(c): Origin’ of ‘necent. = cot 1s. +26 os eee ee ee 13 

(d). Significance’ of accent... 2)... . +. ses cee eee 14 

(e) ‘New "Testament situation” +. 2.+.) -.2 sey eee eee 14 

Os (\Pronuntiation: < (o's itale esis ena een see seen ee eee 14 
(a) Origin of “modern thepry-? 225.50. -+.seu oss eee 14 

(b) Erasmus partly right and partly wrong ........... 15 

a.‘ Paiebantion fone soi 5 < ao zie kine asin e Mei oe caus Ciera ee 15 
Chapter IV.—The Declension of Substantives ...........0..eceeeeees 17 
1, The history of the Greek declensions ...............0e000ee 17 
(a). "Three declensions:~ 27 a2s eis sve ee eee eee 17 

(hb). Metaplasm: iy. 2. 5...s.. basa iane Sees on ee ee 17 

(ce) . Blending ‘of, case-forme: 20. 2s. ee eee eee 18 

2, Special. forms:in the dirst. declension’ 21.7 +22 ./c. see ee ee oe 18 
(a) Toniewnd Dore wenitives .~..2<.> >2+ 2 tae eee 18 

(b) . Nominative cingular. .%...0%.2%4246 0500. Sees 18 

(GC)... WoGatives. -%<4). swat teu kam ee ane CE eee 18 

(d) History of genitive-ablative endings .............. 19 

(e) Locative, dative, instrumental endings ............. 19 

(f) . Aceusative endings. 3...:¢ 5 c2ce% op wae ome ee 19 

3. Special forms of the second declension ..................0+ 20 
(a) So-called Attie- declension... ......:.s55..%-neenmeee 20 

(CD) “"@eos’ AS VOCaIVE? Sele a.c.ce ce foment roe eae ee 20 

(c) "Incots CCR IOR ICC ea OOOO oe cet ore ey ne 20 

(da). Contraction ‘and-heteroclias: .. 3... - <= seni 20 

(e) Distinctive forms in this declension ............... 20 

4, Special forms of the third declension . 2.2: ......-255.se= = 21 
(a) Vocative: 524.2. 2c ates sieeiste oe incense eee 21 

(by; Acctisatives..2 sto 5 aatae centre ee ot eeioeeiae eee ree 21 

(¢)/' Genitive-ablative ‘fornid y.2).4). 5% «se marae neon 22 

(a). » Nominative: «forms... ism ceca os anleerete sie einer 23 

(e)- locative; instrumental, dative. .. =r ists inten 23 

5, -Nomber in. -SUDStAMELVOS: *<:0r6:2!1~ «<n als wa octet sie eae ee ee 23 
(a). ZIG, Sa Less refers ata vate’ ate te }cicoateteheeteee eter al state tens ieee Pate 23 

(b). ‘Words: with one number only: secs ce serait 23 

(co). Neuter plurals: and the verb tec se ccs semen eel 24 

Sy Gender of substantives®’.). «<\ss> cclemip ene rale einen ennee ne eran 24 
(a) Proper DAMES) \.:.:<)\'2 9 aellsla dhs mie sheesh ieraiesiatete te store 24 

(b) Natural and grammatical gender ................. 24 


cc). New. Testament sage’ > teeta care ok tee re 24 
& 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. XVil 


Chapter V.—The Declension of Adjectives ...............c02ceeerees 25 
ewe Dea Oreoinis Of AUT CCELVES:  c:4, crate) sic nso ey<, 31s Bis) orarsieepahaeie rs we 25 
(a) Line between substantive and adjective ........... 25 

(b) Sanskrit adjectives with one ending .............. 25 

(c) Adjective variations from substantive ............ 25 

(d) Specialize one use of substantives ................ 25 

cee Lhendeclensionoreradyectivesunaacminon cit cee ce ec aeice cicce ae 26 
(ah = Wathone mending re sear seeritk accie che she ate nee oe 26 

Gb) Withs two sets, o£ endings oo. s5 spies. train fue «1» 2 ershov al 26 

Ce) Used™ only. with tO pc sreictecrarce ae otto erscone svn slays aces 26 

Ci) Dropped) nen sive ne, sroslerscue a Srl olerade aise clas sia aie 2 

Co)i, Wiathithree endings frpis cvs cto vende ve echt cise = Seg os 26 

Ch), Compound adiectivesa cc cates ec ee atts Sessa cistere 26 

(@)P Barticiple vendings! Mee sci ore cee teie oo srralerereys 6) steers 26 

(i) New) Testament * usages .-5 cere ts seieiesicuerosis sie ale 26 

Suge Dhorcomparisom: Of adjectives. siya cael slals steyaterde lai, os eter oe 2 
(@) ee Comparisontewathoubesuttixes merseyas ses reeisr sires 27 

5(b) wee hee ous se ater oes cancers eee osaleta saree es 27 

(c) Use of suffixes in the New Testament ............. 21 

Cd) Double comparative: Seis sicc-5 + ciels)cyess-0e chaieisis & vse eae 2 

CG) PB rom) PAG VeEriS ers trevs Grate aia euerste ol eseles elas oli ol anei'en over ens 27 

(f) lative superlative in the New Testament ......... 27 

(ayn Devicess sed! ksi secstase ccaterayacesere airateled wiagetale eugrave ae 2 

Ae Adaectival: numerals ™ is 62/0 s\sie cus = tne hae ar slaens-e aye ssi ayens 28 
(a) Wea Ci@ao boos sccosemescboo andehsods-ore 28 

(bo) ee bbrstercardimalvenumbersw races tiere sien ae al 28 

(Gc) Fs Rhee Ordinalsy a cbc schon occserac ot ohs costar Apogee 28 
Chamioer vl — ohe) Declensiony Of | ETONOUNS, pares). care ciclels eos ofale-c) ss sis =) °° 29 
il, Leitso ioabAeM! IRV GooadoagaonoosunpOoCRoDboDD OO UOODSOaDDNS 29 
(Q)) SORE ehie) TOUS! Booadonnonoedcod aCe doen os GaaoUmac. 29 

(hb) ie Relation» tomverbs: (endings)) 5. ocrds. seliereieieisia. 29 

Ce) pe Orisinally demonstrative s.vesiicias sais lolol ora laters ah 29 

Cee brichesketchvot pronominal /LOLmMSe-- «oleate « sirice oy elotes teist aye tol 29 
() eee harstmancdmsecondepersousmericireeioete relies aieteia moO 

(Qo)) Mbnumeal jars” os odadsooesoo ad oODbeOR CUNO O GOO D0OG 30 

(@) IEWSEEESIE 6 Goo o mo clouacood cob onodouognnUDDO DU OOD 30 
CPC exave ere oie re eel ate ecicce telah stern cpeefore)s) pi cVetorsya s ece's: = 30 

CQ) MIDEMONS ETAL Cte cu cenelge oieicroie ets = tisleraiate ofdue) cae ata siete c's) > 30 

(Ge) “TENN! 6 Sobooocaoduoo ops oo sane soooU HOGOOCGonS 31 

(a) IRMA CIR: G Godoo DO SOUS HOOD Sooo Oden UDpGaHe 31 


(h) 


INSGITOGEM . Suc ous poe omUnopee EoU bp OOCECOOO ano 31 


XViii TABLE OF CONTENTS, 


Chapter VIL—The Conjugation of the -Verb 22. .....-s1seeseeuees ees 32 
1. Relation of verb forms and noun forms ........2........0 32 

(a). Roots sand: stemsi)) <\cinc ts cies isperee ote iets eee eee 32 

(b) *'- Verbal 'suflixes: .. 3'o05- 550% act pe one state ee eee 32 

(ce): Verbal “substantives’o5 .... 2s. -cesx ens eee 32 

Cd) “Werbalad jectives® 2 ii' ices aa» we se oe 32 

(8): New Testament forms stot oa -asie ce ae eee ete 33 

g. ‘The building of The Wer) Peck sas sony ss cen ae Oe 33 

(a) The main word of the ‘sentence .... 52.0. dane newer 33 

(b) Original roots neither verb nor substantive ........ 33 

(ec) cAnalysis' of the var. <<. s6c’h <0) an wma et ee eee 33 

(d) ‘Relation’ of suffixes to theme <7... ...-2-1- aseeen 34 

(e) Disappearazice of pe verbs... .<..5- .2--0- seme eee 34 

We CHO EONSOS «ey2i sedis pias oes bles ie cease a ee 34 

(a): “The sorist °2 tcniecs ence cee e eae ee eee ee 34 

(bh) ~ “Phe ‘present-tensevsystemt scan =e mii aes alae cin ee 35 

(ce). “The? fotnte system: c.s5 94 oc seine oe San aan ew eae 37 

(d)° “The: perfect ‘system fon otc. a pe sone Meee oee eee 38 

(6) Reduplicationt.:. v'..a sc. nieces access oe eee 40 

(£). Aumont soa ieoiss.a = oe ete aie a ne oe eee 40 

2 THE MODES hao cw cee es te cee minis Se ee a ee 41 

(a) The indicative “25 ees gone nee ne = ae eee 41 

(b) The ‘subjunctive co 2ti ssc. csestes ss nee nae 41 

(c)) “The ioptative >... teeppesues ca seg eet ee ee 42 

(d)> “The: imperative sac < an aisle es ie eee ae At 

gb. “Whe VOICES 52:5 ciat2 aw ws aye see tema eae. care ae 45 

(a) “Phe active 22. imaci ts Saccas te ces se eee 45 

(b). Whe “middle: «6. sc oieeeteesihaes s eae en 45 

(¢) - The «Passive |. a creie-siaisid sie Siw te pialhies’s! apne eee 46 

Chapter VIII.—Principal Parts of Some Important Verbs .......... 48-56 
Chapter IX.—The Formation of Words in the New Testament ........ 57 
1, "The history ‘of ‘Greek words 5 .i0sewen eos ts eee eRe 57 

2. The kinship of Greek words with each other ............... 57 

8.- The ‘contrastsin ‘Greek wordsi s\. ci.. 0.6 t-te cicaiele see ene 58 

4; (Compound “Words cise: <icce ste oicve o1ein a icln'nlel ai eieNtiarntatah apna nanenre 59 

5,. Light from other tongues -i.5.29 os din sane geese ee eee ee 

6. New Testament developments ............-eecscesevesneee 60 

Part OE —Symbax sss. ans ea spe ple pyle fate pales as etait ete ei eos Ts 61 
Chapter <3.—The Sentence «... 0552.3 decp sau eae e ees Oemee kes ene 63 
ge! DOL TTELONS * ''e'k 35a 0 posvatuataoue an eal aie Nepean Re ts fey a tetas Tene 63 


2. Subject as center of group of words ..........eeseeseeeens 63 


SS 2 Ga Bxb ep Sth So 


e 

~ 

Lo] 

on 
A 


SOON AD MA wpe 


Ses ea es 
Ay feed SY Ls =) 


Chapter 
if 
2. 
3. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 5 Ab: 


Predicate as’ center of proup of words .................... 63 
JEReCM Cue Copp ‘sosaccoche sdoec sop UC NUaOU OO OCOO UES 63 
Apposition with subject and predicate .................... 63 
Numberkimi sibs eetean des predicabey a...) sie sate cre ciel sieieleol «fs 63 
Gender with substantives and adjectives ..............+.+- 64 
CAaSeus ine ap POSIT OMameeaye ore custekeich stojetelens sy <\ayaleoelcvers apie craks els) cisye 64 
Shipley ming Comyoiinel (265535595 dccbnnoguauoocdcuauoonsge 64 
Words, clauses, sentences, paragraphs .............0.0-08- 64 
x ——SnDStantiven Adjective: “AVOLD) <)a1- coins aiselsclowisic ee ssc 65 
Partsmoss eS peeciy LOLAted ule iain wrelcis ctsya cis) sles etstnisss thet sie nss) a's os ous 65 
INGE Gi ARN Seo occkccuobdtce soa Godse pounonD oe aeeKe 65 
Orioim@ ote adgechivesm series ey verre icici ches eebeicr tekst ace) ote 65 
Ads cetiveimer GTO Qersiccevercrs otccrers ee eae sianel sianaisieh nists disverso\ausi ele 66 
Predicate or atinribubive: Ad JeCEIVE) 1.0 e+ <telclele el icieis = els atei=le 66 
Imfrequencys Ol ther Superlative) sieves ot cleley eres oilers ela reieleherey<ter= 66 
IAAT ECE HAS AC VOL) ra clehessksvcl's © einve «ele vucfore oe arse eievevay e.eiaisierelere 66 
Mad yechive nwath outeSMOStANbLyES= aw cycreielerreieleisieveicla «ise +) clisian cles 66 
Adjectives with the infinitive and with various cases ....... 66 
AROREIO Pe eV OURS eT ey rete: ravens 3, sete create nisjatere: cyereoicver< 6, avele-anale 67 
ING VCEOSBAS MPEP OSHA OUS mera eri stoteiierelsiey oletstetstat sl epatalev ate iste) oleiors ers 67 
BUS TARVICIOD WER ACVELDS: 15.05 «cp isie cern cies wleie eie(sinyensvowlajsie s 67 
PAG VEE Dicline PULASCS Pato iaters cycler aia 8) o-s(s,ccavale; ersteis dats oie leva e's ee 67 
PNONCE DIAS PAELICEDLCS  sucicitre: 50.015) sxo'e.siel atote wis vier sUehsie Sie #10) rm i860 67 
Comparison and composition of adverbs ................-- 67 
RSTO Carr dC lOim: satay arovetstctaistels Ve.cns[s <p 0 siscaisiarain Fiera s ererels ss 68 
The indefinite article in Greek ..............2-000 Pea: 68 
LHe ROL CImeoLethendefinitemarti Clete cts ys siecle arermetel siete ole) 68 
Thesmeanin seo tebhe cartel emepeicrerciqc fs oii te) relies) oleate over el 69 
(a) Individual objects from other individuals .......... 70 
(be elasses=trommothersclassesma miners cei eee aes 70 
(cc) Qualities. from other, qualities) <2. - 22... «a2 -cl-)- ff 
Wihatmihesarticlemisi used within sere lrstelarc cloaca cisieisriorl sfercrele 71 
Wihenmthe ranticlemisenio case dimer cisieferereiei-teleisiere oictere oriole tore 72 
Somepspecialenuses of; the varticlows;jer- aio a clai-'e\clereie le eis stele eleie 73 
(a) ‘The correlation of the article ...................- fife 
(hb) The article-with abtributives 32... 6 5.t es ew eco fife 
(Cer Ci feciiviesee sme ae screittere welsiiese q silelsis. oasis 5-6 13 

(4) NAN SEBATTNKES) <6 Gop ooeuod ono el0Rd obIon DOOde 73 

(3) WAG DW AG URGES te ienvsrn racy street cesses sr e7ekers 7 

(Ce) Phe repetitaonot the article 2c occ). 5cs 22 - sane eweee 74 


(GP hbe- article) with: predicates 5... 2.5.5. eee ee 75 


xx TABLE OF CONTENTS, 
(e) The article with proper names .................¢. 75 
(2) ‘The article with pronouns” 0)..cs. ser eee eee 76 
(g) "Dhe article: ‘with rig. ise amie es Sere idee 76 
(h) “The article with  piegos" ees. act ape eae eee 77 
(i) The article with the nominative as vocative ........ 77 
Chapter “XUTT.—Pron0une  cvvis sinc solemn inis’e 0 =k oie ein oe ie eta ee 78 
1. “What:is the pronowun? <2:.00 jn .e ce weale secre ee ke eee 7 
2. Peraistence Of, PrOonONNsy suck ce since es sss oe ae eee eee 78 
ha UTILS SIB anes pau (6) atin oes ello oy axe avatars (erate =e cate eet ieee 78 
A." Aprdg IN predicate: sncsk ae ts occa eee orc nee eee 79 
Dis SE OBIELOW ips o0ss G aioe ale: timlotoinse pais e's ee skein aie iaee se ates ee 79 
Go. MOMIASION 9. ozs 1s wivc wtoie & Bia ielals o 8 ieiaialoye's bisie sini ental ae 79 
(«Third personal pronoun... 5... -¢. 6 se> 442s eee eee 79 
8.. Who TeHexive jc oe. a% cme as sttisies pe ner eee ee 79 
9." BOSSBHRIVO.\.' kp aise <a yok ee inn +e tiag ase eee eee 80 
20. WBemMORS AVS Wo cs, vie nla cis mais eis sn finer eee eee eee eee 80 
Ads WRRel ata ves sie acarexintets esos rate mle oe wre on alae ee 81 
a2,” Gorrelativ6. pronogns >...000105 s\< sles 4c pains eee oe ee ee 82 
i3,. Whe indefinite pronoun... . sg.622 =e as <n 2 = ee wie ee 82 
14, ‘The interrogative pronouns «2.2... <. 9.2626 aoe eee ee 
15, Reciprocal: PTONOUNS “ssicvsic<iates «sm ae 41s oboe woken eee 85 
16. Alternative expressions... 0s. ..<<%u= on a's o leis oo el e 85 
Chapter KLV,.—Tho ‘Cases sis sieisicic ete oe even es se stewie a eee eee 86 
1, Cases an the Indo-germanic tongues \..2-.-.+.2-—ns= 04m eee 86 
(a) Bight cages in the Sanskrit . <.0..:.--.«2<=6> seen 86 
(b) Varied history of the eight cases ..............--. 86 
(e), ‘Sanskrit case endings: ii. cece ete eee 87 
2, “Whe origin and use of the oases... i x... - vane eae 88 
(a) “Tho “word ease: os... tynawao'e <5 bes eae en eee iar 8S 
(hb). Object of Gages is. pic ec. cision sive o ciecce’s =e aie ee 
(c) Origin of the use of prepositions with the cases .... 88 
(d) Blending case forms: ..iea% casemate dn eve te eee 
(e) Distinctive idea of the cases retained ............. 89 
(f) Origin’ of the caso endings ..........0c cnet neuen 89 
(g) Interchange of cases ......c..eccseescsnsseransas OO 
BS, Tho NOMINALIVE wis dec cin cess = n95 40 oe ei eee eee 90 
(a): Binding go sees cedes veins s bs 0 6) ctceniee Vere e Reena 90 
(b) Original use not subject .......seeccecncnssssece 90 
(c) Properly appositional 2.0... ..secnsvemss scene ncsss 90 
(d) In apposition with other cases ...........++.+--+- 90 
(e) Nominative independent ...........+-eeeeeeeeeees 91 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. XxXl1 


AP LORE VOCALLY Ole raicea cre stelct sleters sl Seva) lates tel aero release eel aie, bree ate e as 91 
(a) a Casenciaadclresset iqertere cperclsteicta revels Arete os ces aie So prolae 91 
CDi) pers ys vitAcltenor wail) qye.tcce ote tive siete ets erecta nk alot eis 91 
(©) Nominative msonmsimavenmiyeeinacieitcee niece cicie reas 91 
(a) Dhesariicles wathethe) vocative: sas. -cencs 665 + 92 
(CO) eBinbereally VOCAIVES™ « are eiets.c/ sts s.crs sparse tiene ais oe ie Gos ars 92 

Cem EIN OR A CCUSALI VOM fegeteraca: eters oloielckedalerstorey ste ei, ve le) « fopartiay cy sFa 8 ais eo 92 
(Gr) a Rhee name AMDIOUOUS) cieyeraaier alsheh riers sie) srciels «exe ores ole 92 
Gb PaBhe oldest CaSO Wer rainc.c 12 steve oie tel jac srsusvaieehie a nae. 92 
GO)FS Rooteideas ofc ccti erie othe mee eiy ie Se ee eee 93 
(d) Originally somewhat vague use................... 93 
(eee Retentionsinathenvernaculareeceeree erie tee ee ce 93 
(f)> Analytic study, 2. convenience, 2. 2. sc... cc ee wc ee ee 94. 
(2) With; verbs: of smotion™!. osc. oclug sie << eles ome 94 
(bh) > extension” of (space: sx. xsi = 2a late) vreicrranl Seteets soles 94 
Gi) ee D uration: sou tine ayes ewes sree earls tories 94 
Giiee Watht transitive: verbs) om misc <x cet esc sto oes saat 94 
(ks) elninermobi ects ore cOnteMime crests eisiiere ier sere = ciate 95 
(i) ee won orm oreyaccusatives erm iierecca ci cio iekerienerel 95 
(Ge) Gait bwpassivenyerbs citi mrseacls asics <unieisyers iis ele a5 oe 96 
(QE) eeWiathonteamverlcisarcriacicictisesinsis oe eles A areveee isis cuere 97 
(O) maWathtsthemantiniGiversyariietoecrevctiaercrte strc heroes i 97 
Cpe Alcetsativara DSOlUGG ease ers ce chai ays cree core oie = 2015) w Slats 97 
(Co) ME Wathuprepositions) <a sjrac- tsi cer toveye ete Soin oeies orels 98 

Gre Rhee Oo entbivieuperrocctyercvercel electorate kor tolsicte ona otto. ale avers cceiclel skovGle 98 
(a) Genitive and ablative same ending in Greek ........ 98 
Ch) P Wrows mamesforszenitivels.scea.>- 25 Ree ae 98 
(e)F “Ancreasewimensamre © eciastave leiw ate cleisl rss date iho’ eeclevanierc.c 99 
(a) Resultant: deat. variesis sec..c.c 272 see teiele <o ansere orm icteiare 99 
(OVE eWathmsubstantivesy coco. ae ctociretciste acts eutsvcre creer i oie 99 

(il) bayer PES S cpocoddoseuucnooeuceonecoobbodc 99 
(Mayo IBS g aGRerars! Wire (bth ar yan oobocbe pods og oadd 100 
(GD). TEURE SS IS Ch oebloccca 6b the OHO Onae bombo 00 cor 100 
(GD) ~ Igkimnline 6 sogaoo cpu poodongooe ob ogoodceasn 101 
(5) Partitive sense probably ablative ........... 101 
(G6) Subjective or objective =...) <5. 62s -rae 101 
(7) The meaning of the word specifies .......... 101 
CS) ePositiontof thowcenitive =. < oa. ai <-% om <iete 101 
(9) Several genitives together ................- 101 
(Ge) \WANHD EMONGCHMES Seooddogsabodcooob ooUaooEGaeoOT 102 


(g) With adverbs and prepositions ...........---+-++- 102 


Xxii 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


Ch), , With. verbs. joc.sx;ssnic aces ea eel einem arian 102 

(1) “Predicate penitive-: ccb.cea eects 102 

(2). Verba: of sensation: o n20. oe ee eee 102 

(3). Verbs of anxiety: <.:6. 057 0-00-: on ee eee 103 

(4) Verbs of more objective meaning ........... 103 

(5). Genitive absolute 2.365 25 «chee pe eee en 103 

f. -The -ADIAhIVG) gine nes0ntss haw bowie pm oe one eel ee eee 104 

(a) The case of separation or source .............t.2e. 104 

(b) -Ablative-with@ adjectives cite <6 --ci2e eee ee 104 

(c) With adverbs and prepositions ................-.. 105 

CO)i With “verbs. 5.5 vies’ ce dalacise sae pete oe eee 105 

Be “PRG AGCALIVG | 5c.<in:-<'5 arse Sistem nies oi Sie cee ot ee 105 

(2) (BPA oe pds ene shape 0 ewe pe eae eee 106 

Cb) Dimes... iene ewe et me ceases ences eae eee 107 

(e) -Wathoutanditwith éperc. sero ee eee Oe eee 107 

(d).. With other (prepositions |< .i..cn s<c-5t <t see en Nels 107 

(e) Pregnant construction of éy and ¢is ............ 108 

O, | The ansirumental: ease) <> ccs saku «seen eh hee ope 108 

(a) Expressions Of -fime®..:. <..ve os puis Ss een eee 109 

(b) Association or accompaniment ...............2-00- 109 

(ec) ‘Words of. likeness: ...5<,,..7-< 2 doc kane kee eee 109 

(da) ~ Manner (3-526 2 3s toc eee sete a ee ee eee 109 

(e) Cause or -pround \\ .W0ct wecoee es ee space poe eee 110 

(f) “Means or insirumont: o3.4. sen 5-5 em eens 110 

(ge) -Measnre.. 2300s vsack se ae rw cvicie ale oe 5 bees 110 

(bh) “wo prepositions’ with: <<cr-.. Jt. ok< fe. awen ee 110 

$0, “The Gative’..6 tc ccs ten cceeses Moe eas stk ee een ae 111 

(a) “Indirect object of. verbs (20.5 <4 \40~..42ee eee 112 

(b) “Direet: object of some verbs /...<05 =. the eeu ee ees 112 

(ce). With Gutransitive: verbs... is iuax stoke eel eee 112 

(d):": POssenstON 6: sca h dhe ew taw ed onal hele 5 oe Rete meses 112 

(e) Ethieal dative ......... sala a Baie x's (hai Gia nie ieee 112 

(f) * Dative\or tho. ageng |. suck ose ths bakes ROR 113 

(2) > Wath substambtives: 0.2652 cnc swt eee 113 

(Ch) ~‘Infinitives-an> the dative: J. wets ve oss asie eisai eters 113 

(i) Sometimes the case is ambiguous ................- 113 

Chapter XV.—Prepositions . ........ o's:e» 0.0% pipes eae kee we aS 115 

1. Reasons for use of 5 os vss. 500% ree epee aie eee 115 

B. What are prepositions .<c.s05 yuo sd ala pee eek eieal ae ane 115 

&, So-called improper prepositions |< viwscsssssnssep een vee nee 116 

4,‘ Cases with preposibions: «:010.4.5% 44s sated se wa Asay wen 117 
5. 


Proper. method of studying! occ ceain ck as pt his whe ewe Sees 118 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. Xxiil 


G) Dhue essen ir do oneek dene se oGoe ne ret naa e Oba 118 
FI eet aoe die oS Aide oo Se ROAD ope ory aC tan ran 118 
iS ON EO Bo agi Pon SGU OO BRE COCO CCA A I ar ceca 118 
ee eee ere ame eon esis set inejo 119 
TU YG SoS Leben cA OU NROOU Seam ernaD po nina Cintas ORI acatag 119 
itis APP Risto cea Sah coobod Onan Be OR De Du Ch igr cn aaaeg 119 
TAr Pris) Sg te des dea nso. VASO OS Ua OURO UE I atest ie ie 120 
1G Bae Sa bandeelts aaouciacbincd 40} ric mod OC OnC nti 121 
Fi a a OES SS a5 Ait Cg CIC RENCL SIO La SORA SAECO ied 121 
15. KATA Hee ea stat rel civic toler elell ie eiereraersta ta laeiei shel ejnreie lero sells je’erere1e)'e 121 
DG Me rerGrce (nek heme ane pnmmcie eae sra rear sence cst setts 121 
Pa ceripel ee teleh eRe ints et eine elec sini ye” soo icica ie? 122 
1S" OCH asta sera ac ce ts GSC HORI OD Dey aaa a 122 
19, mpd ---++-+-- ge A a SG AS nCrES OTAGO IOI 122 
DUR car iGge iene ae ons sas te sensi es oma ee noice 123 
IGS aC 3 ate aE aL SG ad ie DORE Ace ESCO BIO IU ma 123 
He Ue) 00) 78 0 ODS DOO ORIEL Oar I OOt Aciara kale ai 123 
OBE Gig) Godaooaddnr {ia trs Sid SOO OS Hid ODE -CIOLIOU OES SECO EDUC 124 
Chapter XVI.—General Remarks about the Weis oodavoundoe docuds oOc 125 
1. The name not distinctive .........- sess eeeeeseeereceseee 125 
oF The function Of the Verb .-< ener. seis e e+ els ses 125 
3, The two types of verbs ....---seeeesenceerc ess eeeecces 125 
4, Infinitive and participle not pure verbs .....-.++++++++++> 125 
5. How the verb is made ..... Sige Mita SHOR HONOR Ohe Cone ROCIO 12 
6. Specific idea in each process ...-.+-eee seer eee eeee teers 126 
i, INRPGHEGING 5 560d So Goces bande conb DD OCU DODO OO 70Gb Oo CONIC 126 
8. Simultaneous development of mode, voice, tense Re ery Hos 6 126 
9, Variations in different verbS ........++++sseseeeeer reece 127 
10. Survival of the Attest ..0. 0 tcc cce ws eo cece me enn mein ci 127 
11. Probable order .......-ceeceescesccecreeres Dei eyaya sie esalorsin 127 
Chapter XVII.—The Modes ........ pets th [aa eee ase criig Oa OO 128 
1. Use of dy with the modes ........eceeeereecrerscccereses 128 
De Ayko Fs nile? “oaesococnasodo0T COON aD DOO OTD OUD SOOT 128 
3. Positive Statement—indicative . .....-.-s- eee ee reece eee 129 
4, Doubtful statement—-subjunctive and optative ....----+--> 129 
5. Commanding statement—imperative ...--+.-++++++serreeee 131 
Chapter XVITI.—The Voices ..-...5. sce. eee eee s cesta ce scence 133 
il, WWahede Sep SGA Sb adanododagon dbo condo ude ody Omd DOGO CoO 133 
PURINES MO tet NG IVOLCERY ereiciajaveroidro oi <ieiate efeoin als wilelisiele rei» #12 oueimiay 133 
3. Voice not transitive nor intransitive .. ..--++-++++reerere 133 


XXiv 


TABLE OF CONTENTS, 


4.9 -AGhiye’ VOICE.) =:..-7- ninie «Biot cretom eis cites cee ete eee 133 
S.- * Miaddle’ voices iis. 5. ererspoertotoce cose re rove ein eins eieme ter terete eine 134 
6.. > Passive voice ss isc scaaticomen cme alc sone ee eee 134 
%. History ‘of middle and. passive nye ee eee ete 134 
8... "The. tenm. deponen’ "22.22.5060 aecenn eens. cee en 135 
Chapter: XLX.—The | Tenses. cece hclcas hs 4 as 0/9 Du cle’ ep ae eee 136 
T.” The: mame 5 s7< sors opel cverat sverexers/al te oterery ate ete a eraisnts heey eee 136 
a, Fundamental .sdes<.\). oc. see es + ces eee ce eer eae 136 
3. Three ideas as to duration of action ..............-s-e0. 136 
4, Greek standpoint in “tense 7.5% - 3.42. cage eetienins Sees 137 
5. Undefinite action—a0orist |.°s. e's $02 o=- oxee ses seme er eee 137 
6. sIntomipleted Aetna’ <a venis arn.9 arse seers see ee 139 
(a). Whe. presenti cc es 2 cisia'g antes stg ale ae ee 140 
(b) . Dhe-impertect,". |. cu. we se cane san ons eee te ee 141 
(ce). “Dhe* fithre G)ce anes oes Cohan Cente eee 141 
7. Completed action (present perfect, past perfect, future per- 
POEL), Ol cc a tee eed Mabe nian et aan ae 143 
(a). ‘The present, perfeet (oe. caciis one a 0 e's ee eae 144 
(b) Whe past perfect c.c.% fc chic onic saieesioc epee 145 
(ce). “he future perfect 2 cisec acs stort ee eee 146 
Chapter XX.—Co-ordinate and subordinate Clauses. Conjunctions ....147 
1; “What: is-a ‘sentence? *<)..5o+.-misolncn nee nce ohehs Oca eee 147 
2. . the--simple ssentenee: . io s<mn ss seca ea mee eee 147 
5. Co-ordination of clauses ..'.5 5.5 a(n. a.aeicia & hv. ce ee 147 
4; Contrash: by ‘CORJUNCHONS: .. 6 -.+ «<5 cs a eeu eee a 148 
5. Disjunctive conjunctions. * «. 7): 2.5. sa sme ssamie teenie eee 148 
6; Inferential ~conjunetions..... -.,..cewiukldlecnis <item ees 149 
7, Subordinating ‘conjunchions: ; <.. nm ecn oes see eee a hee 149 
8. Modes, tenses, voices in subordinate sentences ............ 150 
9.. Character of subordinate ‘claghes: <6... cums cem ce ye eee 150 
10. Connection between sentences and paragraphs ............. 151 
Chapter 3 X1,— Final “Clanses) <%/5. 5.0 va xeawsa wy sss nko sence enn 152 
1.” Pure final ‘elauses—adverbial | sess vcss sane os o> DORE 152 
2. Final conjunctions ..........0.. Sid wre ele (a iy aNeie eisreichieltaren tate 152 
3. Non-final clanges’ 5 4 sis\c-a.scsis's ams 00-8 3 ma nie SoC ea 152 
4, Other methods for expressing design ........eesesseseeess 153 
5. .Absence of the principal verb ©. 0% sss.s<<s5csaekeeeeenen 154 
6, sAbsence Of fe. sass525s <cinsse wis ska onl wee 154 
Chapter’ AA TT.—Clanses of Result ..sivan weve aeausi ve eetaeeeeans 155 
1, ‘Meager development in Greek i.evs.s.scciuees Uapakn sees 155 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXV 


Per Qarenand: VieraAnUiCativGl seco. | sve veins oie chnt os ae he 155 
Sees bnifinibines wil Limyoomenaer sori cietictachs ore custo cinco acre Slee cc 155 
4. Use of Sore at beginning of sentences .................. 155 
Hee OnUnine OL Onewee tok ete eles eae ee oe oe Poe a ine Pcs 155 
G2 Anfinitiver alone; Nob (CONSCCULIVe! cls ice cle iete > oc) -)ei esis mls 155 
io lige ore tol, in whe, New Pestament (2.7. 22-2. ccs 2. > =r 156 
Seo WSOm Ofeiaign ices ce tne meters scree a atset ath ae dis oe mimiow ck tialeors 156 
AU SO OL Gr Olnero felalecyeincstate sit ciate a ertcc ater ielen cue cho Sterol ayo) val ie 156 
Ii.) USE UE MITE! SREB aldadone ce odbcedn nboorobosennpoonane 156 
Chapter kel v= WASHES aie e ofeie elera) o's] si << Wels tats sistent ciel’ a aisle: aistnie sletoile. e's 157 
ii Not, verbs: Of “wishing. S57. c-keo ee )ierslever cher vclele Sievers sho vies 157 
Zing SAS OTE ROB MOS Ob Dah EOD OBO. OO CIE OBO coc bs Bole CEE COPOE 157 
Somes be WAS oomtcie st teasietane tucks et ete rone iol crebe mete eer aretetavnie tereherageraret ste ei 157 
AE TOSOM be. WASH *.3 7of.tar trate halcin levaie state aisle tetane hale Stefehsters: wiene aiereare 157 
SPELT TULUE.O vw Sle on c'tavenei seeks arsica cy snetievevaee ezsveisieiarel el siete a eteievevettie anerever 157 
Go Lntuneswishwand (commanders cases severe ete oericisers cel asinteierere IS 
rue Eso-calleds poLentialoptablyen -tecpercisitetcieis clei sila ie sere 157 
Sa COUTLCSYcOf, they MMPerLeCh LENS a crci2s s\s\e1s/ oils oils Pes @ acto ake 157 
Chapeer, em VE —Oasals \SCNECNEES= tajatettaictctele\c/<tters tele cleis)a\= @ isis ersic 6 © oi 159 
16 WG GF opi socagesbostdbcesco scpaneccouessuanSasa7eO0on 159 
OTERO TOLOT LC a Ee ar NTA oe te be ES 159 
Some eL Memeo eH: ie meron TED) aVertemieie ito eiclais se jo e= ion 159 
ARETE GO OVA seer ca ae ose ee tek Oats SNS Suite ken 159 
INTEC TEM USPS ers create ey oe ca ee ett psn icy teins 3 159 
Gry lnifinativor wakhesOtad cenytek ee eine ve ene me eo oe See oe 160 
eta CAUSE PATEICLP LE 3 arctaterarets ered rare rere = ese vit eae ee clas Shae 160 
Sy nelativeswatheidea, OF CAtISe! cctct-<cetcte Delsieics Ghee we ielerciee 160 
DER AVUD COVA GLOW CLCte te <ionias Sas side a) omer creche a sere pa aoto ee 160 
Chapter, oV.—Conditional Sentences’ adi. os els’ oh oe coe dace cess as 161 
HE CEE ETA eT OMALKGS tik sietcia <tavebsts¥s,c!Asle oa tele SI aie 7 1 eekaieko a oles wis 161 
2. First class condition determined as fulfilled .............. 161 
3. Second class condition determined as unfulfilled .......... 162 

4, Third class condition undeterminal with expectation of ful- 
PUTIN CTIED cy toe erie carta erode close ols ola Sere aiterrs 163 

5. Fourth class condition undetermined with little expectation 
Ole ee EMONE aap W onset Melanie ote eres ietete se 0 Shee ys 164 
Gree Mixed COM CHELONS wey meyet ayes cist Jar eisi of css tata diel sfeleiewie so sve'h hal eLd 165 
Mer etseUEC ACAD) Curse chia PL OUASIS ue sccy fc ayaa va) eet spay Perna she's Sis, areayaveds 165 
See BHI EACH le CONGULIOUSe amie e ware otc his-cie acini cio(aeilacie.s eclawe eiciete 166 


Xxvi TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
9. ‘Conditions: in indirect *discomrse face +e pee eee ee eee 166 
LO; *Concessive: Clavses px cies =: s.< «irae cireibrete eine eereete eee eteate 167 
11, “Negative in: the. protasis: «sw. cone «kanes see ee eee 167 
Chapter XX VL—Relative Clauses) ci sacs Jesse few ees eee 168 
1. Function of the relative with clauses ...........0.---s00- 168 
2. Two kinds of relative clauses, adjectival and adverbial ....168 
o nelative ‘Adverbs. otues cece eens cans eee eet eee 168 
4, Mode -in= the: relative clause: oo<28c0se cee Sele sie eee 168 
5.- Definite and. indefinite: relatives | <cic tr<cieewws oe ose 168 
G.) ‘fhe sso-called “** conditional’? ‘relative. 11..meeee seers 169 
f.. Use pf, gp -in Telative’ Clauses ):.« & tis2«.c.+e see eee See 169 
8. Negative of the relative*clause” +... 06. aac deere 170 
2.. Relative of design ‘or Tesnlt: so5.2 seeps cease ae eee 170 
10... Use: of, édy with relatives: 9i.cecysc.. erence ee eee 170 
Chapter XXVII.—Temporal )Glanuses: «. co eae cke ec cee seat ee eee 171 
i. “hist.of demporal conjunctions, <a. wes: eo a-+ onsale eee 171 
2. The group with sense of until and before ..............-. 171 
(a) "Axpt Boe Sy ee ee OM CaO ee ecm 171 
CW): Pillage i eas oh seve oe eh pete 0 een ee 171 
CO) MENDY sae scores eel se sete ke mae eee Gee er 172 
(HD Singita cere Vive the ane ene 172 
(¢).- ‘po 730 and infinitive. ss. cos ce Soe Sa se noe eee eee 172 
(f) Ev & ain ie wap wh orn tse ose le wie Ry Ace OCIS ears on Eye See 172 
CB) FAD Gb. Seok wasn kee ee oes Sa a ee 173 
3, (Other constructions ...cins oc:ales a cic apes ene Sie eee ee ee 173 
(a) “Hyixa a eee e'a® 6\9 0\0\0 e's) 0 ele’ wioin wha lapis wie lao nivtetelniatateienetene Pic 
CD) rel oes Sina nigh > vend OER CRG R ECE ee eee 173 
(c) ‘Ordre oe. 6 wn le w\e'00\01019 6 Sn * eure, o's 6, <'m lee /e nie alate ale Inala nial 173 
(d) °Ore and 6Tav aia ahs wicg tgntin Vee em 16 ig, acon, Bo Man Ye, Saye pall or PR a 173 
(0): “Dewsaiccnet ake Coat eR eaten cera eat eae eee 173 
(2), “Oepp eit. nuts ccs. area anoeeer iar manu e neee 174 
(2): Merit v6 and infinitive ol. 3 fo. so celecsmeen woes 174 
4, Partieiples with ‘temporal idea... escsusscensseusuie eee 174 
Chapter XXVIII.—Comparative Clauses .........c.ccsceccecceceves 175 
2. sImadeqnate: treatment. »/6 00 nne ss as we alee bee ee 175 
2. Kado, xaba, Kabarep 00.0.0 0 © 6 e's 6 2 De @ 8 « 4 gfe. 8 66 68.0) e we a ee ee ore 175 
Bs PR OTL, +6) 0.63550 4.5 (écu,o.nj0 wisioce 4.5 555 se Bae eile leer 175 
4, DONTROB) G8 cin s04 ve hs divs (nidae Baviuvia sf Eee ee ee eee 175 
5. ‘Os, Kabis, kabdorep, omep, woel, WaTEpEl +. +e sees eeees 175 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. Xxvil 


Chapter XXIX.—Interrogative Sentences ..------++-e+ssreererr er 177 
Tee Marke PiiMbertopation yee me =F ris ee see 9s AG 
9. The modes of direct questions «+--+ ---s+-+rrcersse seer 17 
Sa vikind ef Answer ERPECLSH | cia /afmiehtiaine cme isis ns GT 
4, Interrogative pronouns used ....----+-reeeereer tt 178 
5. Confusion between interrogative and relative pronouns ....17 
6. Interrogative conjunctions . ..---+-+errrresreesre tte 179 
7. Elliptical phrases like fva Th, TL OTL, EL--- se ee eb resets 179 
me Alternative + questions! = fo. s6<'r onion 22 oie 179 
Bae Maclamations emesis easter eo 179 
TOME Writer jechlOnsic hence Ace se heer nS 179 

Chapter XXX.—Indirect TISCOUPSe Gas sns oe ee Spee onscase ere 181 
1. Direct discourse more common -..---++-++esserrtr terre: 181 
Oo 'Pensevas a rule unchanged (62> 0<> --iciteciine es a: 181 
3. Person of the verb may be CHANG EQ! an cia = elite ert 181 
# The: mode may be changed...) 2 mn shah an ae 182 
5, Three kinds of indirect discourse ...-----++++++rsst777"" 182 
G wlndirect assertions, << ---jo2 0%" 292 -"or rose ey 182 

(a) The construction with the infinitive ......++-+++++> 182 
(b) The construction WHER Ten eae ieee secre 183 
(ec) The construction with the participle .... --++--+--- 184 
(a) The construction with Kal yeVEeTO + +2 e seer rere sees 184 
ue reire chy quCStIONSE cua. cei aee oye  aeeaiaes Te 185 
(a) The tense as a rule unchanged .....----++eee00e' 185 
(b) The indicative SAT too eR Re ice dou Deron’ Sao oe 185 
(ce) The subjunctive mode ...--+--++eersecrtrstertt 185 
(d) ‘Tha optative mode ~~~. ~~ =e 2-202 0: pee icrcta ye 185 
(e) Indirect deliberative questions ...---+++++esrerrtrs 185 
(f) The article with the indirect question ....-----+-+++> 186 
(g) The infinitive (A aie eee wer aa ia core canes 186 
8. Indirect commands . ...-----ee-eseerec erste 186 
(aye Glia infinitive, onc < wcll nier sie siiaeras Vaiss 186 
Gb) PConjuncbionsl s cJeeqse- once eran 2 186 
(c) Indirect deliberative question .-..-+--+-++ser00rt 186 
9. Mixture of direct and indirect discourse .--.----+---++-s*"" 186 
10. The subordinate clause . ....---+eseesrerser eset 186 

Chapter XXXI.—The MintiNGiee ee ota anal aat ses oe Seo 187 
GO) Origincof, the: msMibIve ke) = cae wate loom 187 
2, Idea of the infinitive in Greek ..-.---+++-+eserrr etter 187 
3 History of the infinitive . ..---------++++reee rcs 187 
4, 


The article with the infinitive .....------ssesresrs 188 


XXVlli 


TABLE OF CONTENTS, 


©. (Cases of thé ‘infinitive >. 2.7.2 atscbe, se eee eee ee 188 
6. .Common use of zov and the iniinifiveras-. » 2. seieieie 189 
7. -The ‘infinipive: with verbs :n.5:../s'erun tae seco Serer 189 
8: ‘The infinitive with prepositions) <2. cm <i 1s eile 189 
9. The infinitive in indirect discourse ............/........-. 190 
10. The infinitive limited in use by Oru and (va ............-- 191 
11, The, infinitive’ for purpose xcic cic seals wis oem ia i ee 191 
12, "Dore and: the anhinusye. A. 45h ace eee ee nee 191 
18. The, negative of «the infinitive <i iscn-te-s hee tet nol eee 191 
14, ‘Thy periphragtic: antinitive | 5. se... 45s tee eee wee alee 192 
15, ; “Dhe’ yoicas of pho imlinittve 1.26 S0s55 ame sree eo ae 192 
16... "Che Senses iof )the antinitiye yo cs > ook =e ce ees ce me ee 192 
17,” “lpocefero “and the aintiittive J. <2. ie -nee em eee ee 192 
Chapter A XXL The: Participle *..2. 2% .< seas oem tis eee ee 193 
1. Most perfect development in Greek ...................-. 193 
Ge) A’ werbalmdyechive | cites ot wan rotate ane ee ote ee 193 
os! ‘Other *verbal ‘adjectives! see occu «ose os On eee enti ee ee 193 
4, Differences between participle and infinitive .............. 194 
5. Participle and the article, attributive ....... 2.0... .22 sense 194 
6." Prediente participle. ..i.<' casi ost colder ein nee 195 
i. Supplementary participle <°. 22 isesic a. 2. a> = pe eee 195 
8,’ Circumstantial particuple*s. 2.0 2's tessa aes et oe 195 
9, Genitive absoliters) swiss cits ste iscaketse ste ce ae ae 196 
10. Participle in LXX for Hebrew infinitive absolute ......... 196 
11. Adjuncts with the circumstantial participle ............... 197 
125) Participle an sndirect: discourse! 27.4. = ie > are ere 197 
SE) Voice: inl ithew participle: tres. cre csits ete cele ater ee 197 
14; Lense im) the participles <<... <tc. s% + «sie ue sucialcbe teen aren ec 197 
15.--Nevative, ot ithe participle. 2..% aa.<s.ct sere oie < aiaie eens 198 
16, Participleas a substantive’. ...'sssr ccs as ghee ee eee 198 
Chapter XX XAIM.—Nepative Particles’. 1..2..e anes se cate eee epee 199 
1, Two negatives: im Greek'.\t..% sie serch ao Sos ein eee ee 199 
2,:* New. Tesbament. Idiom: sc. ss sa ss see sc antec eelels Sennen 199 
S. 4 With ‘the. imperatives. cs ces cant eteeeu ne eee sons. 199 
AS. Mith. the, subjunctive. *.r.:.t.ule no vetion ee ase see ae ee 
B: Wath the optative:s<,. ss» «es sce pee se alee 200 
Go With the infinitive 5: ss:..\acd0e' ss seg mee ces eee ee eee 
ie. Wath the: parbhiciple® ssc og «ries as ate alc seine eee aT 
S. “With “the Indicative: .... is. <s..sa'son spall get e hae eee 


(a) Declarative sentences . 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. XX1x 


Gi) tC ssnalsenben este c a crete 5 okey cyalers asia) 6)0:  iarare apes cs LOL 

(ele Condutranale Sentences. oreo le 5 e1ere ne Yayoi eae qi oases 201 

(GQ) Lb: Gangeneeks so cainier pogo Jon Gm obo 6 ode rao 202 

(ey Clansestoie purposete = 6 feast eisicem sees sein sion o's 2:5 202 

(G5) JA Uy a] O)S) a AE Sa i en SOE poe ea 202 

(Oe WAT GID IEEE 3 cod oh OCDE GG OD CODE Reon OOCIA ner aae 202 

Gin) eeero batt Ons yap er orci -yarers o srereve eras <n oa 5.0) ss? cas Siete cl s'ersic 202 
Coen direct ediseOurse inate iaere oo atelarere isto fos wi acm cis oes 203 

(ime Succession: of nesatived: syscsue sc aene is Se ots 203 

(k) When the second negative is a single negative ...... 203 
CeO nse ie noe ee ine eee rece ok 2 203 

(m) Redundant negative. ....... ahotstosesckovenel aw aeeale is ausie ere 203 

(n) Odyé...----+--6-- yet er saleataiaig-alats) sucleis) sstasie oe se? 204 

(0) Ovx OTL BECHORDNONCNCIO ONOIONON ORD ICAOHONCIIONG IID CIONOS DiginiG ClCtO Oso ous 204 
Chapter XXXIV.—Intensive Particles ......... OE ee as ae 205 
eeihe Ferm Parti ler ccs <cers 1 ayensi ss tsvais.6,oere a ers ai Bo i Sus ta aueneramnersehorens 205 
Pe Originno ts ImLensi ve spPAbbICleS) ares = cle cree a vole ete s aie eerie 205 
ogee Eee UCT Cygel Tiel CLOG Kom cubre peralay cls cisycfanc\ sic elavejcs «/sistcie stoke orsroravsierorets 205 
che RE eacmemorio’ hacer ahoheve asciy 4a) ack Yorsiara es ach aiane Ser sicher acters ones 205 
8 SECO SO nO SU Sep OM C Un ODN Ontos nse Soo nonoeoneseacn ncn 206 
Fae eae pte har oP aS a oR ES igre os eB te WIS Mee 206 
Sommer srnren ceietensi stator sta iey stay shore sla speci easketteaie, tite etcvavera pie et Sues ere 206 
Os > SPAS eo CLARO ae bane ee ey re Me Pe eos ee 206 
Chapter XXXV.—Figures of Speeds SED DOCG nic SOOR CCIn tae oom 208 
i? NOt, pecaliars to. Greeks i. nfs ese ccs crt ete oehoeiorete woes Bile o\ ais lauats 208 
eemeelih Ome AN DOCH VASO a) a) he cial. tart-ve) oes rao le Ces «te ee 208 
Say SMICACINO ty ese OG TOUTES nn « a.civc a8 Os ce ween ole ae are oaks 208 
A mLULEVIE YH ee ciersee srs escorts aio cieys: ciortkatce oR indie font set Tepe a eee oar ee eee 209 
MBE CEOS Nat Fea ei oye oo Sol cae wysieparerace ona i ks ace A SOO 
Gee OStbID MeO WOEGS I. cies s:crts Slat cists cic sited ne emia ietee serene 209 





PARTE. 


INTRODUCTION. 


« ‘* 


J: es (ia) ie —— an ae 





—————.., 


y+ > 
OF 


{ UNIVERSIT 


OF 


X = ; 
LSALIFORNIEZ 


Se 


CHAPTER I. 
THE MODERN METHOD OF LINGUISTIC STUDY. 


1. There is a modern method. The old way treated the New 
Testament Greek as a thing apart, a peculiar kind of Greek like 
nothing else on land or sea, a religious dialect alone fit for the ex- 
pression of Christian truth. The term ‘‘Biblical Greek’’ used to 
be the right way to define the special type of Greek found in the 
LXX. and the New Testament. The modern method seeks to 
study the language of the New Testament as a part of a greater 
whole, not as an isolated phenomenon. The old Purist contro- 
versy as to whether the Greek of the New Testament was exactly 
like the ‘‘Classic’’? Greek or possessed many Hebraisms long ago 
lost its interest, but a new turn to the whole matter has come. 

2. The evolutionary principle has its application to language 
also. Each member of the Indo-Germanic group has a common 
basis with the rest. Several of these languages have very vital 
connection. Comparative philology therefore is an essential aid to 
the modern student of the New Testament Greek. Some knowl- 
edge of comparative grammar can be obtained from any of the 
numerous handbooks on the subject. The Greek is not a tongue 
entirely to itself. Sanskrit, Latin, and other languages throw much 
light upon the development of Greek. 

3. The Greek itself is a unit and needs to be looked at asa 
whole. It has had a long and wonderful history, but the language 
heard on the streets of Athens to-day is in all essentials the same 
that Aristophanes reports in his comedies. Indeed modern Greek 
differs no more from the Greek of Homer than the English of Ten- 
nyson from the Anglo-Saxon of King Alfred. The various dialects 
all need to be considered and they can be compared with the dia- 
lects of English. Greek is a term wide enough to include Homer 


4 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


and Sophocles, Herodotus and Thucydides, Plato and Plutarch, 
Demosthenes and Paul, John and Tricoupis. Greek is not dead. 
Language has a history and can only be understood rightly by a 
long view of its whole career. 

4. The older grammars gave the literary Attic as the basis of 
the Greek New Testament and left out of view all the other dialects 
save in footnotes. Even the later Attic was given scant justice, 
while the vernacular came in for little consideration. The ver- 
nacular language has received better treatment in recent years in 
the modern grammars. Scholars are now seeing that it is the stream 
of the spoken language that has persisted. Modern Greek vernac- 
ular needs to be compared with the ancient Greek vernacular in 
order to get the right line of development. The literary language 
is always more or less artificial and aloof from the life of the peo- 
ple. Language is life and must be so studied, if one is to catch its 
secrets. 

5. The office of the grammarian is therefore to register and to 
interpret facts, not to manufacture or warp the facts to a theory. 
The novice in the study of syntax has difficulty in ridding his 
mind of the idea that grammars and dictionaries regulate a lan- 
guage. They merely interpret a language more or less correctly as 
the case may be. The seat of authority in language is not the 
books about language, but the people who speak and write it. The 
usage of the best educated writers determines the literary style of a 
language, while the whole people determine the vernacular. Change 
in language cannot be stopped save by the death of the language. 

6. The genius of the Greek language itself must constantly be 
sought. It is easy to explain a Greek idiom by the English or the 
German. ‘This is the vice of many grammars. The Greek must 
be allowed to be itself and have its own point of view. Good 
Greek may be very poor English and vice versa. It is imperative 
for a just and sympathetic appreciation of Greek to look at the 
language from the Greek standpoint. The consistent application 
of this principle will prevent one from explaining one preposition 
as used ‘‘instead’’ of another, one tense ‘‘for’’ another, ete. 


CHAPTER II. 
WHAT IS THE GREEK OF THE NEW TESTAMENT ? 


1. We are at last in a position to answer this question properly. 
The difficulty was always largely an artificial one due to the pre- 
conceived ideas and lack of due perspective in the use of the known 
facts. But the new papyri discoveries in Egypt (Fayum, Oxy- 
rhynchus, etc.) have shed a flood of light on the subject. The 
inscriptions of Asia Minor especially add much information as to 
the vernacular xowy. Even the ostraka have a deal to tell about the 
language of the people. Dr. Deissmann, of Heidelberg, and Dr. 
J. H. Moulton, of Manchester, have been the first to apply the 
new knowledge to the New Testament Greek. They have done it 
with brilliant success. Dr. Petrie, of London, and Drs. Grenfell 
and Hunt, of Oxford, have been the chief modern explorers in the 
Egyptian papyri, but now many scholars like Mayser, Voelker, 
etc., are busy in this grammatical field. The free use of év, for 
instance, appears in the papyri as in the N. T. 

2. The main point that is made clear is one that was known in 
a way before. It is that the New Testament is written in the ver- 
nacular Greek of the time. There are indeed literary influences 
here and there (especially in the writings of Luke, Paul, and in 
Hebrews), but as a whole the New Testament books represent the 
spoken tongue, though not of illiterate men by any means, unless 
some such traces be discernible in 2 Peter and Revelation. There 
is thus a note of reality and vividness in the New Testament not 
usually present in books in the formal literary style. 

3. The Modern Greek vernacular shows a steady line of develop- 
ment from the New Testament vernacular. A backward light is 
thus thrown that is helpful in many ways. The common stream 
of the spoken speech flows on. 


6 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


4. The Greek of the New Testament that was used with prac- 
tical uniformity over most of the Roman world is called the Com- 
mon Greek or xowy. Not that it was not good Greek, but rather 
the Greek in common use. There was indeed a literary xowy and 
a vernacular xowy7. Plutarch is a good specimen of the literary 
xowy While the papyri are chiefly in the vernacular xow? like most 
of the New Testament. 

5. This xowy was itself the heir of the past. The various Greek 
dialects blended on an Attic base. The xowy was thus richer in 
expression as to words and forms than any of the older dialects. 
Compare the relation of the modern English to the various tongues 
that have contributed to its power and expansion. Ionic, Dorie, 
Aeolic, North West Greek and other dialects have made some con- 
tribution to the common result. The use of nominatives in the 
midst of accusatives in the Boeotian, for instance, is strangely like 
the Book of Revelation. So the absence of the future participle is 
like the N. T. 

6. The New Testament Greek is not translation Greek and thus 
differs radically in most respects from the LXX. which shows the 
Hebrew idiom at every turn. The New Testament in general con- 
tains books composed freely in the vernacular xow7. But there are 
traces of such translation influences in the numerous quotations 
from the LXX. and the Hebrew as well as in the possible Aramaic 
original of Matthew and the discourses of Jesus in general, though 
Jesus himself probably spoke both Greek and Aramaic. Luke in 
his Gospel and the Acts may have had Aramaic (or even Hebrew) 
sources (written or oral) for part of his information. Compare the 
opening chapters in both books. But in general the New Testament 
stands on a very different plane from the LXX. as to its language, 
though like it in many idioms. 

7. Still some Hebrew and Aramaic influence is perceived in the 
New Testament. But the Semitic influence is nothing like so much 
as was once supposed. Both the Purists and the Hebraists were 
wrong. One can no longer explain every variation from the classic 
literary style by calling it a Hebvaism, when the same thing is 
common in the papyri of Egypt. As compared with the whole 


WHAT IS THE GREEK OF THE NEW TESTAMENT ? 7 


the Semitic influence is not very great, though it is real and defi- 
nite. The readers were most of them Jews and all were familiar 
with the Hebrew O. T. and the LXX and their writings bear marks 
of this knowledge in various ways. In Lu. 20:12 apocéero répabeu 
is like the Hebrew. Compare Ex. 14:13. 

8. The Latin influence is very slight indeed, consisting of some 
30 words like xevrvpiwy and a few phrases. Rome had her soldiers 
and her laws in Palestine and the trace of that fact is left in the 
New Testament. 

9. Christianity itself has made a definite contribution to the 
language of the New Testament. In so far as the gospel has new 
ideas to set forth, a new turn has to be given to old words like 
Knpvoow or a new word comes into use like xado-diddoKxaos (Tit. 2:5). 
But the papyri have taught us to be chary about dag Aeyoueva. 
Certainly as arule the New Testament took the language of the 
time made ready to hand and put the Christian content into this 
earthen vessel. 

10. There are indeed diversities of gifts. Each writer of the 
New Testament has his own style and angle of vision, a style that 
changes to some extent in each case with change of theme, age, 
and character of composition. On this subject see Simcox, Writers 
of the New Testament. This is all natural and can be illustrated 
in individual cases by the variety in the same writer as Shake- 
speare, Milton, etc. All things considered, now that we know 
much of the facts about the Greek of the New Testament, it is just 
what we hada right to expect, knowing what we do of God’s method 
of work. This is in brief the kind of tongue in which was given to 
men the greatest collection of books in all the world, the New Tes- 
tament. 





ee oan at 


he i ffs ar a mis ee. ; 
. : 25) , dee ne “oe 
aes “ay SNe outa ie sene tad 


Z et natiae ee La | tn aie oe 
: Wikies igs $a ed dt iivants lee 











a ¥ — ee * 
\ al , 
: ‘3 el he one A ae, ia” hg dF) On 
a ae Ry 7" , 7 
Mah x; 
7 . 4 oF usd ad ay Te a > 
é J 
= ‘ae Sa - Ty ures bee 
f 
r 4 Taive a - oe? ie - 
bs : —) Na os vie ¢ 
a "EA Ma -e o ooh wy ro Site y ee Soniivie 
& @ te 


es > es be atte io Et i ae 
5 We : . oat 
7 #4 - > c 7 a by : if 4 <i ‘OT, ales 





i ; = bs j oo 9 Faxed 2 
» 
- pany 
é ey 
+ * 
i] 
4 - 
ow 
- = 
a _* 
_ _ 
Pa = 
; 
- . 


PART TL 


FORMS. 





CHAPTER III. 


ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCENT, PRONUNCIATION, PUNCTUATION. 


1. Orthography.—It is not an easy matter to determine the prin- 
ciples by which to settle the problems of New Testament orthog- 
raphy. There is first the question of text, for the manuscripts 
differ widely. 

(a) In the matter of spelling the usual principles of external 
evidence do not easily apply. We cannot always appeal to the 
Neutral class, say, as against the Western, or the Pre-Syrian classes 
against the Syrian, though sometimes we may. Thus the Syrian 
class uniformly reads Kazepvaovp, not Kadapvaovp. Scribes would 
have difference of opinion about spelling. So Aleph prefers ¢ rather 
than «, while B is fond of e«e and note Moreover the scribe is 
under the constant temptation to correct the spelling in his docu- 
ment by the spelling of his day. It is hard to be sure that a fourth 
century document gives us the first century spelling. Then again 
the scribe was not always a competent judge and could also fall a 
victim to itacism and confuse vowels and diphthongs that were at 
that time pronounced alike. The tendency in the later Greek to 
blend so many vowels and diphthongs into the « sound is an in- 
stance. Thus e, e, 7, 9, v, vw, oc could be confused, and ¢ and a, 
oandw. Many forms in ea were shortened to uw as Aoyla, épifia, 

(b) The final v of oWwis usually retained unchanged as in 
ow7rdoxw, though not always as in ovyyerys. With év the v is gen- 
erally assimilated as éuBadXdo, but we have évxpivw. Movable v be- 
fore vowels is uniformly in harmony with Greek usage, but this 
movable v is very common also before consonants, though not 
always present, as waow tots xrX (Matt. 5:15). Westcott and Hort 
have otrws before a consonant 196 times and otrw only 10 times. 
So otros kal xrA (Matt. 17:12). The manuscripts differ as to the 
use of double consonants as dppaBav or dpaBoy (2 Cor, 1:22). 


12 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


(c) Elision is somewhat arbitrary. It is much more rare 
than in the earlier Greek. The hiatus was not considered so ob- 
jectionable after the manner of the Ionian writers. Dr. Hort says 
that ‘‘elision takes place habitually and without variation before 
pronouns and participles; also before nouns of frequent occurrence, 
as dx’ dpxis, kar oixov. In other cases there is much diversity, and 
occasional variation’? (p. 146 of Appendix to Vol. II. of New 
Testament in Greek). 

(d) Crasis is rare and xaé is the most usual example, especially 
before éy, dv, éxeivos, éxe?, SO xdwof in Lu. 1:3, though xai éy® in 
Lu. 2:48. 

(e) Contraction is in general in harmony with the older Attic 
Greek, though the Ionic influence is again perceived in such forms 
as épewy (Rey. 6:16). 

(f) The rough breathing occurs sometimes where it is not usual 
in the older Greek as dé dw (Phil. 2:23) due to the lost digamma 
or to analogy of dé¢opdéw and used occasionally in the earlier vernac- 
ular (Mullach, Meisterhans). Such examples are common in the 
papyri. So some documents read ddeAmiLovres in Lu. 6:35 (cf. 
ady\mueds in Hermas). Westcott and Hort accept éd’ eAw/& in 
Rom. 8:20, and good manuscripts give ody éA¢yos in Acts 12:18. 
The breathings were not written in the manuscripts till long after 
New Testament times save when the aspiration showed in the con- 
sonant. At this period of the language there was an increase in 
aspiration, though in the modern Greek the reverse is seen, for 
the aspirate is not pronounced. Compare the confusion as to h in 
the usage of the English cockney. 

(g) The prothetic vowel disappears in é@€A (John 5:21), but 
always 76eov (Gal. 4:20). 

(h) In proper names sometimes the Hebrew is merely trans- 
literated as in Aaveéd, while with other names an effort is made to 
make a Greek word out of it as in Zayapias, but the manuscripts 
often vary in such matters. 

(i) The papyri give usa good deal of help as to orthography 
though it is to be remembered that many of the documents pre- 
served in the papyri are written by uneducated people and hence 


ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCENT, PRONUNCIATION, PUNCTUATION, 13 


do not fairly represent the usage of the'time. This is true of the 
New Testament manuscripts. Even A B have xepav, a double 
accusative ending, in John 20:25, and many of the papyri show 
this form (Moulton, Characteristics of N. T. Greek, Expositor, 
May, 1904). So Dr. Moulton argues as to the accusative peLov 
rather than pei{w, which some documents have in John 5:36. 
Likewise he holds that, while good uncials have zAjpys as inde- 
clinable like papyri from the second century on, it is more likely 
that in John 1:14 the manuscripts have changed zAjpy to zAnpys to 
suit later usage. As previously noted édv and ay are often inter- 
changed in the later xowy. Téooepa, however, though common in 
the New Testament, is unusual in the papyri, but Ajpapoua is pretty 
uniform after the Ptolemaic period. 

2. Accent.—This is a thorny subject. 

(a) It is not long since the Greek scholar affected a scorn of 
accent and scattered his accents about promiscuously or not at all. 
Even now it is not uncommon to see woful slips in modern books 
that use Greek. But ‘‘In England, at all events, every man will 
accent his Greek properly who wishes to stand well with the world.”’ 
(Chandler, Greek Accentuation, p. xxiii). 

(b) However, when we come to ask what is the proper 
accentuation for Greek words, we are at once in trouble. We 
only know the facts from the manuscripts and the grammars. 
The early Greek manuscripts give no accents at all, but were 
written in uncial letters without breaks between words. Peo- 
ple ‘were supposed to know the accent and the breathings, as 
was the case with the Hebrew vowel points. Soin Latin and 
modern English no accents occur written on the words, though, 
of course, accent itself exists. At best the manuscripts give 
the accent of their day as they have received it. In the ver- 
nacular there would be a persistence in accent with inevitable 
changes at various poimts. The ancient Greeks were as sensitive to 
a mispronounced word as an educated audience now in all lands. 
We know how the modern Greek uses accent, but can not feel sure 
about the ancient accent at all points. 

(c) We cannot trace the history of accent from Homer to the 


14 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


time of the Greek grammarians, but Aristophanes of Byzantium is 
credited with the written system of accents about 200 B. C. 

(d) We are troubled again as to the significance of the accent. 
Was it only elevation of the voice? or does it also include stress? 
Does it make the accented syllable long? This last is practically 
the result in modern Greek, but does not seem to be true of the 
earlier times. But both elevation and stress seem to be gradually 
included in accent though this is doubtful as to stress. Voice-pitch 
was the original value of accent. It is not possible to lay down 
formal rules for Greek accent save in a general way. Sometimes 
contrast is represented by the accent, as we say out’side, in’side. 
So Greek zé or ti. There is also emphasis in accent and accent often 
is determined by euphony. But one remark can be made with 
confidence. The word should receive the accent in reading where 
the accent is. This truism is not without point if one hears Greek 
read aloud. 

(e) The New Testament does not seem to vary greatly in accent 
from the earlier Greek, but we must remember our lack of infor- 
mation for both sources. The difference between verb forms is still 
shown by the accent as Barra (Acts 22:16). But Westcott and 
Hort print ise both where the verb force is retained (i€ in Attic, cf. 
Rom. 11:22) and where the word is only an interjection (Mark 
11:21). Proclitics occur without accent as ék, és. Enclitics are 
used as in earlier Greek though sometimes the enclitic word has 
some emphasis as twa in Acts 5:36. Tlpés éué is rare (Acts 22:8), 
but zpés pe is common (Matt. 3:14) though in this passage a num- 
ber of manuscripts have zpds pe (cf. LXX). Sometimes the accent 
is vital to the sense as 7 (not tw) in 1 Cor. 15:8. Indeclinable 
proper names are often accented on the last syllable as By6oada. 
There is generally recessive accent in proper names Tvyixos, but 
Xpuords retains the accent of the verbal. 

8. Pronunciation.—We refer now to the sounds of the vowels 
and the consonants, for in a true sense accent is an element in pro- 
nunciation. 

(a) How did the New Testament writers pronounce their vowels 
and consonants? To answer this question correctly we must 


ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCENT, PRONUNCIATION, PUNCTUATION. 15 


answer another one. Do the modern Greeks preserve the ancient 
pronunciation? Many of them think so. It is an amusing story 
told in Blass’s Pronunciation of Ancient Greek, (Purton’s transla- 
tion, 1890,) how Stephen Gardiner, Chancellor of the University 
of Cambridge, proposed in 1542 to refuse a degree to and expel 
from the Senate all who did not pronounce a and ¢ alike and who 
distinguished in sound between o, a, ands. It was a grievous 
heresy that Erasmus had introduced! Now Chancellor Gardiner 
had received the pronunciation of Greek as it had come to Western 
Europe from the Byzantine scholars during the Renaissance. But 
they had brought their own pronunciation of Greek, not that of the 
ancients. 

(b) Master Erasmus was mainly right though the dialects are part- 
ly against him. The ancient Greeks did not as a rule pronounce a 
ande alike. Most of them did distinguish between o, et, 1, w, v, 7, 7. 
They did not all of them pronounce B as v nor 6 as th. The mod- 
ern Greek represents the b sound by wa and the d sound by vz. 
The aspirate was usually pronounced by the ancients, as é¢’ trv 
proves. Hadley (Essays Philological and Critical, p. 140, ) shows 
a wide difference in pronunciation between the Greek of the tenth 
and the nineteenth centuries. Moreover, we can trace the changes 
as far back as the manuscripts go. But even among the earlier 
Boeotians these changes were already going on, for they wrote tis 
adXvs for tots dAAows. Z is already losing the §’ sound in the New 
Testament and becoming merely in effect our z. It is certain then 
that the New Testament Greek was not pronounced exactly like the 
modern Greek, but much more like the vernacular Attic of the time 
of Demosthenes. The vernacular inscriptions of the various early 
Greek dialects show much diversity in pronunciation and spelling. 
But some of the tendencies of modern Greek were already manifest 
in the kow7. 

4. Punctuation.—Punctuation is the function of the modern 
editor, for the Greek manuscripts had the words all written together. 
Paragraphs were not separated till late, though rough chapter di- 
visions are early discernible. Punctuation is the result of inter- 
pretation. The ancients were wholly without our modern conven- 


16 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ience in this respect. See change of place of the period in the 
phrase €v 6 yéyovey in John 1:3. Westcott and Hort pointed it &. 
0 yeyovey tA, See also in John 7:21 the place of the period with && 
rovro, Asa rule German editors punctuate too freely according to 
German ideas rather than those of the Greeks. The scarcity of 
writing material made it important to utilize all the space. The 
student of the New Testament to-day has many conveniences that 
Timothy did not enjoy when he gave himself tothe reading of 
Paul’s Epistles and the other Scriptures. We need the dash in his 
Epistles at times (2 Tim. 4:15 f.) because of the vehement emo- 
tion. Often a parenthesis is called for in the Scripture text (John 
1:15), especially in Paul’s Epistles. 


CHAPTER IV. 


THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 


1. The history of the Greek declensions. 

(a) Nouns (both substantives and adjectives) have three declen- 
sions in Greek, though the distinction between them is not easily 
made. In Sanskrit Whitney finds five declensions, as in Latin, 
but says: ‘‘There is nothing absolute in this arrangement; it is 
merely believed to be open to as few objections as any other. No 
general agreement has been reached among scholars as to the num- 
ber and order of Sanskrit declensions’’? (Whitney, Sanskrit Gram- 
mar, p. 111). There is pretty general agreement among Greek 
scholars as to the number of declensions, but not as to the reason 
for the divisions. The first and second declensions do have vowel 
stems and differ in one having a and the other o stems, but the 
third declension is not wholly a consonant declension for some of 
the stems show no trace of a final consonant, not even of a lost 
digamma as 70Xt-s, dotv. They do differ in this respect that the 
genitive singular of the third declension has always the added 
suffix -os, but even in this matter the first and second declensions 
are in harmony. 

(b) Moreover, while the modern Greek preserves fairly well the 
third declension with many variations as to the case endings, it has 
in the vernacular a supplementary declension that has a vowel 

_stem in the singular and a consonant stem in the plural and com- 
bines thus the first or second and the third declensions, as zazas, 
nanddes. This form of metaplasm is found in the earlier Greek. 
In the modern vernacular Greek it has won a fixed place. The 
New Testament shows a number of examples of such change from 
the second declension to the third, as caBBdarw (Luke 14:1), but 
céBBaocw (Matt. 12:1). So likewise we have 6 rAotros (Eph. 1:18) 

3 


1S A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


and 76 wAotros (Eph. 1:8). The change from the first declension 
to the third is rare, but 9 viky (1 John 5:4) becomes 76 vices in 1. Cor. 
15:55. In éxarovrdpxy (Matt. 8:13) we have the first declension, 
but in éxardvtapyov (Acts 22:25) the second. So we have Avorpav 
(Acts 14:6) and Avorpos (Acts 14:8). But the declensions pre- 
serve their integrity well both in the papyri and in the New Test- 
ament. 

(c) The tendency towards blending the case forms that is so 
strong in the Indo-germanic tongues served to some extent to oblit- 
erate still more the distinctions between the declensions. But for 
this matter and the history of the cases see chapter on the Syntax 
of the Cases. With all the substantives one needs to get the root 
(primitive or derivative), and the case ending. This science of 
word-building (German, Wort-bildung) is necessary for the real 
student of language. 

2. Special forms in the first declension. 

(a) The Ionic genitive-ablative ozepys in Acts 10:1 is, accord- 
ing to Deissmann, the rule in the papyri, but the modern Greek 
retains -as. Note also ovvedviéns in Acts 5:2 and other similar ex- 
amples. The so-called Doric genitive occurs in the New Testament, 
as in the papyri and the modern Greek. So we have Boppé (Luke 
13:29), but “Avépéov (Mark 1:29). Note also the genitive Mdp6as 
(John 11:1). There is much confusion in the manuscripts be- 
tween Mapia (Matt. 1:16) and Mapua» (Matt. 18:55), the latter the 
Hebrew form and indeclinable, the former the Hellenized declin- 
able form. Dr. Hort contends for Mapidy always for the sister of 
Lazarus. In the New Testament and the later Greek the form 
-opxys Supplants as a rule -apxos, as wodurdpxas (Acts 17:6). Muvojs 
is Mwvojv in accusative, but Mwvoéws (third declension) in the 
genitive. 

(b) The nominative singular of the first declension has no ending 
for feminine nouns, buts for masculine stems. The nominative 
plural ise for all stems. In Sanskrit the feminine nominative 
singular has also some derivative stems. 

(c) The vocative has no ending for singular or plural, but with 
nouns in -rys the stem vowel is shortened from @ to & The San- 


THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 19 


skrit has no vocative ending and in a stems uses merely the unal- 
tered stem. 

(d) The genitive-ablative ending for the singular was as in the 
Sanskrit. It appears in Greek variously as os, s, cow, ovo, 10, 0. 
See numerous examples in Homer. The first declension uses s for 
feminine and to for masculine nouns. But co drops thee and the 
a of the stem combines with o after do has become eo under Ionic 
influence. Attic hasan Ionic base. In the Ionic this genitive- 
ablative appears as ew and in Homer is pronounced as one syllable. 
The genitive-ablative plural ending wy is the same for all the de- 
clensions. In the Sanskrit the genitive plural ending is am or sam 
while the ablative has a different ending bhyas. The Latin has 
genitive plural wm and orum. The longa has become w and m has 
become v. This » contracts with the stem vowel 4 making Gv. 

(e) The locative, dative, and instrumental cases have as a rule 
the same ending in the singular and plural of the first declension. 
It is the dative form (a) that is used in the singular of the first 
declension for all three cases. This a in the Sanskrit was ai or é 
and seems to come from a longer form -abhi which occurred in 
feminine stems. So Sanskrit tu-bhja or tu-bhjam like Latin tib(h)i 
and mi(b)hi. This a contracts with the stem vowel 4 (7) into 4, p. 
However a remnant of the original locative singular ending ¢ occurs 
as xapa-i, though ¢ and y could be explained as locative forms also. 
The two here easily blend. There are several remains of the in- 
strumental singular ending ¢e (old Sanskrit bhi) in Homer as 
Ai-¢. But in the Sanskrit singular a is the instrumental ending 
due possibly to the union of the old associative case with the in- 
strumental. This @ is preserved in some Greek words like dpa, 
mayta(y). In the plural these three cases use ov (with phonetic e 
preceding, Schleicher), the locative ending, like the Sanskrit su 
and (Giles, p. 289) os and os instrumental. The dative, however, 
in Latin preserves sometimes its own original ending (bhyas in 
Sanskrit) as in dea-bus, capitibus. Homer uses the instrumental 
plural ¢w (in Sanskrit bhis, possibly seen in dy-dis) in such forms 
as xepady-duv. The old associative plural has no examples left. 

(f) The accusative singular has two endings in Greek v and a. 


20 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


In the Sanskrit this ending is am or m, as in the Latin we have 
em or m for masculine and feminine stems. But the Greek uses 
now v (m thus appearing), now e. But in the papyri and in some 
manuscripts as of the New Testament the vernacular uses both a 
and v as in xéipav, vixray (examples, of course, of the third declen- 
sion). The vernacular of the modern Greek commonly drops v 
entirely. The accusative plural ending is in Greek vs for this de- 
clension. The v disappears, of course, before the s. The Sanskrit 
had ans with short vowel masculine stems. So the Latin as is 
from ans. The Greek third declension, however, like the Sanskrit, 
uses only as without v. 

3. Special forms of the second declension. 

(a) The so-called Attic second declension is almost extinct in 
the New Testament as it is wholly so in the modern Greek. How- 
ever, K@ as accusative appears in Acts 21:1 and ’A7oAAa is genitive 
(1 Cor. 3:4). 

(b) @eés is used as vocative always in New Testament (John 
20:28), save in Matt. 27:46 in quotation from Ps. 22:1 where, how- 
ever, Ocds isread. But 6eé occurs a few times in the Septuagint as 
in Judges 21:3. 

(c) The name ‘Iycots has “Iyood for all the oblique cases save the 
accusative which is ‘Incotv. 

(d) *Ooréov is contracted in John 19:36, but uncontracted in 
plural éoréa (Lu. 24:39) and écréwy (Matt. 23:27). In Matt. 2:3 
TepoodAvpa is still plural neuter and zaoa is used with wos not ex- 
pressed as 7 is so used with the indeclinable form IepoveaAnjpm (Rev. 
3:12). Nots has accusative votv (1 Cor. 2:16), but genitive vods 
and dative vof (third declension). See Eph. 4:23. 

(e) The second (or e) declension has no distinctively feminine 
inflection as in the first (or a) declension. However, feminine 
words like 680s occur with the masculine endings. The variations 
in inflection between this declension and the masculine stems of 
the first declension are several. The genitive-ablative singular ov 
is the result of the contraction of ow after«has been dropped. 
But Homer often keeps it as -ow, The original ablative ending in 
the Sanskrit singular was t or d and appears in otpavo-6e and the ad- 


Ee ll 


THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES., 21 


verbial-ws(7r). So Latin tus (caelitus), Umbrian tu (out of), Anglo- 
Saxon ut (out of). The genitive-ablative plural ending ov is not 
contracted with o of the stem, but the o has been dropped. In the 
jocative, instrumental, dative cases the ending for the singular is 
a Which contracts with o of the stem into » Some distinctively 
locative forms occur, however, as otxo-. (compare dative form otkw). 
The locative, instrumental, dative plural has the locative ending 
wot appearing usually as cs and the instr. os. Homer often has we 
and sometimes the Attic. Homer also has the instrumental end- 
ing in Oedgw. The accusative plural ovs is made from o-vs. The 
v is dropped before s and the o has compensative lengthening. In 
the Doric this lengthening is often into ws, not ovs. In the voca- 
tive singular the stem vowel o has been changed with no ending 
after the manner of the Sanskrit (a to e), though the vocative is 
not strictly a case. The neuter declension is just like the mascu- 
line with the exception that in the singular the nominative, voca- 
tive, and accusative are just alike and have the ending vy like the m 
of the Latin. In the Sanskrit neuters in general had no ending at 
all for the nominative and am with pronouns is a frequent mascu- 
line and feminine nominative ending. Some Sanskrit neuters 
(tat) show a form in d like Latin istud and English that. In the 
Sanskrit the ending for neuter nominative is i and the same for the 
accusative and the vocative. But an, in, un were sometimes pre- 
fixed to this i and then the ni dropped, leaving a, 7, vu. The Greek 
and the Latin use this a for the neuter plural. In the second de- 
clension in the Greek this a displaces o of the stem and there is no 
contraction. 

4, Special forms of the third declension. 

(a) The vocative plural is always the same as the nominative, 
but the vocative singular varies greatly. It is either like the nom. 
as Kypvé, tony, or the stem as datwov, wok. In Mk. 5:34 Ovyarnp, 
not Ovyarep in the vocative form, i. e., the nominative form is re- 
tained, but @vyarep in Matt. 9:22. So warep in Jo. 17:1, but warip 
in 17:21, and even zarnp dikae in 17:25, These are examples with- 
out the article. 

(b) KaAds has accusative singular xAdda (Luke 11:52) and kreiy 


22 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


(Rey. 3:7), both «Adidas (Matt. 16:19) and «res (Rey. 1:18) as 
accusative plural. Xdpis has usually accusative singular xdpw 
(Heb. 4:16), but xdpira occurs twice (Acts 24:27; Jude 4). Tpap- 
pares, not ypappareus, is the accusative plural (Matt. 23:34). This 
form is found in the earlier Greek, in the papyri, and is the form 
in the modern Greek. On the other hand ix6vas, not ix@is is the 
accusative plural (Matt. 14:17). Kepas has xépara, not xépa (Rev, 
5:6). The masculine and feminine accusative singular uses a gen- 
erally, though the close vowel stems, like the open vowel stems 
(a and o declensions), use v (76d, vadv). But Baowve’s and words 
like it have a, and still use it in the modern Greek. The notice- 
able tendency in the vernacular of the xowy to use both a and y, as 
in xépav, did not succeed and was due largely to the ignorant 
classes. Cf. N. W. Greek. The accusative plural for these genders 
is generally as, but some have vs like vats. In some words also the 
accusative is like the nominative (cf. the Latin es) as roAas, BacrAcis. 

(c) The genitive plural épéwv is uncontracted sometimes (Rev. 
6:15). oropdv has genitive SoAopévros in Acts 3:11, though usu- 
ally SoXopGvos (Matt. 12:42). The third declension could easily 
be divided into two or more and thus we should have the five of 
the Sanskrit and the Latin. But all the usual seven divisions of 
the third declension unite in forming the genitive-ablative cases in 
the singular with os like Sanskrit as and Latin is. There is con- 
traction in some forms when the consonant is dropped as with 
yevous (Phil. 3:5). But with words like BacwAre’s os appears as as. 
This may be due to the dropping of digamma and the lengthening 


of one vowel. In Homer we have BucwAjos where «, and not 9, is, 


lengthened. A similar phenomenon is observable with woXts, roAews, 
in Homer zédAnos, where an ¢« has been inserted and « dropped. 
Observe also the acute accent remains on the antepenult because 
originally wéAews was pronounced as two syllables. Schleicher 
thinks that this ws may be rather like the Sanskrit as. The geni- 
tive-ablative plural zéAewv likewise retains the acute accent on the 
antepenult for a similar reason, and the wv does not contract with 
the inserted «. As already observed contraction does not always 
occur in the genitive-ablative plural with forms like xeA€or. 


THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 23 


(d) Perhaps it is in the nominative singular that the forms of 
the third declension vary most. Neuters, of course, will be the 
mere stem for nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, if the 
last letter is a consonant that can stand at the end of a word. If 
not, the letter is simply dropped as in c@pa(r). But some neuters 
instead of this change the consonant in these cases, or originally 
had both, as xépas(r), vdwp(ar). Or else the final s is retained and 
the last vowel changed as yévos(es). Neuter plurals for these cases 
have always simply a. Many masculine and feminine substantives 
have the usual s as the nominative ending with necessary euphonic 
changes as éAmis. Others have the mere stem as aiov. Still others 
have the stem with lengthened vowel as zoujv or yépwv(t). Inthe 
modern Greek a curious nominative is made from the accusative 
singular as 7 eékéva. The nominative plural (masculine and femi- 
nine) is always es, sometimes contracted with preceding e (stem as 
Baorre?s or added as wedes). 

(e) The locative, instrumental, dative cases have in the singu- 
lar the locative ending « without any exceptions. Sometimes con- 
traction takes place as with yéve, 7é\e. In the plural these cases 
use the locative ending o always. 

5. Number in substantives. 

(a) The dual is no longer used in the New Testament, nor does 
it occur in the Septuagint, except in the form dévo itself, which is 
indeclinable save that the form $8voé (plural locative ending) is 
found (Lu. 16:18). But this form appears in Aristotle, and is 
common in the papyri, where we see also (Deissmann, Bible 
Studies) dvw, dvdr, dveiv. "Apdo does not appear in the New Test- 
ament, but only déupérepor and this sometimes apparently for more 
than two (Acts 19:16). The dual was never used largely in the Greek 
(lonic dropped it before the time of xowy) and in the modern 
Greek is wholly disused. It is a logical effort to distinguish pairs 
of things, as the two eyes. The Sanskrit employed it, but Latin had 
only duo and ambo which had a plural inflection in the oblique 
cases. : 

(b) Some words are only used in the singular from the nature 
of the case, and some again only in the plural. Sometimes the 


24 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


plural is used to avoid being too definite as with of {yrotvres (Matt. 
2:20), or again the word may be adverbial (accusative of general 
reference) as toa (Phil. 2:6). 

(c) Neuter plurals often use verbs in the singular being looked 
at as a single whole as 7a €pya--- paptypeé (John 10:25), but not 
always as Ta GAAws Eyovta--- kpuBivat od Sivavra (1 Tim. 5:25). Here 
the items are emphasized. A singular substantive may have a 
collective idea and so be used with a plural verb as 6 wAcioros 6xXos 
éotpwoav (Matt. 21:8). 

6. Gender of substantives. 

(a) The noun “Ayap (Gal. 4:25) is not used as neuter with 76 
mistakenly by Paul. He treats the name asa word. Any word 
can be thus treated as neuter in Greek and the neuter article can 
be so employed. In Rom. 11:4 Paul uses 7 Baad as we have some- 
times in the Septuagint, perhaps because of the idea of aicywvy at- 
tributed to Baal. Compare also the use of 9 with “IepocdAvya (Matt. 
2:3) evidently with the idea of words. 

(b) Any noun used fora male is masculine, and any noun 
used for a female is feminine. Why nouns that have no natural 
gender are not always neuter we cannot tell. Hence no absolute 
rule can be laid down for the guidance of modern students, though 
the presence of the Greek article with substantives shows already 
how the word in question was used. All the older Indo-germanie 
languages have three genders, but the Sanskrit has no gender for 
the personal pronouns, nor has the Greek except airés when so 
used. Delbrueck thinks that originally all the masculine nouns 
of the a declension were feminine, and all the feminine of the o de- 
clension were masculine. 

(c) The New Testament usage does not vary greatly from the 
earlier custom. The classic 6 zAodros sometimes (Rom. 2:4). So 
also occasionally €Xeos, Gjdos. “O deopds (Lu. 13:16) is ra deca in 
the plural (Lu. 8:29) as well as of decpoé (Phil. 1:13). In general 
it should be said that many proper names are treated as indeclin- 
able when they could be inflected like Byédayy -(Matt. 21:1). 


CHAPTER V. 
THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 


1. The origin of adjectives. 

(a) The line of demarkation between substantive and adjective 
is not easily drawn. Giles, for instance, in his admirable Manual 
of Comparative Philology has no separate treatment of adjectives, and 
treats them incidentally in connection with the discussion of sub- 
stantives and suffixes. So also Whitney in his Sanskrit Grammar 
has no distinct treatment of adjectives, but says, ‘‘The accordance 
in inflection of substantive and adjective stems is so complete that 
the two cannot be separated in treatment from one another.”’ 

(b) Most of the Sanskrit adjectives have only one or two end- 
ings, though some haye all three genders. The great bulk area 
stems for masculine and neuter, while the feminine may have a or 
i, and this matter is ‘‘determined in great part only by actual usage, 
and not by grammatical rule.”’ 

(c) Thus it is clear that the adjective isa gradual variation from 
the substantive. The substantive is an essential appellative (éve- 
pata éribera). But substantives were doubtless used in this de- 
scriptive sense before adjectives arose and are still so used, as, for 
instance, we say brother man. So in the New Testament év 7@ 
"lopddvy rorapd (Matt. 3:6), tpoceAnAvOate Suov dpe (Heb. 12:22). 
This is, indeed, apposition, but it is descriptive apposition, and it 
is just at this point that the adjective emerges (Delbrueck), though, 
of course, at a very early period. 

(d) Adjectives then specialize one use of substantives, though 
the substantive retains in some measure the descriptive apposi- 
tional usage. But Greek has a much more developed system of 
adjectives than the Sanskrit and it has survived fairly well in the 
modern Greek, though a strong tendency exists in the vernacular 
to simplify adjectives to one declension. 


26 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


2. The declension of adjectives. 

(a) Some Greek adjectives, like most of the Sanskrit a stem 
adjectives, have only one inflection for all genders, though they 
are actually not used for the neuter. So zévys (2 Cor. 9:9), dpwagé 
(Matt. 7:15) and ovyyevis (Lu. 1:36). It is here that we can best 
see the evolution of the adjective. 

(b) Still other adjectives have only two sets of endings, the 
masculine and the feminine being thesame. So edyevys (Lu. 19:12), 
iAews (Matt. 16:22), pecLov (John 14:28). 

(c) Sometimes also adjectives which can be inflected with three 
sets of endings are used with only two. So aiwwos (Heb. 5:9) is 
feminine. 

(d) Once again some adjectives are no longer used with three 
terminations, as épypos (Gal. 4:27). Both of these examples come 
ultimately from the Septuagint, and dows (1 Tim. 2:8) has two 
terminations as early as Plato (Simcox). See also paras 7 Opye- 
keta (Jas. 1:26). 

(e) The majority of Greek adjectives have three endings, one 
for each gender. This is true of all the participles and the other 
verbal adjectives. All the distinctively feminine inflections belong 
to the first (a declension). But the masculine and neuter inflec- 
tions fall into either the second (o declension) or the third declen- 
sion (consonant and close vowel). 

({) Compound adjectives like arexvos (Lu. 20:28) or evyerjs gen- 
erally have only two endings. So with the Attic second declen- 
sion (fAews). 

(g) The participles also make the feminine forms according to 
the first declension, but the masculine and neuter follow either the 
second or the third. The Greek participle endings are very much 
like those of the Sanskrit and Latin participles. 

(h) The New Testament usage is in general in harmony with 
the older language. Xpvoav (not Xpvopv) occurs in Rey. 1:13. 
‘Hyioous, not nyioeos, appears in Mark 6:23 (thus also in papyri, 
Deissmann), and Babéws, not Babéos, in Luke 24:1. Svyyejs has ovy- 
yevqv according to some documents in Rom. 16:11 and ovyyevetor is the 
correct reading in Mark 6:4. This word also has a late feminine 


4 


J 


(OSS-fTHE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 27 


in -s (Luke 1:36). WAypys is probably indeclinable (as in papyri) 
in John 1:14 and is probably the true reading in Acts 6:5, 

3. The comparison of adjectives. 

(a) It is not always necessary to use the comparative ana super- 
lative forms in order to express the ideas of comparison. The 
other devices used will be discussed under the syntax of the adjec- 
tive. 

(b) In the Sanskrit the suffixes of primary derivation for com- 
parative and superlative (iyans, istha) are much like -twy, -wros 
of the Greek. In the modern Greek these suffixes are not used at 
all, and in the earlier Greek they are less common than -repos, 
-ratos, Which suffixes are like the Sanskrit suffixes of secondary de- 
rivation (tara, tama) and alone survive in modern Greek. 

(c) »’AxpiBeoraros (Acts 26:5) and dywraros (Jude 20) are the 
only superlatives in -ratos in the New Testament (Blass), and there 
are not a great number in -woros, though we have peyoros (2 Pet. 
1:4), eAayurros (Luke 16:10), and a few others. The comparative 
in -repos is common in the New Testament as topdrepos (Heb. 4:12), 
nor is wy uncommon as in peLov (Matt. 11:11). Cf. puxporepos in 
same verse. Taxuov (taxeov) supplants baccov (John 20:4). 

(d) A double comparative with both forms appears in peforepos 
(8 John 4), like our vernacular “‘lesser.’? So Paul makes a com- 
parative on a superlative in éAayutorepos (Eph. 3:8) like our 
vulgar ‘“‘leaster.’? Cf. peysrrétaros in papyri. 

(e) Comparatives made from adverbs we see like é&drepos (Matt. 
8:12) or from prepositions like zporepos (Eph. 4:22). 

(f) The superlative is little used in the New Testament. In the 
vernacular of the modern Greek the superlative form is hardly used 
at all, but rather the article and the comparative form. The be- 
ginning of this usage is apparent in the New Testament as in 
6 petCwv (Matt. 18:4) and petLov (Matt. 18:1). When the superla- 
tive is used it is usually elative (like our very), not the true su- 
perlative. 

(g) Other devices used are padXov, padiota. But sometimes the 
context is relied on to suggest comparison. Compare Luke 15:7, 
In Mk. 7:36 we have a double comparative paAXov reprocorepor. 


28 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


Prepositions like wapd, imép, cte., can be used also rather than 4 
after a comparative as Heb. 9:23; Luke 16:8. The ablative is com- 
mon after the comparative as wovyporepa éavtod (Matt. 12:45). 

4, Adjectival numerals. 

(a) WH read reooepa (Rev. 4:6), reroepdxovra (Matt. 4:2), reove- 
pakovraerys (Acts 7:23), but réecoapes( Acts 21:9), réocapas(Jo. 11:17). 
The papyri (Moulton) do not, save in cases of ignorant scribes, 
use téogepes, but the form occurs in the later Byzantine Greek, 
though not in modern Greek. 

(b) The Sanskrit, like the Greek, inflects the first four cardinal 
numbers in the various genders, though, of course, in only one 
number in each instance. The Greek words themselves are like 
the Sanskrit in root. With dvd cis, xa eis (Rev. 21:21; Mark 
14:19) the form is not indeclinable, but the preposition.(so in 
modern Greek also) is simply the original adverb with no prepo- 
sitional force. In Sanskrit cardinal numerals from 5-19 are usually 
inflected, but without gender, though sometimes indeclinable. 
in Greek cardinal numbers from 5-10 are indeclinable. 

(c) LIlpéros as an ordinal is used in Mark 16:9. Elsewhere the 
cardinal efs is found as in Matt. 28:1. The ordinals are all adject- 
ival like the cardinals from 200 up. 


CHAPTER VI. 
THE DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 


1. Pronominal roots. 

(a) Substantives are kin to verbs in root and adjectives are 
variations of the substantive. But pronouns belong to a separate 
stock and Bopp has rightly divided roots into verbal and pronom- 
inal. All other forms as adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, in- 
tensive particles, are really case forms of nouns or pronouns. Hence 
three sets of stems stand out with special prominence built on two 
root stocks. These stems are verbs, nouns, pronouns. 

(b) Once more noun and pronoun are vitally connected with 
the verb. The noun is so employed in root formation and the 
pronoun is used to form the personal endings of the verb. Hence 
the actual verb form is made up from the two roots of the lan- 
guage, the verbal and the pronominal. 

(c) Monro (Homeric Grammar, p. 57) further remarks that 
noun stems name or describe while pronouns only point out, the 
one is predicative, the other demonstrative. In a sense then all 
pronouns were originally demonstrative. In the Sanskrit the pro- 
nominal roots are demonstrative (Whitney) and differ fundament- 
ally from the roots of nouns. 

2. Brief sketch of pronominal forms. 

Some of the forms are the most primitive known in the Indo- 
germanic languages. In the Sanskrit personal pronouns of the first 
and second persons have no distinction of gender and are made up 
of fragments of various roots. 

(a) In Greek éys was originally éydév like the Sanskrit aham. 
This éyé form appears in Latin ego, Gothic ik, German ich, French 
je, Anglo-Saxon ic, English I. So ovis in Doric 7 like the Latin 
tu, etc. TheSanskritistuam. Compareaham. The oblique forms 


30 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


in the singular come from another stem which is practically the 
same in all the above languages, mam, éué, me, etc. (oé is from 
ré, original tue) for the accusative; éuéor0, éuéo, euod (pod) and 
odo, céo, cov for the genitive-ablatiye; éuo/, cof have the locative 
ending used for locative, dative, instrumental; in the plural jyeéis, 
tyes come from the Lesbian dppés, ippées; qyOv, iudv are a new form- 
ative (Giles), quiv, tyiv are locative forms. 

(b) The New Testament does not use the third personal form 
of ob, of, €, odeis, etc. Instead the forms of airés occur in all gen- 
ders and both numbers. In the modern Greek this form in some 
of the oblique cases is.shortened to the enclitic forms rot, réyv, ete. 
But on the whole personal pronouns haye retained the case-forms 
better than any other parts of speech. 

(c) The possessive pronouns éyués, ods are made from the per- 
sonal pronominal stems, and 7peérepos, duerepos, are really compara- 
tive forms. The reflexive is merely the personal pronoun plus the 
intensive atrés. 

(d) The reflexive forms of the first and second persons are not 
used in the plural except tudv adray (1 Cor. 7:35) for nav airav is 
emphatic rather than reflexive in 2 Thess. 1:4 (Simcox). The 
uncontracted form ceavrod alone is used. Westcott and Hort print 
avrov, etc., about twenty times (against most recent editors) rather 
than always adrod or éavtod. So we have atrov in John 2:24 and 
éavrov in Luke 15:17. The variations in the manuscripts make it 
hard to decide this point. 

(e) The demonstrative ode is formed from the old demonstrative 
6 and 8€ and is declined like 6. Otros is apparently a doubling of 
6 and 76 (stem of 6) with a connecting vowel v and is a strength- 
ened demonstrative. The form otrooé does not appear in the New 
Testament. °Exevos (Homer, xeivos) is from the locative form (ad- 
verb) é-xe7 (compare Latin hi-c, English hi-ther). To--odros is 
still another compound of otros and rot-os. Towodro, not Towidror, is 
neuter in the New Testament. Totos (rowode) is the demonstrative 
to which corresponds the relative otos and ézoios and the interroga- 
tive rotos. In modern Greek 6 érotos is the common relatiye. <A 
similar correspondence is shown between, toaos (rovdode) and 


THE DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 31 


TocovTos, ovos, and wdcos. Adros has not been explained nor 6 deiva, 

(f) The relative is the demonstrative 6s deyeloped like Eng- 
lish that. In Homer os is often demonstrative ‘‘thus.’’ “Ooris is 
merely the addition of the indefinite tis to 6s both of which may 
be declined or only ris. But in the New Testament this form is 
never used outside of the nominative except in case of éws drov 
(John 9:18) and 6m as accusative neuter (Luke 10:35). In the 
modern Greek és as a relative pretty nearly disappears out of the 
common speech and besides 6 éaotos we see dzov and vod used, as 
6 dvyp omov eda, Compare the vulgar English use of ‘‘whar’’ as 
‘the man whar did that is a rascal.”’ 

(g) The interrogative form ris is really the same root as the 
Latin quis, Sanskrit kas, Gothic kwas, German wer, Anglo-Saxon 
hwa, English who. In English and Latin the relative is formed 
from the same root, but in Greek the relative has a demonstrative 
origin like English relative that. Both Latin and Greek make an 
indefinite form from this root as ali-quis, tis. 

(h) The reciprocal pronoun éddAxAwv is, of course, a reduplica- 
tion of @dXos as in English we say ‘‘one another.’’ “Téos is kin to 
Latin swwm (¢e) and so means what belongs to one’s self. The 
modern Greek has developed a number of special pronominal 
forms like xaveis besides those retained from the old Greek. 


CHAPTER VII. 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 


1. Relation of verb forms and noun forms. | 

(a) The verb forms actually in use are made from primitive 
roots like Aerw(Au) or from denominatiye stems like tysdw (tTysa). 
Substantives and adjectives are constantly also made from verbs as 
Aourds (Acirw). ‘The relation between substantive and verb is at 
all times very close’’ (Giles, Handbook of Comparative Philology, 
p. 424). 

(b) The various verb forms use suffixes as substantives do. 
“These suffixes, however, are exactly parallel to the suffixes in 
the substantive, and in many instances can be identified with 
them” (Giles, ibid). In fact two of the so-called verb forms re- 
main as much noun as verb, the infinitive and participle. The 
infinitive is always a verbal substantive, and the participle a verbal 
adjective. 

(c) The Sanskrit was especially rich in verbal substantives that 
illustrate the close relation between verb and substantive. These 
purely verbal substantives had no tense and no voice, but were fixed 
case-forms as the genitive-ablative in as, the locative in 7, the da- 
tive in ai or e, the accusative in am orm. This accusative verbal 
form gradually displaced the others in Sanskrit as did the Latin 
supine in tum. But in Greek the dative form gains the day as in 
Homer dotva is like Sanskrit devane and tueva is like Sanskrit 
vidmane. Forms like dvev are probably in the locative. The 
Greek infinitive thus is a verbal substantive in the dative case (or 
locative) though gradually in usage the dative case idea is no 
longer retained and this form is used in any case in the singular 
saye the vocative. Voice and tense appear in the Greek infinitive. 

(d) The Sanskrit likewise uses verbal adjectives made by suf- 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 33 


fixes quite similar to those in the Greek (ant, mana, ta, etc.) and 
they have voice and tense, but the participle has its fullest devel- 
opment in the Greek language. The infinitiye and the participle 
have no personal endings and never have a subject. They are 
both always in a case relation to some yerb, substantive, or prep- 
osition. The participle has inflection in both numbers and all 
genders, though the infinitive is itself indeclinable. In the modern 
Greek the final v of the infinitive is dropped as Ave. 

(e) In the New Testament there are no peculiar forms for those 
verbal nouns, though ze (also ziv), not mei, appears in John 4:7. 
Westcott contends for infinitive in -oty with verbs in -ow (not ov) 
except in Luke 9:31. But this position J. H. Moulton objects to 
from evidence of the papyri. 

2. The building of the verb. 

(a) The verb (verbum, word) is the word par excellence. It is 
the main word in the sentence and as such receives more changes 
and expresses thereby more varieties of meaning than the substan- 
tive. 

(b) Perhaps originally the roots were not distinctively either 
verb or substantive, but in the Sanskrit the substantive had an 
earlier and fuller development than did the verb. The system of 
case endings used in noun inflection is best seen in the Sanskrit, 
but the verb conjugation appears in its perfection in the Greek. 
The tense system is fairly well developed in the Sanskrit, but the 
modes and the voices not so much so. In the Latin the verb 
swings far away from the line of progress seen in the Greek, so that 
Greek and Latin are more unlike in verb conjugation than in noun 
inflection, though both grow out of tendencies observable in the 
Sanskrit. In the early Sanskrit the aorist is very common in 
yarious modes, but it almost disappears in the later. 

(c) The Greek verb is a complicated, though beautiful, piece of 
word mechanism, and needs to be studied analytically. Mere 
memorizing of the conjugations is not enough, though necessary. 
The first thing to do is to find the verb stem or theme which may 
be a root like Aur or a derivative stem like tyza. Around this theme 
or ase stem the verb forms are built with architectural skill. The 


34 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ground floor, so to speak, is the aorist tense (the old aorist, the 
so-called second aorist) which is often identical with the present 
as €-y-v. By a series of suffixes the other tenses, the modes, the 
voices, the persons, the number are all expressed. 

(d) The suffixes include all the additions to the theme. The 
dictionaries give the verb in the present tense and the impression 
is thus created that the present tense is the stock around which the 
verb grows. Thus on the theme Ax you make the aorist in the 
various modes and voices, the present in the various modes and 
voices (and the imperfect), the perfect in the various modes and 
voices, and so the future. The tense suffix is reasonably stable 
and the mode sign also. The personal endings have to express 
voice, person, and number and appear in two forms (primary and 
secondary) which may have been originally one. 

(e) In the earlier Greek there is a strong tendency towards 
dropping the personal endings. All verbs were criginaily px verbs. 
In Homer many verbs have wz that do not in the Attic, while in 
the New Testament and the papyri many of the Attic verbs in pw 
are dropping the ps as &66 (Rey. 3:9), torévw (Rom. 3:30). In’the 
modern Greek the pu forms belong only to the high style. The 
common people use only w verbs. The early Greeks had thus two 
systems of conjugation, the px inflection where the personal end- 
ings were put directly to the root or root plus mode and tense suf- 
fixes, and the inflection where the personal endings are connect- 
ed with the tense and mode stem by variable vowels°/e. But the 
constant history of language was in the direction of the disuse of 
the px inflections and the unification of all verbs under the » con- 
jugation as with ddpiovow (Rey. 11:9). As with nouns, so with 
verbs the dual is no longer in use. The papyri (Deissmann) have 
even dvvoya like B in the Gospels and Acts. 

3. The tenses. 

(a) The aorist. The New Testament preserves the original 
second aorist of the yz form (non-thematic) which is really the 
original verb-form, as éoryy, éyvwev. The second aorist form (the- 
matic) with the variable vowel °/e« appears also as €Aurov. The re- 
duplicated aorist also survives as jyayov (Luke 22:54). There is 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. BI 


even a reduplicated first aorist, éxexpaga (Acts 24:21). The first 
aorist forms with */e« (with or without o) are frequent as €Ac&a, 
éxpwa. To obtain the root, */e, °/e, or ¢*/e must be dropped. One 
of the peculiarities of the New Testament usage is the increased 
use of */e even with second aorist stems. This usage existed already 
in the case of era, jveyxa, éreca along with elrov, jqveyxov, érecov. In 
the New Testament, as in the papyri, it is extended greatly to such 
forms as 7AOav, <idav, dvedpav, dveidav. In fact, the modern Greek 
uses only some dozen of the old second aorists. Everywhere else 
the later first aorist has the field. The ending ocav, common in 
Septuagint, existing in papyri, and frequent in modern Greek ver- 
nacular, is strongly attested for wapeAaBooay (Mg. of W H) in 
2 Thess. 3:6. “Hyudptyoa (Rom. 5:14) as well as nyaprov (1 Cor. 
7:28) isfound. The growth is towards aorists with oa. We have 
édoxayev in 1 Thess. 4:2. Again forms like a¢jxes (Rey. 2:4) occur 
as in the papyri and the modern Greek. “Eyev79yv is found also 
(Acts 4:4). In Acts 28:26 eirév, not eié, is the imperative form. 
In Mark 12:1 ééédero, not egeSorT0, has lost the root vowel and the 
thematic vowel « has taken its place. The New Testament pre- 
serves the three aorists in xa (éwxa, €6yka, jKa). 

(b) The present-tense system. In no part of the Greek verb 
(and Sanskrit) do we have such a complicated system as in the 
present system. There are (Brugmann) thirty-two classes of Indo- 
germanic verbs in the tense system, thirty of which the Greek pos- 
sesses. However, they can all be grouped under seven simple 
divisions which are practically the same as the Sanskrit systems. 
If the present is built on the aorist (or identical with it as is often 
true like ¢y-p/), the obvious and easy way to make the present 
would be to add the primary personal endings to the aorist or 
present stems, and this is seen in such forms as ¢y-pé. Here é-y-v 
is either aorist or imperfect, for there would be no distinction in 
forms. The imperfect is merely a variation of the present stem 
with secondary endings. Some of these presents are reduplicated 
like 8¢-8w-~, for reduplication is not confined to the perfect. Rather 
it seems to begin with some aorists, continue with some presents, 
and then be taken up by the perfect tense. What is called the 


36 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. \ 


variable (thematic) vowel class is but a step removed from the 
root class, for €\ey-o-v is exactly like €dur-o-y (Giles) in form. 
Hence we may argue that A¢y-o-ws (A€yw) is made from the aorist 
stem by the addition of the thematic vowel. If so, &\eyov was 
originally aorist as well as later imperfect like &dy-v. This fact 
throws some light on the frequent use of é\eyov in the New Testa- 
ment, for instance. The vy class (nasal class) comprises both of 
the previous classes, those that merely add one of the v combina- 
tions of the root (non-thematic) as oBé-vw-m, and those that use 
the variable vowel also (thematic) as dpaprt-dy-w, AapBavw. The 
aorist and the imperfect, of course, differ as €-AaB-ov, é-AdauBav-ov. 
The strong vowel class is just like the variable vowel class save 
that the root vowel has been strengthened. Here a distinction, as 
in the v class, exists between the aorist and the imperfect, as é-dvy-ov, 
é-pevy-ov. The 7 class differs from the variable vowel class only in 
the insertion of r before the variable vowel and the consequent 
euphonic changes é¢-Bad-nv, Baz-rw. Theuclass likewise inserts e 
before the variable vowel with various euphonic results such as 
at&-w, knpic-cw. Not all the verbs in the ox°/e or wox°/e class are 
inceptive, and some have reduplication as y-yvd-oxw. The New 
Testament writes ywwoxw, yivoua. The uncontracted form diwaca 
(Matt. 5:36) and the contracted form dwvy (Mark 9:22) both exist. 
So y, and not «, is the usual form of contracts in ew for second per- 
son middle singular indicative. New presents like orjxw (Phil. 
1:27) are built from the perfect stem. "Hduev (Mark 1:34) is treated 
like an uncompounded w verb. In Rey. 2:20 note a¢dets from adeéw. 
In jpérow (Matt. 15:23) we have Ionic contraction of aw verbs like 
ew. Note reading of A vuxotyre (Rev. 2:7). The imperfect, like the 
aorist, has forms in a. So eyxav (Mark 8:7). In eyooav (John 
15:22, 24) and éoAwtcay (Rom. 3:13, from the Septuagint) the 
imperfect follows the aorist in the use of ocav like the papyri and the 
modern Greek. Winer is in error, however, in citing édidocay 
(John 19:3) as an example, for do is here the root and cay 
the usual secondary ending with j« verbs in the third person 
plural. This example does not appear in Winer-Schmiedel, sec. 
18, 14. “Eri@ow (Acts 3:2) and é&édo0w (Acts .4:33) sometimes 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 37 


displace the ps forms, as do dpiovow (Rey. 11:9), evviovew (Matt. 
13:13). 

(c) The future system: The future tense is a later development 
and the tense has had a varied history. The Sanskrit had a peri- 
phrastic future made by a future active participle usually with an 
auxiliary. This method of making the future by an auxiliary and 
participle or infinitive has persisted till now. In the Germanic 
tongues the auxiliary and the infinitive is the only way of forming 
this tense. English has no future by the use of suffix. In the 
modern Greek the commonest way of forming the future is by 
means of edo and the infinitive (like English). Jebb thinks that 
Herodotus shows that the vernacular early began this usage. Here 
the origin of the idiom is seen in the purpose expressed by the aux- 
iliary verb. But in the New Testament we must insist on the full 
force of @€Aw as in John 7:17. Perhaps the original method was to 
have neither special form nor auxiliary, but to leave it to the im- 
agination to tell when to project a yerb into the future. Thus we 
still stay: ‘I go home next week.’? So Jesus said épxopac xat 
rapaArnpyopar (John 14:3). Some verbs never formed a future tense 
at all as ef, though éAetooua is made from épyoua. Hive as future 
is not in the New Testament. Another deyice used to express time 
is peAAw with the infinitive (aorist or present and once the future 
in the New Testament, as in earlier Greek) as in Matt. 11:14; Acts 
8:3; 11:28. However, the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin and other lan- 
guages, have developed a distinct future tense form. The Sanskrit 
did it by the use of sya or isya, but this suffix, which means ‘‘go” 
as the Coptic suffix na does, was rarely used (Whitney) partly 
because the subjunctiye mode was practically a future in sense. In 
the Greek the future form in o is much more common, though in 
Homer little distinction exists between the aorist subjunctiye and 
the future indicatiye. The two forms may have a common origin 
(Giles), though this is not certain, for the future may be a yaria- 
tion from the present. This latter is the opinion of Delbrueck. 
The modern Greek has no future form at all and, when not using 
6» and infinitiye, has 064 and the subjunctive (cf. Homer). 
Forms like wéopar (Luke 17:8), fdyopae (ibid.) give color to the 


38 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


aoristic origin of the future form. It may be that some verbs make 
the future from the aorist and some from the present. In the New 
Testament we have éxxye®, however, as in Acts 2:17. "EAmotow 
(Matt. 12:21) and similar verbs drop the a, like the Attic future, 
but Parriow retains it (Matt. 3:11). Kedécw, reAéow retain the o, 
while both dzoAéow (Matt. 21:41) and dod (1 Cor. 1:19) oceur. 
The form (Doric) zeootpa (made from ce?®/e) is in the New Testa- 
ment, but Pevfoua. In Rey. 22:19 we have aedG (so Septuagint) 
from ddapéw. The usual future of liquid verbs (€°/«) like xpw6 is 
common. Soalso drofavotua. The Doric future seems like a combi- 
nation of o and «¢ (liquid verbs), or is it that ve°/« is an original end- 
ing? This latter is entirely possible and the fact that the old Dorie 
and Homer both have ce®/e (cf. Sanskrit syo) lends color to the 
idea that the Indo-germanic had such a suffix. Cf. Kuehner- 
Blass, Laut-und Formenlehre, II, 8. 105 f. I may add that Dr. 
W. O. Carver, of this Seminary, strongly inclines to this view. 
Hirt (Handbuch, etc., 8. 403 f.), however, considers ce°/« to be a 
union of o and the liquid «. The future appears in the New Tes- 
tament only in the indicative mode and in the verbal nouns (in- 
finitives and participles). 

(d) The perfect system. This tense presents some special diffi- 
culties both as to formation and signification. We are concerned 
only with the formation, though it may be remarked that in the 
Sanskrit, as the aorist disappears, the perfect increases in use with 
apparent loss of precise distinctions. Both Greek and Sanskrit 
preserve reduplication, probably originating from the iterative and 
reduplicated present like ywyvéoxw. The perfect then is in form a 
variation from the present. However, we are utterly at sea as to 
the origin of xa which is usually added to the perfect active stem 
before the personal ending. The « may be due to some redupli- 
cated x stems in the present, which set the style. Some color is 
lent to this idea by the presence of some older perfect forms with- 
out the « as oléa, yéyova, AeAoura, and the aspirated forms like 
yéypada. In fact a form without « or a appears in some verbs like 
é-ora-vae (Acts 12:14). Besides jxw, though present in form, has 
the meaning of the perfect. Note é&AOov xai jew (Jo. 8:42). All 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 39 


this seems to show that the common xa for the active was a gradual 
development. This xa was used also with a few aorists (€doxa, 
€0yxa, Ka). Compare modern Greek éAv@nxa for eAvOnv. In the Latin 
a similar phenomenon occurs in the ending vi as in ama-vi, which 
has not been explained. The Latin has some reduplicated perfects 
like dedi and aoristic forms in s like seripsi. This form with dou- 
ble origin does double service in the Latin (both aorist and per- 
fect). The modern Greek has wholly dropped the perfect form 
save in the passive participle. Instead éy with the aorist infini- 
tive (a, not az) is used as éyw Avo much like the English. In the 
Attic we have sometimes éyw and the aorist participle. The past 
perfect in modern Greek is expressed by dxov Avoa. The Sanskrit 
has merely a trace of the past perfect. It was never very common 
in the Greek, though it was always at hand when needed. In the 
modern Greek, as in the old, the common tenses are the aorist, the 
present, and the imperfect. The perfect middle adds the personal 
endings directly to the reduplicated stem like éora- pev in the active. 
In the New Testament oféa is conjugated regularly in singular and 
plural of the indicative. Future perfect is «dyow. In Acts 26:4 
we have toacw. Outside of the indicative the form is 84, tore, 
eidévat, ciddés. The opt. eideinv is not in the N. T. It is not only in 
Rev. (19:3) that forms like eipyway appear; they are in the rest of 
the New Testament (John 17:7, rerypyxay) and in the papyri. Avot, 
originally avrz, by analogy of aorist is av. Kexomiaxes Rey. 2:3 is 
like the aorist afjxes (Rev. 3:4) and such forms occur in the papyri 
among the ignorant scribes (Moulton). “Adéwvra: (Luke 5:20) isa 
Doric form for ddetvta, though similar forms occur in Ionic and 
Arcadian. The past perfect like the imperfect, is confined to the 
indicative, and like it also usually has an augment besides the 
secondary personal endings. However, we have only xev forms in 
the active. The Sanskrit had no future perfect nor has the modern 
Greek. In the ancient Greek are only two such active forms, éor7Ew 
and re6vyfw. The rest are in the middle voice. Inthe New Testament 
we have only eidjow and that is from the Septuagint (Heb. 8:11). 
In Luke 19:40 some manuscripts read xexpagovow. In Heb. 2:13 
we have the periphrastic form écopa: erodes. Such forms occur 


40 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


for the present perfect and the past perfect also. This analytic use 
of the verb forms is more common in all the tenses in the New 
Testament idiom (like xowy) and Hebrew too), especially in Luke’s 
writings, and finally in the modern Greek wholly destroys the per- 
fect verb forms. 

(e) Reduplication. This peculiarity is not confined to the per- 
fect tense, though it is characteristic of the tense system and holds 
through all the modes and voices, whereas xa does not belong to 
all the verbs of the active and occurs no where else. Reduplication 
is found with the aorist, the present, the perfect asin Sanskrit. How- 
ever, in the modern Greek reduplication has vanished save in the 
perfect passive participle. As has already been said its origin is 
found in the iterative presents where the verb idea was repeated by 
the repetition of the initial consonant or the modification of the 
initial vowel (if the verb begins with a vowel). The idea of the 
perfect tense grows out of the idea of repetition. The New Testa- 
ment follows ancient usage in the formation of the reduplicated 
stem as yéyparra (Acts 15:15), éyvwxay (John 17:7), peurnobe (1 Cor. 
11:2), etAnder (Rey. 5:7), 7Amixare (John 5:45), dxjxoa (1 John 1:1), 
éwpaxas (John 8:57), édpaxa (1 Co. 9:1). "Axyjxoa is an example of 
Attic reduplication. 

(f{) Augment. The Sanskrit augment isa. It has been sug- 
gested that this is the instrumental case of a demonstrative pro- 
noun and means ‘‘there.’’? It was a sign of past time and was used 
only with the past tenses of the indicative (aorist, imperfect, past 
perfect), but it was not always so used especially in the earlier 
language (Whitney). Augment, in fact, is found only in Sanskrit, 
Zend, Armenian, and Greek (Giles). In Greek it is found only 
in the past tenses of the indicative, but Homer is very irregular in 
his use of augment, half of his past tenses not having it (Monro, 
Homeric Grammar, p. 44). The iterative verbs in Homer do not 
take the augment at all. It would seem then that the augment as 
the sign of past time was at first only used when it was necessary 
to make plain that the form was a past tense. In Homer we find 
both the syllabic augment (e) and the temporal augment, the 
lengthening of the initial vowel, though the syllabic augment is 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 41 


sometimes used with a vowel also. Augment is preserved in the 
modern Greek. In the New Testament it is not found with some 
words like zpoopwpny (Acts 2:25), apeOyoav (Rom. 4:7), oikodopy6y 
(John 2:20), drdécaro (Rom. 11.1). Meéddro, divapor, Bovropat, as in 
ancient Greek, sometimes have the temporal augment in addition 
to (not instead of as Winer) the syllabic as 78vv46yv (Mark 9:28). 
With compound words the usage varies. The augment may be 
after the preposition as zapwxnoev (Heb. 11:9) or before as éxpopyrev 
gav (Matt. 11:13). Some words have double augment as dzexate- 
ordby (Matt. 12:13) or even treble augment as qvedxPnoav (Matt. 
9:30). "EpydZopa has ppydouro (Matt. 25:16) regularly. The past 
perfect does not always use the augment as reOeyeAlwro (Matt. 7:25), 
yet see €BeBAyto (Luke 16:20). 

4. The modes. 

(a) The indicative. There isno mode suffix for the indicative. 
It is, of course, the normal mode for all the Indo-germanic lan- 
guages, and is always used by them unless there is special reason 
for using one of the other modes. It is the only mode which uses 
all the tenses in Sanskrit and Greek. In the Sanskrit the future 
occurs only in the indicative, and the perfect appears only in the 
indicative and the participle save a few examples in the early San- 
skrit (the Veda) of the other modes. The imperfect and the past 
perfect, of course, belong to the indicative only. Hence in Sanskrit 
it is only the aorist and the present that use modes other than the 
indicative. This is interesting as showing the gradual growth of 
the modes. In modern English we have nearly come round again 
to the position of the Sanskrit in our almost exclusive use of the 
indicative. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative are varia- 
tions from the indicative and the old injunctive mode. 

(b) The subjunctive. In the early Sanskrit the subjunctive is 
very common with the aorist and the present and has a special 
mode signa. But the later Sanskrit nearly loses this mode as we 
have in English nearly ceased to use it. The first person survives 
as a practical imperative. In Greek the earliest form of the sub- 
junctive with non-thematic stems is not different from the indica- 
tive with thematic stems and uses °/e, not ®/n, just like the indica- 


42 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


tive thematic stems. So vowev is subjunctive in Homer, while tev 
is indicative. In the early Ionic the non-thematic stems do in 
some cases use °/n, but not always. It would seem therefore that 
the subjunctive mode sign was first the variable vowel °/e already 
in use. This sign was gradually lengthened into */y, Even in the 
fifth century B. C. the Ionic has aorist subjunctives like zoujoe. 
Hence, ‘‘the distinction between indicative and subjunctive cannot 
always be easily drawn’’ (Giles). It is also probable that the 
Attic futures ona, riova, and the New Testament dayoua (Jas. 
5:3) were originally aorist subjunctives. The mode suffix was 
first added to the stem as in the yu forms (60-7=é6) and in the 
aorist passive forms (Av-6éo=Av00). In Mark 8:37 dot is subjunc- 
tive (as in papyri), é7=o7 as often. But with thematic stems the 
variable vowel °/e was merely changed to “/7 and the o aorist makes 
the subjunctive %/on, In dvvopa, divyra we either have irregular 
accent and contraction (so ierjTa, an=n instead of a) or the mode 
sign “/y displaces a of the stem. So the optative dvvaro has irregu- 
lar accent (compare ioratro). Homer frequently uses px with the 
subjunctive of verbs, €éAom, t8ou. The subjunctive used only 
primary personal endings in both Sanskrit and Greek. In Greek 
the subjunctive has increased in the frequency with which it is 
used, and in the modern Greek has displaced both the optative and 
the infinitive (save with auxiliary yerbs). The Greek used a per- 
fect subjunctive also, though it was never very common in the 
nature of the case. In the New Testament besides «8 (1 Cor. 
2:12) we only have examples of the periphrastic perfect subjunctive 
like 9 memrounxes (Jas. 5:15), 9 KexAnwevos (Luke 14:8). The later 
Byzantine Greek, like the Latin, developed a future subjunctive 
which is not, however, preserved in the modern Greek where the 
ancient future forms are lost. Occasionally manuscripts of the 
New Testament give such forms in some yerbs as kepdnOyowvra (1 
Pet. 3:1), and in Luke 13:28 Westcott and Hort print dyno in 
the text and dpeo$e in the margin. This may, however, be a late 
first aorist form. Cf. mg. dpéyoGe (Lu. 13:26) with text dpgeo6e. 
(c) The optative. The Greek is the only language that preserved 
both subjunctive and optative in its flourishing period. In the 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 43 


Sanskrit the optatiye displaced the subjunctive save ina few special 
uses, while in the Latin the subjunctive was extended in its scope 
to partial future time as well as present, like the indicative, and 
the optative was not used. Asa matter of fact both subj. and 
imperative are future in idea. The Gothic has only one such mode 
whether subjunctive or optative is not clear. In Homer the sub- 
junctive and optative struggle together, the optative gains a firm 
place, especially in the literary style, and then loses it gradually 
till in the modern Greek it does not exist. In the New Testament it 
occurs only sixty-seven times, Luke using it twenty-eight and Paul 
thirty-two times, John, Matthew and James do not have it at all, 
and Mark, Hebrews and Jude only once each, Peter using it four 
times. It seems never to have been common in the vernacular and is 
correspondingly scarce in the papyri. The Sanskrit had two mode 
signs for the optative either ya or 7. So the Greek has two mode 
signs for the optative either. orm. The latter is used with non- 
thematic tense stems like $0-%-v, the former with thematic stems 
like Adr-o-t-pu, AV-ca-t-wu. ~The subjunctive and the optatiye mode 
suffixes are an addition to the tense stem and hence seem to show 
that these modes grew after the origin of tenses. The personal 
endings of the optatiye are chiefly secondary, though pz is primary. 
The mode doubtless was meant to be secondary and the subjunc- 
tiye primary, but in actual usage this is not always true. In the 
Sanskrit the optative is used in all sorts of ways as the subjunc- 
tive is in Latin save that it has no future, but its use to express a 
wish is really future and jx in the Greek suggests connection with 
primary ideas as well as secondary. The subjunctive in Latin, 
and often also in Greek, is used after secondary tenses. The Greek, 
moreover, developed a future optative which was used only in in- 
direct discourse after secondary tenses. This tense does not appear 
in the New Testament. The aorist and present optative are the 
tenses commonly used. The ancient Greek had a perfect optative, 
but in the New Testament we have no perfect. Indeed in all late 
Greek the perfect subj., opt., and imperative are very rare. Cf. 
J. E. Harry in The Classical Review for 1905-1906. The Attic 
ew. (ete) instead of a in the first aorist is found in the Textus Re- 


44 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ceptus as rouoeavy (Luke 6:11), but in W H and Nestle zoujoacer, 
But in Acts 17:27 the critical text has wpAadjoeur. 

(d) The imperative. The imperative is in a way a makeshift and 
seems a development from the indicative and injunctive. Some 
of the forms are just like the indicative as Aéyere and this only the 
context can decide. Cf. Jo. 5:39 and 14:1. The imperative, like 
the indicative, has no mode suffix. In fact the future indicative 
in Greek, as in Hebrew and English, is often used where the im- 
perative could haye been employed as od doveioas (Matt. 5:21). 
And for the first person both in Sanskrit and Greek the subjunc- 
tive is used for the hortatory idea. There is no first person im- 
perative form, though in English we say ‘‘Charge we the foe.”’ 
Moreover, in Latin the third person can be used for exhortations 
also, but in Sanskrit and Greek the aorist subjunctive was early 
used with ma, »y in prohibitions, probably before there was an 
aorist imperative. In Sanskrit the imperative is little used outside 
of the present tense. With this late mode the present comes be- 
fore the aorist in time and the aorist imperative is nearly confined 
to positive commands. However in the New Testament we have 
for the third person pi) xataBarw (Mk. 13:15) and similar aorist 
negative imperatives. Other imperative forms use merely the stem 
like the original vocative (Giles) as torn. Other imperatives again 
use the variable vowel like Aéye, AaBé, AGre, probably interjectional 
forms if € is part of the root (Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 171). Brug- 
mann considers that the accent of AaBé, ciwé, EXO, eipé, ide, is that 
of all imperatives originally when at the beginning of a sentence. 
But in the N. T. we have ide, AdBe. Some imperative forms are 
possible substantives as Bawtiuvov, Bartwo (Acts 22:16). See use 
of oroxeiv (Phil. 3:16) and the common yxatpev (James 1:1) like 
papyri. Again other imperative forms use personal endings like 
otn-h, with which compare the Sanskrit dhi, or like rw (Sanskrit 
tu, originally tod the ablative of the demonstratiye pronoun). The 
plural in vrov is like the Sanskrit ntw with v added. But the Doric 
makes the plural vrw. But this Attic form is displaced in the later 
xown (New Testament and papyri) by tw-cav (compare cay in plural 
of secondary tense). Thus also cfwv became ofwoay, It remains 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 45 


to speak of O¢s, &, 86s, oxés which seem kin to the unaugmented 
aorist indicative (injunctive like Av@yre). In the modern Greek 
the first and third persons are expressed by ds (des) and the 
subjunctive much like the English ‘‘let’? and the infini- 
tive. In the New Testament we already see aes éxBadrw (Luke 
6:42). In the use of dayo (Mark 11:14) the optative clearly ap- 
proaches the imperative. There is, of course, no future impera- 
tive, for all imperatives are future in idea. The perfect is some- 
times used in Greek as rediuwoo (Mark 4:39) as in the earlier San- 
skrit. But it is not used in the modern Greek. In Lu. 12:35 we 
find écrwoayv repueLwoperva. Forms like avaBa (Rey. 4:1) merely use 
the stem. “Hrw (éorw) appears in the New Testament and the 
papyri (possibly Doric) as in 1 Cor. 16:22. Sometimes the imper- 
ative form is used with either number and is practically interjec- 
tional as-aye (Jas. 4:13) as in the older Greek. Compare éyérw in 
Greek and agito in Latin. The periphrastic imperative occurs also 
as in to etvodv (Matt. 5:25). Cf. yiveoGe Erepogvyotvres (2 Cor. 
6:14). Note two persons in Mk. 14:42. 

5. The voices. 

(a) The active. It is probable, though by no means certain, 
that the active is the original voice. The personal endings of 
the active are evidently kin to the pronouns. Compare pe and 
pev (ues) with the oblique forms of éys, oc and re with ov, te and ve 
(vor) with the demonstrative tés (6s). In a wonderful way these 
pronominal suffixes express person, number, and voice. ‘The sec- 
ondary endings differ from the primary in being shorter and in 
haying a few special forms like cav and in the fact that v re- 
places » (uw). There is in Greek a certain tendency towards abbre- 
viation of these suffixes. So pe continually drops off, o in full 
form appears only in éo-o¢ and 7 only in éo-r¢. We have the same 
situation in the English verbal suffixes, retaining them only in the 
second and third person singular. 

(b) The middle. The middle is the only other voice that ap- 
pears in the Sanskrit where every active ending has a correspond- 
ing middle. However, not all verbs have both voices, some having 
only the active, some only the middle, and some tenses using only 


46 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


one yoice. In Homer the middle is more common (Monro, Homeric 
Grammar, p. 7) than in any other period of the Greek language. 
In the modern Greek it is well nigh displaced by the passive, and 
the distinctively passive forms (aorist) are used, though the ver- 
nacular uses aorist middle imperative Avoov rather than AvOyr.. In 
the New Testament the middle is disappearing before the passive. 
In Latin the passive has wholly supplanted the middle though 
some verbs retain a middle sense. It is supposed by some (Don- 
aldson, New Cratylus, ) that the middle endings are formed by doub- 
ling the suffix for the active. So then pa is from pay, the second 
» having dropped out. This is in entire accord with the idea of the 
middle voice, though it is wholly conjectural. Still it is just as 
possible (Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 152) that the active r/@yu. may 
be a weakening of pac to pu in riHenwar with a corresponding length- 
ening of « to y (cf. r/@euev in plural). Some middle forms occur, 
however, in the later Greek that are not common in the older Greek 
like jynv (Matt. 25:35). In the modern Greek eiyé is always mid- 
dle save in the form eve (efvar), etc., which takes the place of éoré 
(évr’). The contraction in the second person singular of the in- 
dicative of eva into «is rare in the later Greek. It is usually . 
So even with ovy (Matt. 27:4), though uncontracted forms like 
édwaca (Luke 16:25) occur. So also ddyeou, wieoar (Luke 17:8). 
But BovAe is found in Luke 22:42. 

(c) The passive. In the Sanskrit, as in the Coptic, there is no 
passive voice. However the Sanskrit shows the beginning of a 
passive formation. In the present tense verbs of the ya class form 
a virtual passive by accenting it as ya’. Such verbs use the middle 
endings and are conjugated in the same way except the accent. 
But in the Greek more progress has been made. ‘Two tenses in the 
Greek have distinctive passive conjugation, the aorist and the 
future. But here again the aorist passive uses the active endings 
and the future passive the middle endings. The Greek passive 
then has no endings of its own. In most tenses it merely borrows 
the entire middle inflection, while in the two tenses above it draws 
on the active and middle both. The so-called second aorist pas- 
sive like é-oraA-y-v is really the second aorist active (root aorist) 


THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 47 


like &By-v, €-fy-v. And the special suffix 6 (6y) which the passive 
uses for the first aorist stem is sometimes used as an active form 
(Giles, Comparative Philology, p. 411). The future passive is 
merely the addition of o°/e to 67. But even here some future mid- 
dle forms like dducyoouen are used in a passive sense just as in the 
other middle forms. Clearly then the passiye is later in origin 
than both active and middle and is built out of both of them 
though it never did have a complete set of distinctive endings. In 
the Latin the passive early displaced the middle, but in the Greek 
the process was much more slow. In the New Testament the pas- 
sive has greatly increased in use. New passive forms appear like 
éyevnOnv (Matt. 6:10) not common in the earlier Greek. So édvyv 
in Luke 8:6, qyyéeAnv (Luke 8:20), deraynv (Gal. 3:19). The future 
passive is also common as kouznOyodpeba (1 Cor. 15:51), and the 
second future passive as dAAaynoopueba (ibid). For all three voices 
of ywwoxw see 1 Cor. 13:12. 


CHAPTER VIII. 
PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IMPORTANT VERBS. 


The perfectly regular yerbs like Avw, grew, Pwrifw, etc., call for 
no comment. The rare verbs are not given with fulness. All that 
is here attempted is a summary of the most important verbs in the 
New Testament that haye anything specially noteworthy about any 
of the tenses. It will be a handy list for the student. Only the 
forms that occur in the N. T. are given. Few things are more 
essential in Greek than a ready knowledge of the verb. 


"AyyéAAw (comp. dv-, dm-, di-, e&-, éa-, mpo-er-, KaT-, mpo-Kat-, map-), 
» > A »” / / 
nyyAXov, ayyerdO, nyyeAa, -yyyeApa, -n}yeAnv. 

“Ayw (comp. av-, é-av-, d-, ovv-ar-, d-, eio-, wap-euo-, ef-, éx-, Kart-, 
PeT-, Tap-, Tepl-, Tpo-, mMpoo-, Tvv-, ért-cvv-, br-), Hyov, aw, 
nyayov and 7n&a, 7XOnv, 4xOjoopat, 

Aivew (Comp. é2-, map-), -yvovv, -awéow, -yveoa. 

Aipew (comp. av-, ad-, di-, e&-, xab-, wepi-, mpo-), -A® and aipyoopat, 
-cAov and eidAa, npeOnv. 

Aipw (comp. dz-, e&-, ér-, pet-, ovv-, trep-), ap, pa, Tpxa, Appat, 
npOnv, apOjoopar. Imper. dpov and inf. dpa. 

*Axovw (comp. o-, elo-, em-, map-, mpo-, tm-), AKovov, dxovow and 
akovoopat, nKovoa, axnKoa, HKovaGOny. 

"AdAdoow (Comp. am-, bi-, Kat-, dzro-Kat-, pet-, ovv-), dd\drAakw, HAA\aEsa, 
-yAaypat, -nAdynv, dAAayyoopat. 

“‘Apaptavw (mpo-), dpaptyocw, jpaprov and yuapryca, WudpryKa. 

*Ava-Baivw (only in comp., dva-, mpoc-ava-, ovv-ava-, dao-, dua-, é-, 
ép-, KUTU-, PETa-, Tapa-, mpo-, gvp-), -€Bawov, -Byoconar, -€Byv, 
-BéBnxa. Short forms dvaBa, avaBare in imper. 

*Av-adioxw (only in comp., dv-, mpoo-av-, xat-av-). Other forms from 
dvarow, dvakoow, WvddAwoa and dvdAwou, avnrAdOnv. 


PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IMPORTANT VERBS. 49 


*Av-otyw (only in comp., dv-, di-av-), dvoiEw, dvéwta, jvoEa, and 
qvewsa, avewya, avewypevos and yvewypevos, Avolynv, avovyycopat, 
avewdxOnv, nvolxOnv, and AvewxOnv, avorxOyoopa. 

*Amavtaw (only in comp., da-, avy), -avTyiocw, -nvTyACG. 

*Amoxteivw (Only in comp.), aroxrev@, amreteva, arextavOnv. Pres. 
inf. also dzoxrévver Oat. 

“AréAXype and droAdtw (only in comp., éx-, ovv-a7-), drodkeow and 
GToA®, arwAeoa, aroAwAds; Midd. aroAAvpat, drwAAVpyy, arroA- 
odpar, arwAdounv. 

"Artw (dv-, xaO-, wept-), YrTopny, Ya, HYapnv, 7POnv. 

*Az-whew (only comp., dm-, e-), -Gca, -wodyny. 

*Apeckw, npeokov, dpeow, npera. 

*Apxew (€7-), ipkeoa, apxerOyoopa. 

"Apveouar (dz-), dpvncopat, -ypvnodunv, npvyyar, -apvnOycopas. 

“Apralw (d-, cvv-), dp7acw, iptaca, Hpwaynv, ypracOnv, aprayncopas, 

"Apxo (év-, mpo-ev-, po-in-), Hpxov, dplowat, npEduny. 

Agave (cvv-, trep-), nvgavov, aigjow, yvénoa, niéyOnv. 

"Ad-uxvéouar (only comp., ap-, di-, ép-), aducduny. 

Baivw, see dvaBaivw, 

BdddAw (adudi-, dva-, dvtt-, dzo-, dia-, ék-, €-, wap-eu-, é7t-, KaTa-, peTa-, 
TWapa-, TEpl-, Tpo-, Tuu-, wrep-, tro-), BarG, €Budrov and once 
Ahn, born, (be, <Croeee sous Sere 
EBAnOnv, BAnOjocopas. 

Barrifw, éBdrrilov, €Bartilounv, Barticw, éBdrriwa, Goduapy)s Be Bar- 
tispat, €BarticOnv, BarticOyocopa. 

Bidw, éBiwoa. 

BAarrw, Brdpw, €Braipa. 

BAérw (ava-, dao-, Su-, éu-, émi-, mepi-, mpo-), €BArerov, Brdla, 
éBreva. 

BovrAopor, €Bovdounv, €BovdnOyv. Note Bove (Lu. 22:42). 

Tapéw, eydpouv, éynua and éyduyoa, yeyaunxa, éyapyOnv. Tapicxw only 
in present. 

TeaAdw (xata-), -eyeAwy, yeAdou. 

Téivopar (dro-, Sua-, émt-, mapa-, ovp-rapa-, mpo-), yevyroua, éyevduny, 
and éyevnOnv, yeyova, eyeydvev, yeyevnuar. Never ylyvoya as 


in Attic. 
4 


50 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


Twookw (dva-, du-, émi-, Kata-, mpo-), éyivwoKxov, yvwoopa, eyvov, 
éyvoxa, éyvoxey, eyvwrpat, eyvacOnv, yrwoOnoona. Subj. ye 
and yvo?, imper. yw, inf. yv@var, part. yvovs. Never yy- 
VOoKW, 

Tpdpw (dro-, éy-, ém-, xara-, mpo-), éypaov, ypdyw, éypaya, yeypada, 
7€ypappat, -eyeypdupny, eypadyy. 

Acixvupe and dexviw (dva-, dzro-, év-, €mt-, v7o-), deiEw, édeéa, edecx- 
Onv. 

Adopat (rpoo-), ededpnv, edenOyv. In Lu. 8:38 W H read édciro, 
Impersonal dé and ée. 

Agpw, apa, dapyoopar. 

Aéyopat (ava-, dzro-, dua-, eio-, éx-, am-ex-, év-, et-, wapa-, tpoo-, t7o-), 
Cdexounv, Ceaunv, Sedeypar, -€d€xOnv. 

Aéw (kata-, repi-, ovv-, bro-), Syow, ednoa, -cdnodunv, Sédexa, Sena, 
-ededeunv, edeOnv. 

Auxovéw (only thus), diupxdvovv, Suaxornjow, Sunxdvyca, SunxovyOnv. 

Avdaokw, edidackov, diddEw, edi(daka, 6104 Onv. 

Avsope and occasionally éd0w (dva-, dmo-, dvt-amo-, dia-, ék- 


> 
) €7rl ; 


peta-, Tapa-, mpo-), ed(dovv, docw, édwxa and sometimes édwoa, 


) 


déduxa, deddxew and eeddxev, Sedona, €d00nv, SoOnovopa. 2 
aorist ind. plural édexapev, subj. 86, d07, and dey, opt. dey 
in Eph. 1:17 (WH text) instead of dofj. Imperf. ind. 
midd. occasionally édéero and 2 aor. ind. midd. sometimes 
edero. 

Aupjaw, duyow, edivnoa. In Jo. 7:37 dupa. 

Awxw (é-, xata-), duo, ediwka, dediwypar, diwxPynoopar, 

Aoxéw (ed-, ovv-ev-), eddxovv, éd0éa, eddokynoa, nvdoKnoa. 

Aivvapar, edvvapnv and ndvvaynv, Suvycopar, HdvvyOyv and pdvvapyy. 
Both divacae and dwvy. 

Avw and divw (éx-, da-ex-, in midd., &, ém-ev-, wap-ao-, émi-), ew 
and édvoa (-edvodpnv), -edvnv. 

"Edw (mpoo-), ciwv, édow, elaca, 

"Eyyilo (xpoo-), ityyhov, eyyiow, ryywa, ipyyexa. 

"Eyeipw (dt-, &-, ér-, owv-), eyepd, ipyeipa, eyjyepuat, HyepOnv, eyepOy- 
copa. 

Eldov, see bpaw, 


PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IMPORTANT VERBS. 51 


Eid is obsolete in present, but perfect is common. Oida (in both 
numbers, tcacw once in Acts 26:4 and tore), subj. ido, opt. 
absent, imper. tore (Jas. 1:19), inf. eidevar, part. eidus. 

"Ew is obsolete, but elw6a and eiaGev occur. 

Kixw (t7o-), «ta, 

"Eoxa is from obsolete present etx, 

Kipé (am-, &v-, map-, ovp-map-, ovv-), jv and juny, écopa, “Eorw and 
nT. 

Ei (only comp., am-, eio-, &€-, ér-, owv-), -yev. Present always in 
future sense. 

"Ezw obsolete present. Etzoy (dyt-, da-, mpo-) and etra, épd, eipyxa, 
cipyKev, elpynuar, éppeOnv and éppyOnv (Attic). Both eipijxaow 
and elpykay, <irov and <izé, citov and eas, e’res and eras, 
but only cizarw, elrare, cirdtwoar. 

*Ex-teivw (only comp., €ék-, é-ex-, trep-ex-), -€rewov, -TEVva, 
~€TELVO., 

*Ex-tpérw (only comp., éx-, év-, émt-), -eTperounv, -€rpeja, -etpdrny, 
E , 
iT pamnoopa, 

*Ex-xéw and ék-xvv(v) (only comp., ék-, émt-, ovy-, trep-«-), -€Xxvvvor, 
-xXeO, -€xea, -Keyupat, -exvOnv, xvOjooua. Uncontracted forms 
EK XEETE and é&€xeev. 

*Edavvw (dar-, cvv-), jAavvopnv, -yAaca, €AxjdaKa, 

"EXeyxo (e€-, dia-kat-), -nAreyxouny, ehéyEw, nAreyEa (-dpnv). 

*EArilw (ar-, mpo-), nAmifov, éAmid, HAmioa, HATA. 

*Ey-réAXopan (Only comp. and midd.), -reAovpau, -ererAapny, -Térad~ 
pa. 

"Epyalopas (Kat-, mept-, mpoo-), «ipya¢ouny (some MSS) and mpya- 
Copny (So WH), jpyacapny, etpyarpar (passive). 

“Epxopar (av-, ém-av-, da-, bi-, cio-, ér-eo-, map-eo-, ovv-eo-, é&-, di-e€-, 
€m-, KQT-, Tap-, avT-7ap-, TeEpl-, Tpo-, Tpoc-, Tvv-), NpXOMNY, 
eAevoopar, NAPov and 7AGa, eAjAvOa. 

*Epwtaw (d:-, éx-), Apotwv and ypwtovy, épwTrnow, NpwTnoa. 

‘EoOiw and éo6w (kat-, cvv-), jnobiov, payouat, payor. 

Etayyedilw (apo-), ernyyAlouny, ebnyyeAuwa (-cdunv), cdnyyeAuopac, 
einyyeXloOnv. 

Evdoxew. See doxéw, 


52 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


Eixaipéw, edxaipovy (also yix-), evxalpyoa. 

Eidoyéw goes regularly with es (not 7d) in most MSS. 

Eiptoxw (dv-), etpurxov and nip-, eipyow, edpov (etpapyer, etc.), and 
eipynoa (some MSS.), etpyxa, cipeOqv, ebpeOjoopac. 

Evxopat (mpoo-), nbxopyy, eddpny. 

"Exw (dv-, mpoo-av-, dvt-, dm-, €v-, €m-, KaT-, peT-, Tap-, TEpl-, TpO-, 
mpoo-, ovv-, vrep-, bro-), elxov (exaper, etc.), Ew, eaxor, 
éxxyka. Etxyooay as well as exav and etyov. 

Zdw (dva-, ov-), eov, Snow (-yoopar), noo. Ind. fjs, inf. gyv. 

Zovvyu and lovviw (dva-, du-, wept-, irro-), CLavivov, Licw, eLwoduny, 
-lwopar. 

"Hxw (dv-), AKov, nfo, HSa, ja (some MSS. in Mk. 8:3). Some MSS. 
nxaow instead of jKovew. 

@artw (cvv-), apa, eradny. 

@arvpalw (ex-), earvpalov, Oarpacw, eOavpaca, eOavpdoOyv, Oavpac6r)- 
coma, 

@drw (not é6€drAw), 7HeAov, GARTH, 7H€AnTa. 

OQryyavo, €Oryov. 

@dCBw (do-, c-), €6ABov, TéOAypac. 

@vijcxw (dio-, cvv-a7o-), -Gavodpuar, -eavov, tevynxa. Both reOvavat 
and reOvyxevar, but only rebvyxas. 

‘Thdoxopat, tAaoOyre (Lu. 18:13). 

“Iotn, iordvw, totaw, (av-, em-av-, é&-av-, ad-, &-, év-, ef-, én- 
(erictapar), ép-, xat-ep-, ovv-ep-, Kab-, avTi-Ka8-, dzo-Kaé-, 
peO-, map-, TEpl-, Tpo-, Tvv-), oTHTW (-yjooMa), EoTyv, EoTyCG, 
éoryxa (intr.) and éoraxa (tr.), e(ornxew, eordOynv, oraby- 
cowa. Both éords and éoryxds, but always éordva, 

Kabaipw (du-, éx-), -exabapa, Kexabappac. 

Ka6apifw (du-), xaBapid, exabapica, Kexabdpurpat, exabapicOyv, éxabe- 
pioOy (Matt. 8:3). 

KdOnpa (ovy-), kabelopar (rapa-), kabilw (ava-, émi-, mapa-, mept-, Tvy-); 
exabnunv, kabyoopa. Kadov (xdOnoo); éxabeounv, callow (ico- 
por), exabioa, exabioduny, Kexabcxa. 

Kaiw (ék-, xata-), Kavow, -éxavoa, Kéxavpat, -exanv, -exavOny, -Kar)- 
copa, KavOyooua. In 1 Cor. 13:3 some MSS. have xav6y- 


owpat, 


PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IMPORTANT VERBS. 53 


Karew (avti-, év-, eio- (-par), émt-, peta-, mapa-, ovv-Tapa-, mpo-, Tpoc-, 
avy-), ekadovy, kadéeow, éxdAeva, KeKAnKa, KeKAnpaL, eKANOnV, KAy- 
Onoopac. 

Kapvo, ékapov, kékunka, 

Kepavvype (ovy-) and kepavviw, éxépaca, Kexepacpan. 

Kepdaivw, Kxepdnow, éxépdnoa (kepdavw some MSS. in 1 Cor. 9:21), 
KeponOnoopat. 

KAalw, &Aauov, kdavow, exAavoa.. 

KAdw (éx-, kata-), aoa, exracOnv. 

KAelw (azo-, éx-, kata-, ovy-), Krelow, exAerva, KEKAELTpaL, exeloOnv. 

KXivw (ava-, ék-, kata-, mpoo-), KAWa, ekAWa, KEKAUKa, EKALOV. 

Kopilw (éx-, ovy-), Kouicopar and Kopuotpar, exopioapny. 

Kéorrw (dva-, ék-, év-, Kata-, mpo-, mpoo-), ékomTov, KoWopa, -€Kxowa, 
exowapnv. 

Kpalw (ava-), expaLov, Kpagw, expaga and éxékpaga, Kexpaya. Some 
MSS. kexpagopat. 

K pepaprar (€k-), kpepavviw, kpepatw, and kpepaw, e&-expeuero (Lu. 19:48), 
expepaca, expeuacOnv. 

Kptvw (dva-, do-, dvt-amo-, dva-, év-, émt-, KaTa-, ovv-,b70-, Tv-v7T0-), 
expivouny, Kpw®, €kpiva, KEeKpiKa, KeKpikewv, KéKpyat, explOny, 
kpOjoopiar. , 

Kpvatw (aro-, év-, mepi-), Expupa, Kexpyppar, éexpvBnv. 

KvAlw (dva-, adzro-, mpoo-), KvAiow, -exvAuoa, -KeKvALo aL. - 

Aayxavw, EXaxov. * 

AapBavw (dva-, dvti-, ovv-ayti-, dmo-, émt-, KaTa-, peTa-, Tapa-, ovv- 
Tapa-, 7po-, mpoo-, ovv-, ovv-7ept-, bro), éAduBavov, AjpYyopa, 
€\aBov (edaBare 1 Jo. 2:27), eAaBounv. AaBe, not rAaPe. 
EiAnges in Rey. 11:17. 

AavOavw (éx-, ét-), EAaBov, Ehafdpnv, -AeAnopaL. 

Aéyw (avti-, émi-, Kkata-, mapa-, mpo-) to say, only pres. and imperf. 
in N. T. Some MSS. éeyay in Jo. 11:56. Cf. etrov. 

Aéyw to collect (only comp. dia-, é€x-, vA-), -eAeyouny, -eEw, -eAeéa 
(-dunv), -AeAcypar, -eA€xOnv. 

Aeirw (dro-, du-, €k-, émt-, Katu-, év-KaTu-,; mept-, b7ro-), €Aevrov, -deipw, 
€Aurov, -A€eAeppar, - eXeiPOnv. 

MavOdvw (xata-), éuabov, pena yKa. 


54 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 

Maw, only peAee impersonal, "Emu-peAowar and émi-pedeopan, -pwedy: 

copa, -eueAnOnv. Mera-weAopar, -enedAounv, -enednOynv, -pArOn- 

copa, 

MaXw, eueAAov and juedrAov, peARTY. 

Mévw (ava-, dua-, év-, €mt-, KaTa-, Tapa-, Tvv-Tapa-, TEpt-, Tpoo-, Uro-), 
pev@, Eueiva, -mELEeVNKA, MELEVKELY. 

Miyvyu and ployw (ovv-ava-), Guisa, peprypae, 

Mimyyoxw (ava-, ér-ava-, tro-), prvytw, pépvnpor, enrvnoOnv, pyyoOn- 
copa. 

Oixodopew (dv-, éx-, ouv-), wxoddpovv, oiKodouynow, wkodounoa (also 


? 


oikod-), wKoddpnpat, @Kodopjuny, wKodounOyy, oikodounOjcopat. 

‘Opaw (ag-, kaf-, mpo-), édpwy (some MSS. in Jo. 6:2), -wpay 
(-opdpnv), Sowa, apaynv (Lu. 15:28), éwpaxa and édpakxa, 
Ewpaxe, &POnv, dpPOycopar. Eidov (elda, eldayev) is from ob- 
solete stem 16 (Latin video). Subj. (do, imper. ie (not id), 
inf. idetvy, part. dev. 

Tlai{w (év-), -€raov, ratEw, -émata, -eralyOnv, -rarxOynoopar. 

Ilacyw (arpo-, cvp-), érabov, rérova. 

Ilavw is regular save avarancopa. 

TleiOw (dva-), erefov, welow, Ereca, wéroba, ererolbav, mémepas, 
ereiaOnv, mecOnoopa., 

Tlevaw, revaow, éreivaca. Inf. revarv. 

Ilepi-reuvw (only comp. ), -€rewov, -réTpnyar, -ernOnv. 

IIjyvps (xpoo-), éxnéa. 

IliaLw and mélw (izo-), eriaca, wemleopa, exiacOnv. 

IIiparAnpe (eu-) and eu-rysrdrAdw, éxAnoa, éxAjoOnv. 

Iliuarpnye and mysmpaw (éu-), -erpyoa. 

Ilivw (kata-, ovv-), Exwov, miopar, emiov, mémoxa. Both wey (MSS. 
even wiv) and meiv, but only wie. Cf. wiera. 

Ilurpackw, érimpackov, mémpaka, wémrpapar, erpabnv. 

Ilimrw (dva-, dvti-, drro-, éx-, év-, émi-, KaTa-, Tapa-, Tept-, mpoo-, Tvp-), 
éximtov, mecotpa, érecov and éxeca, wértoxa. Cf, rérrwxes 
(Rev. 2:5) and wérrwxay (Rey. 18:3). 

TlAéw (dmo-, dua-, éx-, xata- mapa-, tro-), -€rXeov, -€rAevoa. 

IlAjoow (ék-, é-), -erAnooopunv, -erAngsa, exAnynv (-erAdynv). 


IIvéw (€x-, év-, iro-), Exvevoa, 


Or 
Or 


PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IMPORTANT VERBS. 


Ilviyw (dzo-, ém-, ovp-), emuyov, érvga, -exvlynv. 

IIpacow, mpagw, érpaga, méerpaxa, wempaypa. 

IlvvOdvopor, éxrvvOavopny, érvOopnv. 

‘Pavri~w, épavtuca (some MSS. éppavr-) pepdvticpar (some MSS. 
épp)- 

‘Pew (wapa-), pevow, -eppvyv. 

‘Pixtw (dzo-, émi-) and furréw, épupa (and epp-), éppyspor (and €p-). 

SBavyu and cBeviw, cBevvypar, oBeow, ExBeoa, Bec Oyoopar. 

Sypaivw, eojpavov, éonpava. 

maw (dva-, dzo-, du-, émi-, mepi-), -eorwpny, oTaow, eoTacdpny, 
-eovracOny. 

Srretpw (dua-, émt-), eoretpa, eomappar, eorrapyv. 

SreAAw (azo-, e-azro-, ovv-aro-, du-, émi-, KaTa-, gvv- OF Gv-, bro-), 
-eoTeAAOunV, TTEAD, -eoTELAa (-dunv), -eoTAAKa, -EoTaApat, -eTTAA- 
nv. Cf. dréoradxay in Acts 16:36. 

Sryxw (cf. mod. Gk. or&w) pres. from éoryxa (cf. ypyyopew from 
éypyyopa), imperf. éoryxov in Jo. 8:44 and Rey. 12:4 acc. to 
W H. 

Srypilw (ém-), orypiféo and orypicw in some MSS. (cf. ornp in 
LXX), éorypiéa and éornpica, éorypiypar, éoryplxOnv. 

Srpepw (dva-, dao-, dua-, ék-, émi-, KaTa-, peTu-, Tw- OF ov-, v7o-), 
-oTpew, eotpepa, -eoTpappor, eotpadyy. 

Stpwvviw and orpwvvyps (Kata-, b7o-), é€oTpwvvvoy, EoTpwoa, EoTpoOpat, 


‘ 


> , 
eoTpwOny. 

Su-Levyvyst (only comp.), cvveteréa. 

Suv-reuvw (only comp.), ovvtetpnuevos in some MSS. (Rom. 
9:28). 

Ldalw (kata-), spatw, eogaga, eopaypa, eopdyny. 

Swlw (du-, &-), eowlopny, cHow, Eowoa, TeTwKa, TéowTpor, eowOny, 
owOyoopat. 

Taoow (dva-, avti-, dzo-, dia-, émt-dua-, émi-, mpo-, mpoo-, Suv-, i7o-), 
éraga (-dpnv), TéTaxa, Téraypar, -eTayyv, -eTdxOyv. 

TedXew (dzo-, dia-, ex-, emi-, ovv-), TeAéow, éTéAETA, TETEAEKa, TeTEAETHAL, 
2 , , 
ereAecOnv, TeAcoOHcOpat. 

Tixtw, teopat, erexov, éTexOnv. 


Tpédw (ava-, éx-, év-), EOpepa, -cOpeapnv, TeOpappar, -erpadyy. 


56 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


Tpexw (cic-, Kata-, wepi-, mpo-, mpoo-, avv-, ém-ovv-, tmo-), Erpexov, 
€dpapov. 

Tvyxavw (€v-, tmep-ev-, €mt-, mapa-, ovv-), érvxov, Térvxa and rérevya 
(or even tervxnxa in MSS. in Heb.8:6). 

Tvzrw has only present stem in N. T. See zardoow and wAyyvyp. 

Paivw (dva-), Pavotpa, -epava, epavnv, pavycopat. 

Depw (dva-, dzo-, du-, eio-, ék-, émt-, KaTa-, wapa-, Tepl-, ™po-, TpoT-, 
aw-, tro-), Epepov (-ouynv), oicw, -yveyxov and jveyxa, AvExOnv. 

Devyw (dro-, dua-, €x-, xata-), pevsouat, -repevya, Epvyov. 

Dhdvw (rpo-), épOaca, épOaxa. 

Doeipw (dua-, xata-), Plepd, EfOeapa, -epOappar, ePOdpyv, pOapyjoopat. 

DoBeopar (€x-), EpoBovynv, epoByOnv, poBynOyoopar. 

Ppdcow, eppasa, eppaynv, ppaynropar. 

Piw (€x-, gup-), Epryy. 

Xaipw (ovv-), €xatpov, €xapyv, xapyoopac (some MSS. xap@ in Rey. 
ag e205 . 

Xapilopar, xapioopa, exapurduny, anes, exapiaOnv, XaproOyoopat. 

Xpdopar (xata-), €xpwunv, éxpnoapny, Kéexpnpar. 

Xpy (impersonal) only once, Jas. 3:10. 

Vixw, Yvynoopa. 

"Ovéopar, dvygapyv, not éxprdpyy. 


CHAPTER IX. 
THE FORMATION OF WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 


1. The history of Greek words. The usage of the New Testament 
is in harmony with the history of the language. Each word has 
its own history as truly as each individual man. Take oxdvdaXov, 
for instance. It occurs first in the Septuagint, a noose, a snare, 
as in Ps. 69:23. It was the trapstick, the trap, then any impedi- 
ment, then a stumbling block, then any person who is an occasion 
of stumbling as in Joshua 23:13. So Peter became a stumbling 
block to Jesus (cxavdadov ef euod, Matt. 16:23). Christ crucified 
became a cxavdadnfpov, trap-stick. The root oxavé is seen in the 
Sanskrit ska’nda@mi, to dart, to leap, and in the Latin scando, de- 
scendo. ‘This is a very simple illustration and is chosen for that 
reason. One does not fully know a Greek word till he knows its 
history. The resultant meaning of a word in any given instance 
will be determined by the etymology, the development, and the 
immediate context. These three things are to be carefully noted 
before a final conclusion can be safely reached. Roots are either 
primitive or denominative. Wherever possible, find the root of a 
Greek word. This is a fascinating subject that can here be merely 
sketched. See Curtius, Greek Etymology (1886). 

2. The kinship of Greek words with each other. There are smaller 
‘families of Greek words which are all kin to the common stock 
and to each other. Acckvyus is a good illustration in point. The 
root is dx and so appears in 8-y. The Sanskrit dic-d-mi means to 
show, to point out, and dica is jadgment whether of men or gods. 
The root is strengthened in the Greek verb, and deckvyys is to 
show, to point out. Ackxy is the way pointed out, right or justice. 
Aixyv is the adverbial accusative and means ‘‘after the way of”’ or 
like. Act&s is a showing, deyya something pointed out, while 


58 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


dékavos is aman who seeks to go the right way, a righteous man, 
Auadw is to make righteous and then usually to show or declare 
righteous, while dxaiwous is the act of declaring righteous. Acxacopa 
is what has been declared righteous whether deed or law, while 
Sxaoowvyn is the quality of being righteous whether actual right- 
eousness or attributed righteousness. Acaéws is a righteous method 
or manner, while Sixawrys or dixaorys is one who decides right- 
eously. Atxaoryjpiov, finally, is the place where things or persons 
are shown to be righteous. Each of these many words from one 
common root occurs in the New Testament save one (d:xawrys). 
The difference in meaning lies here not so much in the changes 
due to the lapse of time and new connections, for this word has 
shown itself to be very persistent in its root idea. The change in 
idea is here due chiefly to the difference in the suffixes. One 
cannot thus rightly comprehend the significance of New Testament 
words till he understands the import of the Greek suffixes and pre- 
fixes. The ideas of action, agent, result, instrument, quality, 
place, person, etc., are differentiated in substantives (and adjectives 
to some extent) in this manner. Avrpov, for instance, in Matt. 
20:28 is Av-w plus -rpov which means the instrument. The offered 
life of Jesus is the means of loosing us from the penalty of our sins, 
So dzo-Av-tpw-o1s (Rom. 3:24) is the act of loosing us from the pen- 
alty of sin by means of the death of Christ and consequent recon- 
ciliation. We are restored to the favor of God. Here again a great 
theme can be only outlined. See the Greek grammars for the sig- 
nificance of the prefixes and suffixes. 

8. The contrasts in Greek words. Different words are used to ex- 
press varying shades of the same general idea. With déxaos, for 
instance, it is profitable to compare kaXds, dyads, ayvos, Govos, KaBapds, 
where goodness is looked upon not so much as right, but as beau- 
tiful, admirable, consecrated, undefiled, purified. Compare véos 
and xavds, the one young and not yet old, the other recent and not 
ancient. So répas is a wonder or portent, oypeiov a sign or proof, 
dvvapus a power or mighty work. Clear perception of such dis- 
tinctions is essential to correct exegesis of the New Testament. We 
see Jesus himself insisting on the use of dya@és for the idea of abso- 


THE FORMATION OF WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 59 


lute goodness when he said: Ovdets ayabos ei pi eis 6 Oeos (Mark 
10:18). Both dya6ds and dikaos occur together in Luke 23:50. In 
Luke 8:15 xapdia dya6}) kai Kady approaches Socrates’ frequent use of 
these two adjectives together. Compare our ‘‘the beautiful and 
the good.’? See Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament (1890); 
Heine, Synonomik des Neutestamentlichen Griechisch (1898). 

4. Compound words. The Greek is not equal to the German in 
the facility with which it forms compound words, but it is a good 
second. <A few striking examples can here be given and special 
attention called to the subject. No part of the compound word is 
meaningless. “AAAotpi-erioxores (1 Peter 4:15) is a good example, 
for we have oxoros, em, adAotpios, each with its own history, and 
each contributing to the resultant idea of one who takes the super- 
vision of other men’s matters which in no wise concern him. 
Another good illustration is atro-xard-kpitos (Titus 3:11). See also 
mpoowro-Anuatys (Acts 10:34), durAots (1 Tim. 5:17), dp6arpodovrca 
(Eph. 6:6), Aoyouaxia (1 Tim. 6:4) which does not occur in the 
older Greek, povddarpos (Mark 9:47). The New Testament uses 
compound words in harmony with the principles of the ancient 
Greek, though sometimes the meaning is not perfectly clear as in 
the case of éGeXoPpyoxia (Col. 2:23). Paul is fond of piling up 
words together to express his emotion as tepexrepiccod (Eph. 
3:20). 

5. Light from other tongues. A number of roots belong to the 
common Indo-germanic stock. Others are found in one or another 
of the kindred languages. Take devs again. Besides the San- 
skrit dic-d-mi the Latin has dic-o, in-dic-o, judex. The Gothic has 
the root in the form teiho a messenger, the German has zeigen to 
show, the English uses indicate, indict, contradict, judge, ete. 
Take oxérrouar. The Sanskrit root is spac look, spacas a spy. The 
Zend has cpac look at, spy. In Latin we have specio, con-spicio, 
spec-ulum, spec-to. In the Greek root metathesis has taken place 
and omex has become oxer. Hence oxérropa is to spy out, cxory 
is a watching, cxomd is a watchtower, oxomds is a spy and then aim 
or goal, oxwy is owl. In Phil. 3:14 Paul says xara cxordv doo, 
See Curtius, Greek Etymology (1886). 


60 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


6. New Testament developments. There are no ‘‘Biblical’’ suffixes 
or terminations. The new words in the New Testament are formed 
in harmony with the Greek idiom = Svyxowwvds (Rom. 11:17), for 
instance, is after the analogy of owtpodos. “Hpwdiavds (Matt. 22:16) 
and xpurriavés (Acts 11:26) are Latin formations like Romanus, 
Africanus. The proper names in the New Testament are like those 
in current vernacular use at the time often in abbreviated form as 
"Aro\Ads and also "AroAAdnos. “Ayiaopds is similar in formation to 
mepacpos. ‘There is an increasing number of verbs in -dw and -iZw 
like Barrilw, pavri<o. Compound words are always to be noticed 
carefully and each element in the composition given due signifi- 
cance, as, for example, dvtirapjdOev in Luke 10:31. The priest 
went along on the opposite side of the road. A number of words 
once held to be Biblical or peculiar to the Septuagint are now 
known to be common in the vernacular xowy as shown by the 
papyri as, for instance, yoyyvw, apeoBurepos in the official sense. 
On the whole there is little of a special nature in the formation of 
New Testament words, but much can be learned from the use of 
comparative philological principles. The most astonishing thing 
about the New Testament words is not the number of new forma- 
tions, but the scarcity of such words. There are, we now know, 
only about ‘50 new formations among the round 5,000 words of 
the New Testament’’ (Deissmann, Philology of the Greek Bible), just 
one per cent. And this ‘‘fifty’? may become ‘‘ten’’ before we are 
done with the papyri. This volume of Deissmann’s is the best 
single handbook of the new knowledge from the papyri and the 
Septuagint. 


PART III. 


SYNTAX. 








iI BRAR 
OF THe’ 


UNIVERSITY * 







. yt 2 = 64 
i. "tapas ~-3_5 
, Reuse” 2 ; Pe hake tl oe 

a: he PE oc “S ae i) 
















- = uy - * 
ov ad 
= = Cue, £ wie — 
€ 
i. A ~~ aS Pe 
Pe © _ cs 
- “ i d e 
a - 
, a. de 
- —oaP bd : on Sa ced » 
Ln Oi) on qe Se 
‘ A ? 7 a 4 & ay 


oe Uae Os 


oat ie ee are ee eee Pre a 


i a ee 
ae, ee ee Wate’ & ) ny 


foie eer Sh ‘1 Aes 
o 7 a ei :a 

= NN TR Se e 

: eh eee 





f 
’ 
. 
. 
ae 
4 >» 
* 
. 
© ae 
2S 
J 


CHAPTER X. 
THE SENTENCE. 


The Sentence itself calls for some comment. In a larger treatise 
much more space would be needed. But here a few words must 
suffice. 

1. The sentence is the expression of an idea and is complex. 
The subject and predicate are essential to the complete expression 
of a sentence, which may be very brief. Indeed one word may 
have both as dmeye. (Mk. 14:41). Indeed the sentence does not 
absolutely require the expression of either subject or predicate. 
Both may be suggested or implied as in the case of o8xé (Lu. 1:60), 
vai, kvpie (Jo. 11:27). 

2. The subject may be itself the center of a group of words 
(substantives, adjectives, adyerbs, prepositions, ete.). Cf. Rom. 
7:10 % évrorAy 7 eis Cav. 

3. The predicate may also be the center of a group of words as 
toovtouvs fytel To's mpooxvorvtas aitév (Jo. 4:23). Subject and 
predicate are thus the two foci of the sentence. 

4. The predicate is either a verb or a substantive, adjective, 
etc., with a copula (epi, xadrotua, etc.) expressed or implied. 
Thus 6 dypés éorw 6 xdopos (Matt. 138;38): Cf. Jo. 4:11; Rom. 
ys 

5. Apposition is found both with the subject as avyp zpodyrys 
(Lu. 24:19) or the predicate as dv zpodbero 6 Oeds ihacrypiov (Rom. 
8:25). Asarule the verb agrees with the subject in person. The 
first person prevails when two or more are used as éy® kal 6 raryp 
ev éopev (Jo. 10:30). 

6. The subject and the predicate agree in number except that 
construction according to sense often prevails over mere grammat- 
ical number as 6 6xAos éotpwoay (Matt. 21:8). The neuter plural 


64 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


may take a singular (Lu. 4:41) or a plural verb (ibid.). Paul 
sometimes uses the literary plural as in 2 Cor. 10:13. 

7. Substantives and adjectives as a rule agree in gender. Some 
adjectives have no distinctive feminine form as éye Zev aidnov (Jo. 
6:47). Often gender is according to sense as €6v1; éoxoruzpevor (Eph. 
4:17 f.). Words vary in gender also. The whole question of 
grammatical gender is unsatisfactory to us moderns. 

8. Adjectives, participles, and substantives in apposition agree 
usually in case. But anacoluthon is common in all Greek in this 
matter, especially colloquial Greek or impassioned argument. 
Note xaOapiZov in Mk. 7:19; zpeoBuréepos, exrcLapevous, ypapavres 
(Acts 15:22 f.). The book of Revelation is full of such anacolu- 
tha with participles or words in apposition. Sometimes as in 
do 6 ov (Rey. 1:4) it is intentional anacoluthon. 

9. Sentences are either simple or compound. Compound sen- 
tences are either paratactic or hypotactic (co-ordinate or subordi- 
nate). Co-ordinate sentences may have connectives as is usual (xaé, 
dé, etc.) or not (asyndeton as 1 Cor. 13:7). Even subordinate 
sentences may haye asyndeton of the conjunction as O&as elrwpev 
(Lu. 9:54). 

10. Syntax deals with the relations of words with each other, 
of clauses with each other, with sentences, and with paragraphs. 
We take up words first. 


CHAPTER XI. 
SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, ADVERB. 


1. The parts of speech are connected with each other more or 
less. It is simply mechanical to think of anything else. Adverbs 
bulk largely in furnishing various parts of speech in the develop- 
ment of language, such as prepositions, conjunctions, particles, 
ete. The higher organization of speech calls for fine distinctions 
which are made possible by new uses of adverbs. Adverbs them- 
selyes haye various origins as verb, substantive, adjective, pro- 
nouns. As a rule the adverb is the fixed case-form like xdépw 
(freely), which also is used as preposition with genitive. In itself 
it is merely the accusative of xdpis. But cf. duoAoyounévws and 
even vovvexas. 

2. The elements of speech are probably verb, noun, and pro- 
noun. It is not clear which is the earliest, verb or noun. Perhaps 
now one, now the other arose first. In truth there is little real 
distinction between a verb root and anoun. Compare the modern 
English use of the word ‘‘work.’? The pronoun is itself of inde- 
pendent origin and has been remarkably persistent in the Indo- 
germanic languages. Compare ‘‘me,”’ for instance, in the various 
tongues. This shows the personal and social side of speech. Book 
language is an afterthought. 

3. The adjective is merely a variation of the substantive, both 
of which are nouns (évéyata). No separate treatment is given 
to the Sanskrit adjective in Whitney’s Sanskrit Grammar. 
Most of the Sanskrit adjectives have only one or two endings 
though some have all three genders. Some substantives came to 
be employed in a descriptive sense like brother man, ddeAdos dvOpo- 
mos. Out of this descriptive usage the adjective (é7iGerov) grew. 
The ONG is then strictly an evolution from the substantive and 


66 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


is often itself used substantiyely as 16 ayafov (Rom. 12:9). The sub- 
stantive itself continues also to be employed in a descriptive sense. 
Therefore no hard and fast line of distinction can be drawn be- 
tween substantive and adjective. They are inflected alike and 
often are used alike, though for practical purposes a line of cleav- 
age can be noted. Observe év 76 “Iopddvy rotayd (Matt. 3:6). See 
chapter on Declension of Adjectives for further remarks on this 
line. 

4, The adjective is more developed in Homer than in the San- 
skrit and the Greek has its own genius in the use of the adjective. 
It uses the adjective where other languages might not. So devre- 
pator 7APopev (Acts 28:13). A distinction is to be ebseryed between 
mpatos (Rom. 10:19) and zpéarov (Jo. 1:41). Cf. aparos in Jo. 
20:4,8. So also povos (Lu. 24:18) is different from the adverb 
povoy (2 Tim. 4:8). Cf. English ‘‘feel bad’’ and ‘feel badly.” 

5. The adjective is either predicate or attributive. Take daapa- 
Barov (Heb. 7:24) as an example of the predicate adjective and 
aisviov (Jo. 6:47) as an example of the attributive adjective. 

6. The adjective is rarely used in the superlative form in the 
N. T. and even then it is usually elative in the sense of ‘‘very’’ 
as peywota (2 Pet. 1:4). A few examples of the true superlative 
survive as dxpuBeorarnv (Acts 26:5). The comparative is often, as 
in modern Greek, used like the superlative. So pe{wv in 1 Cor. 
13:13. 

7. The adjective is used frequently as an adverb. So zodv, 7d 
mpotov (Jo. 12:16), 7d Aouwdy, etc. This is probably the earliest 
and simplest adverb. ; 

8. Adjectives are frequently used without substantives as avev- 
patriots mvevpatud (1 Cor. 2:13), ry émovon (Acts 16:11). Some-— 
times only the context can decide what is the gender of the adjec- 
tive. So dd rod rovnpod (Matt. 6:13). 

9. Adjectives may be used with the infinitive as txavds Baordoa 
(Matt. 3:11), with iva as dpxerdv iva yéryrae (Matt. 10:25), with the 
associative-instrumental as dpows avOpdry (Matt. 20:1), with the 
accusative as 6po.v vidv avOpwrov (Rey. 14:14), with the ablative as 
petLwv tod matpds (Jo, 8:53), with the dative as 7a dpeora aired (Jo, 


SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, ADVERB. 67 


8:29), evoyos tH Kptoa (Matt. 5:21), with the genitive as aAjpns 
xapitos (Jo. 1:14), ete. 

10. Adverbs are either the neuter accusative of an adjective like 
mov, KdANOov, patuota; the accusative of a substantive like xapu; 
the article with an adjectiye as 76 zpérov, or with a substantive as 
THv apxnv (Jo. 8:25) as an adyerbial phrase; or the ablative case 
of an adjective like kadés or pronoun as ovrws; or some other case 
of noun or pronoun as zavry (instrumental), éxe? (locative), ete. 
Cf. wofas in Lu. 5:19, and ékxeévys in Lu. 19:4 as examples of the 
genitive. Space does not permit a full list of adverbs in the N. T. 
Cf. 70 xa® juepav (Lu. 19:47) and rotvavriov (Gal. 2:7). 

11. For the use of adverbs as prepositions see chapter on Prep- 
ositions. The so-called ‘‘improper’’ prepositions like éw are ad- 
verbs as indeed all prepositions are as zep¢, for instance. 

12, Adverbs may be used with the article and thus as the 
equivalent of substantive (ws tod viv, Matt. 24:21), or adjective 
(év 7 viv kaipo, Rom. 3:26). 

13. Many prepositional phrases have an adverbial sense like 
dad péepovs (2 Cor. 1:14), eis 7d wavredes (Heb. 7:25). 

14. Participles often have an adverbial idea as rpoo@eis cirev 
(Lu. 19:11). | 

15. Adverbs may be compared like dvérepov, péduora and com- 
pounded like trepexrepiccod. 


CHAPTER XII. 


THE ARTICLE. 


1. The indefinite article in Greek. The Sanskrit and Latin had 
no article, as the Greek has no indefinite article. Not even in the 
modern Greek has the indefinite article of the Teutonic and Roman 
tongues developed, though occasionally efs or tis is used with little 
more force than the English a (an). Even in the New Testament 
we see traces of this use of efs as in Matt. 8:19 where efs ypappareds 
is practically equivalent to our ‘‘a.’’ In fact, the English one, 
Scotch ane, French un, German ein is simply the cardinal ‘‘one”’ 
adapted to this very usage. Children often say: ‘‘That was one 
funny man.’’ So likewise ris is used where ‘‘certain’’ is rather 
too emphatic in English as vopuxds tes in Luke 10:25. 

2. The origin of the definite article. The Sanskrit and Latin did 
not develop any article at all, and the Greek never developed the 
indefinite usage to any extent. Moreover, the Greek was slow in 
creating the definite article, though in Homer we do haye the be- 
ginning of the article. The forms 6, 9, 7é are occasionally used in 
Homer with the force of ‘‘the,’’ chiefly with adjectives, proper 
names, or for contrast. It is just in Homer that we see the evolu- 
tion of the article, for this same form 6, 4, ré is very common here 
as a demonstrative and appears also as a relative. Hence 6 is- 
originally a demonstrative that was gradually weakened to the 
article or heightened to the relative. This threefold usage of one 
form is seen in the Ionic, for Herodotus uses the t forms as dem- 
onstrative and relative as well as for the article. And even in the 
Attic 6 is preserved occasionally as demonstrative. So in the poets 
and Plato the demonstrative 6 appears before relative pronouns 
(cf. Justin Martyr). The modern Greek often has 6 émotos as the 
relative like old English ‘the which.’? In the poetical quotation 


THE ARTICLE. 69 


in Acts 17;28 rod yap kai yevos éopev we have the demonstrative rot. 
Such uses as 6 6€ are common, when the demonstrative is in con- 
trast with a noun usually in an oblique case. So 6 6é etrev (Matt. 
14:18). So also in the contrasted expressions of pév, of dé (Acts 
14:4). In Acts 5:41 of pév is used absolutely. We even have 6 as 
a relative in the expression 6 jv (Rey. 1:4,8) in harmony with 
Homeric usage. The Greek relatiye 6s 7, 6 which is common in 
Homer and in the later Greek is demonstrative in origin also 
though Giles does not think so. So in John 5:11 we read Os 8 
dzrexp(On abrois, and in Rom, 14:2 6s pév muoreva. Compare os per, 
ds S€ (Rom. 14:5). The contrasted expressions are found in oblique 
cases as by pev, ov d€ (Luke 23:33). This demonstrative in both 
forms is the same word as the Sanskrit demonstrative sd, sa’, tad, 
where in the masculine and feminine nominative singular the ¢ has 
been softened to s. So in Greek this s becomes often a rough 
breathing, (7)6, (7), 76, and this form then loses the accent. 
We see it in the Latin is-te, is-ta, is-tud, the Gothic sa, so, thata, 
German der, die, das, the Anglo-Saxon se, seo, thaet, and modern 
English this, that. In the German and the English we have also 
the threefold use of the same form as demonstrative, article, rela- 
tive. In English ‘‘the’’ is a weakened form of “‘this.’? But in 
the New Testament as in the earlier Attic 6, 7, 7é is usually the 
article and the demonstrative and relative ideas are generally ex- 
pressed by other words. But the demonstrative use of 6 continues 
in the modern Greek as 70 xat 76, this and that. The modern 
Romance languages obtain their articles from the Latin demon- 
stratives dle, iste. 

3. The meaning of the article. The Greek grammarians call it 
7 épurrixov dpOpov. The English word article comes from the same 
root as &pOpov, viz., dpapicxw, to join, “Ap is the root form. This 
etymology is not yery distinctive for many other words join words 
together. But épucrudv is more to the purpose, for the article does 
define, limit, point out. It is a pointer, not like the demonstra- 
tive, as far and near, this or that, but it simply points out some- 
thing as the thing in mind. It is natural, if not good manners, 
for children to point at objects. The article does not tell why a 


70 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


certain thing is pointed out, but it always points at something. 
The Greek article points out in one of three ways (Broadus): 

(a) Individual objects from other individual objects. 

*Idmv 8& Tovs GxAous dveBy cis Td Gpos (Matt. 5:1). Then the multi- 
tudes in question were those that had come to hear him and the 
mountain is the one right before him in which he had spent the 
whole night in prayer (Lu. 6:12), down which he had just come 
(Lu. 6:17) and up which he now again ascended where he sat 
down. The Greek article is never used when it has no meaning. 
We may not be able to see it in the English idiom, but it had its 
usual force in the Greek. The King James Version does not treat 
the Greek article properly here and in a great many other passages. 
The translators were under the influence of the Latin Vulgate. In 
Luke 4:20 we read kai wrvgas 76 BiBXlov arodots TH barnpeTy exadbioer. 
Here the roll is the one that Jesus had just read and the attendant 
is the one who had given it to him. In Luke 18:13 even the 
Revised Version has translated 7é dpaprwAd by ‘‘a sinner’’ and put 
‘‘the sinner’? in the margin. But a large part of the point lies in 
7o. He seemed to himself to be the great sinner of the world as 
did Paul later (1 Tim. 1:15). In English we also use the article 
to distinguish individuals from other individuals. 

(b) Classes from other classes. Take Matt. 8:20 as an example: 
Ai dAwmexes Hwreors Exovow kal Ta weTELVa TOD ovpavod KaTacKyvares, 6 
d€ vids Tod dvOpwzrov otk exer Tod Thy Kehadjv KAivy. Here adwrexcs, 
mereava, dvOpwrov are all classes that are by the article distinguished 
from other classes. In the case of rod dvOpw7ov it is the singular 
that is so used in the collective general sense of man or mankind. 
The singular is also used with the article in the representatiye 
sense as in Luke 10:7 adgwos yap 6 épyaryns tod pucGod airov, Tere 
5 épyarys is the representative of the whole class of laborers. For 
ot dvOpwra in the plural asa class see, Matt. 12:56. We use the 
article in English sometimes to distinguish a class from a class. 
But even in the Greek the article is not always necessary for this 
purpose, as émt rovypods kat dyabovs (Matt. 5:45). 

(c) Qualities from other qualities. The article is not necessary 
with abstract qualities, but is often so used to sharpen the promi- 


THE ARTICLE. a 


nence of the quality or to describe it as previously mentioned. 
This usage is common in German and French, but is unknown to 
English save as the quality can be treated as an individual matter 
already mentioned. So in German die Weisheit, in French la 
sagesse, but in English wisdom. In 1 John 4:18 we have good 
examples of this use of the Greek article. Gos is first without the 
article and then is repeated with the article, while dydry as the 
important matter in hand has the article each time. Sometimes 
this article should be retained in English as in Rey. 4:11 ryv ddfav 
Kal THY Tysnv Kat THY Svvayey Meaning the glory and the honor and 
the power which God possesses. In Rom. 13:7 we have an inter- 
esting study in the use of the article. 

4. What the article is used with. The article can point out any- 
thing that needs further definition. The article will, of course, 
have the gender of the substantive with which it is used, though 
any substantive may have the natural, not the grammatical gender 
6 auyv (Rev. 3:14). But see the neuter in Gal. 4:25 where 76 8 
“Ayap purposely treats the feminine name as a neuter word. The 
neuter article is alone used with the infinitive as 7d 8 kaOéoae (Mk. 
10:40). So the article is used with adjectives with or without sub- 
stantives as 6 rouny 6 Kkadds (John 10:11), 6 ayos tod eod (J0.6:69). 
The article is used also with adverbs without a substantive. In 
the New Testament 76 viv is very common as in é76 700 viv (Luke 
5:10) and even ra viv (Acts 27:22). In fact the article can be used 
with any part of speech as the verb in 76 8 ’AvéBy (Eph. 4:9), a 
clause as in 76 Ei dwy (Mark 9:23), a quotation as in 76 od ¢gov- 
evoets, ov porxevoas (Matt. 19:18), or a sentence as in 76 rds airois 
mapado aitév (Luke 22:4). This use of the article with sentences 
is very common in Luke and is frequent in modern Greek. The 
article occurs often with the participle as with other adjectives 
when a substantive is also used as 77 epxomevy juepa (Acts 21:26) 
and especially where no substantive appears as in Luke 22:27 
where four examples occur, 6 dvaxecuevos (twice), 6 duaxovav (twice). 
The article with the participle is a common practical equivalent to 
a relative clause as in tots rwwtevovew (John 1:12) and hence has a 
larger signification than a mere adjective since the participle has 


~I 


Z A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


tense. The article is common with the infinitive as in Mk. 5:4; 
Matt. 26:2. Often the article is used by itself when the context is 
clear as in ta Kaioapos (Mark 12:17), 6 rod ZeBedacov (Matt. 10:2). 
Cf. 76 tis ous (Matt. 21:21). 

5. When the article is not used. The article is not, of course, used 
when the idea is indefinite as in pera yuvaixds éAdvda (John 4:27). 
Here the King James Version misses the point by saying ‘‘the 
woman.’’? But a word may be definite without the article, for the 
article is not the only way of making a thing definite. Proper 
names, for instance, are definite in the nature of the case and do 
not require the article to make them so as in pds BapvaBav Iaddos 
(Acts 15:36). So when a substantive is used with a genitive it 
may be sufficiently definite without the article as in wvAa ddov 
(Matt. 16:18). This usage is not unknown .to earlier Greek and 
is in the papyri. ‘The Hebrew construct is like it also. But such 
a word may not be definite as in Oeod vids (Matt. 27:54). More- 
over, some words are definite from the nature of the case as & 
vonov (Rom. 4:14), td Kvpiov (Matt. 1:22), é« avetparos ayiov 
(Matt. 1:21), though these terms for the Deity may have the 
article like proper names. So also such words as #Awos (Matt. 13:6), 
y7 (Luke 2:14), @adaooa (Luke 21:25), Koopos (Gal. 6:14), can be 
definite without the article in English as well asin Greek. See 
1 Cor. 8:4f. for év kéopw, ev oipavd, ét yjs. Besides, a number of 
’ words like véuos (Rom. 2:12), ypady ( 1 Pet. 2:6) are so distinctive 
that they are at times definite without the article. The same is 
true of a number of familiar phrases in English and Greek like at 
home (éy otxw or olkor), in town (év wéAe), in church éy ékxAnova, 
(1 Cor. 14:35), where it is not necessary to say that the article is 
omitted. It is simply not used because the idea is definite enough 
without it. So then the Greek article is not used at all unless the 
word is definite and only then when it is not definite enough to 
suit the speaker or writer. It is not strictly in accord with the 
genius of the Greek language to speak of the ‘‘omission’’ of the 
article, but rather of the non-use of it. See 1 Cor, 3:22f. for a 
long list of definite words without the article. 


THE ARTICLE. 73 


6. Some special uses of the article. 

(a) The correlation of the article. If a genitive is used with a 
noun and both have the article, each is unmistakably definite. So 
Nathanael said to Jesus (John 1:49) 30 @ 6 vids rod Geod and like- 
wise Peter (Matt. 16:16). A proper name in such a case does not 
always have the article as pera rHv peroreriav BaBvAGvos (Matt. 1:12). 
But where one of the words is without the article it is 
indefinite as in e vids ef rod Oeod (Matt. 4:3) where Satan assumes 
that Jesus is a son of God. But ina case like Oeod vids (Matt. 
27:54), both words may be indefinite or both definite and only 
the context or nature of the words can decide. Compare vids 
tod Geod (Matt. 27:40) and @eod vids (Matt. 27:43). In John 
10:36, when meeting a criticism of his enemies, Jesus calls 
himself vids rod Geot, though elsewhere he says 6 vids tod Geod (John 
5:25). 

(b) The article with attributives. There are three kinds of 
attributive expressions with which the article has to do. 

(1) Adjectives. The attributive adjective is preceded by the 
article, though the adjective itself may precede the substantive, if 
one is used, as in 76 épov dvoya (Matt. 18:20), or follow the sub- 
stantive as in 6 zou 6 Kados (John 10:11). But in o dxAos zodts 
(John 12:9,12) wodts appears to be attributive in idea like the 
French use of the adjective without the article as la rée‘publique 
Francaise. But in Mark 12:37 we have o zodts dyAos (compare 
6xAos woAds in Mark 5:21). Perhaps this usage grew by analogy 
out of the common construction of was, dAos, otros, od, exeivos. If 
no article is used with an adjective, it may still be attributive as 
puxpa Cyn (1 Cor. 5:6). 

(2) With genitives. From the nature of the case genitives are 
generally attributive whether the article is used or not, though the 
genitive is predicate after eiyc, yvoua, etc. So oixodouz Geod (1 Cor. 
3:9), Kata THY xdpw Tod Oeod (1 Cor. 3:10), 75 Kypvypa pov-(1 Cor. 
2:4). This is true whatever the position of the genitive, whether 
as above or preceded by the article as in paprus téy Tod xpicrod 7aO- 
npatrov (1 Pet. 531), and in rq atrod yapure (Rom. 3:24). The 
article may be added for the sake of distinction as in Mapéa 9 rod 


74 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


Krora (John 19:25) or repeated for emphasis as in o Adyos 6 Tod 
otavpod (1 Cor. 1:18). 

(8) With adjuncts. When the adjunct has the article before 
it, the phrase is, of course, attributive, as in tots év Xpurrd "Inood 
(Rom. 8:1), && ris drodutpicews THs év Xpirtg “Inood (Rom. 3:24). 
But if no article is used, then the adjunct may be either predicate 
as év 7H capké (Rom. 8:3) which goes with xaréxpwe (not tiv apapriay, 
for Christ has no sin in his flesh) or attributive as eis tov Oavarov 
(Rom. 6:4) where this phrase goes with 8&4 rod Barricparos (see 
preceding verse). Often the tone of voice will show that a phrase 
is attributive as of vepol ev Xpucrd avactycovra zp@tov (1 Thess. 
4:16), 6 murrds év €Aaxiorw (Luke 16:10). The one article can be 
used with any number of attributives (2 Pet. 1:4). 

(c) The repetition of the article. It is not necessary for the 
article to be used only once when there are a number of predicates, 
though this is a neat Greek idiom, as in 2 Peter 3:15 where we have 
TiVv TOU Kupiov Huav paxpoOvulay cwrypiav yydobe. Sometimes the 
article is repeated in such examples (cf. Attic) as in ro ris d0Eys 
Kal TO TOD Oeod wvetua (1 Pet. 4:14). Sometimes the article is used 
with the attributive and not with the substantive as in év ayarn tH 
év Xpiotd “Inood (2 Tim. 1:13). It is very common to haye the 
double article thus 6 xaipos o ends (John 7:6), 0 vids 6 ayamnrtds 
(Matt. 3:17). The article can be repeated with each attributive as 
Ti poppatay Thy Sioromov Thy dfeiavy (Rey. 2:12). But the article is 
not repeated quite indiscriminately. When seyeral connected 
nouns relating to different objects differ in gender, they take sepa- 
rate articles even if they have the same case and number, as in 
dd TOD vopov THs dpaptias Kat ToD Oavarov (Rom. 8:2), unless indeed 
the ideas are close akin as in év waoas tats évroXats cai dixaripace 
tov kupiov (Luke 1:6) where one article suffices. Two substantives 
that agree in number, gender, and case, and that refer to different 
objects may be grouped under one article and so viewed as one, 
though not in reality, as in of Papurator kal Yaddsoveator (Matt. 16:1), 
whereas we usually have of bapwrator kat ot ypayparets (Mark 7:5), 
the one a party and the other a profession, though most of the 
scribes were Pharisees. So Jesus says 6 ovelpwv cal 0 Oepifov (John 


THE ARTICLE. 75 


4:36) to emphasize the distinctness of the two persons. But when 
two substantives relate to the same person, it is not usual to repeat 
the article, as "Ey "Iwdvys, 0 adeXhos tyuGv Kat ovvKowwvos (Rev. 1:9). 
Cf. Rev. 3:17. So in 2 Pet. 1:11 (and also 2:20; 3:18) we have 
Tov Kupiov Huav Kal awthpos “Incod Xpiorod. Here the one article 
definitely shows Jesus Christ to be both our Lord and Sayior. 
Hence in 2 Pet. 1:1 rod Ocod Audv Kat cwrppos “Inootd Xpiorod the 
article likewise means that Christ is our God and Savior. Winer de- 
parts from his usual rectitude in not insisting on strict grammar for 
2 Pet. 1:1. So also on doctrinal grounds he denies the force of 
the one article in Titus 2:13 émuddveav ris 80&ys Tod peyddov Geod Kat 
cuwrtipos ipav Xpustod Incod. But Paul’s doctrinal system in Phil. 
2:9 and Col. 1:15-19; 2:9, not to mention Rom. 9:5 and Acts 20:28, 
does not forbid the natural import of the one article here. 

(d) The article with predicates. When the noun has the 
article and the adjective does not, it is generally predicate. Soin 
peyddn TH povy (Acts 26:24) Luke means that he spoke with the 
voice loud and elevated. In Heb. 7:24 drapaBarov eye tiv tepwovvyy 
does not mean that he has the unchangeable priesthood, but he 
has the priesthood unchangeable. As a rule the article is not used 
with the predicate noun even when the subject is definite. Cf. Mk. 
3:1. 1 John 4:16 ‘O 6eds dyarn éoriv God is love, but love is not 
God. Thus we can tell subject from predicate. Hence in John 
1:1 beds Hv 6 Adyos We translate the Word was God, not God was the 
Word, for subject and predicate are not here co-extensive. But if 
the predicate is previously well known or is identical with the sub- 
ject (W. F. Moulton in note to translation of Winer), the article 
is used. So in Acts 21:38 odk dpa ov ef o Aiytatus. Here o refers 
to the well-known leader of the four thousand insurrectionists. In 
1 John 3:4 4 dpapria éotiv % dvopia has the article twice because sub- 
ject and predicate are interchangeable. So in John 3:10 33 @o6 
ddacKados shows Nicodemus to be the well-known teacher. 

(e) The article with proper names. This peculiarity of Greek 
persists to the present day. The article is not always used with 
proper names and no wholly satisfactory remark can be made 
about it. Thus in Acts 19:1 we have rov’Azod\Aw evar év KopivOw 


76 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


TlatAov. Often we can do nothing with this article in the English 
idiom, but in an example like that in Acts 19:13 we can see the 
point as ‘OpxiLw tyas tov “Incotv ov TatdAos xnpiooa. Here the exor- 
cist seeks to identify Jesus to the demon by the article, ‘‘the Jesus 
whom Paul preaches.’? The article will often be used with the 
noun in apposition to the proper name, but not with the proper 
name as “Iwavys 6 Bartiorns (Matt. 3:1). 

(f) The article with pronouns. The genitive of personal pro- 
nouns may or may not have the article as @eé wou (Matt. 27:46), 
tov matépa pov (Matt. 26:53). The pronoun, again, may rarely 
come after the article as 77 airod xapite (Rom.3:24). Or the article 
may not appear at all as @iAo pov (Jo. 15:14), dovAous éavrod (Lu. 
19:13). The article is sometimes used with the possessive pronoun 
as év TO o@ Gvopate (Matt. 7:22). But the article never means pos- 
session. Where it is said of Pilate that drevijaro ras xeipas, it is the 
hands, which were, of course, his own. “Exacros never uses the 
article in the New Testament (1 Cor. 3:8). We have rév detva once 
(Matt. 26:18). “Ids outside of id and xar’ idfay has the article 
uniformly as of to. (John 1:11). Towtros is used with the article, 
though not always, as of rowtro (Rom. 16:18). Once we have ai 
Suvdpes toadra (Mark 6:2). Once also the article occurs with 
TogovTos aS 6 ToovTos wAodTos (Rey. 18:17). The New Testament 
follows the Greek custom in using the article with otros, 8c, éxeivos, 
though to us it is an anomaly. Perhaps the demonstrative was 
felt to be so definite that the very atmosphere called for the article. 
The article, moreoyer, is generally used with the noun and not 
with the demonstrative, though the force of the demonstrative 
seems to be attributive, not predicate. So otros 6 dvOpwros (Luke 
14:30). Even with proper names otros is generally used with the 
article as otros 6 “Inoots (Acts 1:11). So when otros is not used 
with the article it is predicate, not attributive, as ravras jpuépas 
(Acts 1:5), days these (hence). Cf. Acts 24:21. Thus in John 
2:11 ravrnv érotnoev dpxiv Tov onpecwv Means that he did this as a 
beginning of miracles. 

(g) The article with rés. Without the article in the singular 


mas is ‘‘eyery’’ as mavta repacpov (Luke 4:13). But in the case of 


THE ARTICLE. We 


abstract nouns ‘‘ 


every’’ is tantamount to all as racav yapdv (Jas. 
1:2). So also if itis a proper name and hence a single object as 
raca lepoodAvpa (Matt. 2:3). Since ypady was sometimes regarded 
as definite without the article zaca ypady in 2 Tim. 3:16 may be 
‘tall Scripture,’’ though it may also be ‘‘every Scripture,’’ since 
the point is not clear. There is a difference between raca 7 70s 
(Matt. 8:34) and 7 zaca weds, though this latter construction is 
found only twice (Green) in the New Testament (Acts 20:18 tov 
mavra xpovov, and 1 Tim.1:16 tiv dracay paxpobvpiay). In Matt. 7:26 
mas 6 dxovwy is equivalent to mas dotis dxovee (Matt. 7:24). The 
plural zavres preserves the distinction this far that the article before 
(oi zavtes) groups the sum total as 7a wdavta (Col. 1:16). “Ordos is 
used generally with the article as 6Aos 6 kécpos (Rom. 1:8). In 
John 9:34 we have 6dos in the predicate without the article, év 
Gpaptias ov éyevvyOns dAos, you were begotten in sins the whole of 
you. But in general the article in the New Testament is true to 
the genius of the Greek tongue and it is not possible to appreciate 
the Greek article save as one is in sympathy with the Greek as a 
living idiom. 

(h) The article with péoos. In the New Testament we have 
commonly 76 péor, eis pecov, ev péow, Kata pecov, AS év pecw ArvKwy 
(Matt. 10:16). But we have also the old construction péons voxros, 
in the middle of the night (Matt. 25:6). “Akxpos is not-used in this 
way, though we have 76 dkpov rod daxrvAov (Luke 16:24). 

(i) The article with the nominatiye as vocative. Here we have 
an old Greek idiom intensified by the Hebrew and Aramaic usage 
in which tongues the vocative regularly uses the article. In the 
New Testament a number of examples occur, as vat 6 rarjp (Matt. 
11:26); aBBa 6 warnp (Mk. 14:36); 1d xopaowov (Mk. 5:41). The 
form is nominative, but the case is really vocative. 


CHAPTER XIII. 
PRONOUNS, 


1. What is the pronoun (mpd dvéparos, pro nomine)? The pro- 
noun is a device to preyent the constant repetition of the noun. In 
modern English we much dislike the repetition of the same word 
whether verb or noun. Macaulay is criticized for using the sub- 
stantive too much. But the noun should always be used where 
necessary to ayoid ambiguity. In English we even dislike too fre- 
quent use of the pronoun. 

2. Persistence of pronouns. As already noticed, the pronominal 
roots are, many of them, very old, perhaps as old as the oldest 
verbal roots. The pronouns have been the most persistent parts 
of speech as to retention of case-forms. We see this in the English 
he, his, him, ete. But a complete set of pronouns in all respects 
was not developed. In the vernacular new pronouns continually 
arose from time to time. 

3. Emphasis. In Greek the pronoun is not so common as in 
the modern European tongues. The Greek verb itself contains the 
personal subject, and even the oblique case of the pronoun was not 
always used. When, therefore, the nominative case of the pro- 
noun is used, there is emphasis. Cf. éyd (Matt. 5:22), ov (John 
1:42), dpets (Matt. 27:24). In the New Testament the pronoun, 
as in the xow7 and the Hebrew, occurs much more frequently than 
in earlier Greek. But there is still some emphasis, except in the 
redundant pronoun as in Rey. 7:2 (adrots). It may be very slight, 
however, merely a change of tone. See Mark 1:8 (atrés); Matt. 
1:21 (adrds) ; 8:24 (adrds) ; Acts 20:35 (adrés). In adrés the emphasis 
is occasionally very slight, if at all, but we must always look for 
it. See Lu. 1:22; 6:8; 15:14; 24:25,381. The literary plural ap- 
pears also as in ypddopev (1 Jo. 1:4). Ch. ypddo in 1 Jo, 2:12, 


PRONOUNS. 79 


4. Airos in predicate. In Luke we find a yery common idiom 
that is reproduced in modern Greek. It is the use of avrés in the 
predicate position and translated by ‘‘that very.’’ See Lu. 13:51, 
év aity TH pa. Strictly it is (in this example) ‘‘the hour itself,’’ 
but there is a shading to the demonstrative force as in modern 
Greek. But this is not true of Matt. 3:4, which the King James 
Version mistranslated airos dé 6 “Iwavys. 

5. Position. Sometimes the pronoun occupies an emphatic 
position like od ris (Rom. 14:4), od miorw jv eas (Rom. 14:22). 
Note the contrast in éyw oe (Jo. 17:4), we ov (Jo. 17:5), etc. But 
sometimes the unusual position is for euphony, not emphasis, as 
with airod (John 9:6). Cf. wov and gov in Jo. 9:10,11,17, ete. Cf. 
airs pov ddeAdpds (Matt.12:50). See also Matt. 8:8. 

6. Omission. Hadley and Allen speak of the ‘‘omission”’ of the 
pronoun when there is no emphasis. This is to speak from the 
standpoint of the English. It is proper to say the pronoun is 
simply not used in Greek when it is not needed. Each writer, to 
be sure, decides for himself whether he will use the pronoun in a 
giyen instance. It only confuses things to say that he ‘‘omitted”’ 
a pronoun when he simply did not need it for his idea. 

7. Third personal pronoun. The New Testament has a very 
simple usage for the third personal pronoun in the oblique cases. 
Airés (Lu. 4:20) is the word, never ot, the old reflexive form, and 
usually in the oblique cases. This is, of course, just one of the 
early uses of airés. Sometimes, as in Lu. 19:2 (xat ards) the 
nominative form has this sense of emphatic he. But for the other 
use see Matt. 1:21 (airés). ‘O atréds is still frequent as ‘‘the 
same’’ (Matt. 5:46). Cf. ro avro mvetya (2 Cor. 4:18) and avro 
To mvetua (Rom. 8:26). The intensive use of avrds, though not 
very common, survives as airds yap Aaveld (Lu. 20:42). Cf. also 
aitos €yo (Rom. 7:25), adroit duets (1 Th. 4:9). 

8. Thereflexive. This pronoun holds its own in all three persons 
in the singular and to some extent in the plural as éuavrod (Jo. 
5:30), ceavrév (Matt. 4:6), é€avrp#s (Matt. 12:25). In the plural 
éavT@y Occurs indiscriminately for either person, the first (Rom. 
8:23), the second (Rom. 6:11), the third (Rom. 5:8). But tpav 


80 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


avrov appears in 1 Cor 7:35 and tpiv abrots in 1 Cor. 11:13. Atrév 
is not common, though necessary occasionally as in Jo, 2:24, a 
good example (airés, atrov, avrois). “Eavrod may be with the article 
(Lu. 11:21) or without (Lu. 13:19). The position may even be 
éavrav Ta ivdru (Matt. 21:8). But instead of the reflexive we have 
the personal form as tiv (Matt. 6:19). “Ids (cf. idirys, Acts 
4:13) is common in the N. T. as in the cow. So rov tozov tov tdov 
(Acts 1:25). 

9. Possessive. The various ways of expressing possession are all 
distinctive. The article does not mean possession. In such a case, 
where only the article is used, the idea of possession is considered 
clear enough. If you say ‘‘I have a pain in the head,” it is per- 
fectly clear whose head it is. But ‘‘the’’? does not mean ‘‘my.”’ 
So John 2:11 (rév). The possessive pronoun without the article 
is less distinctive than with it. See John 4:34 (éuov); 13:35 (pot). 
For the possessive pronoun with the article see John 7:8 (6 épés) ; 
Lu. 22:19 (riv éunv). The possessive is not used in the third per- 
son in the New Testament, but the genitive of avrés (Matt. 1:2). 
In the first and second person the genitive thus used may be either 
emphatic or unemphatic according to the form (enclitic) and the 
presence or absence of the article. See Matt. 7:3-5 (cov and gov) ; 
John 14:2 (wov). In Matt. 7;3 note also 7G o@ 66aAneG. In gen- 
eral the possessive pronoun is rare in the N. T. save éués in John’s 
Gospel (as above, but see Phil. 3:9). The possessive pronoun 
may have a genitive in apposition with it as ry 47 xept TavAov 
(1 Cor. 16:21). 

10. Demonstrative. The usual demonstratives are found in the 
New Testament though obros and éxeivos are the only ones that have . 
much frequency. The customary distinction between these two 
obtains. In the case of obros the absence of the article means the 
predicate idea as in Jo, 2:11; Acts 1:5. But in wept puds ravrys 
guvys (Acts 24:21) we come close to the attributive usage though 
the article is absent. The epexegetic use of rodro (kat rodro) is seen 
in 1 Cor. 6:8. The demonstrative rarely appears as the direct an- 
tecedent of the relative as otros 6s (Lu. 5:21). The contemptuous 
idea is conveyed by otros in Acts 17:18; 19:26. Interesting is the 


PRONOUNS. 81 


resumptive use of ovros as in Matt. 10:22. “Ode is nearly confined 
to the form rdée (Rev. 2:1), but note Jas. 4:13. The peculiar 
deiva oceurs only once (Matt. 26:18). “Exeivos is sometimes an em- 
phatic subject (he) as in Jo. 5:35,46; 19:35; Matt. 15:18. For 
distinction between ovros and éxeivos see Lu. 18:14. For the dem. 
ds see ds dé (Jo. 5:11), Os pev, Os d€ (1 Cor. 11:21). For 6 d€ see 
Rom. 14:2; Eph. 4:11. 

11. Relative. The relative pronoun is not well named, since all 
pronouns as many other words express relation. However the 
usual agreement in number and gender between the relative and 
its antecedent justifies the name. The bond is thus very close. 
The occasional union of case by attraction is a still closer bond in 
the same direction, as ofs in Lu. 2:20. But attraction is not nec- 
essary as we see in nv (Heb. 8:2). dors, besides the usual indefi- 
nite sensé as in Matt. 13:12 and Lu. 12:1, often assumes a strongly 
definite idea (compare two ideas in fis). So Lu. 2:4; Acts 
10:47. For the suppression of the antecedent see ot (Rom. 10: 
14). The absence of the antecedent is not a peculiarity of Greek, 
but belongs to all languages. Compare the English ‘‘who gives 
quickly gives twice.’’ Note oin Lu. 7:47. Cf. even aérots (Matt. 8:4) 
with no substantive in the context. Sometimes indeed the ante- 
cedent 1s incorporated into the relative clause and both are in the 
same case as in eis Ov wapeddOnre Troy dvdaxns (Rom. 6:17), Cf Lu. 
1:20 and Mk. 6:16. Note tis éorw otros ds in Luke 5:21, but cf. 
Rom. 7:15. The attraction of the relative to the case of the ante- 
cedent is specially common in Luke (cf. ov in 5:9) which is not 
surprising as it is one of the finer and subtler points of syntax. It 
occurs twice only in Matt. (18:19; 24:50) and once in Mark (7:18). 
Cf. Plummer on Luke, p. li. Usually this attraction is from the 
ace. to some other oblique case, but sometimes other cases than 
the ace. experience it. Cf. gos tis jyepas js (Acts 1:22) where a 
locative becomes gen. See also 2 Cor. 1:4. This attraction may 
be inverse from antecedent to the case of the relative. Thus tov 
dptov é6v (1 Cor. 10:16) and zavri 6 (Lu. 12:48). The relative 
usually agrees with its antecedent in gender and number, but this 
bond i often broken if the sense justifies it. In Mk. 15:16 6 agrees 


§2 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


in gender with the predicate zpatwpiov rather tnan with the ante- 
cedent ris aiAjs. In Phil. 2:15 ois differs in number and gender 
from yeveds. See also 6 in Eph. 5:5, and és in Eph. 1:14 (mg. 6 
text of W H), and 1 Tim. 3:16. There is a real agreement in 
sense, however, which is more important than mere formal gram- 
matical structure. But ovros (Matt. 7:12) is strictly grammatical. 
In 1 Cor. 15:10 Paul purposely says eipi 6 eis, not ds. “Oors like 
és is very common in the N. T., but it is nearly confined to the 
nominative, but see ace. neuter 67 in Lu. 10:35. Cf. also éws orov. 
“Ooos is frequent as in Matt. 7:12, but ofos (1 Thess. 1:5) is rare, 
and #Atkos appears only four times (cf. James 3:5). For rocovrw— 
dow see Heb. 1:4. Cf. xa ooov (Heb. 7:20) and daov dcov (Heb. 
10:37). In Rom. 9:6 we have the old classic idiom ovx ofov dre 
where ofos almost equals dvvarés. The repetition of the relative is 
well shown in Phil. 4:8 (60a). Cf. 1 Cor. 15:1f. As in Latin 
sometimes the relative occurs at the beginning of sentences as av 
év (Lu. 12:8), év ots (Lu. 12:1), ot x¢pw (Lu. 7:47). This classical 
idiom is more frequent in Luke. In Rev.1:4 6 jv occurs where 6 
is relative. 

12. Correlative pronouns. They are not very common in the 
N. T.  Totos does not appear at all and rowode once (2 Pet. 1:17). 
Towtros (neuter rowdro) occurs about sixty times either with the 
article as of rowdro (Rom. 16:18) or without as rowtro (Matt. 
18:5). In Rey. 16:18 we even find ofos otk éyevero tyAuKotTos Taopds 
ovrw peyas Where the same idea occurs twice. Cf. Oras ofa ov yeyo- 
vey troavrn (Mk. 13:19). In Acts 26:29 note rovovrovs dzoios. And 
in 1 Cor. 5:1 observe rowvry pris. Tooodros (cf. Lu. 7:9) is less 
common and always without the article save once 6 togotros zAodros. 
(Rev. 18:16). 

13. The indefinite pronoun. In Greek the indefinite is the same 
form as the interrogatiye save the accent. Tits is very common in 
the New Testament with a substantive as tepeds rus (Lu. 1:5) or 
without as «& tus éye (Mk. 4:23). It may occur at the beginning 
of a sentence as in tues d€ (Acts 17:18). It can be used also for 
the emphatic idea of somebody or something as e& yap doxe tes elvad 
nm, pdtv ov, dpevarare (Gal. 6:3) where both senses occur. Cf! 


PRONOUNS. 83 


Acts 5:36. In Mk. 10:17 <is seems to be the equivalent of tis. We 
even have els 7s together (Mark 14:47; John 11:49). Tis at times 
is almost equal to ‘‘a kind of” as eis 76 elvae judas drapxiyv twa (Jas. 
1:18), and with numbers 7s generalizes the expression as d¥vo0 twas 
tov pabyrav (Lu. 7:19). In ava els e&acros (Rev. 21:21) we have 
a distributive idiom and the adverbial use of dvd. 

14. The interrogative pronouns. Tis is, of course, the usual inter- 
rogative pronoun in the New Testament, as ris trédecgev tpiv (Matt. 
3:7). For the double interrogative ris té see Mk. 15:24. It is 
used in alternative questions instead of zdérepos as ris ék tGv, etc., 
(Matt. 21:31), Tiva Oedrere drodvow tyiv, tov BapaBBav 7 “Inooty rov 
Neyopevov Xpiorov; (Matt. 27:17). Sors.... 9 (Matt. 23:17). 
In ti rodro dxovw rept cod; (Luke 16:12) we have rather a predicate 
use of rodro than any peculiar use of ré. Té dr occurs by itself as 
ri ore elnretre (Lu.2:50), but the copula éoréy or yéyovey may be mere- 
ly dropped out for see ré yéyovev Gre jpiv pedras eupavilew ceavtov Kal 
ovxi 76 Kdopw; (John 14:22). The same thing is true of ta ri (iva 
ri in quotations from the Old Testament as Acts 4:25) as ta ré 
évOupciobe wovnpa; (Matt. 9:4). Tis used with any of the preposi- 
tions as da 7é (Matt. 9:11), and sometimes 7/ by itself is in the 
accusative, as to what, and so why, as té d€ Pdréreas 7d Kapdos; 
(Matt. 7:3). Sometimes this adverbial use of 7é borders close on 
to our ‘‘how’’ as in Luke 2:49 above and in Acts 5:4 ré dre eGov 
and in Acts 5:9 r¢ éte ovvepovny. In Luke 12:49 we have a more 
difficult passage, tip 7AOov Barciv ext tiv yy, Kat ti Aw ci 7dH 
évy@6n; Here ‘“‘how I wish’’ makes far better sense, though it is a 
very unusual use of the interrogative form as an exclamation. In 
Acts 13:25 the neuter 7 is used rather than riva (attested by some 
manuscripts) like the modern Greek idiom, ré éué izovoetre ectvac; 
There is nothing peculiar in the common use of ris (r/ ) dpa, or oty, 
or yap. See Paul’s ré oty by itself (Rom. 6:15). Tvs has no effect 
on the construction of the sentence and in Acts 17:18 ré dv OéAu 6 
oreppordyos ovtos Néyerv; we have merely the conclusion of a fourth 
class condition. IlLérepos is not used in direct questions in the New 
Testament. It is urged by some writers that in Matt. 7:14, Mark 
9:11,28, and possibly also John 8:25 we haye ore used as a direct 


84 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


interrogative. This is more than doubtful. It is more likely that 
the phrase ti 67s has been here condensed into 67. and the elKpse 
is carried still further as sometimes tva is used with no preceding 
verb. It is even suggested that in Matt. 26:50 ed’ 6 wdpe is a case 
of 6 as a direct interrogative, but here again it is better to under- 
stand an ellipse. Cf. the prolepsis c@ ris (Mk. 1:24) where the 
interr. is almost equivalent to the relative. IyAckos is not used as 
a direct interrogative. Totes is like the Latin qualis and is used in 
direct question fairly often in the New Testament, as év zoég é&ovoia 
tavra roveis; (Mark 11:28). So zécos is still the word for quantita- 
tive questions as wdécous éxere aptovs; (Mark 6:38). In indirect 
questions the New Testament does not so well follow the usage 
of the earlier Greek so far as the pronouns are concerned. 
“Oars is so used only once, viz., in Acts 9:6, caf AaAnOyceral vor 6 Te 
ae Set rroveiv. drepov, not zérepos, occurs once only, disappearing 
like the English whether (Simcox), viz., worepov éx tod Geod éoriv 
} éys (John 7:17). dios appears twice (Gal. 6:11; Heb. 7:4), 
and one (Gal. 6:11) is not certain, (dere ryAkous tyiv ypdupaocw 
éypaya. Idcos is so employed a few times, as ide rca cov Karyyopov- 
ow (Mark 15:4). TIlozos is also in use in indirect questions, as ov« 
oidare rota Hepa 6 KUpios tpav epxerar (Matt. 24:42) “Oroios four 
times occurs in this construction, but once (Acts 26:29) as usual 
relative, tovovrovs dzotos (Blass in error here). As example of in- 
direct question see Jas. 1:24, eiféws éreddBero Szoios jv. But in the 
New Testament the great majority of indirect questions that use a 
pronoun haye tis, contrary to the usual earlier usage (Alexandrian, 
says Blass. So in papyri), as ov« ol8ate ré aireiode (Matt. 20:22). 
Cf. Matt. 15:32. Sometimes the relative and the indirect interrog- - 
ative are used side by side, but there is a difference, as in 1 Tim. 
1:7, pip vootvres py Te & A€yovow py Te Tept Tivwv diaBeBaotvra. Some- 
times r/ is used where it verges close on to the relative idea, yet not 
quite, as SoAjcerar yap bpiv év exeivy TH dpa té Aadjonre (Matt. 10:19). 
This is really an indirect question which is, however, the subject 
of S00jcera. Winer is doubtless correct in saying that Latin would 
here have quod (not quid) dicatis, but the Greek follows its own 
genius. So also in a case like Mark 1:24, old ce ris ef, the indirect 


PRONOUNS. 85 


question is in the accusative, a sort of apposition to oe the object of 
oida. Thus we explain also idety tov “Incoty tis eorw (Luke 19:3). 
The double interrogative properly occurs also in indirect questions 
as tis ti apn (Mark 15:24). But the relative and the interrogative 
at times are almost interchangeable in the kouw7. 

15. Reciprocal pronowns. The familiar addAos adXo is also found 
as Acts 19:32. The distinction between érepos and aAXos is observed 
to some extent in the New Testament. See Gal. 1:6f.; 2 Cor. 
11:4. But in eis érepav kdpyv (Lu. 9:56) we have érepos in the 
sense only of a second, not of a different kind. And in Lu. 19:20 
6 €repos is used after 6 devrepos (19:18) as the next (a third). Com- 
pare 6 els, 6 erepos (Matt. 6:24). In Rom. 2:1 6 €repos is practically 
neighbor. The reciprocal idea is also set forth by eis (1 Cor. 4:6) 
and éavrév (1 Cor. 6:7), as well as by the usual dddjAov (Matt. 
24:10; Lu. 2:15). 

16. In alternative expressions we have ts. . . . Tus as TwWes pev 
.... tees 6& (Phil. 1:15); tus... . GAXos as trd TwOv... . GAAoV 
(Luke 9:7f.); vis... . repos (1 Cor. 3:4); cis. ... eis (Mark 
10:37); «is piv... . 6 O8 as pia pev. . . . 70 0& (Gal. 4:24); 6 ets (Cor 
els... . 6 repos (Matt. 6:24). The negative forms otris, pjtis do 
not occur in the New Testament save that pyre is used in questions 
aS pate eye eps, kvpte; (Matt. 26:22). Westcott and Hort print p7 
ms asin John 15:6. Oddeés is very common either alone as ovdels 
dvvarat (Matt. 6:24) or with a substantive as ovdels oikerns divarat 
(Lu. 16:13). Mydets is not so frequent, but is used as formerly; 
SO pydels yuwwoxerw (Matt. 9:30); dvaBorAnv pydewiav (Acts 25:17). 
Sometimes the negative is separated from the pronoun like the 
Hebrew as & é airy od mece?irar (Matt. 10:29), but the resultant 
idea is the same. So sometimes ov... . mas as ov dKxawwOjoerae 
waca oop§ (Rom. 3:20) and rarely py... . was (1 Cor. 1:29). 
Iids....ov (1 Jo. 1:21) and was.... py (John 3:16) do not 
depart from the usual idiom. So od was 6 A€ywv (Matt. 7:21) is in 
full accord with the usual idiom, 


CHAPTER XIV. 
THE CASES. 


1. Cases in the Indo-germanic tongues. 

(a) There are eight well defined cascs in the Sanskrit, the oldest 
member of this group of languages, viz., the nominative, the voca- 
tive, the accusative, the genitive, the ablative, the locative, the 
instrumental, the dative. These eight cases, with the exception 
of the vocative, have, as a rule, separate case suffixes. It is pos- 
sible that the oldest Sanskrit had another case, the associative, 
which was merged into the instrumental. But Giles ( Comparative 
Philology, p. 269) suggests that the difference in sense between in- 
strument and association may be due not to two cases, but to the 
distinction between inanimate and animate objects (instruments 
and companions). 

(b) These eight cases have had a wate history in all the Indo- 
germanic languages. The Russian language still has eight case- 
forms. In Latin the eight cases have six distinct case-forms, the 
ablative, instrumental and locatiye appearing under one termina- 
tion, 7 cr ein the singular, 7s or zbus in the plural. The Gothic 
has only four separate case-forms, dative, locative, ablative, and 
instrumental all being alike and the vocative now like nominative 
and now like accusative. The German still has five case-forms. 
(nominative, yocative, genitive, accusative, dative). The Anglo- 
Saxon preserved six distinct case-forms and in some words all 
eight. A few Anglo-Saxon words have the locative and ablative 
endings, though in general these cases have been blended with the 
dative and the instrumental (March, Grammar of the Anglo-Saxon 
Language, p. 148). In modern English, outside of the personal 
pronouns, the eight case-forms have all disappeared save the geni- 
tive s and that is sometimes represented by the apostophe and is 


THE CASES. 87 


often displaced by the preposition of. In French, outside of the 
pronouns, there is no case-form at all. In the Greek the eight 
cases appear under fiye case-forms, the genitive and the ablative 
having the same endings, while the locative, instrumental, and 
dative have the same terminations. In the modern Greek vernac- 
ular even the locative; instrumental, dative cases disappear, ets and 
the accusative being used instead. So modern Greek vernac- 
ular has only three case-forms, nominative, accusative, and geni- 
tive. 

(c) The kinship between the chief Indo-germanic tongues in 
the cases will be readily seen from the table of Sanskrit case-end- 
ings (omitting the dual): 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
nc) pede ae BY Wisp tom Tee 
N. sor— as or 4% 
V. —_ — 
Ace. am or — as or 4% 
G. as am 
Ab. as bhyas 
Day ear) bhyas 
I. a@ or bhi bhis(ois) 
oe Sa su 


The similarity of these endings to Greek and Latin case endings 
is at once apparent. The identity of the genitive and ablative 
singular ending as (like the Greek os) is at once noticeable and is 
imitated by the Greek in the plural also. Again the identity of 
the ablative and dative plural bhyas is like the Latin bus in dative, 
ablative, locative, and the instrumental (sometimes is like su or 
instrumental ois), an identity observable in the Latin singular also 
in most words. So then the Greek genitive and ablative follow the 
Sanskrit singular while the Latin ablative, locative, instrumental, 
and dative proceed along the line of the Sanskrit plural for these 
cases. In Sanskrit, as in all the Indo-germanic tongues, the voca- 
tive has no case-endings. Like Latin and Greek neuters, the nom- 


88 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


inative, accusative, and yocative in Sanskrit are alike. The Greek, 
unlike the Sanskrit and the Latin, makes the accusative plural in 
most cases (masculine and feminine) different from the nomina- 
tive. In neuter nouns in Greek there are, therefore, only three 
distinct case-forms. Remnants of distinctive ablative, locative, 
and instrumental endings are preserved in Greek. 

2. The origin and use of the cases. 

(a) The word case (casus, wréois) means falling. It is the in- 
flection of the noun by case endings, though some nouns are inde- 
clinable. 

(b) The object of cases is to express the relation of words in 
a sentence. In the isolating languages (like the Chinese) this 
relation is shown by the order of the words and the tone in pro- 
nunciation. In the old Sanskrit this relation was expressed by 
means of {the eight cases and no prepositions were used till very 
late. In modern English and French prepositions have practically 
displaced the cases and the Chinese plan of relying on the position 
of the words is largely used. The Greek and the Latin come in 
half way between and exhibit all these tendencies. 

(c) The burden upon the cases was felt to be too great even in 
the later Sanskrit and a number of set case-forms (adverbs) came 
to be used with most of the cases to make clearer the relation of 
words to words. Thus a few prepositions gradually arose even in 
Sanskrit. In the Greek and Latin this tendency to use a preposi- 
tion to define more sharply the idea of the case grew rapidly. Even 
in the Coptic there are no case-forms, but only particles and prep- 
ositions. ‘‘These adverbs, which we now call prepositions, in time 
become the constant concomitants of some cases; and when this 
has happened, there is an ever-increasing tendency to find the im- 
portant part of the meaning in the preposition and not in the case 
ending’ (Giles, Comparative Philology, p. 272 4.). The rise of prep- 
ositions, therefore, marks the beginning of the decline of the case 
system. 

(d) There is thus a constant tendency in all the Indo-germanic 
languages to blend yarious cases into one case-form and so to lessen 
the number of case-forms. The increasing use of prepositions is in 


THE CASES, 89 


harmony with the analytical process in language growth. But for 
the increasing use of prepositions this would have resulted in 
greater confusion than ever. Prof. J. H. Moulton seems to go too 
far when he says; ‘‘In other words, the purely local cases, in which 
the meaning could be brought out by a place adverb (for this pur- 
pose called a preposition), sacrificed their distinct forms and 
usages.”’ 

(e) Asitis, the distinctive idea of each case remains practically 
what it was originally even when several cases are blended to- 
gether. Grammarians have made hopeless efforts to derive the 
Greek genitive from the ablative or the ablative from the genitive. 
Both ideas are manifestly expressed by the same case-ending, but 
historically they are different cases and express different ideas. So 
it is with the locative, instrumental and dative. The Sanskrit had 
practically distinct endings and clearly distinct ideas for each case. 
Greek and Latin have distinct case ideas, but not distinct endings 
for all eight cases. The proper historical method for studying the 
Greek cases is to see which one of the eight a given case is, appeal 
to the original meaning of that case, note the bearing of the par- 
ticular context on that meaning, take noteof the history of the 
case, and the resultant idea will be the truth expressed. 

(f) We do not know certainly the origin of the case-forms them- 
selves. They are either pronominal as the nominative-and accus- 
ative or local as the ablative and locative. But it is all specula- 
tion, since in the oldest Sanskrit the case-forms do not appear 
apart from the nouns. In general, it is to be observed that the 
ablative was the earliest case to lose its case-form, while the geni- 
tive has been the most tenacious of its endings in all the languages. 
The accusative is the oldest of all the cases. But in the New Test- 
ament, as in the older Greek, the real idea of each of the eight 
cases is manifest, though the process of blending has made further 
progress as is seen in the practical equivalence of e’s and accusative 
and év (the locative) with verbs of rest and motion. The practical 
absence of cases in the Hebrew would accentuate this tendency to 
some extent. 

(g) Winer is clearly correct (Grammar of the Idiom of the N. T., 


90 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


Winer-Thayer, p. 180,) when he says: ‘‘No case is ever in reality 
put for another (enallage caswwm). Sometimes, however, two 
cases can be used with equal correctness in one and the same connec- 
tion when the relation to be expressed may be yiewed in two dif- 
ferent ways.’’ That is true and important. 

3. The nominative. 

(a) The ending s is thought to be demonstrative like Sanskrit 
sa@s. This case is treated first (called prathamd, first, by the 
Hindu grammarians), though it is not the first in order of time. 

(b) It has come to be the case of the subject, but it was not 
originally that, for the old subject was part of the verb as $-n/, I 
say. The addition of a noun or pronoun in apposition with this 
verbal subject, as éy#, is a later development due to desire for 
greater accuracy and clearness. It is unscientific, then, to speak 
of the ‘‘omission of the subject’’ in such cases as is done, for in- 
stance, by Hadley and Allen (Greek Grammar, p. 203). Even the 
so-called ‘‘impersonal’’ verb has a subject in the verb itself as vet, 
Kad@s €xet, 

(c) In Greek, then, the nominative, the naming case (r@ats 

évopactixy) is properly appositional both when subject of a verb 
and when in the predicate as od ef Ilérpos (Matt. 16:18). Here 
the verb has become copula merely and Ilérpos is predicate, but 
that is not always true as éy# ew (John 8:58). But instead of 
the predicate nominative we often have eis and the accusative as in 
the Attic Greek. So éyevero eis tpia pépy (Rev. 16:19). This is very 
common in the Septuagint. English likewise can say: It is me, 
and French ¢’ est moi. Compare Latin, dedecori est. This ap- 
positional force of the nominative is often clearly seen in such . 
examples as Atros 8 éy& IlatAos rapaxadO (2 Cor. 10:1). 

(d) The nominative is thus sometimes retained even when in 
apposition with other cases, as in John 13:18, dwvetré pe 6 didaoxados 
kal kiptos, Where it is practically a quotation. So in Rey. 1:4 the 
nominative is retained even after the preposition a6 as if to em- 
phasize the unchangeable nature of God, dd 6 dy cat 6 ty Kai 6 épxd- 
pevos. Inthe Revelation of John indeed this retention of the nom- 
inative in apposition with an oblique case is so frequent as to 


THE CASES. 91 


become noticeable, especially participial clauses, as tijs Kaus “lepov- 
cody, 9 KataBaivovoa (Rey. 3:12). 

(e) Moreover, the nominative is used where it is not connected 
with the rest of the sentence. Ina way the nominative ‘‘has a 
certain tendency to be residuary legatee of case-relations not obvi- 
ously appropriated by the other cases’? (Moulton, Expositor, Au- 
gust, 1904). So in salutations the nominative is used as a matter 
of course, as IlatAos kAnTOs azoorodos (1 Cor. 1:1). Sometimes the 
structure is changed and the nominative is left suspended as 6 wuxdz 
ddéow aitg (Rey. 3:21). Other examples of broken structure with 
the nominative are 7y juépus tpes (Matt. 15:32), pact zpacrai 
(Mark 6:40), id0b gov) &« rv otpavOv (Matt. 3:17), dvopa aire 
‘Iwdvys (John 1:6). This ‘‘parenthetic nominative’? (Moulton) is 
common in the papyri. As a matter of fact these ‘‘nominatives 
absolute are the most frequent and the most distinctly marked”’ 
(Winer) of any of the absolute uses of the cases, i. e., cases with 
no distinct connection with the sentence. See Acts 7:40, 6 yap 
Mwvojs otros. It is used in exclamations as in Matt. 3:17. So in 
Rom. 7:24, tadairwpos éy avOpwros. The use of the nominative 
form as vocative is really vocative and is treated under that case. 

4. The vocative. 

(a) This is the case of address (xr@ous kAXyTiKy) and it is justified 
in usage, though strictly it is not a case so far as the form goes. 
In the Sanskrit ‘‘the vocative is not considered and named by the 
native grammarians as a case like the rest’? (Whitney, Sanskrit 
Grammar, p. 89). It is not distinguished from the nominative 
save in the singular and not always there. When it is so distin- 
guished in the Sanskrit, it is either the mere stem or the accent is 
changed. Besides, the vocative is not an inherent part of the sen- 
tence; and yet, though without case endings, it has to be treated 
as a case for practical syntactical purposes. 

(b) The vocative is used by itself as Hdrep (John 17:1) or with 
® as in Rom. 2:1, & dv@pere. Thus in the plural & dvdpes Tovdaton 
(Acts 18:14) or dvdpes “AOnvaton (Acts 17:22), just as in the older 
Greek. 


(c) But the distinctive forms (merely the root) rarep and O¥yarep 


92 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


are not always used in the vocative, the nominative forms appear- 
ing also as Ilarjp (John 17:24) and 6vyarnp (Mark 5:34). We even 
have Iarjp déckave in John 17:25. Note & wAyjpys, not wAjpes, in Acts 
13:10. The nominative form is used in apposition to the vocative 
form as in the Sanskrit and Homer. Thus © dy6pw7e, ras 6 xpiver, 
Rom. 2:1. 

(d) The article with the nominative form, as aboye, is very 
common in the New Testament, though it is not unknown to the 
older Greek. It is the rule in address in the Hebrew and Aramaic 
(cf. aBBa 6 waryp, Mk. 14:36) and some of the examples are direct 
translations of the Aramaic as Mark 14:36 (above) and 76 kopdovov 
(rade6a) in Mark 5:41. But this is by no means always the case, 
for see 7d puxpdv zotuvov (Luke 12:32), you little flock. In Matt. 
11:26 6 zaryp is the practical equivalent of zarep in the preceding 
verse (Simcox, Language of the N. T., p. 76). 

(e) These must be called vocatives though they have the form 
of the nominative. So 6eés in the New Testament, as in the older 
Greek, is the nominative form always save in one quotation from 
the Septuagint (Matt. 27:46). We thus have xvpe 6 Oeds in Rev. 
15:3. It is not surprising therefore to find Thomas saying in 
direct address to Jesus, not exclamation, “O kvpios pov Kat 6 Geds pov 
(John 20:28). The form is nominative, but the case is vocative. 

5. The accusative. 

(a) The name is not very clear (rréavs airatuy). It is more 
probably derived from air in the sense of cause, rather than of 
accusation. Priscian calls it casus causativus. It is then by name 
the causative case, though that is again yery vague. ‘‘Accuse’’ in 
old English meant to betray or show, but the showing case would 
not distinguish it from the other oblique cases. 

(b) Howeyer, it is the oldest case and the other oblique cases 
are variations or after developments. The accusative is the normal 
oblique case for a noun unless there is some reason for it to be used 
in some other case. The presumption then is in favor of the use 
of the accusative. Even the oldest form of éya is éydéyv (cf. Sanskrit 
aham). The accusative is used with verbs, substantives, and 
adjectives. 


THE CASES. 93 


(c) The root idea of the accusative is extension whether of 
thought or the result of verbal action. In a general way it answers 
the question ‘‘How far?’’ (Giles, Comparative Philology, p. 303). 
The relation of the noun to the verb or other noun as shown by the 
accusative is very indefinite. The precise nature of the relation is 
determined by the character of the yerb and the noun. It is not 
known what the ending m(v) comes from. Some scholars consider 
it allied to Sanskrit ma, Greek we, others think it merely a local 
termination. 

(d) The truth seems to be that originally the accusative was 
used very loosely even after the other oblique cases arose, when 
one did not wish to differentiate sharply, so that even a point of 
space or of time could be expressed by the accusative in Sanskrit 
and even in the N. T., as épay évarny (some MSS. in Acts 10:3), apav 
éB8ounv (John 4:52), zofav dpav 7&w (Rey. 3:3). 

(e) In fact in the vernacular Greek the accusative retains its old 
frequency as the normal case with verbs where the written style 
uses other cases (Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen Vulgarsprache, 
S. 828-333), rather than locative, instrumental, dative, and even 
genitive and ablative. The same thing is observable in the old 
poets. Pindar, for example, has ‘‘a multiplicity of accusatives’’ 
(Giles). In the modern Greek the accusative has regained its old 
frequency to the corresponding disuse of the other cases. ‘‘When 
a fine sense for language is failing, it is natural to use the direct 
accusative to express any object which verbal action affects, and 
so to efface the difference between ‘transitive’ and ‘intransitive’ 
verbs’’ (Jebb, in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook to Modern Greek, 
p- 807). Hence many verbs that were intransitive in the written 
style are transitive in the vernacular as seen in the New Testament, 
papyri, and modern Greek. The use of the other oblique cases 
served to make fine distinctions. When these distinctions were 
not sharply perceived, the use of the cases faded. The accusative 
then has made a circle. In the beginning it was the only case. 
It is again the normal case in modern Greek. So in the New Test- 
ament we have of xpwpevor tov kdopov (1 Cor. 7:31) instead of the 
instrumental 7 kxoopw (cf. utor in Latin). The accusative with 


. 


94 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


xp7o0a is found in Cretan inscriptions and in late Greek. In Acts 
27:22 Luke has zapaw yas and not the dative tyiv. Soin Rev. 
2:14 we have éd/dacxev 7G Badax (dative) as in some late writers, 
perhaps partly influenced by Hebrew. 

(f) But in general we can easily see the root idea of the accusa- 
tive. For convenience we may analyze the examples and explain 
them in the light of the root idea and the history. 

(g) Extension naturally found first expression with verbs of 
motion. In Sanskrit ‘‘it stands especially as the goal of motion, 
with verbs of going, bringing, sending, and the like’’ (Whitney, 
Sanskrit Grammar, p. 92). In Homer this use is common with 
yerbs which imply reaching a point and in the poets the idiom con- 
tinued to be frequent both as to place and persons. In English we 
say, go home, where home is accusative. This original use of the 
accusative is not preserved in the New Testament, but in Matt. 
4:15 é86v bardooys is closely related to it, by way of the sea. 

(h) Extension of space is clearly expressed by the accusative 
and is anormal development from verbs of moticn. So in John 
6:19 we have the idiom common to all Greek, éAynAaxéres otv ds 
atadious eikoo. revte 7 Tpidxovta. This sometimes is in the Sanskrit, 
Latin, Greek, English, ete. 

‘Gi) Duration of time is distinctly conveyed by the root idea of 
the accusative. This idiom is a common one in the Indo-germanic 
languages. Ti &d€ eoryKare OAnv THY jyEpav apyol; (Matt. 20:6). So 
in Luke 15:29 we have rocatra érn SovAedw cor. Compare ék dnvapiov 
tiv hp<pav (Matt. 20:2). But note above the old use of the accusa- 
tive where duration cannot be accented (John 4:52). 

(j) With verbs that are transitive the accusative is the natural 
case for the expression of the extension of the action of the verb to 
an external object. Not all verbs in Greek are transitive, and the 
same verb is not always transitive as €uevov quads (Acts 20:5), but 
guevey wap’ avrois (Acts 18:3). Besides it is not a question whether 
the verb is transitive in Sanskrit or in English, but in Greek, as 
pry Opvdere pyre Tov obpavov pare Tiv ypv (James 5:12). So rov warepa 
abrois €Xeyev (John 8:27). The Greek could look at émvuye as trans- 
itive in the sense of swearing by and Aéyw in the sense of speaking 


THE CASES, ~ 95 


about. Moreover, when the verb is transitive, it does not have to use 
the accusative, if some other case is considered more in harmony 
with the idea to be expressed. So éwAavOdvopa is used with the ac- 
cusative in Phil. 3:13 7a pév dzicw, but with the genitive in Heb. 
13:2 irogevias. Sometimes the difference is quite marked as with 
dxovovres pev THs Povas (Acts 9:7) and tiv dé dori otk jyeovoav (Acts 
22:9). Once more, verbal phrases may be looked at as transitive, 
when the verb itself is intransitive, as ”"Apyovra Tod Aaod cov oiK épets 
kax@s (Acts 23:5), and drav xadds ipas eixwow (Luke 6:26). But 
the great bulk of the accusatives with transitive verbs call for no 
remark as éxdédecev aitovs (Matt. 4:21), éxrycaro xwpiov (Acts 1:18). 

(k) Some verbs may use an accusative of the inner object or 
content (Delbrueck), or of the outer objective result. The action 
of the verb expresses itself in a word of the same root as époByOnoav 
poBov péyav (Mark 4:41), @vdrdcoovtes pvdAaxas (Luke 2:8), the so- 
called cognate accusative. Here again the idea of extension is 
obvious and vital. Sometimes the word is not identical in root, 
but only similar in sense as dpxov Ov Gooey (Luke 1:73). In this 
last example as in others the relative is used thus as éydmrn qv jyd- 
myods pe (Jo. 17:26). The accusative naturally expresses the ob- 
jective result in the same way as dpaptavovta dpaptiav (1 John 5:16), 
0 dreGavey. . . . 0 de £7 (Rom. 6:10). 

(1) Some verbs, moreoyer, can be used with two accusatives or, 
if time or space be considered, with three. This double accusative 
is very common in the Sanskrit. The second accusative may be 
simply in apposition with the first as ovkére A€yw tas Sovrovs, a 
predicate accusative. But eis is often used with this predicate ac- 
cusative as es tpopyrny atrov efxov (Matt. 21:46). One accusatiye 
may be of the person and the other of the thing as ékeivos tuds ddater 
mavra (John 14:26), dv airyoe 6 vids aitod dprov (Matt. 7:9), r¢ otv 
monow “Incotv (Matt. 27:22), épwrjcw tuas kayo Adyov &a (Matt. . 
21:24), évdidvoxovew aitov ropdipay (Mark 15:17), dpxiLw oe tov Oedv 
(Mark 5:7), €xpuré ve . . . . EAatov (Heb. 1:9). With airéw the 
person could be put in the ablative. So zapa& and ablative in Acts 
3:2, and ddapetrae dx’ éuod (Luke 16:3). With évdidioxw the gar- 
ment could be put in the locative or the instrumental. Compare 


96 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


meptBareirar ev inariow Nevkois (Rey. 3:5). With xp‘ the instrumental 
case could be used as in Acts 10:38 (avevpare dyiw). So the double 
accusative is sometimes optional. The accusative of the thing may 
be cognate as in Eph. 2:4 above or causative as in Mark 9:41 és 
yip av rotiocn tuas motypiov vOaros. Sometimes the adjective alone 
expresses one of the accusatives as tpas obdtv SpeAjoe (Gal. 5:2). 
(m) Some yerbs use the accusative eyen in the passive. It is 
a mistake to associate the accusative in one’s mind simply with 
the active voice. Many verbs are intransitive in the active voice, 
while the middle voice is just as likely to be transitive as the 
active, and indeed the passive voice may also be transitive, though 
in the nature of the case this is not so frequent as with the other 
voices. But it is to be remembered that the passive is an after 
development and may retain some of the force of the early form. 
Certainly the passive form gradually encroached on the middle 
and sometimes loses its passive idea (passive deponents). Some 
of these passive deponents are transitive and are used with the 
accusative, as pi) oby PoByOjre adrovs (Matt. 10:26). But in Matt. 
10:28 note dé rév droxrevovrwv. The present middle oBeiobe is 
intransitive in Matt. 10:31 and transitive in Matt. 10:28. See also 
evtparnoovra Tov viov pov (Matt. 21:37), éav érauxvvOy pe (Mark 
8:38), prynv Cyprwb7G (Matt. 16:26). Sanskrit had no proper pas- 
sive voice, but in Greek, Latin, and English some verbs that had 
two accusatives retain the accusative of the thing in the passive. 
This is natural, for the other alternatives would be a predicate 
nominative (as happens with verbs of calling, naming, making. 
for example, Heb. 5:10) or another oblique case. With the pas- 
_ sive of dddoxw the accusative is the only recourse in Greek, Latin, - 
and English, as as éddax6yre (2 Thess. 2:15), but with verbs like 
mepiBdddw either the accusative is possible (as usually), wepeBeB- 
Anpevous aToAds Aevkds (Rey. 7:9), or the locative, wepyBeBAnuevous év 
ipatiows Aevxois (Rey. 3:4). See also dedenévos rods wodas .... Kat 
H dis abrod covdapiw mweprededero (John 11:44), dapyjoerar ddAfyas (Luke 
12:47), 0 eye BarriLopa (Mark 10:38), oixovoptav wemlorevpoe (1 Cor. 
9:17), dvepOappevor tov voty (1 Tim. 6:5), where there was only one 
accusative in the active or middle, that of the thing, the person 


THE CASES. 97 


being in the dative. The Greek has more liberty than the Latin 
and can turn this dative into the nominative verbal subject and 
retain the accusative of the thing as in case of two accusatives. In- 
deed by analogy the Greek can greatly extend this construction as 
see memAnpwpmevor kaprov Suaooivys (Phil. 1:11), rHv airiy eixdva pera- 
poppovpeba (2 Cor. 3:18), and even rh aAvow zepikepor (Acts 28:20) 
where the passive of the verb zeputi@yu is evidently in accord- 
ance with ancient usage. There is also one example of the 
accusative with the verbal in réov in Luke 5:88, oivov véov . . . BXry- 
Tov. 

(n) Then again the accusative as the case of extension may be 

the case of substantives or adjectives apart from any verb, as év 
tporov (Matt. 25:37), rov dpvOudv (John 6:10), 7a zpos tov Oedv (Heb. 
2:17). In the Sanskrit ‘‘the neuter accusative of innumerable ad- 
jectives, simple or compound, is used adyerbially’’ (Whitney, 
Sanskrit Grammar, p. 93). The adverb is merely a word in a fixed 
case. The Greek used a multitude of such accusatives as adverbs 
not only in the neuter (singular and plural), but in the masculine 
and the feminine singular of substantives, and the feminine singu- 
lar of adjectives. So odd ozovdadrepov (2 Cor. 8:22), word exoriacer 
(Rom. 16.6), tiv dpxyv (John 8:25), dwpecy (Matt. 10:8). This 
use of the accusative is in perfect harmony with the idea of the 
case. 
(0) The accusative is used with the infinitive, not merely as 
object, but in a general way as the person connected with the 
action. The infinitive, like the participle, cannot have a subject, 
but it can indicate the person who has to do with the action, when 
not otherwise clear, by the accusative. So wadw xpetav éxere rod 
diddoxew buds Twa Ta oTorxeia (Heb. 5:12), ev rd cicayayeiv tors yoveis 
76 madiov “Incoty (Luke 2:27). This use of the accusative is found 
also in Latin and Anglo-Saxon and is in thorough accord with the 
idea of the case. The action stated in the infinitive holds good as 
far as the person mentioned is concerned. 

(p) There remains still the accusative absolute. The grammars 
generally mean by this a participle and substantive in the accusa- 
tive. ute even here the accusative is not out of line with its own 


98 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


idea, though the connection with the sentence is not very close. 
In 1 Cor. 16:6 rvxév is an example of the neuter accusative parti- 
ciple so used. There is a still larger connection of thought. An 
example may probably be found in yvdorny ovra ce (Acts 26:3), 
unless an anacoluthon is allowed. Even then the fact remains 
and the accusative is not difficult of explanation. In Rom. 8:3 
76 ddvvatov Tod vouov May be a nominative absolute, but is just as 
naturally the accusative. In Rom. 12:18 the parenthetic phrase 
To e€& tpov is accusative. 

(q) The accusative is frequently used with prepositions which 
merely accent the idea of extension in a more specialized way. 
The prepositions do not then properly govern the case, but are 
rather fuller expressions of the precise idea of the case, being them- 
selves properly adverbs. Thus we haye ava péoov (Mark 7:31), da 
tov poBov (John 7:13), eis tHv wodAw (Matt. 26:18), ext tHv ynv (Matt. 
15:35), xara tov vopov (Luke 2:22), pera quépas tpets (Luke 2:46), 
mapa THv ddov (Matt. 20:30), wept adrév (Matt. 8:18), xpos adrov (Matt. 
3:5), trép SovAov (Philemon 16), td tov pddiov (Matt. 5:15). 

6. The genitive. 

(a) It is no longer open to dispute that in Greek two cases, the 
genitive and the ablative, are found with the same ending. Moul- 
ton properly calls Winer’s definition of the genitive as ‘“‘unques- 
tionably the whence-case’’ ‘‘an utterly unjustifiable procedure.’’ It 
is hopeless to try to find the explanation of the genitive in the ab- 
lative as Kuehner and Crosby did or the ablative in the genitive 
as Madvig attempted. Comparative grammar has settled this 
matter. The two cases happen in Greek to have the same form, but 
do not have the same idea, though examples occur that can be 
explained either as genitive or ablative. 

(b) The genitiye has the wrong name. It is not casus genitivus 
or moots yevytuy, but rather mrdouws yerwy as the Stoic gramma- 
rians called it. It is, then, the case of yévos, genus, kind, species, 
in a word the specifying case. It is thus a descriptive case and is 
in function adjectival, though it is not adjectival in origin. See 
qpepa mapackevns (Luke 23:54). It is a mistaxe to explain the 
ending os or oo as derived from the adjectival suffix, though it is 


THE CASES. 99 


not known what the origin of the genitive ending is. It may be 
pronominal. 

(c) The use of the genitive was greatly extended in the later 
Sanskrit, and in the modern Greek it has maintained itself far 
better than the dative. The form has survived better in the Indo- 
European languages than that of any of the other cases. In fact 
in the modern Greek the form shares with the accusative the result 
of the loss of the dative. We have such constructions as rod 76 eza, 
I told himso. But in the New Testament the genitive form is not 
so used. The real genitive always tells the kind or species. It is 
this and no other. 

(d) The resultant idea will naturally greatly vary according as 
this root conception is applied to different words and different con- 
texts. It must never be forgotten that the varying resultant idea 
does not-involve a change in the root idea of the case. The error 
must not be made of mistaking the translation of this resultant 
idea for the philosophical or historical explanation of the case 
itself. Meroxeoiav BaBvAdvos (Matt. 1:12) is translated removal to 
Babylon, but surely the genitive does not mean ‘‘to.’’ It is dif- 
ficult to make a satisfactory grouping of a case with so many pos- 
sible combinations in detail, and the simplest analysis is the best. 
The true idea of the case will be found everywhere. 

(e) The use of the genitive with substantives is uniform in 
essence, but varied in application. 

(1) The local use of the genitive is the most objective and 
probably the earliest as with most of the cases. The local adyerbs 
aiTod, ov, Orov, Tov, wavTaxod, duod are all probably in the genitive 
case, though it is possible that they are short forms of the locative 
form -of&. In Homer the genitive is thus used freely, especially 
with negatives as otk "Apyeos ev. So in the New Testament we 
have ov povov "Edecov GAG oxedov maons THs Aaias 6 IlatXos ovtos retcas 
peréotnce ixavdy dxdov (Acts 19:26). This usage survived in the 
vernacular and the poets. The poets are often the best source for 
actual usage of the people. Compare the Latin Romae, humi 
(really locative forms) and the Greek idiom zod yjs. It is not 
surprising therefore to find the genitiye used with such local prep- 


100 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ositions (adverbs) as émt, wepi, werd, évtds, tAyolov, Evexev, évavtedv. 
Homer can say Aover Oa rorapoio, to bathe in a river, and Luke can 
use iva Baby Td axpov tod SaxTiAov avrod datos (16:24), where védaros 
emphasizes clearly the kind of material in which he was to dip his 
finger. The genitive is not only used with the idea of rest, but 
even where the conception of motion is involyed, though the geni- 
tive does not, like the accusatiye, accent extension, but genus. In 
Matt. 1:11 and 12 peroxecia BaBvdAdvos is thus properly a Babylon 
removal. In itself it could be a removal to Babylon or from Baby- 
lon and the solution we must seek elsewhere than in this phrase. 
The same thing holds true in regard to 7 dcropa tov “EAAjvwv 
(John 7:35) and 63s e6vav (Matt. 10:5). It is in fact the disper- 
sion of the Jews among the Greeks and the way to the Gentiles. 
Note also zotas cigevéyxwow aitév (Luke 5:19), and éxetvys (Luke 
19:4). 

(2) The root idea of the genitive is very plain in expressions of 
time, the genitive of selection, this rather than some other time. In 
Luke 18:7 jpépas xai vuxros do not emphasize the wholeness of either 
day or night as in Luke 2:37 (vikra xat qépav), but rather that both 
day and night are included. So also péons vucrds (Matt. 25:6). See 
also 76 Aowev (Heb. 10:13) and rot Aourod (Gal. 6:17). In Matt. 
24:20 the distinction is seen between the genitive xemdvos as the 
case of genus and the locative caBBdrw expressing a point of time. 
It is not strange to see Sis tod caBBarov (Luke 18:12) and drag rod 
évavtod (Heb. 9:7). In the New Testament, however, prepositions 
occur very often with expressions of time with either the accusa- 
tiye, genitive, or locative case, as «fs woddd éry (Luke 12:19), 8 
qpepov (Mark 2:1), év rd waoya ev rH €opty (John 2:23). 

(3) In the Sanskrit there are hardly any possessive adjectives. 
Possession is the most obvious and the most usual use of the geni- 
tive case, as watdéas tov dodAov Tod dpxtepews adeiAov avTod TO wriov 
(Matt. 26:51). It is the high priest’s servant, not that of another, 
and it is the servant’s ear, not another’s. Sometimes the relation- 
ship is not clearly defined, but is assumed as plain. So Mapia 
"Tax Bov (Luke 24:10) is James’s Mary, which might be his mother, 
wife, or daughter. We learn from elsewhere that it is his mother, 


THE CASES. 101 


Often the genitive is used simply with the article, where the con- 
text explains, as of rod Xpiorod (Gal. 5:24), especially the neuter 
article as ta Kafoapos (Mark 12:17). 

(4) Indeed the genitive may express identity (apposition) as 
ToXes Yodduwv Kat Toudppas (2 Pet. 2:6), 9 oixia rot oxyvovs (2 Cor. 
5:1). The genitive characterizes the substantive as 76 c@pa tis 
dpaptias (Rom. 6:6), 6 oixovdmos tis aduxias (Luke 16:8), though it 
must not be regarded as identical with the adjective (see év xawéryte 
fwns, Rom. 6:4), and even expressions like viol gwrds (1 Thess. 
5:5) are shown by the papyri not to be mere Hebraisms, but in 
accord with general Greek idiom. 

(5) It is not alone quality that can be expressed by the geni- 
tive, but also a partitive sense (possibly ablative), as 76 déaroy Tis 
moAews (Rey. 11:13), and sometimes such a genitive is found alone 
with no noun as the subject of the verb as ovv@dOov 88 kal tov pabyrov 
(Acts 21:16). The genitive naturally expresses price as dyvapiov 
(Rev. 6:6). 

(6) The genitive may be either subjective as 9 yap éyamrn tod 
Xpurrod ovvéexe quads (2 Cor. 5:14) where it is Christ’s love for Paul 
that constrains him, or objective as €xere riotw Oeod (Mark 11:22) 
or ézt evepyeoia avOpdov daGevots (Acts 4:9) when the good deed is 
done to the man, not by him. In 7% 6€ rod rvevuatos BAacdnpia 
(Matt. 12:31) we have a good instance of the objective genitive. 
There is nothing in the genitive itself to determine when the usage 
is subjective or objective. In itself it is neither. That is a matter 
for the context. 

(7) Ina word the genitive is the general or genus case and the 
precise specifying les in the word, not the case. Bémtipa petavoias 
(Mark 1:4) is therefore repentance baptism; what the precise rela- 
tion is between the two is not set forth by the case. In rh yeevvay 
tov wupds (Matt. 5:22) Gehenna is described as characterized by fire. 

(8) Most frequently the genitive comes after the limiting word 
as in Matt. 5:22 above, but observe “EAAjvev word rAHGos (Acts 14:1) 
and 7 Tot rvevpatos BAaodypia (Matt. 12:51). 

(9) Two and even three genitives can be used together, as tov 
pwticpov Tod evayyeAiov THs ddEyns TOD Xpiorod (2 Cor, 4:4). 


102 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


(f) The use of the genitive with adjectives is naturally more or 
less parallel to that with substantives. So aévov rijs petavoias (Matt. 
3:8), wAjpys xépitos (John 1:14) though Latin here has the abla- 
tive (or is it instrumental?) with plenus, cvppopdovs tis eixovos (Rom. 
8:29), €voxos aiwviov duaptyjpatos (Mark 3:29), évvouos Xpiorod (1 Cor. 
9:21), and even 74 avré trav rabqudrwv (1 Pet. 5:9). Occasionally 
the participle is so used as 70 ei@opevov Tod vopwov (Luke 2:27). 

(g) Adverbs and hence prepositions may be used with the geni- 
_ tive when the meaning of the adverb is in accord with the idea of 
the case. So d&lws trav dylwy (Rom. 16:2), and prepositions like 
peragd Tov vaod Kal rod Ovoworypiov (Matt. 23:35), éyyis tis Avddas 
(Acts 9:38), rAnovov rod xwpiov (John 4:5), gow judy (2 Cor. 4:16), 
evtos tpov (Luke 17:21), péxpe ris ojpepov juepas (Matt. 28:15), ews 
tod Xpiorod (Matt. 1:17), dxpe Idpov (Acts 13:6), evexev euod (Matt. 
10:18), éxt ris ys (Col. 1:16), we qydv (Matt. 1:23), war’ éuod 
(Luke 11:23), wept rod “Igoot (Acts 28:23), dvtt rodAAGv (Matt. 20:28), 
da Tod tpopytov (Matt. 1:22). 

(h) The genitive is very common with verbs, where the idea of 
species is accented. With verbs the genitive is this and no other, 
while the accusative with verbs is this and no more (Broadus). 

(1) What is called the predicate genitive is a very obvious use 
of the case as mdvra tyav éorw (1 Cor. 3:21). 

(2) Some verbs lend themselves more readily to the idea of the 
genitive, though very few verbs can be said always to require the 
genitive rather than the accusative. See previous discussion of 
the accusative. So some verbs of sensation as wdvta pov péuvnobe 
(1 Cor. 11:2) like vernacular English ‘‘remember of’’ pvnmovevere 
THs yuvaixos Adr (Luke 17:32), but prnpovedvere rods révre dptovs (Matt. 
16:9) ; émAabecba tod Epyou tuav (Heb. 6:10), but 7a pev édriow ém- 
AavGavopevos (Phil. 3:13); abrod dkovere (Mark 9:7), but jxovoe tov 
domacpov (Luke 1:41); yevoeral pov rod Sefrvov (Luke 14:24), but 
éyevouto TO vowp (John 2:9) ; éys cov dvacuny (Philemon 20), éuzvéwy 
dreAns (Acts 9:1); wav Onpiov Oiyn rod dpovs (Heb. 12:20); xadrod 
épyou émBupet (1 Tim. 3:1), but éribvpjoa airyv (Matt. 5:28); 
émiokorns dpéyerae (1 ‘Tim. 3:1), yéuovow doréwy (Matt. 23:27), but 
yepovta dvopata Braodnuias (Rey. 17:8). 


THE CASES, 108 


(8) Another group of verbs that often use the genitive exhibit 
one’s concern for, or estimate of, a matter. These verbs do not 
differ greatly from the preceding list, as éweweAnOy adrod (Luke 
10:34); pay OdAtydpe madelas Kvpiov (Heb. 12:5); trav idiwv od zpovoe 
(1 Tim. 5:8); rod iddov viod otk éfefoaro (Rom. 8:52); mpabjves 
modAod (Matt. 26:9); avycaro tiuns apyvpiov (Acts 7:16); éyxadciobae 
aracews (Acts 19:40) ; deaAgjs tynis avcovcPwoav (1 Tim. 5:17). 

(4) There is still another group of verbs of a more objective 
character as of doxodvres apxew Tov eOvav KataKupievovow aitdv (Mark 
10:42); Baorever THs “lovdaias (Matt. 2:22); ris tuav efovoias pere- 
xovow (1 Cor. 9:12); Kexowdynxev aiyaros (Heb. 2:14), but pip cowover 
dpaptias adXotpias (1 Tim. 5:22); éreAaBero atrod (Matt. 14:31); 
expatynoe THS Xepos adTns (Matt. 9:25), but xparyoas tov “Iwavyy (Matt. 
14:3); mdcas abrov tis xepds (Acts 3:7); Tod Evds avOekerar (Luke 
16:13). Some verbs eyidently use the genitive as a result of the 
change of idea wrought in the verb by the preposition xaré used in 
composition, as aicxvvyns katadpovycas (Heb. 12:2), cov xatapapre- 
povow (Matt. 27:13), xareyéAwy airod (Matt. 9:24). 

(5) It is not possible to decide positively whether what is called 
the genitive absolute is genitive or ablative. In Sanskrit the in- 
strumental (associative) is sometimes so used and the locative 
often, while in Anglo-Saxon the dative is the case for absolute 
clauses with a participle. This is especially true of Wycliff, but 
this dative form is sometimes instrumental. In Latin the case so 
used is the ablative as generally considered, but here again the 
instrumental and the ablative have the same form. Mullach 
(Grammatik, p. 857) says that in Greek the genitive absolute be- 
longs to the higher style, and was not used much in the vernac- 
ular. In the modern Greek vernacular (Jebb) this idiom has 
practically disappeared and conjunctions and finite verbs are used 
instead. But in the papyri this construction is used with great 
frequency and freedom. In the New Testament the usage is hardly 
so common and occurs chiefly in the historical books. Note dva- 
x»pyrdvtwv aitav (Matt. 2:13). Sometimes, as in the earlier Greek, 
the genitive absolute is used where the participle might have been 
made to agree with a substantive or pronoun in the sentence, as 


104 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


Tavita b€ aitod évOvpnbevros epavy aito (Matt. 1:20), and eyen when 
it is the subject of the principal verb as prynorevbetons ris pytpos 
airod Mapias . . . . etpéOy (Matt. 1:18). If this construction is 
really the genitive, and not ablative, the genitive of the substan- 
tive or pronoun has its usual explanation and the participle is an 
adjective in agreement. 

7. The ablative. The remaining uses of the genitive form, not 
genitive in idea, are ablative. The old ablative ending ¢ or d, seen 
in some words, Latin inscriptions like domod, Greek &s(r), w@s(7), 
oipavobev, Umbrian tu (out of), Anglo-Saxon @t (out of), is held by 
some to be demonstrative like Sanskrit ta. But, whatever may be 
true as to the origin of the original ending, the idea of the case is 
clear. It is the case of origin or separation, casus ablativus as 
Julius Caesar called it, rrGous dpaperixy. This is the ‘‘whence’’ 
case of Winer. Like the genitive, the ablative is used possibly 
with substantives, certainly with adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, 
and verbs. 

(a) Homer could say 6rtyq dvdzavos rod<noro, short is the rest 
from war. But, as in Latin the ablative disappears from use with 
substantives, so in Greek, unless indeed some examples of the so- 
called partitive genitive may not more properly be considered 
ablative, as €v rovrwy (Matt. 6:29). This is rendered more prob- 
able by the frequent use of dé or é€ with the ablative in similar 
examples, as riva dé trav dv0 (Matt. 27:21), ris e€ tuGv (Luke 12:25). 
It is possible to think of duarortvy Geos (Rom. 1:17) as ablative, 
righteousness from God, but it is more likely the genitive, God’s 
kind of righteousness. 

(b) But certainly the ablative occurs in the New Testament 
with some adjectives. It is common enough in the earlier Greek 
as in Plato érurrjpns Kevds, eAevOepos aidods. So fevor trav duabyxdv 
(Eph. 2:12), dwe/paoros xaxév (James 1:13), and other verbal ad- 
jectives like didaxrot Oeod (John 6:45), Sidaxrots avetyaros (1 Cor. 
2:18) 5 yevvytois yuvarxdv (Matt. 11:11), «Anrot Incod Xpurrod (Rom. 
1:6), and participles also as etAoynnévoe rod ratpds (Matt. 25:34). 
Moreoyer, the ablative may be used after the comparative form of 
the adjective, pelwv tod xvpfov (John 13:16), puxpdrepos mdvror 


THE CASES. 105 


(Mark 4:31), and also after the superlative as mp@rdés pov (John 
TLS); 

(c) The ablative is very common in the New Testament with 
adverbs and so with prepositions. The growth of prepositions in 
addition to the mere case is especially noticeable with the ablative. 
So xwpls wapaBorjs (Matt. 13:34), avev yoyyvopod (1 Peter 4:9), éx- 
Tos TOU awpatos (1 Cor. 6:18), e&w ris oixias (Matt. 10:14), arep dxAov 
(Luke 22:6), ew6ev tis woXews (Rev. 14:20), rAjv tod wAovov (Acts 
27:22); possibly also ériow pov (Matt. 3:11), eurpoobev tay avOparwv 
(Matt. 5:16), wépav rod “Iopdavov (Matt. 4:25), troxarw trav moder 
(Mark 6:11); so also dé cod (Matt. 5:29), e« rod vdatos (Mark 
1:10), wap airdv (Matt. 2:4), ixd rdvtwv (Acts 22:12), trép mavrov 
(2 Cor. 5:15), rpo tot racya (John 11:55), mpos rHs tuerepas cwrnpias 
(Acts 27:34). The ablative idea of comparison (separation) is in 
several of these prepositions. A number of adyerbs are them- 
selves in the ablative as ovtws, was, dvw, etc. 

(d) The ablative occurs rather often with verbs (though not so 
frequently as the accusative, genitive, or dative), where the idea 
of separation or origin is dominant. So idéas émAvoews od yiverat 
(2 Peter 1:20), av twes aoroyjoavtes (1 Tim. 1:6), exddAvoey aitods 
tod BovAjpatos (Acts 27:45), qv jxotcaré pov (Acts 1:4), éxparodvro 
Too py emvyvava (Luke 24:16), torepotvra: ris d0&ys tov Oeod (Rom. 
3:23), Aelwerar codias (James 1:5), denn avrod (Luke 5:12), décw 
avT@ Tov pavva (Rey. 2:17) where the part is contrasted with the 
whole (compare the ablative in é« rot aprov éoOéerw, 1 Cor. 11:28, 
and éoGie dro tov yrixiwy, Matt. 15:27), ov Bpadiver kipios Tis émay- 
yeAtas (2 Peter 3:9); so also with a number of compound verbs as 
apicrato tov iepod (Luke 2:37), imepBadrAovoay THs yvdoews (Hph. 
3:19), danAAotpropevae THs Cwons (Eph. 4:18), amoorjcovrat twes Tis 
miatews (1 Tim. 4:1), dreorepypevwr tis ddnOeias (1 Tim. 6:5), dia¢- 
epere adtav (Matt. 6:26). Cf. also tis xapitos eSeréoate (Gal. 5:4). 
In examples like Heb. 12:11, ov Soxe? yapas efvar dda Avrys, and 
Acts 20:3, éyévero yrduns, we probably have the ablative. See 
émAvoews in 2 Peter 1:20. 

8. The locative. In Greek most of the dative and instrumental 
examples are locative in form. Bopp considered the locative end- 


106 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ing 7 to be the root of the old demonstrative pronoun. But in 
actual Greek usage locative forms are used also as instrumental 
and dative, while dative forms are used freely as locative and in- 
strumental (Giles, Comparative Philology, p. 330). The case is very 
common in the Sanskrit with its distinctive ending, while in Latin 
these three cases and the ablative have the same form save that in 
the singular the dative sometimes has a separate ending. In Gothic 
the three cases have no distinction in form, but in Anglo-Saxon 
the instrumental and the dative have separate endings and some 
locatives occur as here, there, where. See Skeat and March. The 
Latin uses the locative case freely as hwmi, Romae (ai), Corinthi. In 
Homer the locative is far more common than in the later Greek, 
while in the modern Greek vernacular the locative along with the 
datiye disappears save with a few prepositions. The significance 
of the locative is very simple. In Sanskrit Whitney calls it the in 
case, and so it is in Greek. It indicates a point within limits and 
corresponds in idea with the English in, on, among, at, by, the re- 
sultant conception varying according to the meaning of the words 
and the context. In every instance it is not hard to see the simple 
root idea of the case, a point with limits set by the word and con- 
text. 

(a) The locative is used thus with substantives and verbs to 
express location in space. In Homer it is very common to have 
the simple locative with names of towns, countries, crowds, ete. 
But in the New Testament, as usually in the Attic prose, a preposi- 
tion is nearly always so used with the locative as év’A@yvats (1 Thess. 
3:1). However observe Anotats repierecev, (Luke 10:30). In Jas. 
2:25 we have €érépa 666 éxBadovoa, and with several yerbs expressing 
the idea of going the locative is used as qopeveoOar tats ddots a’rav 
(Acts 14:16), orocxotor tots txveot (Rom. 4:12). But the old loca- 
tive with expressions of place is preserved in the adverb yapad 
(John 18:6), though otxo, atro&t, roé no longer appear in the New 
Testament. But xikAw (Mark 3:34) occurs several times. And 
the locative is still used with outward objects as t@ wAoupiv 7AOov 
(John 21:8), whereas in Matt. 14:13 we read év zAot; and in Luke 
3:16 we have téate BarriLw, while in Matt. 3:11 the text is Barrifw 


THE CASES. 107 


ev voatt, as in Mark 1:8; Acts 1:5; 11:16 the locatiyve téare appears 
without év. See also the locative in Eph. 5:26, xa6apicas 74 Novrpw 
tov voatos; John 19;2 
tots wooiv; and 1 Cor. 9:13, 7é Ovovaornpiw rapedpevovres. 

(b) The locative without a preposition is freely used with many 
expressions of time asin Sanskrit, Latin, Anglo-Saxon. Here, of 
course, the time is viewed as a point, not duration (accusative), 
nor distinction (genitive). Observe difference between 76 caBBatov 
and ty pug caBBarwv in Luke 24:1. So the locative occurs with 
expressions like 7 tpity qyépa (Matt. 20:19), ravrn rH vuerié (Luke 
12:20), airy rH dpa (Luke 2:38), rerdéptn pvdaxy (Matt. 14:25), ra 
oaBBérw (Luke 6:9), rots cadBBaow (Matt. 12:1), rH éopt7 (Luke 
2:41), érépas yeveats (Eph. 3:5), rots yeveoious airod (Mark 6:21). 
With most of the phrases mentioned above é is also used and 
other expressions of time always use év. The év adds little, if any- 
thing, in point of fact to the true idea of the locative case, but it 
constantly increases in use. The locative appears in some tem- 
poral adverbs as zépvor. (2 Cor. 8:10), ded (2 Cor. 6:10), marae (2 
Cor. 12:19). But Brugmann (Gr. Gr., 8. 252) considers zaAat 
and xapueé dative forms. 4 

(c) The locative is naturally common with many figurative ex- 
pressions without év as well as with év. The root idea of the case 
meets every demand for the explanation of all these examples as 
ot mTwXol TO rvevpate (Matt. 5:3), rots ecw wepirareiv (Acts 21:21), 
oxnpate eipebeis (Phil. 2:8), tH xaxia vymia€ere (1 Cor. 14:20), zopevo- 
pen TO POBw (Acts 9:51), Barricn tas mvevpate ayiw (Mark 1:8), 
Otay meipacpols TEepiTéeonte mrouiAos (James 1:2), xepoypadov Tots doy- 
paocw (Col, 2:14), xadapot 777 xapdia (Matt. 5:8). 

(d) The locative is not used in the Greek New Testament with 
as many prepositions as in Homer. Originally nearly all the prep- 
ositions used the locative, but this case gradually disappeared with 
most of these prepositional adverbs. So in the New Testament 
dui, peta, bd, ava, wep no longer use the locative, but, as in 
Homer (Monro, Homeric Grammar, p. 101), so in the New Testa- 
ment the locative is often used after verbs compounded with them 
as well as with év, wapd, éwi, See examples above. Here as always 


, €reOnxav advtov tH Kepady; Acts 14:8, advvatos 


108 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


the prepositions do not govern the locative, but ‘‘stand to it in the 
relation of adverbial elements strengthening and directing its mean- 
ing’? (Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar, p. 103). A number of prepo- 
sitions like dui, év (evi), emi, wept, tpds (azpori), are themselves in 
the locative case. There are only four prepositions that use the 
locative in the New Testament. They are év, éri, wapd, zpds. As 
examples see év 7G “lopdavy (Matt. 3:6), éxt @vpas (Matt. 24:33), 
Tapa TO otavpo tod ‘Incotd (John 19:25), apds rd prnuetw (John 
20:11). 

(e) What is called the pregnant construction of the locative or 
the accusative appears in the New Testament in connection with 
év and eis. In the older Greek the cases without prepositions were 
so used. In such instances either the accusative is used with a 
verb of rest as very often with es and zapd (so 6 «is rév dypov in 
Mark 13:16 and oradcoa ézicw rapa rots rddas aitod in Luke 7:38) or 
the locative is used with a yerb of motion as 6 éuBawas per’ éuod riv 
xeipa ev TH TpvBAw (Matt. 26:23) where Mark (14:20) has és 76 
tpvBdov. It is a difference of conception in harmony with each 
case. The accusative suggests extension and the locative empha- 
sizes location. The accusative is so used more frequently than the 
locative. Eis and éy were originally the same and és constantly 
encroaches on év. 

9. The instrumental case. The history of this case is not as clear 
as that of the others. It is possible that there are here two cases 
combined, an old associative case with the ending a as in dua, taxa, 
and the true instrumental case with the ending bhi for singular and 
bhis for plural. & does occur in Homer for the singular as Geddx 
and dw for the plural as 6eopw, but in Homer these endings are 
used not only for the instrumental, but also for the locative, the 
ablative, and possibly the dative also (Brugmann, Giriechische 
Grammatik, S. 239). Moreover in the Sanskrit singular a is the 
ending and in the plural dhis. It is possible therefore that we have 
only the one case, which has developed the instrumental idea from 
that of association. The two conceptions are close kin and it is not 
hard for association to develop into agent or instrument. Our 
English with is a pertinent example which originally had merely 


THE CASES. 109 


the idea of association (by, near), but has developed into that of 
agency. And the same thing is true of by. It is proper therefore 
to treat it as one case with the original significance of mere associa- 
tion and a later idea of instrumental association. It was once used 
with expressions of place but it no longer so appears in the New 
Testament unless érépa 686 exBadotoa (James 2:25) be so taken (loca- 
tive most probably). Even ory and 77 are not used in the New 
Testament. But in Westcott and Hort’s text for Acts 21:28 we do 
have TaVvTAXy. 

(a) The instrumental does occur in the N. T. in expressions of 
time where a considerable period of time is presented. The acc. 
might here be used, but the instr. is an old Indo-germanic usage. 
So in John 2:20 we have recoapaxovta Kat @& erecw oixodopnOy. Cf. 
also Acts 13:20 where we have as éreow tetpaxociows Kal mevTyKoVTA, 
for the whole period. See Luke 8:29 zoAdocis xpdvos, Acts 8:11 
ixave xpovw (cf. Luke 8:27), Rom. 16:25 xpovas aiwviors. 

(b) The idea of association or accompaniment occurs in a num- 
ber of examples, as éuiAa aird (Acts 24:26), Erepoluyodytes driorous 
(2 Cor. 6:14), pemeypevnv rupi (Rev. 15:2), xowwveire trois rod Xpurrov 
maOypaow (1 Peter 4:13), jKorovOnoay aire (Mark 1:18), éxoAAnOn Evi 
(Luke 15:15), ovvetwero 8 aitd (Acts 20:4), peroy Sixaroovvy xat 
dvopia (2 Cor. 6:14). Prepositions and other cases are sometimes 
used with some of these verbs, but these are clear examples of the 
associative instrumental. Cf. eis travtnow aire (Jo. 12:13). 

(c) Allied to the above usage is the instrumental with words of 
likeness. The correspondence is a figurative association, as 6010s 
aire (John 9:9), icovs jyiv (Matt. 20:12), rapomodere radars KeKov- 
apevors (Matt. 23:27), ro adrd rH eEvpyuevyn (1 Cor. 11:5), €orxev Krv- 
dwn Gardoons (James 1:6). 

(d) This idea of association is very common with expressions 
of manner, where the idea is going on towards means or instru- 
ment. So we explain e éy& xdpite perexw (1 Cor. 10:50), ravri 
TpoTw, ete mpopacer cite GAnOeta (Phil. 1:18), dxatadrvatw rH Kepadry 
(1 Cor. 11:5), reva pica dpyjs (Eph. 2:3), Kvmpus ro yever (Acts 
4:36), and even zpocevxy tpoonvgaro (James 5:17) and Oavarw teA- 
evtatw (Matt. 15:4) for, though answering to the Hebrew infini- 


110 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


tive absolute, this construction is common in Homer. A number 
of adverbs in the instrumental case illustrate this usage as zravoixed 
(Acts 16:34), raya (Rom. 5:7), wavrdnbeé (Luke 23:18), wavry 
(Acts 24:3), xpupy (Eph. 5:12), id (1 Cor. 12:11), dypoota (Acts 
16:37), dua (Acts 24:26), and the preposition perd and the con- 
junction iva, 

(e) The instrumental case is also used to express the idea of 
cause or ground, This conception likewise wavers between asso- 
ciation and means. Thus we have towtras yap Ovoias edapecretrar 
(Heb. 13:16), 77 dmurrig. €&exddoOnoav (Rom. 11:20), py Sevileobe 777 
év ipiv tupoce (1 Pet. 4:12), a py rd oravps tod Xprorod dudKwvrar 
(Gal. 6:12). 

(f) Means or instrument can thus be naturally expressed by 
this case. Donaldson (New Cratylus, p. 439) calls it the imple- 
mentive case. The verb xpdouar obviously, like wtor in Latin, has 
the instrumental case as woAAq appyoia xpopeba (2 Cor. 3:12). 
Other illustrations are ovvar7x4y tH broxpioe (Gal. 2:13), jraher 7d 
pipw (Luke 7:38), dvetrev 6€ “laxwBov . . . . paxaipy (Acts 12:2), de- 
dapactra 7H Picea (James 3:7), ddAvoeor dedéoGa (Mark 5:4), od 
POaprois, dpyvpiw 7) xpvoiw, eAvtpwOnTE,. . . . AAG TYyniw aipare (1 Pet. 
1:18 f.), werAnpwpevors racy adixia (Rom. 1:29), xapuré eore cecwo- 
pero (Eph. 2:8), 6 rs yrrnra (2 Peter 2:19); and probably also 
TH yap €Amide éowbypev (Rom. 8:24) and xataxavoa mupi acBeorw 
(Matt. 3:12) though these could also be locative. The agent with 
passive yerbs may also be expressed in the instrumental case as 
ovdev agov Pavarov éotiv rerpaypevoy aitd (Luke 23:15), and probably 
Kayo ebpeOG ipiv (2 Cor. 12:20), though this may possibly be a true 
dative (Brugmann, Giriechische Grammatik, 8. 400). 

(g) The instrumental case is used to express measure in com- 
parative phrases. In English the is in the instrumental case in 
phrases like the more, the less, as is shown by the Anglo-Saxon 
thy (the). The accusative gradually displaces the instrumental in 
Greek for this idea, yet it appears several times in Hebrews as in 
10:25, rocovrw padrdrov dow PrErere, See also woAAG padAov (Mark 
10:48). 

(h) Only two prepositions use the instrumental in Greek, dua 


THE CASES. 111 


and ow. In Latin ewm is used with the instrumental and in San- 
skrit sam (ovv). See dua avrots (Matt. 13:29) and ow 16 dyyecw 
wAj0os (Luke 2:13). Verbs compounded with ovr take the instru- 
mental very often as cvvnyépOnte 76 Xprotd (Col. 3:1), a por cvv- 
avrAdBytae (Luke 10:40), cvvyatperé por (Phil.2:18). There are other 
ways of expressing many of the aboye ideas in Greek than by the 
instrumental case as prepositions grew into common use. For 
instance, cause or ground can be clearly conveyed by da and the 
accusative, manner by ev and the locative, and eyen means or 
instrument by év and the locative as dzoxreivar év poupaig (Rev. 6:8). 
This last construction is like the Hebrew idiom, it is true, but it is 
also occasionally present in the older Greek and survives in the 
papyri. Greek, like other languages, and more than some, had 
flexibility and variety in the expression of the same idea. 

10. The dative. This Greek case, according to Brugmann, 
Griechische Grammatik, S. 2264. coalesced in form with the loca- 
tive and instrumental after they had lost distinction in endings. 
So then in Greek the union was first between the locative and 
instrumental. The case-endings of the three cases which thus 
united are partly locative (1, wx), partly dative (a), and partly 
instrumental (a in adverbs and dialects, ¢ in Homer, and possibly 
-ois). Clearer traces of the difference in endings suryive in Greek 
than in the ablative. In afew words both locative.and dative 
forms occur in Greek (otkou, otkw). In Latin the dative singular 
is often separate from locative, instrumental, and ablative. Butin 
both Greek and Latin the function of these cases remains distinct 
after the forms are blended. In the modern Greek vernacular this 
form for all three vanishes. For the dative it was eis and the accusa- 
tive or even the genitiye form by itself. Soin English the dative 
form has gone save with some pronouns like him, me, though the 
case is used either without any sign or usually with to, as I gave 
John a book or I gave a book to John. See in Wyclyf’s Bible, ‘‘Be- 
lieve ye to the gospel’? (Mark 1:15). The idea of the dative 
(mrdois Sotixy, casus dativus, the giving case) is very simple. 
It is the case of personal interest and accents one’s personal 
adyantage or disadvantage. It is chiefly used with persons 


112 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


or things personified. It is thus a purely grammatical case (rein 
grammatisch) like the nominative and vocative, and therefore is 
not properly used with prepositions. So alsoit is not often used 
with expressions of place, for even épxouat cour taxd (Rev. 2:16) is 
not place, but person, though the verb is a verb of motion. In 
Heb. 12:18,22 place occurs with the dative. Cf. also Acts 9:3. 
The dative, like the other cases, has a variety of applications for 
its fundamental idea. 

(a) It is thus naturally the indirect object of verbs as zpocédepov 
aitd maidia (Mark 10:15), 6 d& fy adrots (Mark 9:12), py dare 76 
ayvov Tots kvol (Matt. 7:6), ades quiv 7a dhernpara pudv (Matt. 6:12), 
though the dative is not necessary in such examples as jveyxov abrov 
mpos avtov (Mark 9:20), etrev apds tov Sipnwva (Luke 5:10). 

(b) But the dative may be also the direct object of transitive 
verbs where the personal interest of the subject is emphasized. So 
we have nrebyoate TO Ged (Rom. 11:30), éreiOovro aité (Acts 5:36), 
qmiotow avtois (Luke 24:11), Od apéoar (Rom. 8:8), dovAedw cor 
(Luke 15:29), zpocexive: aird (Matt. 18:26), émoretoare aitd (Mark 
11:31), traxovovew airs (Luke 8:25), Boner wor (Matt. 15:25), duy- 
kovovv ait (Matt. 4:11), Aatpevev avrg (Luke 1:74). 

(c) The dative is also common with intransitive verbs which 
yet have personal relations. Some of these are examples of ‘‘ad- 
vantage or disadyantage.’’? Note ré iptv doce? (Matt. 18:12), apere 
ayios (Eph. 5:3), py pepysvare rH Woyn (Matt. 6:25), dreOavopey rH 
dpaptia (Rom. 6:2), épp76y trois dpxatos (Matt. 5:21), épavy aire 
(Matt. 1:20), éyévero atrdé (Acts 7:40), 7 7G bed (Rom. 6:10), 7a 
idtw kupiw orjxe (Rom. 14:4), évetyey aird (Mark 6:19), and even by 
itself as Oe6 (2 Cor. 5:13). Cf. Luke 18:31. Some of these datives 
are in the predicate and are called predicate datives, but the ex- 
planation is the same, personal interest. Cf. further Matt. 23:31; 
Jo. 16:7; Matt. 17:4; 2 Cor. 2:18,15. 

(d) Indeed the dative may be used to express possession, when 
the predicate noun is in that case, as ov« jv avrots téos (Luke 2:7), 
piv eorw H émayyeAla (Acts 2:39), eav yévntad tu dvOpdrw Exardv mpo- 
Bara (Matt. 15:12). 

(e) What is called the ethical dative does not differ in essence 


THE CASES. 113 


from the fundamental dative idea. It is in reality the dative of 
advantage or disadvantage. In fact it is little else in resultant 
meaning than the pure dative conception. Compare the English 
‘“thear me this,’’ ‘‘look you,’’ ete. So possibly Rev. 2:16, xopaé 
go. See also Mark 1:24, ré qyiv cai oof. As for doreios 7d bed (Acts 
7:20), dvvara 7G Ged (2 Cor. 10:4), and tots rrwyxors 7d kdopw (Jas. 
2:5), there may be a Hebraism (Blass), but that is not necessary, 
and certainly it is not straining the dative to use it thus. 

(f) It is not possible to reach a final decision as to whether it is 
the dative or the instrumental that is sometimes used with the 
perfect passive. The Sanskrit had the passiye so little developed 
that we can get little help, but the Latin seems to use the dative 
though we cannot be sure. The New Testament has no example 
of the dative with the verbal adjective in réos, but in Luke 23:15 we 
read obdév'agvov Oavarov early rexpaypevov aité. If wehave here the da- 
tive, it is with the idea of haying a thing done for one. See also 
mpos TO GeaPnvar avrois (Matt. 6:1), airé cipePjvar (2 Peter 3:14) where 
either the dative or the instrumental is possible. 

(g) The dative can be used with substantives indeed, especially 
verbal substantives, that have the idea of personal interest. So 
evxapiotiat TH Ged (2 Cor. 9:12), rh d& Ged xapis (2 Cor. 2:14). With 
adjectives therefore the dative is very common, such adjectives as 
povoyevns TH pytpt (Luke 7:12), xadrov cof éorw (Matt. 18:8), mori 
To kupiw (Acts 16:15), amreBys TH ovpaviw drtacia (Acts 26:19), txavov 
To Toorvrw (2 Cor. 2:6), dpecra aire (John 8:29), dpxeroy ro pabyty 
(Matt. 10:25), cwrjpios macw (Titus 2:11), O... . tryjxon (Acts 
7:39), @PApa ois avOpwros (Titus 3:8), pavepoy eyevero rH Papa 
(Acts 7:18), évavrios avrots (Mark 6:48). 

(h) Most of the Greek infinitives are in the dative case, all 
those ending in -a. This is plain in the Sanskrit and in Homer, 
where the true dative idea is preserved usually in the infinitive. 
Compare the old English, ‘‘What went ye out for to see?’ The 
infinitives in -a: are all dative in form though the dative idea is 
only preserved where design is contemplated as 7AOopev zpockvvjoat 
atte (Matt. 2:2). 

(i) Sometimes it is not possible to decide whether a form is 

8 


114 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


locative, instrumental, or dative, as tpoty ry de€ua (Acts 2:33) which 
may be to lift up at the right hand, or by the right hand, or to the 
right hand. 


CHAPTER XV. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


1. The reason for the use of prepositions. Originally in the 
Indo-germanic tongues there were no prepositions at all. 

The Sanskrit has no proper class of prepositions. The cases at 
first do all the work of expressing word relations. In modern 
French and English (save genitive and pronouns) the prepositions 
do it all except what is done by the order of words. Thereisthus a 
striking development in the Indo-germanic tongues. In a word, 
then, prepositions are used to bring out more sharply the idea of 
case. The various relations between words came to be too com- 
plicated for the cases by themselves. 

2. What are prepositions? They are in themselves merely 
adverbs. But these adverbs are themselves in cases. All prepo- 
sitions then are adverbial. In Homer the adyerb and the prepo- 
sition go hand in hand. Instead of its being exceptional for adverbs 
to be used as prepositions, that is the normal history of each one. 
The Sanskrit began to use set case-forms of nouns as adverbial 
prepositions, chiefly with the genitive and accusative, and a few 
with locative, instrumental, and ablative. None were used with 
the dative, and naturally so. They were originally local in mean- 
ing (Delb.,-Grund., IV.,S. 134) and the same root idea is always 
carried from the local usage to other applications such as time and 
metaphors. All prepositions were originally case-forms of nouns 
or pronouns and in some the case is still plain, as the locative in 
éi, avti, the accusative in xapw (still found as substantive also). 
The so-called adverbial prepositions mark a stage in the progress 
from noun to preposition, from local adverbs to adverbs used with 
cases and then to fixed prepositions. It is not at all clear that the 
preposition was used first in composition with verbs, as the mean- 


116 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. © 


ing of the word might imply. The free position of the preposition 
in Homer argues against it. The preposition was always allowed 
freedom with verbs, sometimes separate, sometimes with the verb, 
and then again repeated after the verb. The case used after a 
compound verb is not necessarily the case common with the prep- 
osition, but rather the resultant of the preposition and the verb. 
Strictly speaking, prepositions do not ‘‘govern’’ cases. Rather the 
cases called in the aid of prepositions to help express more clearly 
case relations. Examples of the adverbial use of prepositions with 
no effect on the case survive in the New Testament. So ava, Rey. 
21:21; Mark 14:19; xara, Rom. 12:5. 

8. The so-called ‘‘improper’’ prepositions are therefore very 
proper, as proper, in fact, as any others. Every preposition is a 
prepositive (or, as sometimes, postpositive) adverb. The New 
Testament shows a considerable list, as does the xowy (and all Greek 
indeed), of prepositions that are still used also as adverbs and 
which are not used in composition with verbs. But composition 
with verbs is merely a matter of development after the adverb or 
preposition has been formed. Here are those that meet us in the 
is, Pe We 

dpa with the associative instrumental (Matt. 13:29); 
avev with the ablative (Matt. 10:29); 

avrixpus With genitive (Acts 20:15) ; 

drévavre With genitive (Matt. 27:61) ; 

arep with ablative (Luke 22:6) ; 

dypu with the genitive (Luke 4: 13); 

7s with genitive (Jo. 3:23) or dative (Acts 9 vias : 
éxrds With ablative (2 Cor. 12:2); 

éurpoobe with ablative (Matt. 5:16); 

évavriov with genitive (Luke 1:6); 

évexa With genitive (Luke 6:22); 

évexev (Matt. 5:10), etvexey (Luke 4:18) ; 

évrés with genitive (Luke 17:21); 

évémov With genitive (Lu. 1:15); 

ééw with ablative (Matt. 10:14); 

ééwev with ablative (Rey. 14:20); 


PREPOSITIONS. 117 


éravw with genitive (Matt. 5:14); 
éréxewa With ablative (Acts 7:43); 
éow with genitive (Mark 15:16); 
éws with genitive (Luke 10:15); 
xatevavte With genitive (Matt. 21:2) ; 

Ci. évayre with genitive (Luke 1:5) ; 
xatevorruov With genitive (Eph. 1:4); 
xvkAw with genitive (Rey. 4:6); 
peoov with genitive (Phil. 2:15); 
peragv with genitive (Luke 16:26); 
pexpe with genitiye (Matt. 11:23) ; 
éricw with ablative (Matt. 4:19); 
omobev with ablative (Matt. 15:28); 
éyé possibly ablative (Matt. 28:1); 
mapextos With ablative (Matt. 5:32); 
mapamAnoov With genitive (Phil. 2:27); 
aepav with ablative (Mark 3:8); 
mAnv with ablative (Acts 8:1); 
mAnoiov with genitive (John 4:5); 
treprepicood With ablative (Eph. 3:20); 
trepexewva With ablative (2 Cor. 10:16); 
trepavw With ablative (Eph. 1:21); 
troxatw With ablative (Mark 6:11); 
xépw with genitive (Eph. 3:1); 
xepis with ablative (Matt. 15:34). 
dvrixepa With abl. or gen. (Lu. 8:26). Cf. drévartt. 
Kuxdobev with genitive (Rey. 4:5). 

This list of adverbs used sometimes as prepositions will repay 
study. See Luke 5:19 asa study in prepositions. Cf. ava péov, 
dua pecov, €k pecov, év péow, kata pecov Which are practically com- 
pound prepositions. 

4. The cases with which prepositions are used. Let it be re- 
marked over again that the prepositions do not govern cases in the 
strict sense of that term. They are used to help out the cases, not 
toregulatethem. The dative is not used with any of the prepositions 
in the N. T. except éyyvs. The cases used with Greek prepositions 


118 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


are the accusative, locative, instrumental, ablative, and genitive. 
In the older Greek (Homer) the most of the prepositions were 
employed with two or more cases, but the tendency was constantly 
towards a narrower usage. There was also constant change in the 
application of each preposition, especially in the spoken language. 
In the modern Greek vernacular do actually occurs with the 
accusative. 

5. The proper method for studying a Greek preposition. It is 
often true that the etymological idea is best preserved in prepo- 
sitions in composition. So look at the meaning in composition 
as given by Hadley and Allen, as the first step, in connection with 
the opening definition. Hold on to the etymological meaning, seek 
the root idea of the case, observe the connection, and then see what 
the resultant conception of the whole is. Thus it will be perceived 
that it is not the preposition itself that changes so much as the 
variety of connections in which it appears. Notice, also, the meta- 
phorical uses as really the same in principle as the original local 
meaning. Observe changes in case construction between Homer, 
Attic, and New Testament Greek. See in general Harrison on 
Greek Prepositions, Adams on Greek Prepositions, Curtius’ Greek 
Etymology, Bopp, Pott, Delbrueck, Helbing, Krebs, ete. 

6. dudi. In locative case. See Sanskrit abhi, Zend aibi, Latin 
ambo, old German umpi, English about. It does not occur in the New 
Testament save in composition. So dudiBa\Aw Mark 1:16; dude 
én Matt. 6:30. duddrepos occurs fourteen times according to 
Moulton and Geden’s Concordance. See Matt. 15:14. 

7. dvd. Its case not known, possibly instrumental. Compare 
dvw, Compare our analogy. Compare also dy. See Sanskrit ana. 
See Zend ana (with accusative). Compare Gothic ana (up), Ger- 
man an, English on. It occurs in New Testament only thirteen 
times, and chiefly in the distributive use and only with the accusa- 
tive. See John 2:6; Luke 10:1; 1 Cor. 14:27. But it is very com- 
mon in composition. Moulton and Geden give over ten pages of 
such examples. See Matt. 5:1; Acts 24:22; Acts 8:30; Mark 10:51; 
Matt. 11:28; John 6:39. 


8. dvri. Locative case of Sanskrit anta. Compare Latin ante, 


PREPOSITIONS. 119 


Gothic and, German ant-(ent-), Anglo-Saxon andlang (along), and- 
swerian (answer). So ante-room, antagonist. Used slightly over 
twenty times in New Testament and always with genitive. It is 
not so common in composition as avé although frequently used. 
It is an interesting preposition because of its bearing on the doc- 
trine of the substitution theory of Christ’s death. Here as always 
the original meaning (face to face, before) is the idea to appeal to 
in the explanation of every usage. See Luke 10:31f.; 19:44; 
24:17; Heb. 12:2; Matt. 5:38; 20:28; John 1:16; 19:12. 

9. dé. Compare ap, Sanskrit apa (instrumental), Gothic af, 
Latin ab, German ab, English of, off Old Greek sometimes drat. 
Delbrueck says in Arcadian and Cyprian dialects arv occurs and 
with locative. In the New Testament it is used only with the 
ablative, and is very common indeed. It isalso extremely frequent 
in composition. The meaning (from, off) is generally very simple. 
See Matt. 3:16; 5:29; 6;13; 10:28; John 11:18; Rom. 8:23; Mark 
3:14; Luke 24:41. 

10. &d. Possibly instrumental although sometimes diaé (Aes- 
chylus), locatiye case. Same word as dve. So diaxdow. Cf. Latin 
duo, bis, German zwei, English two, ’tween, from Sanskrit dva, dvi. 
The original local idea of ‘‘interval between”’ is always present. This 
idea together with the case idea and the meaning of the words and 
the connection will explain every instance of its use. The result- 
ant idea will vary as the words, case, and circumstances vary, but 
the true root idea of the preposition is still discernible. The two 
cases used in the New Testament are the genitive and the accusa- 
tive. There are hundreds of examples in the New Testament and 
in composition also it is very frequent. See Mark 5:4f.; Matt. 
261 Gal 21= Rom. 11:36;, Heb. 2:10; Luke 17:11; 24:51; 
Mark 18:20. 

11. é&. Older form év/, civ’, locative case. Same word as Latin 
in, German in, ein, English in, from Sanskrit pronominal stem and 
Sanskrit ana, ani, antar (within). It simply means a position 
within boundaries, and has really the same idea as the locative case 
and is so used in current Greek. However, originally, as in Latin 
in, év was used with accusative (Delbrueck, p. 134) and examples 


120 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


occur in Greek dialectical forms as Arcadian, Cypriote, ete. Indeed 
the Boeotian dialect does not have es at all, but uses év now with 
locative, now with the accusative. In English vernacular we still 
say, jump in the river, come in the house. Compare the so-called 
constructio praegnans of the Greek. It is the most common of all 
prepositions in the New Testament and abundant in composition. 
It is always true to its original conception, although the Hebrew 
conception sometimes makes unusual applications. The prepo- 
sition is therefore variously translated in English idiom, but in 
itself only means in. One common yice in the study of Greek 
prepositions is to read the resultant idea of preposition, case, and 
context into the preposition, and then explain the preposition by 
the English translation of this resultant idea. Translation into 
English is one thing, and study of Greek syntax is quite another 
thing. The context of the word with which év is used needs special 
attention as marking the boundary and thus giving color to the 
resultant idea. Eyen the instrumental use of & is good Greek, 
though rare in the older tongue. See John 2:23; 4:20; 8:20; 
Matt. 2:6; 3:6,11; 26:23; 12:24; Rev. 6:8; Matt. 9:4; 1 Cor. 
9:15; Luke 22:49, 

12. eis. A specialized form of éy, as évs, és, eis. Doric and Aeolic 
inscriptions sometimes use eis with locative and év with accusative. 
So the original meaning of é&v and eis is the same. However, the 
two forms gradually became associated with different cases (as in 
and into in English). But in Latin in held on to both locative and 
accusative. Still in Greek év and «is frequently merge in usage with 
verbs of motion, constructio praegnans. «is of itself means only in. 
The idea of into (if present) comes from the accusative case (ex- 
tension) and the verb of motion and the connection. Often és is 
used where the accusative alone would be clear. Compare év. The 
preposition is very common in New Testament Greek, both singly 
and in composition. Fierce polemical battles have been waged 
over its usage, but the theological bearing of the preposition can 
come only from the context. In modern Greek és displaces év. See 
Jo.21:23; Matt.5:1; Mk. 1:9; Acts 8:38f.; Mk. 13:16; Matt. 12:41; 
Rom. 11:36; Luke 12:10; Mark 1:4; Acts 2:38; Matt. 21:41. 


PREPOSITIONS. 121 


13. é&. In Greek as in Latin this preposition is used simply 
with the ablative and varies little in its usage. There is no San- 
skrit equiyalent, but Church Slavonic, Lithuanian, and Old Trish 
have the same root. It is always true to its root idea, out of. As 
with év and «is, the word with which it is used must mark the 
limits and the yerb describe the action. For instance, house, river, 
water, mountain, all present different boundaries. This prepo- 
sition is also common in the New Testament, and especially so in 
composition. See Matt. 8:28; Luke 11:16; 6:42f.; Mark 1:10; 
John 20:24; Rom. 12:18. For &, da, eis see Rom. 11:36. 

14. émé. Compare Sanskrit adyerb and prefix api, locative case. 
Compare Latin ob. Curtius says that it is allied to Sanskrit dpa 
(do) in spite of difference of meaning. Compare English up, Ger- 
man auf. éré means over, upon, but less sharply than dvé and 
trép. It-is very common in the New Testament separately, and 
fairly so in composition. It is used with the genitive, locative, 
and accusative. Observe the case idea, and meaning of the words 
and the context. See Matt. 6:10; John 19:19; Matt. 3:7; 7:24; 
26:55; Luke 3:2; Acts 11:19; Rev. 7:1. 

15. Kara. Karai(locative or dative) occurs in some poems. It 
means ‘‘down,’’ but the etymology is not known. Compare our 
cataract, catastrophe. Quite common in New Testament, both 
singly and in composition. The cases used with it are the gen., 
ace., abl. (Acts 27:14). In the older Greek the ablative was also 
possible. The resultant idea does not vary very much. ‘‘Against’’ 
comes from the idea of ‘‘down.’’ Compare our being ‘‘down on”’ 
a person. See Matt. 8:32; Mark 11:25; Luke 4:14; 8:1,39; John 
8:15; Acts 26:3; Rom. 2:1. 

16. pera. Instrumental case. Compare péoos. Sanskrit mithas 
(genitive), Gothic mith, Latin medius, German mit (nuti), English 
mid. This preposition is used with the locative, genitive, and 
accusative in Homer. In the New Testament only the accusative 
and genitive usages survive. It is quite common, and moderately 
so in composition. The sense of ‘‘after’’ as a resultant idea with 
the accusative seems difficult; but in Homer the accusative is used 
with verbs of motion with the idea of ‘‘into the midst of.’’ Clearly 


122 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


the notions of ‘‘extension’’ (accusative) and ‘‘midst’’ combined 
explain the resultant idea of ‘“‘after,’’ with possibly the idea of 
‘succession’? suggested by the context. See Mark 1:13; 10:30; 
Matt. 3:2; 21:30; Jo. 3:25; Acts 1:5; 10:5; 2 Cor, 3:18; Lu. 22:52 f. 

17. wapdéd. Epic zapaé is locative or possibly dative and zapa 
instrumental (Curtius) as Sanskrit has param (accusative), 
para (instrumental), and pare (locative). Compare Latin per, 
German ver, English for—in forswear, forbid, etc. Skeat makes 
English far same as Sanskrit paras (beyond). So ‘‘alongside’’ is 
the root idea and can be seen in every example with proper ob- 
servation of case idea and context. It is used with the locatiye, 
accusative, and ablative in the New Testament, and is particularly 
common in composition. Compare parallel, parable, paradox, etc. 
See Mark 14:43; Luke 18:9; 19:7; John 19:25; Rom. 2:13; Matt. 
4:18; Rom. 4:18,25; Heb. 1:4; 2:2. 

18. wept. Compare Greek répi£, repuoods and particle wep (Har- 
tung). zep¢ is locative case. Compare Sanskrit pari, round about, 
and Zend pairi. So Latin per before adjectives (Curtius). Har- 
rison says that wepé as compared with dudié (on both sides) is rather 
placing round about, alongside of round about. The root is the 
same as that of zapa (see Sanskrit). It is used in Homer and even 
Attic with the locative, but not so in the New Testament. Here it 
is used only with the genitive, accusative, and possibly with the 
ablative (Delbrueck). The ablative certainly occurs with it in 
Homer. It is found with considerable frequency in composition 
and alone. See Acts 18:25; 1 Jo. 2:2; Mark 9:42; Luke 10:40; 
Acts 1:3; Luke 17:2; 2 Cor. 3:16; 1 Thess. 5:10; John 18:19. 

19. mpd. Compare mporepos, mp@ros (Doric zparos), mpdow, ete. 
So Sanskrit pra as prefix and Zend fra (instrumental case), Latin 
prod (ablative), pro, prae (rai, locative), German vor, English 
fro, for, fore. The case of zpé is uncertain. Compare Latin abla- 
tive and also avd. There are some signs in Homer that apo was 
once used with the locative, but it is in later Greek seen only with 
the ablative (Delbrueck). The idea is really comparison and so 
ablative as with ixép. It is used in the New Testament more fre- 
quently than dui, dvd, and dyré, but not so often as many other 


PREPOSITIONS. 123 


prepositions. In composition it is common. The root idea is 
always present even when the resultant idea is substitution as in 
ancient Greek and Latin, but it is not used in this sense in the 
New Testament. See Acts 12:6; Luke 11:38; James 5:12; 2 Cor. 
17:2: Gal. 3:1. 

20. zpés. A longer form of zpé as is is of év and é& of éx, occurs 
also as zporé (Doric), locative, and in nine (Curtius) other forms 
all akin to Sanskrit prati (locative) which is used with accusative 
and ablative. The meaning is the same as zpé, before. It is used 
with three cases (locative, accusative, ablative) according to Del- 
brueck. But Monro insists that it is genitive and not ablative. In 
the New Testament only one ablative (genitive) occurs, Acts 27:34. 
There are only six locative examples and all the rest are in the 
accusative. It is one of the commonest prepositions in the New 
Testament and abounds in compound words. Many of the exam- 
ples are of great interest. Examine according to preceding prin- 
ciples Mark 5:22; 6:51; Acts 23:30; John 1:1; 20:11; Luke 7:44; 
18:11; Heb. 5:14; Matt. 11:3. 

21. ow. Older form éw. Ionic éuvds (xowds) according to Curtius. 
Compare Latin cwm, con, co (v in Greek as in accusative ending). 
Compare Sanskrit sam and Greek dua. Mommsen says that ow is 
used with the instrumental in both of its ideas, proper instrument 
or help, and the associative instrumental (together with). But 
the associative idea (Delbrueck, Harrison) is doubtless the root 
idea in ow. It is used very little in the New Testament, save by 
Luke and Paul, but in composition it is exceedingly common. 
See Lu. 7:12; Rom. 8:32; Matt. 27:44; Acts 15:15; 2 Tim. 2:11; 
Acts 16:10; 1 Cor. 8:7; 2 Cor. 5:14. 

22. tmép. imépa (upper rope). Compare Sanskrit wpari (loca- 
tive case of wpara) with locative, accusative, and genitive. Zend 
upairi (locative) with accusative and instrumental. Latin super, 
Gothic ufar, German weber, Anglo-Saxon ofer, English over. These 
are all comparative forms, Sanskrit positive wpa, Greek ixé. Chau- 
cer uses over in sense of upper. This preposition is used only with 
the ablative and accusative, generally ablative in New Testament. 
As a comparative the case would be ablative rather than genitive. 


124 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


See Monro’s Homeric Grammar, p. 147. It is used rather frequently 
in the New Testament, but sparingly in composition. Much interest 
centers around this preposition because of its use by Paul concern- 
ing the death of Christ, whereas Jesus used avré twice. It is in- 
sisted that avré is necessary to express the doctrine of substitution, 
and that in using trép Paul avoided that doctrine. But neither 
dvti nor trep of itself expresses substitution. One means in itself 
‘face to face’’ and the other ‘‘over.’’? Both, however, in the proper 
connection are used freely when that is the resultant idea. In fact, 
in Alcestis (Euripides) irép is used more frequently than dvré and 
apo with thisidea. Allthree prepositions yield themselves naturally 
to the idea of substitution where the connection calls for it. Here, 
as always, the root idea of the preposition, the root idea of the 
case, and the context must all be considered. See Acts 1:13; Mark 
9:40; Matt. 10:24; Lu. 16:8; Heb. 7:27; Philemon 13; John 
11:50; 2 Cor. 5:14; Gal. 3:13; 1 Tim. 2:6. 

23. ind. Also traé (dative or locative). Aeoliciza. Sanskrit upa 
(near, on, under) with locative, accusative, and instrumental. Zend 
upa with accusative and locative. Latin sub, Gothic uf. Compare 
English ab-ove. The ideas ‘‘on’’ or ‘‘under’’ both depend on 
standpoint and de not differ much after all. Monro suggests that 
the original sense is ‘‘upwards’’ (compare tyr, aloft, and dtrrws, 
facing upwards). At any rate dro is not, like xara, used of motion 
downwards. Hence the comparative (see irép) and the superlative 
(Sanskrit wpamas, Greek traros, Latin swmmus, English oft) are 
perfectly natural. It is freely used in the New Testament and 
often in composition. The locative no longer occurs with it, as in 
earlier Greek, but the accusative, genitive, and possibly ablative. 
In expressions of agency t7é is the direct agent whereas &a is the 
intermediate agent. Other prepositions are also used to express 
agent as éx, dd, rapa, mpds. It is used only twice in the Gospel of 
John, once in the Epistles of John, and twice in the Revelation, 
and is thus an incidental argument for identity of authorship. It 
is specially common in the writings of Luke and Paul. See Luke 
11:33; Gal. 3:25; Matt. 5:13; John 1:48; Matt. 1:22; 4:1; Mark 
5:4; Matt. 6:2; Acts 6:11. 


CHAPTER XVI. 
GENERAL REMARKS ABOUT THE VERB. 


1. The name is not distinctive. In a sense all the rest of Greek 
syntax centers around the verb (the word par excellence of the sen- 
tence) save intensive particles and figures of speech. The verb is 
the bone of the sentence. Indeed the Greek verb may be a sen- 
tence in itself containing both subject and predicate as dweavev. 
There is therefore an appropriateness in calling this part of speech 
the word (pjya). 

2. The function of the verb. The verb contains two ideas, 
action (including ‘‘state’’) and affirmation. Action may be also 
expressed by substantives and adjectives, but not affirmation. 
Verbs make affirmation by limiting the action to certain persons. 
This limitation is made by personal endings which also distinguish 
the voices. These personal endings are probably oblique cases of 
pronouns. 

3. The two types of verbs. As we know, in the Greek verb we 
see what are called the pz verbs and the w verbs with some differ- 
ences of inflections in several tenses. But originally there was 
only one inflection, the xz, whereas in modern Greek the » forms 
have displaced all the yx forms save in ea. The w verbs arose 
from the dropping of mw and other endings and the addition of the 
variable vowel. The New Testament, like the rest of the xowy, 
represents the transition period of the language in this matter, but 
further on towards the w victory than the earlier Attic. 

4, The infinitive and the participle are not verbs in the strict 
sense, as will be readily seen. They have no personal endings, 
and so cannot make affirmation. In modern languages the per- 
sonal ending is dropping off, and the verb depends on the separate 
expression of the personal pronoun for its limitation. Infinitives 


126 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


and participles are quasi verbs, verbal nouns, possessing voice and 
tense and being used with cases as verbs. They are hybrids, the 
infinitive a verbal substantive, the participle a verbal adjective. 
They are not now verb, now noun, but both at the same time. 

5. How the verb is made. It is a complicated process which 
cannot be entered into here, since it properly belongs to accidence, 
not syntax. See chapter VII., Conjugation of the Verb. But the 
verb is a growth and a very complex growth at that. ‘The verb 
expresses action (or state) and affirms it of a subject. It therefore 
has tense, mode, voice, person and number; expressed by stem, con- 
necting vowel, ending.’”’—H. H. Harris. 

6. To understand the verb then is to understand each of these 
processes. Mode, voice, tense, person, number, all have a specific 
idea. The total result is the idea of the yerb in a given instance. 
The alphabet of the verb is to know the forms by the form itself, 
not by the English translation. It is useless to attempt explana- 
tion before this elementary stage is reached. Voice pertains to the 
action of the verb as regards the subject of the action. Tense has 
to do with the action of the verb as regards the state of the action, 
and in the indicative expresses time also. Mode pertains to the 
manner of affirmation, how it is made. 

7. There is one other matter of importance to note also. It is 
the meaning of the word itself, the root, apart from any or al! of 
the processes just named. The same tense of ‘‘blink the eye’’ and 
‘ive a life’’ do not convey exactly the same idea. The difference 
is due to the thing which is mentioned in each instance, the nature 
of the case. The Germans call this ‘‘Aktionsart,’’ kind of action. 
It plays an important part, especially in the study of the tenses. 
The late recognition of this common sense matter is not a great 
compliment to grammarians. 

8. The development of mode, voice, tense was necessarily more 
or less simultaneous. There is no essential order for the discussion 
of them therefore. In the beginning there was probably only one 
mode, one voice, one tense. The rest were built up around them 
with more or lesscompleteness. In the Greek the system was never 
carried out logically either in mode, voice or tense. The English 


GENERAL REMARKS ABOUT THE VERB. 127 


verb has, however, far greater limitations apart from the help of 
auxiliaries. But the Greek verb is much richer than the Sanskrit 
and even than the Latin. 

9. Individual verbs show very unequal development as to mode, 
voice, and tense. Some have pretty free play in most directions. 
Others fall far short of their opportunities, failing in either one or 
the other point. These are called defective or else deponent verbs. 
Deponent is rather a misnomer and defectiye is a much better 
description of the facts as to voice as well as tense. 

10. Once more the modes, voices, and tenses varied greatly in 
their history. Some survived and flourished. Others barely 
existed or perished. There was a survival of the fittest. The 
grammarian like the true historian must tell the important facts in 
each case. 

11. Probably tense was earlier than mode or voice, though it 
does not matter greatly how they are studied because a large part 
of the development was parallel. The second aorist (coinciding 
with present) is the oldest tense. The indicative is the oldest 
mode. The actiye is probably the oldest voice, but the middle may 
be. 


CHAPTER XVII. 


THE MODES. 


1. The use of av with the modes. There is much difficulty in 
understanding av. It is used with all the modes, save the impera- 
tive. It is freely used in Homer with the future indicative and 
the subjunctive. So Tatian (pp. 80, 94) has av with the future 
indicative. It is, however, chiefly found in dependent clauses. In 
the New Testament it is thus found with the indicative as well as 
the subjunctive. In independent clauses av in the New Testament 
occurs with the indicative and the optative. It is not true that 
relative and conditional subjunctive clauses ‘‘must also have ayv.’’ 
It is usually present, but is not necessary. Leo Meyer argues that 
Greek dv is kin to Gothic an and Latin an, and originally had two 
meanings, one ‘‘else,”’ the other ‘‘in that case rather,’’? Latin and 
Gothic preserving the first and Greek the second. Cf. also old 
English ‘‘an’’=if. Monro argues that the primary use of av and 
xé in Homer is with definite and particular examples, and that the 
indefinite and general use is secondary. In the New Testament 
both exist, although the general usage is more common. See Mark 
11:19; 6:56. Sometimes ay is spelt éay (Matt. 5:19). More in 
detail in conditional and relative sentences. 

2. Whatis mode? Mode is manner and pertains to aflirma- 
tion, and not to action as do yoice and tense. The personal endings 
limit the affirmation; mode is in a sense the dress of the affirma- 
tion. As to the manner of affirming, there are three possible kinds 
of statement: definite, doubting, commanding. But they are not 
of equal age nor frequency. The four modes really represent three 
points of view since the subjunctive and optatiye are somuch alike 
in idea. They and the imperative ultimately grow out of the 
indicative and the old injunctive. 


THE MODES. 129 


3. Positive statement. The Greek has one mode of definite 
assertion. It is called the indicative; not a yery good name since 
all the modes indicate. With this mode one affirms positively, 
definitely, absolutely, undoubtingly. One may or may not tell 
what he knows to be true, but he states it as real. Mode has noth- 
ing per se to do with the-actual facts, but only with the statement 
of them. Most untruths are expressed in the indicative mode. 
The indicative is the normal manner of affirmation unless there is 
reason to be doubtful or to make a command. It is thus the one 
most used and has the most complete set of tenses as to the time 
element. The indicative always stands for itself. The modes, 
like the tenses, are not interchanged. The indicative is so much 
the usual mode that some grammarians do not consider it a mode 
at all. It does not indeed haye a distinctive mode-sign like the 
subjunctive and optative, but neither does the imperative. The 
indicative is the natural manner of expressing a thing unless there 
is special reason for one of the other modes. It is indeed the 
mode par excellence instead of being no mode at.all. The Greeks 
used the indicative according to the genius of their own language. 
One must see to it that he does not read English into the Greek 
indicative, though, as a matter of fact, the English indicative has 
practically supplanted the old subjunctive. The application of the 
general principle of the indicative will tide one over every instance 
if he gives due weight to the context. Some striking examples are 
given in lieu of extended discussion. See the point in the 
indicative mode in zowtmey (Jo. 11:47); e&ea (Jo. 4:4; Matt. 
23:23; and Matt. 25:27); éBovdrcuny (Acts 25:22); éepaware (Jo. 
5:39); syeanices (Matt. 5:48); Ow (1 Cor. 7:7) and 76eXov (Gal. 
4:20); yixouny (Rom. 9:3); ie eray (1 Cor. 10:22); sperbe 
(Matt. 27:24). 

4. Doubtful statement. The ck has two modes for doubt- 
ing affirmation, the subjunctive and the optative. The names are 
not distinctive, for both are used in subordinate senses, and the 
optative is used elsewhere besides in wishes and is not the only 
mode so used (see indicative). But the names will answer at any 


rate. They are really different forms of the same mode, the mode 
9 


130 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


of hesitating affirmation. Compare the Latin which has no optative, 
buta past subjunctive. In Greek the subjunctive is chiefly primary 
and the optative chiefly secondary, but the distinction is not always 
observed. The Greek love of vivid statement made the subjunc- 
tive more popular than the optative and kept it increasingly after 
past tenses of the indicative. There is thus no sequence of tenses 
_in Greek, but a sequence of modes. But this sequence of modes 
is not necessary. In fact in the New Testament it is exceptional, 
for the optative had nearly disappeared from use. In modern 
Greek it no longer exists. In the ancient vernacular the optative 
was not used so much as in the books. It was one of the luxuries 
of the language that the spoken language little used. It is scarce 
in Plutarch, and occurs only sixty-seven times in the New 
Testament. The optative died as the subjunctive is doing 
in English. In the New Testament wishes about the future 
are expressed by the optative or sometimes by d¢eXov and 
the future indicative. Wishes about the present are expressed 
simply by é¢eAov and the imperfect indicative. Wishes about the 
past are expressed by é¢edov and the aorist indicative. The sub- 
junctive has to do the work of the imperative in the first person 
owing to loss of that form. The use of the aorist subjunctive in 
prohibitions rather than the aorist imperative is traceable to the 
Sanskrit idiom. But the aorist imperative in prohibitions does 
occur a few times in the New Testament. Even the second and 
third persons are used sometimes in the New Testament in ques- 
tions of deliberation. The future indicative is doubtful because 
the action is future, and so it is not strange that Homer uses both 
the subjunctive and the future indicative for future statements. . 
Compare iva and édv in the New Testament with either subjunctive 
or future indicative. The negative of the subjunctive is wy, of the 
optative od or w. It needs to be remarked that the modes have 
precisely the same force in independent and dependent clauses. 
The particular construction of the subjunctive and optative with 
various dependent clauses comes up later. Here the root idea is 
insisted on which lies behind it all. As a matter of fact only the 
most general idea of doubtful statement will hold, for both the 


THE MODES. 131 


subjunctive and optative are difficult of scientific analysis. The 
subjunctive glides into the realm of the future indicative on the 
one hand, if indeed it is not a variation of it (see Homer), and 
into the sphere of the imperative on the other where in fact it is 
supreme in the first person. The optative is not alone wish or 
will. The potential idea exists also and the doctors much disagree 
as to which is the original and how to relate the two conceptions. 
In the Latin the optative vanished utterly before the subjunctive, 
while in the Sanskrit the subjunctive largely succumbed before the 
optative. The Greek indeed developed both side by side though 
the optative was chiefly confined to books as remarked above. 
The subjunctive is more common in Homer than in later Greek. 
Some examples of the subjunctive and optative in the New Testa- 
ment worth considering are here given. “Eywpev (Rom. 5:1); 
yevorro (Gal. 6:14); piynre (Matt. 23:33); edgacunv av (Acts 26:29); 
adv Bédor (Acts 17:18); pay ciceveyxyns (Matt. 6:13); roujoopev (Luke 
3:10); 76 ris dv ein (Luke 9:46); yernrar (Luke 23 281) ; Eroundowpev 
(Luke 22:9); ety (Luke 22:23); wapadé (Luke 22:4); ayo (Luke 
22:16); ewpev (Luke 9:54. Cf. aoujons, Mark 10:35. See infini- 
tive with 6eda in verse 43). For ddes tdwpev see (Matt. 27:49). As 
examples of ddedov take Rey. 3:15; Gal. 5:12; 1 Cor. 4:8. 

5. Commanding statement. The imperative is the mode for 
commands, the assertion of one’s will on another’s. This mode is 
somewhat allied in form to the indicative and is a development in 
meaning of an emphatic indicative in some of its forms which are 
identical with the indicative. Compare our ‘‘you shall.’’ The 
indicative in that vigorous sense is often found in Greek, as dwWeobe 
(Matt. 27:24). Here one’s duty is stated as a prediction. Often 
it is hard to decide between the imperative and the indicative when 
the forms are identical, but the connection will generally decide, 
as in tore (Jas. 1:19; Eph. 5:5). Other forms of the imperative 
are interjectional (cf. detre, Matt. 11:28) or allied to the subjunc- 
tive or the old injunctive like AvOyre and similar forms. 
Still others have special endings. So the imperative is on the 
whole a makeshift and an afterthought in the modes. The aorist 
subjunctive held its own in prohibitions of the second person and 


132 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


usually of the third as the subj. did completely for all commands 
of the first person. In the imperative as with all the modes the 
meaning of the word itself and of the context has to be considered. 
Hence one can see how the imperative is used in épyfeoe (Eph. 
4:25). Cf. also wove xat £jon (Lu. 10:28). Instead of the impera- 
tive we sometimes have iva (Eph. 5:33). The negatiye of the 
imperative naturally is always py as with the subjunctive after 
Homer. The indicative and optative use either od or py according 
to the idea involved. Observe 80s (Matt. 5:42), ages éxBarw (Matt. 
7:4), AWoare (Jo. 2:19), karadixalere and daodvere (Lu. 6:37), tof 
éxov (Lu. 19:17), dpare pydels yerwoxérw (Matt. 9:31), tore ywwoxorrtes 
(Eph. 5:5), xaraBdrw (Mk. 13:15), Bowtie (Acts 22:16). In 1 Pet. 
5:12 observe eis qv or7re. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 
THE VOICES. 


1. What is voice in the verb? Voice is vox, the speaking part 
of the verb, and this is not a bad name for the function. Voice 
has to do with the subject of the action, the one of whom the 
affirmation is made by the mode. 

2. The names of the voices are not specially felicitous. All verbs 
express action or state in all the voices, and verbs that express 
only state like ciyé have the active voice. The middle means 
nothing in particular. If the idea is that it comes in between 
active and passive, that is not true and hence a misnomer. If it 
refers to the fact that there is a reflex action in this voice, this is 
true, but a poor way of expressing it. Reflexive voice would 
conyey that idea much better. The term passive is not so bad in 
the original sense of that word. We have to use the terms simply 
because they are in vogue. 

3. The voices have nothing per se to do with the question whether 
the verb is transitive or intransitive. That matter belongs to the 
individual verb and is in reality a question of ‘‘Aktionsart,’’ not 
of the voice at all. The active voice, for instance, may be either 
transitive or intransitive and often the same verb will be used now 
one way, now the other. The same remark applies to the middle 
voice. Some verbs indeed in both these voices will haye more 
than one object. The verb in the passive voice again is sometimes 
transitive also, though in the nature of the case it is more usually 
intransitive. The point is that voice must be considered entirely 
apart from the question of transitiveness. That is another matter 
to be raised on other grounds. 

4. The active voice represents the subject merely as acting. 
That is all. Itis therefore the commonest and most natural voice to 


134 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


use. It is also probably the oldest. Some verbs never had any othet 
voice. Some verbs have one voice in one tense, and another voice 
in another tense. In simple truth many verbs are more or less 
defective on this point. 

5. The middle was probably built on the active by a doubling 
of the personal ending, psx becoming poya=por. This explanation 
is not certain, some scholars even putting the middle as the oldest 
voice. But certainly the middle was on a par with the active at 
most points and had a parallel development. The active and the 
middle had a full set of personal endings. In the middle voice 
the subject is acting with reference to himself, and here again the 
action may be either transitive or intransitive. How the subject 
acts with reference to himself, the middle voice does not tell. That 
has to be determined by the meaning of the verb and the context. 
He may be represented as doing a certain thing of himself, by him- 
self, on himself, for himself, etc. The precise shade of emphasis 
comes from the context and the word itself. The reflexive pro- 
noun is sometimes used in the New Testament with the middle 
though it is not necessary. In English the reflexive pronoun is 
the only way that the middle idea can be expressed. 

6. The passive represents the subject as acted upon. The pas- 
siye is later than the active and the middle and did not develop 
distinctive personal endings. In most cases, like a parasite, it used 
the middle endings as in Latin throughout. In the future passive 
there was a special suffix 6e(e) as in the aorist passive when the 
active endings were employed. It is a curious perversion of facts 
and irony of fate that the grammars have so long regarded the 
middle as the interloper. Some languages indeed have never de- - 
veloped a passive, the Coptic, for instance. The Sanskrit has the 
barest beginning of the passive in one conjugation while the active 
and middle are in full swing. English can only express the pas- 
sive by the auxiliary verb to be and the participle. 

7. The history of the middle and passive has been one of the 
most interesting in the Greek language. Originally there was no pas- 
sive. The Boeotian dialect uses the passive very seldom. In modern 
Greek there are few distinctive middles, so completely has the 


THE VOICES. 135 


passive captured the middle. In the New Testament the middle 
is already disappearing before the passive. In py PoByOpre avrovs 
(Matt. 10:26) the passive form is used, but not the passive idea. 
So also the common dzoxpile’s (Matt. 3:15). In Homer there is 
no future passiye and the second aorist passive is rare. Indeed the 
aorist middle and the aorist passive are not always distinct in 
Homer as *BAjro (he was struck). Cf. Sterrett, Homer’s Iliad, 
The Dialect of Homer, p. 27. All this is in harmony with the de- 
velopment of the passive from the middle and active. 

8. The term deponent as applied to the middle and passive is: 
largely a misnomer. Many of the tenses were defective and did 
not develop forms in all the voices. Hence it is not proper to say 
that they laid aside (depono) what they had never assumed. How- 
ever, as between the middle and the passive, as shown above, the 
middle gradually disappeared as the passive usurped both form 
and function. But the term deponent is not usually applied to 
this particular matter. The following examples will illustrate the 
voices in the New Testament: 

1 Cor. 5:11 (€ypaya, cvvavaplyvvebar, dvopalopevos); 6:7 (adixeioGe) ; 
6:11 (dredovcacGe, HyacOyre); 13:12 (ywoockw, émvyvdcopa, éreyvao- 
Onv); Lu. 20:11 (apooero); 20:13 (evtparyoovra); Matt. 27:5 
(dayyéaro) ; Matt. 27:24 (dreviparo); Mk. 14:47 (oracdpevos) ; 14:65 
(jpéavro); Luke 2:5 (droypayacbau); Acts 22:16 (Bdrrior); Acts 
12:8 (00 Kat imddyoar); Gal. 2:7 (aemiorerpar); 2 Thess. 2:15 
(€d:8axOnre); Matt. 9:38 (SenOyre); Matt. 10:9 (xryonoGe); 10:28 
(poBynFjre); Titus 2:7 (ceavrdv wapexopevos). 


CHAPTER XIX. 
THE TENSES. 


1. The name tense (French temps) isa mistake. Time is not 
the basal idea. This name does not represent the original and 
essential matter. Time belongs only to the indicative mode in 
Greek save by indirection, and is not the main idea in the indica- 
tive. In the other modes time is not expressed, and is only sug- 
gested by the relation to other parts of the sentence or context. In 
Latin time appears in the subjunctive also. Time is distinctly 
a secondary development in tense grafted on the main idea. Cf. 
Delbrueck, Grundlagen, p. 80. 

2. But what is the fundamental idea in tense? The state of 
the action is the main idea of tense, and not merely an additional 
idea as Hadley and Allen have it. This is the original and only 
general idea of tense. 

3. There are three distinct ideas as to duration of the action 
found in all the modes, viz., incompletion, completion, or indefi- 
niteness. These three conceptions cover all the kinds of action 
there are as to duration. In the indicative, where time is also ex- 
pressed, there might have been each of these three conceptions in 
distinct forms in past, present, and future. As a matter of fact, 
the conceptions exist, but only in the past is there distinct expres- 
sion with three tenses. The ideas are used, however, in the pres- 
ent and future, but not with separate tenses. The tense in the New 
Testament is used in accordance with the true Greek idiom, save 
that the Hebrew conception has sometimes in translation Greek 
determined the point of view. But in New Testament Greek one 
tense is not used ‘‘for’’ another. That is an abomination of gram- 
mar. We must beware of explaining Greek tenses from the Eng- 
lish translation. 


THE TENSES. 137 


The tense for indefinite action is the aorist, the tenses for incom- 
pleted action are the present, imperfect, and future; the tenses for 
completed action are the present perfect, past perfect (pluperfect), 
and future perfect. 

4. Here again we must insist on looking at the Greek tense from 
the Greek standpoint, and not from the English or German point 
of view. Each Greek tense has its meaning and is used to ex- 
press that idea. What the English would have used is quite 
another matter. Historical grammar is essential to exegetical 
grammar, and the best exegetical grammar maintains the Greek 
standpoint. It is not necessary to anglicize the Greek idiom in 
order to understand it; to do so is rather to hinder true apprehen- 
sion, for the student will inevitably feel that the Greek ought to be 
like the English. The English will be the standard and Greek 
rises or falls as it is like or unlike it. If Greek syntax is not un- 
derstood as Greek, it is not truly understood. 

5. Indefinite action—the aorist. The aorist is presented first 
because it is normally the oldest form of the Greek verb. The 
aorist and present in many verbs had the same stem like ¢y-p/, for 
instance. Cf. @¢y-v with éorn-v. The so-called second aorist is 
older than the first aorist. The root of a verb is found in the second 
aorist, if it has this tense. The Greek tenses seem to haye been 
built up around the second aorist. The aorist is the-simplest in 
idea. Itis unlimited action, ddpieros, both as to duration and as 
to time. The augment (an example of pre-flection) in the indica- 
tive shows past time, but the tense as a tense has no time. It is 
simple action without representing it either as incompleted or com- 
pleted. It may in fact be either, but the aorist does not say so. 
The Greek is an ‘‘aorist loving language’ (Broadus). A statement 
in the indicative would naturally be in the aorist unless there is 
reason to put it in some other tense, and so of the other modes. Ii 
the action is not to be described as completed or incompleted, put 
it in the aorist. General statements or illustrations are often put 
in the aorist and you are left to draw the inference. This is really 
a representative aorist. Some verbs of special meanings will have 
different shades of meaning in different tenses, and this is only 


138 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


natural. It is the tense idea plus the verb meaning. In the indica- 
tive the aorist is past time because of the augment; in the parti- 
ciple it is contemporaneous cr by suggestion past or future; it is by 
suggestion present or future in the subjunctive, optative, impera- 
tive, and infinitive. The infinitive in indirect discourse has past 
time only by suggestion. But in all this diversity as to time, the 
idea of simple action is always present. The aorist is not used 
‘for’? the present perfect, the past perfect, or the present. Hadley 
and Allen are here explaining Greek by the English. See the exact 
force of the Greek aorist in every instance. That force is well rep- 
resented by Moulton (Prolegomena, p. 109) as punctiliar or point 
action. The thing to bear in mind is that the aorist represents the 
action asa point. In itself it may haye continued a long time. 
It is precisely the idea of the aorist (undefined action) that it does 
not distinguish between complete or incomplete action. It may be 
used of either. Take oixodounby (Jo. 2:20), for instance, which 
covers the space of forty-six years as the ‘‘point.’’ Just here 
‘¢Aktionsart’’? comes in also. The particular meaning of the word 
itself may stress the beginning, the end, or the action as a whole. 
The German grammarians have giyen special names to the resultant 
ideas, that is, the aorist plus the meaning of the word. For the 
beginning ingressive as voonoa (to fall sick), for the end effective as 
tedeoa (to complete) or wAnpOoa (Matt. 5:17), for the act as a 
whole constative (not a very good term) as {joa (to live). Some- 
times indeed the same word can be used for each of these ideas as 
Baretv may be “‘let fly,” ‘‘hit,” or merely ‘‘throw’’ (Moulton, 
Prolegomena, p. 130). So then in the aorist the tense idea is to be 
combined with the word idea. It may be added that in the past - 
indicative, in the subjunctive, the optative, the positive impera- 
tive, the aorist is the tense used as a matter of course unless stress 
is to be laid on the ideas either of incompletion or completion. 
The Greek tenses are not always made from the same stem. These 
examples will illustrate the New Testament aorist. Matt. 3:17 
(ciddxynoa); Matt. 25:5 (évvoragav); Matt. 9:18 (éreAcdirnoev; observe 
dprv); Matt. 12:28 (épOacer); Mark 11:24 (éddBere); Matt. 23:2 
(exaioav); Jo, 10:38 (yore, but cf. ywdoxyre); Luke 1:30 (etpes) ; 


THE TENSES. 139 


2:48 (érotyoas); 16:4 (€yvor, petactabo) ; 23:19 (jv BrAnBeis) ; 24:17 
(éoraOnoav); James 1:11 (dveradrev); 1:24 (éreAabero); Rom. 3:25 
(jpaptov); 15:15 (eypaya); Mark 5:39 (dreOavev) ; 5:42 (avéorn, but 
note wepieware); 1 Cor. 7:28 (juaptes). In Luke 23:19 (jv Brnbeis) 
we have the aorist participle with 7. 

6. Incompleted action—(present, imperfect, and future). Pres- 
ent and future tenses are named from the point of view of time, 
while the imperfect is named from the standpoint of state of dura- 
tion. It would have been better to haye had all the names con- 
sistent. The imperfect in Greek is a past imperfect, and the pres- 
ent is a present imperfect, and the future is a future imperfect. 
But it should be noted that the present indicative is also often 
aoristic and the future is usually so. In the indicative no clear 
distinction between indefinite and incomplete action is made in 
present and future time. In the other modes the present tense 
is more free from this complication. The idea of incompletion or 
linear action runs through all the modes and is a variation from 
the aorist conception. See formation of the present from aorist 
root stems. The idea of time concerning the incompleted action 
appears properly only in the indicative where all three points of 
time occur. The subjunctive has no time of its own, and only the 
present tense for incompletion. The so-called future subjunctive 
is a later deyelopment. The optative is similarly situated, save 
that there is a future optative, which, however, is only used in 
indirect discourse where in the direct form the future indicative 
was used. The same thing is true of the infinitive, the future 
infinitive representing the future indicative, save with peAdkw, when 
there is a future idea in the word (but néAdw uses also present and 
aorist infinitiyes). The future participle corresponds to the future 
indicative by suggestion, especially with the idea of purpose in the 
context. But this is a very rare construction in the New Testa- 
ment. There is no future imperative. So, then, the imperfect or 
past incompletion is confined to the indicative, the future or future 
incompletion is nearly so if indirect discourse is borne in mind. 
The present is the normal tense for incompletion in all the modes, 
The stem of the imperfect is the same as that of the present. 


140 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


(a) The present. 

So, then, the present tense expresses incompleted action, which 
action in any given case may be momentary, prolonged, simulta- 
neous, descriptive, repeated, customary, attempted, interrupted, or 
begun, according to the nature of the case or the meaning of the 
verb itself. In vivid narration past or future incompleted action 
can be conceived of and stated in the present indicative. This is 
not a peculiarity of language at all. It is simply a lively imagina- 
tion that changes its point of view. No distinctive effort is made 
to present the aorist idea in the present time (indicative). That 
idea is merged with the present tense without distinction. Some- 
times the idea of incompletion is intensified by the use of the verb 
ciué and the participle as in English and Hebrew. The so-called 
historical present in the midst of aorists and imperfects is just the 
lively imagination of the narrator drawing the picture closer. Itis 
not the present used for the other tenses. The hearer or reader is 
expected to wake up and see the picture. The same thing is true 
of the present in the midst of futures. Some verbs naturally sug- 
gest future action like eu. Indeed some future tenses like ety, 
mopar are thus merely lively presents. In Homer, as is well known, 
the present and imperfect stems are not always differentiated from 
the aorist. The periphrastic present is not uncommon. Another 
thing to be noted about the present tense is the effect of preposi- 
tions on the word, Aktionsart again. It is a pity that the term 
perfective is applied by the new grammarians to this effect of some 
prepositions in composition. It has nothing to do with the perfect 
tense, and it is necessarily confusing to some extent. If épyaferOae 
is to work, xarepyafeoOa (Phil. 2:12) is to work down. So ywooxey . 
is to know, éxvywwoxev is to know thoroughly. The list can be 
easily extended. Sometimes the simple verb represents the incom- 
plete idea like @joxew (to be dying), while the compound aorist 
sums up the whole like dzofaveiv (to die). See xaradtoar (Matt. 
5:17). The following examples of the present will set forth fairly 
well New Testament usage: Matt. 2:4 (yewdarac) ; 3:1 (wapayiverac) ; 
3:10 (xeirqe) ; 3:15 (apérov éoriv) ; 5:25 (lobe edvodv, el); 6:2 (aowtow, 
dréxovow); 25:8 (oBevvevrac); 26:18 (wad); 27:33 (eeriv Acyopevos) ; 


THE TENSES. 141 


Mk. 11:23 (yiverar); Lu. 17:6 (exere); 18:12 (xrdpar); 19:8 (ddwpe) ; 
19:17 (tobe éxywv); 22:23 (en); 22:24 (Sone?) ; Jo. 3:15 (ey); 10:32 
(Abd£ere); 10:38 (miorednre, yewooxyte); 14:3 (€pxouar); Heb. 3:12 
Brémere); Rey. 1:18 (Gv eiui); Mk. 4:38 (droddvpeba). 

(b) The imperfect. 

The imperfect likewise expresses incompleted action which in 
any given case may be either momentary, simultaneous, prolonged, 
descriptive, repeated, customary, interrupted, attempted, or begun, 
according to the context or the meaning of the verb. Too much 
has been read into the Greek tenses and not enough allowance is 
always made for the meaning of the verb itself. To wink the eye, 
for instance, is obviously different as to length of duration from 
eating one’s dinner and living a life. With due regard to this 
point and the context the Greek imperfect will be found always 
true to its root idea. The participle with «zc is very common in 
the New Testament, especially in Luke. The imperfect is the 
descriptive tense of narrative and varies the simple monotony of 
the aorist. It puts life into the story like the present. Some 
imperfects that are very common like é\eyev perhaps do not differ 
in stem from an old second aorist (cf. €AaBev). In English we 
must use the auxiliary verb and the participle if we wish to accent 
linear action either in the past, the present, or the future. In 
Matt. 9:24 note carefully drebavev, xabevda, xateyekwv. The meaning 
of the word (Alktionsart) is to be observed in the imperfect tense 
also. It is interesting to compare imperfects with aorists or per- 
fects in the same sentence and see the reason for the difference. 
Examine, for instance, these New Testament examples: Matt. 3:6 
(€BamriLovro); 3:14 (duexdAvev); 26:55 (exabeLouny); 27:30 (érurrov); 
Mk.12:41 (€6edpe); 14;61 (eorisra); 14:72 (exAaev); 15:6 (drredvev) ; 
15:23 (éddovv); Mk. 5:13 (érviyovro); Lu. 1:21 (jv zpocdoxar; cf. 
1:22, jv duavedwv) ; 1:59 (exdrovy); 17:10 (dpefAomev) ; 17:27 (qobrov, 
etc.) ; 23:12 (apotmfpyov dvtes); Jo. 21:18 (eavvves, etc.); Acts 18:4 
(Erebev); 27:18 (érovtvro); Eph. 5:4 (dvfxev); Acts 22:22 (xabijcer); 
Matt. 23:23 (a); Lu. 24:26 (éde); Matt. 25:5 (éxdBevdor). 

(c) The future. 

The future likewise presents incompleted action which in any 


142 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


case may be either momentary, instantaneous, prolonged, descrip- 
tive, repeated, customary, interrupted, attempted, or begun, ac- 
cording to the nature of the case or the meaning of the verb. The 
future with eiué and the participle is fairly common. The future 
optative does not occur in the New Testament. As in the present, 
so in the future no distinctive expression of aoristic action is made. 
The very fact of futurity throws an air of indefiniteness over many 
verbs in the future tense. The will of the speaker or writer often 
enters largely into the tone and exact force of a verb in the future. 
Compare our shall and will. The only way to emphasize the idea 
of incompleteness in the future tense is by the use of eiué and the 
participle as in the present tense. There is this difference, how- 
ever. In the future the idea is usually aoristic (ddpurros, unde- 
fined). This is due partly to the nature of the case since all future 
events are more or less uncertain. But another reason is the origin 
of the tense itself. It is probably a variation of the aorist subjunc- 
tive as the usage of Homer indicates (cf. Giles, Manual, ete., p. 
446 ff.). But Giles suggests also that the Aryan and Letto-Slay- 
onic future in -syo (cf. ‘‘go’”’ in English and na in Coptic) may be 
discernible also. But the result is that the future indicative and 
aorist subjunctive do not differ greatly in actual usage. Hence in 
the New Testament with éav, iva, py wore, etc., both appear. There 
is a difference though slight. The subjunctive is a doubtful asser- 
tion in present time, while the future indicative is a positive asser- 
tion in future time. Some futures indeed are but variations of the 
present indicative (cf. etué and épxouac), due to the vivid realization 
of a future event in present time. See Delbrueck. The periphras- 
tic future is common in the Sanskrit. In the modern Greek 6a _ 
and the infinitive (cf. English) is the most frequent method. In 
the New Testament #€Ao has not yet weakened to a mere future 
like our ‘‘will’’ and ‘‘shall.”’ Ina passage like Jo. 7:17 the full 
force of 6€Aw is to be insisted on. Cf. Oedere droAvow (Matt. 27:17) 
with modern Greek. Mé\dAw appears in the New Testament chiefly 
with the aorist or present infinitive, (Matt. 11:14; Rom. 8:18) and 
with future infinitive also (Acts 11:28). Forms like wiopa (Luke 
17:8) give color to the aoristic origin of the future. A case like 


THE TENSES. 143 


ayo. €veobe (1 Pet. 1:16) has an imperative force. But various as 
the sources of the future are, it is certain that it is a later develop- 
ment in the tenses. The future with a negative may amount to a 
prohibition. The future participle is not common in the New 
Testament (Matt. 27:49). Here are further examples of the New 
Testament usage: Matt. 1:21 (xadéoas); 3:11 (Barrica); 6:5 (ot 
éoeoGe); 10:22 (évecOe proovpevor); 12:21 (eAmodow); 16:22 (€orac); 
21:41 (arod<ow, cf..droAG 1 Cor. 1:19); 27:24 (dpecbe); Lu. 1:20 
(€oy owwrdv) ; 12:8 (dporoyyoe) ; 16:3 (xoujow); Phil. 1:18 (yapyoo- 
por); Lu. 21:19 (xryjcecbe); Heb. 11:32 (émrctWe). 

7. Completed action—(present perfect, past perfect, and future 
perfect). The perfect tense is found in all the modes, although 
naturally it would not occur often in the subjunctive, optative, and 
imperative. Indeed in the New Testament the perfect optative is 
absent and in the subjunctive is found only in the periphrastic 
form. The perfect imperative is almost obsolete in the New Testa- 
ment. The xowy corresponds to this situation. But the perfect 
infinitive and participle are quite common. It always conveys the 
same sense, completed action. Variations in the resultant idea 
will occur in this tense also, owing to the meaning of the verb and 
the context. The action may have been completed a moment ago 
or a thousand years ago. The action may be represented as just 
finished or as standing finished. The tense yields itself naturally 
to these different applications. The resultant idea may be state or 
condition. The reduplication is the effort to express the idea of 
completion in the verb form and exists in all the modes. It de- 
pends on the speaker or writer as to how he will present an action, 
whether as incompleted, completed, or indefinite. He chooses the 
tense that will present his idea. No sensible man uses one tense 
when he means another tense. That would be jargon. But in the 
subjunctive, optative, and imperative the choice is practically one 
between the aorist and the present. Different writers vary greatly 
_in the use of the aorist and the present. It is true indeed that in 
Sanskrit, as the aorist disappears, the perfect is used with increas- 
ing frequency. In Latin the distinction in form between the aorist 
and the perfect vanished completely, but the idea of the aorist was 


144 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


preserved in the perfect form (aorist) as is shown by the sequence 
of tenses in a dependent clause. One cannot infer, because Greek 
uses presents, aorists, imperfects, and perfects in parallel clauses, 
that these tenses are equivalent. The Greek loves variety. The 
writer or speaker has perfect freedom to change his standpoint and 
he expects the hearer or reader to do likewise. Uniformity belongs 
to the professional grammarian, not to the living language. What- 
ever may be true of the Byzantine Greek under the influence of 
the Latin blending of aorist and perfect forms (not of tense mean- 
ing), that cannot be justly said to be true of the New Testament 
Greek. There is a threefold history of reduplication in Greek. 
With the aorist reduplication is intensive as 7yayov, with the pres- 
ent continuous as d/dou, with the perfect completed in idea as 
dddwxa. 

(a) The present perfect. Et 

This is the standard tense for completed action and is in 
all the modes. In the New Testament the perfect optative 
does not occur, but some examples of the periphrastic sub- 
junctive are found besides «dé (1 Tim. 3:15). The perfect 
imperative is rare, though the perfect infinitive and the per- 
fect participle are common. The present perfect is not used for 
the past perfect, the aorist, the present or the future. For viyid- 
ness a writer will sometimes use it in the midst of other tenses, but 
he makes the change on purpose in order to produce yividness. 
He does not wish the present perfect understood as aorist. The 
use of eiué with the perfect participle is rather common in the New 
Testament. The present perfect with reduplication is probably 
derived from the iteratiye present. We do not know the origin of 
the -xa stems. The existence of ofda, AeAoura, ete., may indicate 
that some reduplicated stems in -xa set the fashion for most per- 
fects. The modern Greek has wholly dropped the reduplicated 
perfect save in the passive participle. Instead éyw and the aorist 
infinitive (a, not ac) is used as éyw Avoee much like the English. 
The older Greek has already begun to use éy# Avoas. This analytic 
process is characteristic of the xowy and so of the New Testament 
(especially Luke). The present perfect in Greek does not say that 


THE TENSES. 145 


the act was just completed. That may be true or not. Here again 
the meaning of the verb itself and the context is to be carefully 
observed (Aktionsart). The resultant idea will be due to the tense 
plus the special verb idea. Each tense thus has a certain amount 
of play in actual usage, though the tense idea itself remains stable. 
The idea of completion may thus have immediate application or 
remote, may accent the permanence of the completion over a long 
period or merely the present situation, may suggest the unchange- 
able result or accent only the actual outcome. It is not possible 
to square the Greek perfect with English usage. For a good dis- 
cussion of this point see Plummer on Luke, p. 424. The Greeks 
used the aorist where we in English prefer the perfect and vice versa. 
Each language has its own point of view. These examples will 
illustrate New Testament usage: Matt. 3:2 (#yyxev); Matt. 25:24 
(<Andds, contrast with AaBov verse 20); 4:7 (yéypamrar); 13:46 
(weémpaxev, cf. eixev); Mk.4:39 (repipwoo); 15:44 (réOvnxev); Lukel:22 
(édpaxev); 4:6 (xapadédorar); 5:23 (apéwvrar); 5:32 (€AyjdrAvda); 14:8 
(q kexAnuevos); 14:18 (exe pe wapytynpevov) ; 16:26 (éornpuxta); 20:6 
merecpevos eotiv); Jo. 5:36 (dréoradke); 5:45 (pAmixare); 16:28 
(€AjAvba and note éé7AOov); 17:6 (rerypyxav);. 19:22 (yéypade) ; 
1 Cor. 15:4 (éypyeptar); Heb. 5:12 (yeyovare éxovres); 7:23 (eioiv 
yeyovores) ; Jas. 1:24 (dreAndAvbev); 2 Cor. 1:9 (aeroBores apev); Rev. 
5:7 (ctdnpev); Mk. 5:4 (Sedéo6ar). Cf. also Mark 5:19 and Luke 
12:35. 

(b) Past perfect. The augment (the sign of past time) is not 
always used in the New Testament (see Homer). This tense is not 
so common as the aorist indicative because it was not so often de- 
sired to emphasize completed action in past time. This tense, as 
all idea of past time, is confined to the indicative. It was never 
very common in Greek, in simple truth, just as the perfect sub- 
junctive, optative, and imperative never enjoyed a wide vogue. 
The Boeotian dialect has no past perfect. Still in the cow the 
past perfect indicative is far more in evidence than the perfects in 
the other modes. For practical purposes outside of the indicative 
the Greek used the aorist or the present and only occasionally the 
Benes In the indicatiye, future time was almost wholly indicated 


146 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


by one tense, present time by two tenses, past time by three though 
the aorist and the imperfect held the field against the past perfect. 
The aorist was used of past time in the indicative, as a matter of 
course, unless there was a special desire to lay stress on the incom- 
pletion or the completion of the action. When therefore the past 
perfect is used, the completion in past time is distinctly empha- 
sized. But as a rule the Greeks did not care to work out the rela- 
tion of time so carefully. The simple aorist told the story consec- 
utively and one could see the rest for himself. The periphrastic 
form appears occasionally. Examine these New Testament illustra- 
tions: Matt. 7:25 (reBepedriwro); 26:48 (joav BeBapnuevr); Mark 
14:44 (SeSdéxer); 16:9 (ékBeBrAnxa); Luke 4:29 (exoddpynro); 5:17 
Gjoav édnAvOdres); 8:29 (cvvnpmdxe); 15:24 (hv drorwdus); 16:20 
(€BéBrAyro); Jo. 6:17 (éyeyovea, and note great variety of tenses in 
verses 16-21); 11:44 (aeprededer0) 5 18:5 (ior); Acts 14:23 (ze- 
morevkercav); 20:16 (expiker); 21:29 (Hoav mpoewpaxdres, and note 
cionyayev and xexoivwxey in preceding verse). 

(c) The future perfect. This was always a rare tense and is 
nearly extinct in the New Testament. It is not often necessary to 
express completed action in future time. The few examples in the 
New Testament are confined to the indicative. One (xexpafovow) 
in Lu. 19:40 is not supported by Aleph B L, and is not in West- 
cott and Hort’s text. The other examples are periphrastic futures 
with eiyé save eidyow in Heb. 8:11, and this is from the LXX. The 
two ancient Greek future perfects active (éorjgm and rebivjgw) do 
not appear in the New Testament. As examples of the periphras- 
tic conjugation observe the following; Matt. 16:19 (éorat dedenevor) ; 
Lu. 12:52 (€covrar diapepepirpevor) ; Heb, 2:13 (€copar rerobws), 


CHAPTER XX. 
CO-ORDINATE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. CONJUNCTIONS. 


1. What is a sentence? The answer in grammatical terms is not 
so easy as it appears at first. The word sententia is, of course, a 
thought, an opinion expressed. The object of language is supposed 
to be to convey thought—or to conceal it. Any word or phrase 
that conveys a clear and complete idea is a sentence. Is the verb 
essential to a sentence? Some grammarians think so, but that is 
not always true. The verb is the main word in a sentence and is 
usually expressed, but not always. It is not alone the copula éoriy 
that is sometimes absent. Any verb may be absent if the sense is 
_ clear without it. When sailors shout ‘‘A sail! A sail!’ it is a dis- 
tinct idea. 

2. The simple sentence grew up around the verb. Subject and 
predicate became the foci of the sentence. Each of these 
might or might not be further amplified by the various parts of 
speech or by adjuncts. The child is making progress when he 
puts words together. The clause may be long or short. 

8. Co-ordination of clauses is the next step in language. Two 
clauses are either placed side by side with connecting links (true 
conjunctions) or contrasted with each other (disjunctive particles). 
Co-ordination (paratactic conjunctions) was the first and always 
the most frequent method of uniting clauses. In the New Testa- 
ment the xowy7 usage is perhaps heightened in this particular by the 
use of xaf much like Hebrew vav, though not to the extent of the 
LXX. Kai is as frequent as ré is uncommon in the New Testa- 
ment. Téis used chiefly in Luke (especially Acts) as Luke 2:16 
(ré—xal), 21:11, etc. Besides re—xaié it is found alone (Acts 1:15), 
with dé (Acts 19:2), and with another ré (Acts 2:46). But xaé in 
the New Testament is the most frequent of all conjunctions. Turn 


148 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


to the Gospel of John, for instance, and it meets you at every turn 
as a mere connective between words (Jo. 3:22), at the beginning 
of clauses (9:39), equal to and yet (3:19), in the sense of also 
(10:16). For otre. . . . xaé see Jo. 4:11. Another use equivalent 
to even is found elsewhere (Lu. 10:17). The xai éyévero so common 
‘in Luke (over fifty times) does look like the Hebrew, but the 
papyrihaveitalso. The N. T. has four constructions with xai éyevero, 
one is Kat éyévero kat (Lu. 5:17), another is kati éyévero and the verb 
(1:23) another in kat éyévero kai idod (24:4), and the last is the 
infinitive (Mk. 2:23). So also éyevero dé (Lu. 6:1). In kai eyevero xa‘, 
the second xa/is almost like 6m. Aé (Jo. 11:4) and adda (2 Cor. 
7:11) are both in themselves co-ordinating conjunctions. For 
Kai. ... kat see Jo. 6:36. For kai yap see Jo. 4:23. In Matt. 
26:15 Kai (kayo... . tapadwow) almost has the force of tva. Kai 
can be used any number of times. See Matt. 18:25. The para- 
tactic conjunctions are not always used. Cf. 2 Tim. 3:2f. (Asyn- 
deton). Cf. 1 Cor. 15:42-44. 

4, Contrast is expressed by several conjunctions in frequent use. 
7 is used fairly often both singly and doubly (7—#) as Matt. 5:17; 
6:24. So also ere, only in Paul’s Epistles (common) and twice in 
1 Peter. See 1 Cor. 3:22. 8€ is not so frequent as a transitional 
conjunction between sentences as it was in the earlier Greek. This 
is due to the wide use of xaé and to the frequent absence of trans- 
itional conjunctions in the New Testament. Still dé occurs very 
often and both as a slight mark of transition and as a rather strong 
adversatiye conjunction, depending altogether on the context. See 
1 Cor. 15:12, 20. Cf. éyw 8€ (Matt. 5:28). For kai 5€é see Jo.6:51. 
é\Ad does not in itself mean contrast any more than é¢, but is so 
used in appropriate contexts (Jo. 6:32). For use in mere pro- 
gressive statement see 2 Cor. 7:11. For ddd in conclusion of a 
condition see Rom. 6:5. For ddd’ 7 see 2 Cor. 1:13. yw occurs 
only once (Heb. 6:14) and that in a quotation from the Septua- 
gint. dpws occurs only three times (John 12:42). 

5. Disjunctive conjunctions are 7 and ere. In Matt. 12:33 we 
have 7... . 7, but in Lu. 20:4 only one 7. For jro. . . . # see 
(Rom. 6:16). Green (Handbook of N. T. Greek Grammar, p. 345) 


CLAUSES. CONJUNCTIONS. 149 


cites xaé in Matt. 21:23 as practically disjunctive. Cf. Heb. vav. 
For 7 xat see Rom. 4:9. For ete. . . . etre see Rom. 1236-8. Neg- 
ative disjunctives are frequent. So otk... . ovd€ (Acts 8:21) 
ovdé. . . . ovdé (Rev. 9:4), otre. . . . ovre (Rom. 8:38), ovdé.... 
ovre (Gal. 1:12), uy... . pndé (Jo. 4:15), pndé. . .:. pydé (Matt. 
10:10). We even have otre... . xaé (Jo. 4:11). 

6. Inferential conjunctions serve also to mark the transition 
from sentence to sentence as well as from clause to clause. The 
Greeks carried the idea of inner relation often to all the sentences. 
So close did they feel the bond of connected thought to be. dpa (from 
dpapioxw) is used fairly often and is usually prepositive in the New 
Testament, especially with otv (Matt. 12:28; Eph. 2:19). owv is 
very common in the Gospel of John (not Epistles and Revelation) 
and moderately so elsewhere. It is used in both the transitional 
and illative senses (John 2:18; Matt. 3:10). dpa otv is common in 
Paul as Rom. 8:12. ydp (yé+épa) is very common indeed in 
various resultant senses (explanation, argument, etc.) due to its 
compound etymology, and the various connections in which it 
occurs. See Acts 8:31; Matt. 1:21; Rom. 2:1; 16:19. Cf. rovyapotv 
(Heb. 12:1), and rotvy (Lu. 20:25). The Greek like the Latin 
uses the relative like a conjunction and begins a sentence thus. 
So av@ oy (Lu. 12:3), d6 (Rom. 1:24), ete. Cf. dore Matt. 19:6. 

7. But the Greek is particularly rich in subordinating conjunc- 
tions which introduce dependent clauses. Thus a number of 
dependent clauses may be grouped around one independent clause, 
the whole being a highly organized method of speech. The Sans- 
krit and the Hebrew are both poor in these subordinating con- 
junctions. But Greek is like Latin and English in this respect. 
These conjunctions will be discussed in detail in connection with 
the special forms of sentence that they give rise to. Here a few 
only are mentioned en bloc. 67 is freely used both in direct quo- 
tations (Matt. 4:6), indirect quotations (Matt. 2:16), and in causal 
sentences (Lu. 6:20). So with és in comparative clauses, temporal 
clauses, indirect discourse (how, not ‘‘that’’). See Lu. 24:6; 
Rom. 15:24 (as dv). ore and érav are used hundreds of times, 


éwore not at all (WH.), eve’ (Heb. 9:26; 10:2; Rom. 3:6) and 


150 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


éxeidy seldom, jvixa twice, éoré not at all, éws often, pepe and axpe 
seldom, ézov common, od fairly so, 64ev moderately often. But the 
time would fail to tell of all the Greek conjunctions in this space. 
This list added to those already discussed in subordinate clauses, 
will give some idea of New Testament usage. 

8. Modes, tenses, and yoices mean the same thing in both sub- 
ordinate and independent clauses. The root idea of mode and 
tense is always discernible. Each will be colored by the meaning 
of the verb itself and the context, but here again the resultant idea 
of all these must not be put upon the mode. The Greek isa 
highly organized language with a rich collection of conjunctions, 
both co-ordinating and subordinating. Itis thus possible in Greek, 
by means of the sharp distinction in tense, mode, and conjunction 
to make yery exact distinctions in the expression of Greek thought. 
The imperative is naturally used seldom in subordinate clauses, 
and in the New Testament very seldom. Note 6 dyrioryre (1 Pet. 
5:9), eis qv orpre in 1 Pet. 5:12, and ta... . xavyao6w (1 Cor. 1:31). 
The point to insist on is that the subordinating conjunctions do 
not change the root ideas in mode, voice, and tense. In Matt. 
9:31 (dpare pydeis ywwoxéerw) two imperatives come together. In 
1 Cor. 1:31 xavyac6w after iva is due to the quotation. 

9. The two kinds of statement natural to subordinate clauses 
are positive assertion and doubting assertion. The indicative, of 
course, is used for the one, and the subjunctiye.and the optative 
for the other. In the New Testament the subjunctive is nearly 
always used for the second idea. The infinitive and participle are 
also freely used in subordinate clauses, not with conjunctions, 
however, as they are not really modes. Often an idea in Greek. 
can be expressed with substantial identity either by a conjunction 
and a finite mode, or by the infinitive with or without-a preposi- 
tion, or by the participle. Individual style and taste will often 
determine between them as well as between several conjunctions of 
similar import. All subordinate clauses maintain a case relation 
to the principal part of the sentence, and so are either substantive, 
adjective, or adverbial. See Matt. 9:28 where the clause with dr 
is in the accusative case and is substantive. The relative clause is 


CLAUSES. CONJUNCTIONS. laa 


an adjective clause (Lu. 1:26) as the temporal clause is an adverbial 
clause (Lu. 1:23). 

10. So close did the Greeks feel the connection of thought to be 
that independent sentences were often, almost usually in the more 
careful writers, joined together by some of the co-ordinating con- 
junctions or intensive particles. In Plato or Demosthenes such 
sentences and even paragraphs are thrown into relief or relation to 
each other by 68€, kai, adda, re, odd, yap, ovv, dpa, 7, 87, etc. As 
mentioned above even relative pronouns (cf. 66ev Heb. 8:3) with 
prepositions were so used as éy ots, ot xapw (Lu. 7:47), di qv airiay 
(2 Tim. 1:12), etc. But in the New Testament this inner bond is 
not so constantly preseryed. In Romans, for instance, where the 
line of thought is close, Paul constantly follows the ancient idiom. 
But in the Gospels frequent breaks occur as in Jo. 13:21,22,23,24, 
25, but in 26 we find ot. Kai is perhaps rather more frequently 
used at the beginning of sentences than in the earlier Greek. Cf. 
Jo. 13:27. 


CHAPTER XXI. 
FINAL CLAUSES. 


1. Pure final clauses are adverbial, and are in fact in the accus- 
ative case (general reference). Compare the adverb dwpedv. Here 
there is design, something aimed at, finis, end, aim. 

2. In the New Testament the pure final particles are iva, dzws, 
py. os occurs once (Acts 20:24) according to some documents. 
So Westcott and Hort. da is far the most common particle of 
design and is used chiefly with the subjunctive, but often with the 
future indicative, and even a few times with the present indicative. 
Seek the force of mode, voice, and tense in each instance. As 
illustrations of these particles take Mk. 9:9 (iva pydert diyyjowvtar); 
Lu. 6:34 (Wa darodaBwow); 20:10 (Ha Sdcovow); 1 Jo. 5:20 (ia 
ywooxopev). In the case of drws only the subjunctive is used in the 
text of W H except once (Rom. 3:4 with ay), and usually without 
av as in Matt. 6:2 (d2ws dofacbdow), negative py (Matt. 6:18, dws 
pi pavys), but occasionally with av as in Luke 2:35 (érws ap 
droxatudbdow). The old classic construction of érws and the future 
indicative with verbs of effort has disappeared in the New Testa- 
ment. In Rom. 3:4 dws vyjoas is from the LXX. “Orws in Lu. 
24:20 (d2ws rapédwxay) is relative merely and not final. jp, pajrore, 
and pyrws are used for pure design and so adverbial. The sub- - 
junctive or future indicative can be used. So Mk. 13:36 (uy evpn); 
14:2 (yore Eorac); 1 Cor. 9:27 (pyrws yevwpar). jens is also used 
with the aorist indicative to express a design about a past event. 
So Gal. 2:2 (pyres edpaov ) and 1 Thess. 3:5 (mayTrws eretpacer ). 
In 2 Tim. 2:25 W H have in the text wyrore day (opt.) after prim- 
ary tense. 

3. wais not always strictly final. It is in the New Testament 
very often non-final, not result, but not yet design. In this con- 


FINAL CLAUSES. 153 


struction the clause is substantive and gives the content and not 
the purpose. The clause will then be substantive and in the nomi- 
native, accusative, or some other case. In modern Greek va and 
finite mode has supplanted the infinitive. This tendency is per- 
ceptible in the New Testament. The negative is yy. The possible 
optative in Eph. 1:17 (607) is not pure design. Both here and in 
2 Tim. 2:25 the optative in text of W H is after primary tense. It 
may seem strange that this non-final or sub-final use of tva did not 
come to be pure result since the Latin ut (cf. English that) was 
used in both senses. But as a matter of fact it did not. “Ozws is 
also sometimes employed in the non-final and substantive sense. 
The same thing is also true of py, pajrore, paws, especially after 
verbs of beseeching, striving, fearing, etc., and in the accusative. 
py in the best documents is found only with the subjunctive in 
New Testament, as Acts 27:17 (uy exrécwow). payrore is little used 
in this sense, but is found with subjunctive and future indicative 
as in Heb. 4:1 (pyore 8oxq); 3:12 (pajrore ora). ore has lost 
its temporal idea and means ‘‘perchance.’’ paws is used with the 
subjunctive as 1 Cor. 8:9 (ujrws yévytar). If the fear or caution 
is about a present or past event, the indicative is used with pyras. 
So Gal. 4:11 (uyjaws Kexoriaxa). With the infinitive dofodvo. means 
to hesitate (Matt. 2:22, ebony dredOciv). In Lu. 19:21 we have 
dtu... . after epoBovyyy oe. Here are further examples of tva 
with the non-final idea: Mk. 8:22 (iva dyyrae after rapaxadovorr) ; 
Matt. 18:6 (cupdepea iva kpeuacO7) ; Mk. 9:30 (ov« 70edev iva tis yvor) ; 
Jo. 15:12 f. (iva éyarare in apposition with évrody, iva 64 in apposi- 
tion with ravrys). A peculiar use of wa with the imperative in 
1 Cor. 1:31 (iva xavydo) is due to the direct quotation without 
change of form. John’s Gospel has wa about one hundred and 
fifty times while Luke has only sixteen instances of it in Acts. 

4, There are other methods of expressing design in the New 
Testament besides conjunctions. The infinitive is very commonly 
used for this purpose and never expresses mere result, not even 
Rom. 7:3 (rod py etvac); either by itself as accusative of general 
reference, Mark 2:17 (xadéoat); or with the very common 70d (geni- 
tive of the article, and not our English to) as Matt. 2:13 (rod dzro- 


154 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


A€oar) ; or With eis 76 (often in Paul), as Rom. 1:11 (eis 7d ornpry69- 
vat); or with zpos 76 (common in Luke and Paul), as Matt. 23:5 
mpos TO Oeabnvar); or with dore as Matt. 24:24 (dore rAavaoba); or 
with és (twice only), as Heb. 7:9 (as ézos eixeiv). Moreover, the 
relative with the future indicative, Mark 1:2 (0s xatacxevéoe) or 
the subjunctive, Heb. 8:3 (0 zpocevéyxn), can be used to indicate 
design. A few examples of the future participle also occur, as 
Acts 8:27 (apooxuvjcwv). 

5. Sometimes the principal yerb is not expressed and the con- 
téxt must supply the leading idea as only the dependent clause is 
given. This is natural in abrupt speech. So Mk. 5:28 (iva ém6yjs) ; 
Matt. 20:32 (iva avoryéow) ; Eph. 4:29 (iva 36). 

6. Then again ta itself is not used in what is like a non-final 
clause. However these examples can be otherwise and more 
properly explained than by the ellipsis of #. Each verb may be 
independent and the subjunctive merely the hortatory subjunctive 
or a question of doubt. So Lu. 6:42 (des éxBadrw; compare the 
modern Greek as and subjunctive regularly); Jo. 18:39 (BovAcrbe 
drodvow); Mk. 14:12 (Odes Erousdowper). 


CHAPTER XXII. 
CLAUSES OF RESULT. 


1. Consecutive clauses had a meager development in Greek as 
compared with Latin and modern English. After all result was 
once design and design may be contemplated result. So ut in 
Latin serves both purposes. Blass (Grammar of N. T. Greek, p. 
272) thinks that ta came to be so used in the New Testament. 
But to this we demur. : 

2. In the ancient Greek the consecutive idea was expressed by 
déore and the indicative when it was regarded as actually accom- 
plished. There are only two examples of this use of éore in the 
New Testament, John 3:16 (dere éwxey), and Gal. 2:13 (dere cvwva- 
anxOn). The indicative suits these two cases exactly. 

3. But in the New Testament the infinitive with dore is very 
common, not merely in the sense of design, the old usage (Luke 
4:29, dore xataxpypvicar), but also of actual result (Mark 4:37 adore 
yeuilecOar). Cf. Matt. 13:32 (dere edAGeiv). This latter is indeed 
the usual construction of dere in the New Testament, some forty- 
five examples in all. 

4. The word dore is also used at the beginning of sentences with 
the indicative, the subjunctive, or even the imperative. But here 
it has no effect on the construction at all and is not a consecutive 
particle, but an inferential conjunction. See Mk. 2:28 (dere éoriv) ; 
1 Cor. 5:8 (dere éoprafwpev); 1 Cor. 10:12 (dare Brerérw). 

5. The origin of dere is very simple, as and ré. as was originally 
a demonstrative (4s in Homer) and then a relatiye. It is not 
always easy to decide which dove is with the infinitive, demonstra- 
tive, or relative, nor does it greatly matter in actual usage. 

6. Perhaps a word more is needed to observe that not only is 
wva not used in the strict consecutive sense, but the infinitive is not 


156 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


so used except with éore. No true example of rod and the infini- 
tive in this sense exists in the New Testament, nor of es 76 and 
infinitive, not to mention zpos ro and the infinitive. See on the 
other side Burton, N. T. Moods and Tenses, p. 157. 

7. *Ed’ dre (on condition that) does not appear in the New Tes- 
tament at all nor os re after 7. Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 224) 
thinks that tva in Gal. 2:9 is practically equal to é¢’ dre. 

8. In Heb. 3:11; 4:3 és is considered consecutive by some 
scholars (so), but ‘‘as’’ is probably correct. 

9. In Matt. 8:27 orc is practically a resultant conjunction after 
otros. Cf. quiin Latin. Torards éorw otros Stu kal of dvepor kat ® 
Oddacca aird imaxovovow; cf. also Lu. 8:25. This is much like 
OUTWS WOTE, : 

10. Burton (N. T. Moods and Tenses, p. 124) says that New Tes- 
tament Greek uses the relative with the idea of result as in Latin 
and the older Greek, but he cites no example to that effect. In 
Rom. 8:32 és ye with éfecoaro comes close to that idea, 


CHAPTER XXIII. 
WISHES. 


1. It is not the verbs that express wish or will that are here 
under discussion though they have an interest in themselves. Cf. 
Matt. 1:19 (€BovdAyOy for deliberate choice) and Matt. 2:18 (j0carex 
for inclination). It is how the New Testament Greek expresses a 
wish that we have to consider. 

2. The old Greek usage of ei@e and e ydp has vanished. Instead 
is found ddedov (GPeAov without augment) used as a particle like 
utinam in Latin. Cf. already ades with subjunctive aboye. 

3. So then a wish about the past is put in the aorist indicative ~ 
with é¢edov as in 1 Cor. 4:8 (ddedrov eBacrevoare). 

4. A wish about the present is expressed by the imperfect 
indicative and édedrov. So Rey. 3:15 (ddedov js). Cf. also 2 Cor. 
11:1. In Rev. 3:15 some MSS. actually have ddedov eins. 

5. A wish about the future may also be expressed by o¢eAov and 
the future indicative as we have it once in Gal. 5:12- (6deXov dzro- 
xopovrat). But the usual way to express a future wish in New 
Testament Greek is still the optative, once the present as in Acts 
8:20 (ein), usually the aorist asin 1 Thess. 5:23 (dyudoa). The 
commonest wish of this kind is py yevorro (Gal. 6:14). 

6. The wish about the future may verge on the border of a com- 
mand or prohibition as in Mk. 11:14 (yyxér payor, the only opta- 
tive in Mark). On the other hand the imperative in imprecations 
is close to a wish as in Gal. 1:9 (dvd0eua éorw). 

7. In Acts 26:29 (edgacunv dv) we have the apodosis of a fourth 
class condition, the so-called potential optative, a very polite form 
of expression. This is in harmony with classic diction. 

8. The imperfect tense with the verb of wishing offers another 
polite and courteous way of saying a difficult thing. It is just the 


158 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


imperfect without av with no suggestion of a condition at all. The 
present indicative would be too blunt. So éBovdAduny (Acts 25:22), 
nOedrov (Gal. 4:20), nixéunv (Rom. 9:3). As examples of 6ew take 
Matt. 20:14; Rom. 1:13, and of BovAowar 1 Tim. 2:8. 


CHAPTER XXIV. 


CAUSAL SENTENCES. 


1, The common particle yép is used in co-ordinate, not subor- 
dinate, clauses. In sense it is often causal, but it is not considered 
a causal conjunction in the formal usage. 

2. The usual causal conjunction is ér and in some writers 
(James, 1 Pet., Heb.) der. The subjunctive mode is not used 
nor the optative. The indicative has its usual force. The nega- 
tive is always od as in 1 Jo. 5:10 (6re 0d wewiorevnev) except in one 
instance (Jo. 3:18) where the construction is closely parallel to the 
above (te pay reriorevxey). The distinction is exactly that between 
ov and py and it is a real one. Sometimes the causal connection is 
not very close and not very different from ydép. Cf. 1 Cor. 10:17 
(both ére and yap) and Rom, 1:21 (dr). For a closer link see 
1 Cor. 11:2 (ere) and Lu. 1:13 (dre). 

3. “Ered, éredn, and éreadymep are all found in the New Testa- 
ment. But éredyrep appears only in Luke’s classical introduction 
to his Gospel (1:1), while ézedy is found some nine times in this 
sense (1 Cor. 1:22, ered) airotow). “Eve is still more frequent in 
the usual causal sense (as Heb. 5:2, ézet wepixerar). The classical 
usage of an ellipsis with ézeé persists in the New Testament also 
where ézec=since if that were true. So Heb. 9:26 (éwei éda); 10:2 
(éret oi dv éravoavro). Once the negative with émeé is yas in Heb. 
9:17 (érel pa Tore ioxver). 

4, In Matt. 25:40,45 ég’ ocov is causal, ef’ daov éranoate. Note 
also xa? écov in Heb. 7:20. 

5. Kaér, though a comparative particle as in Acts 4:35 (xaOdre 
ay elxey), is yet in Luke used also as a causal conjunction. So Lu. 
19:9 (kaBore éoriy). In Heb. (as dd aderer, 3:1) o6ev occurs 
some half dozen times. 


160 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


6. The infinitive with da is often used in the New Testament to 
express a reason. See Luke 2:4 (8476 eva). Cf. Mk. 5:4. In 
Jo. 2:24 we have &4& 76 and orc in verse 25. 

7. The participle likewise is used where the causal idea is im- 
plied. So Matt. 1:19 (O/xasos oy). Usually in such cases the par- 
ticle és is added to give the alleged reason, which may or may 
not be the true one. So Lu. 16:1 (as dacxopriwv) ; Acts 27 :30 
(as peddovtwv). So also dorep in Acts 2:2 (dorep pepoperys). 

8. The relative pronoun may imply a cause. So Heb. 12:6 
(Ov wapadexerar). So often dors as in Matt. 7:15 (otrwes épxovrar) ; 
Rom. 6:2 (otrwes). 

9. "Av? dv (Lu. 1:20) and &0 (Heb. 3:10) almost amount to 
causal conjunctions. Cf. also ob xdpw, di qv airiay, etc. In Heb. 
2:18 év @ is practically causal. 


CHAPTER XXvV. 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


1. Some general remarks. The Greek conditional sentence is 
one of the crowning triumphs of syntax. No language has sur- 
passed it in accuracy of expression. In the modern Greek the loss 
of the optative is felt, and the system generally has suffered col- 
lapse, as is the case in modern English. The important things to 
understand ina Greek condition are the mode and tense. Historical 
syntax does not justify the modern distinction into general and 
particular conditions. There are four separate forms for Greek 
conditions (Winer, Broadus, Blass). They are the condition 
determined as fulfilled, the condition determined as unfulfilled, 
the condition undetermined but with prospect of fulfilment, the 
condition undetermined and with remote prospect of fulfilment. 
Let us first see the standard forms. Then we can study the varia- 
tions. 

2. The condition determined as fulfilled. Here any tense of the 
indicative is used in the condition, and any tense of the indicative 
in the conclusion. The indicative states the condition as a fact. 
It may or may not be true in fact. The condition has nothing to 
do with that, but only with the statement. It is here that Hadley 
and Allen chiefly err. This condition does assume the reality of 
the condition. Take Matt. 12:27. Christ did not cast out demons 
by Beelzebub, but in argument he assumes it. The indicative 
mode determines the condition as fulfilled, so far as the statement 
is concerned. ¢ is used in the condition clause as a rule, though 
sometimes éév occurs with the present indicative and often with the 
future. In Homer éay (or e xe) is used freely with indicative or 
subjunctive as in the modern Greek. Sometimes the apodosis is 
not = ue indicative at all, but in the imperative or the hortatory 


162 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


subjunctive. But this variation is so slight as not to change the 
essential nature of the condition. This is far the most common 
condition. It is the natural one to use, unless there is a special 
reason to use another. It is the condition taken at its face value 
without any insinuations or implications. The context, of course, 
must determine the actual situation. The protasis often comes 
first. Some representative examples are here given: Matt. 12:27 
(ci &BadrAw, ekBaddAovow); 12:28 (ci exBddAw, EfOacev); 26:33 (el 
oxavdadicOjoovta, cxavdaricOjcopar); Lu. 4:3 (ei el, eiré); 19:40 (ean 
cwrjcovew, Kpasovow); Jo. 15:20 (ei ediwéuy, SwEovew); 18:23 (ei 
é\adnoa, paptipnoov); Acts 11:17 (ei éwxev, ris yunv); 1 Thess. 3:8 
(Zepev eav oryxere); 1 Cor. 15:16 (et otk éye/povras, éynyeptar). These 
examples will exhibit the freedom and variety shown in this most 
common condition usually termed the condition of the first class. 

3. The condition determined as unfulfilled. Here only past 
tenses of the indicative are used with ¢ in the condition and gen- 
erally av in the conclusion. This condition states the condition as 
untrue, as contrary to fact. It may be fact, but it is here treated 
as not fact. Here again it is the statement only that is contrary to 
reality. Take Luke 7:39 where the Pharisee assumes that Jesus 
is not a prophet and hence does not know. The indicative mode 
determines the condition, and as unfulfilled by suggestion. A 
present matter is looked at from the standpoint of the past (im- 
perfect indicative), while a past event is looked at from a remoter 
standpoint (aorist or past perfect indicative). Sometimes this 
point of view, together with the context, is sufficient to make clear 
this condition without ay in the conclusion. So Jo. 15:22 (eé py 
7AOov, ovK eixooav). Note viv d€ following by way of contrast. Cf. 
also the same construction in verse 24. In particular, verbs of 
fitness, propriety, possibility, and obligation do not need ay (not 
omitted, simply not needed). So Matt. 26:24 (xaddv fw ed ovK 
eye 9n) ; Acts 26:52 (édivaro ei pty érexéxAyto). So also the apodosis 
ée in Matt. 23:25 and od xaOjxev in Acts 22:22. Usually, however, 
av is expressed in the conclusion to make more clear the idea of 
unreality (the definite use of dv). Indicative conditions would nat- 
urally be taken as being of the first class, unless there is something 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 163 


in the context to show otherwise. The presence of d@v in the apo- 
dosis came to be accepted as hint enough. But, as seen above, 
this hint was not always considered necessary. The context and 
common sense were often relied on as sufficient. It is only in past 
time, however, that any question arises between conditions of the 
first and second classes. Both, according to the genius of the 
indicative, make positive assumptions, one as true, the other as 
untrue. Neither goes into the actual facts of the case. That, to 
be sure, has to be left to the nature of the case. Modern Greek 
has lost this idiom. Cf. English ambiguity. The ay in the apo- 
dosis cannot begin the clause. The New Testament has a number 
of clear examples of this form of the condition, that of the second 
class: Matt. 11:21 (e eyévovro, radar av perevonoay); 23:30 (et jpeba, 
oik dv mucba); 24:43 (ei 78a, eypyyopycev av Kat otk av eiacev; Observe 
repetition of év as in Lu. 17:6); Lu. 7:39 (ei qv, éywoxev dv); 12:39 
(ei nde, eypnyopyter ay Kal ovk adjxev; margin in WH. has ov ay like 
Matt. 24:43); Jo. 14:28 (e pyamare, exdpyte av); 18:30 (a py qv 
mov, odk dv mapedixapev); 19:11 (odx efxes, ei py jv Sedopevov); Acts 
18:14 (e peév jv, Kata Aoyov dy dverxounv; and contrast with the next 
verse, ef S€ éorw, dpeobe); Heb. 11:15 (et euvnudvevor, cixov av, this 
about past time); 1 Jo, 2:19 (ei joav, peperyxeoay av). 

4. The condition undetermined with some expectation that it 
will be determined. Here the subjunctive is naturally.used in the 
condition as the more vivid of the two modes of doubtful assertion. 
édv is used in the condition and sometimes ay or e&. The conclu- 
sion most naturally has the future indicative, but that is not nec- 
essary. There is considerable variety in the form of the conclu- 
sion. In point of fact any tense of the indicative, subjunctive, or 
imperative may be here employed. The use of the optative would 
make a mixed condition which will be discussed later. It all 
depends on the idea in the speaker’s mind and his point of view. 
The so-called present general condition really belongs here. The 
subjunctive mode (undetermined) thus clearly marks it off from 
the two conditions with the indicative (determined). As can be 
readily seen, the line of cleavage between this condition and the 
first condition when it has the future indicative is not very sharply 


164 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


drawn. Goodwin indeed rubs it out entirely. But it is best not 
to do that. The difference, as already remarked, between the 
subjunctive and the future indicative is not great, though it is real. 
Sometimes, though not often, éav is contracted into av after the 
fashion of the older Greek. So in Jo. 16:23 (dv 11 aityonre, dace). 
Further examples follow of the third class condition: Matt. 5:13 
(éav pwpavOy, adioOnoera); 18:13 (eav yernra, A€yw); 18:15 (eav 
dxovon, éxépdnoas); Mk. 3:24 (edv pepic67, od Swvata); Lu. 9:13 (otk 
cioty, ei py te dyopacwpev); Jo. 7:17 (av O€An, yudoerar); 7:37 (éav 
dua, épxéoOw); 8:51 (av typnon, od pip Oewpyon); 12:32 (av tyw8d, 
edxiow); 13:17 (ei tatra oidare, paxdpuol éore eav route atta; Note both 
conditions and the distinction); Acts 5:38 (éav 7, xaradvOycerat; 
contrast with «i éoriv, od duvyoecOe in the next verse); 1 Cor. 7:28 
(éav yyyns, ovx jpaptes); 2 Cor. 5:1 (dv xatadv6y, éxouev). So also 
compare el tis xadet (1 Cor. 10:27) with éay tis ein (1 Cor. 10:28); 
Phil. 3:12 (ei xaradaBw). In Mk. 10:30 éav py AaBy is unusual 
after ovdels os. See Jo. 5:19 for two uses of av. 

5. The condition is undetermined and with no indication as to 
determination. Naturally the optative is here used as the least 
vivid of the two modes of doubtful statement. Note also the op- 
tative in both condition and conclusion. Both of the undeter- 
mined conditions are thus marked off by mode (subjunctive and 
optative) from the two determined conditions (indicative mode). 
et is used in the condition and a in the conclusion (less definite 
use of dv). In English translation it is difficult to distinguish this 
form of condition from the second class condition as described 
above (under 3). But the two conditions differ radically in Greek 
after Homer’s time. In the New Testament no whole example of 
this class of conditions occurs. We have the condition or the con- 
clusion, but not both at the same time. Already, then, this con- 
dition was beginning to break down. In modern Greek it is gone. 
The so-called past general supposition belonged here with a mixed 
conclusion. But this construction is not in the New Testament. 
All that we have left then in the New Testament are some protases 
by themselves and some apodoses by themselves. The optative is 
also found in a mixed condition like Acts 8:31 (ads yap av duvatuny 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 165 


éav py tis ddnynoe pe). This condition was even quite common in 
literary Greek, as it lent itself readily to polite expression. But it 
never had a firm hold on the popular tongue. The other three 
conditions really answer for ordinary use, though without this 
precise shade of thought. Here are a few New Testament speci- 
mens of the fourth class condition: Acts 24:19 is a mixed con- 
dition like Acts 8:31, but not of the same kind (ots ée ézi cod 
mapeivar Kal KaTryopelv, et Te exouev pds me). In Acts 27:39 (et dvvawro) 
there is a touch of indirect discourse like Acts 17:27 (e dpa ye Wy- 
Aagdyoeav). See also Acts 17:18 (ré av Odor) an apodosis of the 
fourth class with which compare Lu. 9:46 (76 tis dy ey) which is 
not due to indirect discourse. In Acts 26:29 (evéa/unv av) the 
usual apodosis appears. The protasis is found in 1 Pet. 3:14 (ei kat 
macxote), 3:17 (ei BerAor), and 1 Cor. 15:37 (ei rvxor). 

6. Mixed conditions. In a language as flexible as the Greek 
it could not be expected that everything should remain hard and 
fast. The variations in the structure of conditional sentences are 
not even all of them peculiar to the Greek genius. Many of them 
belong to the play of the human mind. It is obviously natural 
for one point of view to be occupied in the condition and another 
in the conclusion (1 Cor. 7:28, éay yypys, ox japtes). This leads 
to what are called mixed conditions. The grammatical construc- 
tion is merely accommodated, as always, to the mental conception. 
All that is involved in a mixed condition is that one form is used 
in the protasis and another in the conclusion. In the development 
of the four normal classes of conditions, it would be strange if some 
interplay were not found. The human mind does not work in 
ironclad forms. If we recognize the fact of life in language, what 
are called mixed conditions will give no serious trouble. In Acts 
8:31 (see aboye) we have a protasis of the first class and an apo- 
dosis of the fourth. So in Acts 24:19 we find a protasis of the 
fourth and an apodosis of the second class. In John 8:39 in the 
marginal reading we have a protasis of the first class and an apo- 
dosis of the second (e éoré, érore). A clear case of this is found 
in Lu. 17:6 (et €xere, edeyere av). 

7. The participle may be used instead of a fully expressed con- 


166 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


dition. The participle does not in itself mean condition, but it 
may suggest it. So Lu. 19 :23 (kay €XOov oly TéKw av aitd Expaga). 
Here a conclusion of the second class is expressed and the parti- 
ciple conceals or implies the condition. So also AapBavepevov (1 Tim. 
4:4) suggests a condition of either the first or the third class. 

8. Elliptical conditions. An incomplete condition is really a 
species of ellipsis, or even aposiopesis, and is common to all lan- 
guages. So Acts 26:29 (evga/uny dv, only apodosis) ; 23:9 («i éAdAy- 
oev, only protasis). Thus is to be explained also the abrupt use 
of e« (compare Hebrew ’im) in solemn oaths or other strong ex- 
pressions and questions. So Mk. 8:12 («i do6jcera); Heb. 3:11 
(ei €Xevoovrat). Here ef does not mean ‘‘not’’ though that is the 
resultant idea. It is an ellipse also when ¢ is used in direct ques- 
tions as in Lu. 13:23 (e 6Acyou of cwfopevor). Cf. also Luke 22:49, 
The omission of the yerb isa common ellipsis as in Rom, 8:17 
(ec 8& rexva). So also the New Testament uses various expressions 
without the verb as « py (Matt. 5:15); & 8& ph} (ujye). as Mark 
2:22; et pa te dv (1 Cor. 7:5); even éxrds ef wy (1 Tim. 5:19); doe? 
(Matt. 3:16) ; once éemepeé (1 Cor.15:8) ; and once etrep (Rom. 3:30). 
Here of course the verb of the condition is not expressed; but 
even when it is a set phrase, it is still a condition. See John 14:2, 
where the conclusion occurs (etrov av). With éeé there is some- 
times a suppressed condition, the apodosis being expressed. So 
dec in Heb. 9:26 and ovk av éravoavro (10:2). 

9. A kind of condition worth noticing is one where the influ- 
ence of indirect discourse is felt. So Rom. 1:10 (et was ctodwOjc- 
ona); Acts 20:16 (ei etn); 27:39 (ei divawro). With verbs of wonder 
as in Mark 15:44 (e ré@vyxev) we meet the same phenomenon. In. 
the same passage in Mark observe also « dweOavev (difference in 
tense). 

10. Concessive clauses are nothing but conditional sentences. 
Kai before e or édv has the force of even, and the condition would 
be “‘even if.’”’ This construction is not common in the New Testa- 
ment. See John 8:16 (kat édy xpivw). In e@ xaé or éav kal the xaé 
seems more nearly to have the idea of ‘‘also;’’ ‘‘if also’? then would 
be a concession not so extreme as ‘‘even if.’? So 2 Cor. 7:8 (e «at 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 167 


éXvrnoa). Kairep occurs ony five times in the New Testament and 
with the participle each time. But Justin Martyr has xairep éd¢ed- 
Aere in the First Apology. In Luke 12:38 we find kav... . Kav. 
So Heb. 5:8 (xairep ov). The correct text of Rev. 17:8 (aapécrar) 
removes the old xairep and the indicative. 

11. The negative of the condition clause with the subjunctive is 
always py (Lu. 18:3). With the indicative, however, either m7 or 
ov is used, but not in the same sense. py negatives rather the 
condition itself and in the New Testament the conclusion is nearly 
always negative also. So John 18:30 (ei py) jv). When ov is used 
in the condition, the negative is quite emphatic or there is antithesis 
or asingle word is negatived. So Lu. 18:4 (ei ov doBotpar); Jo. 1:25 
(ei ov ef); 5:47 (ei ov morevere); 10:37 (ei o¥ to, with which com- 
pare «i zo just below and kay py muorevyte). In Matt. 26:42 both 
ov and py occur in the same sentence (¢ ov divarat Totto wapeAbetv 
eav py iw). In 1 Cor. 9:2 e od does not mean precisely what e pq 
would. 


CHAPTER XXVI. 
RELATIVE CLAUSES. 


1. The relative pronoun relates two clauses by connecting a word 
in one clause with one in another. Compare Chapter XIII, 11, for 
brief discussion of the function of the relative pronoun. The rela- 
tive pronoun not only obviates the repetition of the noun, but 
binds together two clauses into one sentence. 

2. There are two kinds of relative clauses, the aajectiyal and the 
adverbial, just as there are two kinds of relative pronouns. Compare 
dsandas. Every relative clause is therefore either an adjective or 
an adverb. But like other adjectives the relatiye clause may be 
used as a substantive. Cf. Jo. 11:3. 

3. The relative adverbs may be either local as ézov, comparative 
like és, temporal as ére, final as dws, causal or objective as or. 
Just as adjectives are sometimes used as substantives like 76 dyaOov, 
so ore in indirect discourse introduces an object clause. Compare 
quod in Latin and even quia in late Latin like the Vulgate. It is 
therefore by means of the relative that Greek and Latin become so 
rich in subordinate clauses as compared with the Sanskrit, for 
instance. 

4. The mode in the relative clause has just the same force that 
it has in the independent clause. As a matter of fact in the ad- - 
jectival relative clauses only the indicative and subjunctive are used 
in the New Testament. Take as illustrations Os ov« dxoAovOd jyuiv 
(Mk. 9:38) and 8? fs Aarpevwnev (Heb. 12:28). It is not the rela- 
tive clause that requires in itself either the indicative or subjunc- 
tive. 

5. The relative pronoun may be either definite or indefinite as 
is well illustrated by dors freely used in the New Testament in the 
nominatiye either as more definite than ds (iris ovK apaipeOjoerat 


RELATIVE CLAUSES 169 


avtns, Lu. 10:42) or less definite than os (carts o& paige, Matt. 
5:39). So then the indicative, the mode of clear cut statement, 
may be used either with the definite or the indefinite relative. So 
likewise with the subjunctive the mode of doubtful assertion. 
Instance 8 fs Aatpedwomev (Heb. 12:28) and doris yap odov Tov vopov 
typyoy (James 2:10). Ch. orov.... dayw (Lu. 22:11). With 
0 zpoceveyxn (Heb. 8:3) compare 6 zporgpéepa (Heb. 9:7). This sub- 
junctive is in a clause of design. 

6. The grammars commonly speak of the conditional relative 

sentence, but I doubt the justice of this expression. It is true 
indeed that do7is and eis do not differ greatly in idea. Cf. varia- 
tions in MSS. on Mk. 8:34 between sors and efris. But after all there 
is a subtle difference in structure just as between the English ‘“‘f 
any one’’ and ‘‘whoever.’’ Technically one is conditional and the 
other is relative. It is syntactical confusion to blend them just as 
it would be to call 6 AapBdvev (John 13:20) the same thing as os 
AapBave. Hence av twa repo (Jo. 13:20) is a conditional clause, 
but Os 8 dy drodeoa (Mk. 8:35) is a relative clause. The indefinite 
relative clause whether with indicative or subjunctive is much kin. 
in idea to the conditional sentence, but formally it is still the rela- 
tive sentence. There is no ‘‘if’’ in the Greek clause any more than 
in the English. The use of avy with os and the future indicative 
(cf. Lu. 12:8) is indeed like éay and the future indicative. 
7. The use of dy in the relative clause does not make it a condi- 
tion. The use of av indeed is much like that of the relative doris. 
It has the effect of making the clause more definite as (cf. oray 
nvosev, Rey. 8:1) ocor av yavro (Mk. 6:56), or the clause is ren- 
dered more indefinite as Os av etry (Matt. 5:22), So ares av pa dxovon 
(Acts 3:23). The form éay or ay is immaterial as 6s yap éay OeAn 
and 6s & dy d@rodéon (Mk. 8:35). But ay is not necessary with the 
subjunctiye in such relatiye clauses as is seen in James 2:10 (coors 
typyon). Cf. also ooris dpvyonta (Matt. 10:53). Besides av is very 
common with the indicative, especially the future as 6s 8 ay drodere 
(Mk. 8:35), and the past indicative as dzov av ciceropevero (MK. 
6:56) and even the present indicative as érov av traye (Rev. 14:4). 
Cf. also Lu. 17;33. In Jo. 14:13 see ore dv, but éév re in 14:14. 


I 70 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


8. The negative of the relative clause is yy with the subjunctive 
as Os av py €xn (Lu. 8:18) and usually od with the indicative as 6s 
yap ovk éore Kal” duov (Lu. 9:50). But when the relative is indefi- 
nite wy may be found as 6 py bpodroyd (1 Jo. 4:3) and @ py det 
(Titus 1:11). In 2 Pet. 1:9 the relative is definite, but the sub- 
jective negative suits well, 6 wi) répeotw tadra, 

9. Sometimes the relative is nearly equivalent to the Latin qui 
with the subjunctive (design or result). So agus éorw @ rapeén toro 
(Lu. 7:4) is practically result with which Blass (Grammar of N. T. 
Greek, p. 218) compares agus tva Avow (Jo. 1:27). See also Os xara- 
oxevaoe. (Lu. 7:27) as a clause of purpose. Blass also cites (Mk. 
14:14) drov dayw and ovk éxw 6 zapabyow (Lu. 11:6) and otdéa exw 
doris peptmvyoe (Phil. 2:20). The classic idiom ovdcis éorw ds (Mk. 
10:29) has no effect on the mode. The subjunctive is used also 
with such clauses of design as dé js Aatpevwpev (Heb. 12:28). 

10. “Oaos, like és and doris, uses either éév (as doa éav OeAnrte, 
Matt. 7:12) or av (as dca dy aityonre, Matt. 21:22). 


CHAPTER XXVII. 


TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 


1. The New Testament has quite a number of temporal con- 
junctions such as axpu, ee’, érav, éredyn, ews, qvika, péxpt, d7dTE, OTE, 
Stay, mpiv, as. These will need to be discussed separately for the 
most part, but they can be grouped for convenience. 

2. One group can be made of dypr, ews, wéexpr, and zpiv in the 
sense of ‘‘until,’’ though even here a distinction has to be made 
and the words can best be treated separately. 

(a) “Axpe (so always in New Testament save twice dxpis, Gal. 
3:19 and Heb. 3:13) is both a preposition as in @xpe xarpod (Lu. 
4:13) and less often a conjunction as in axpu te\ec67 (Rey. 20:3). 
The simple conjunction is not socommon as Is axpu fs yucpas (Matt. 
24:38) and dypr ob (Lu. 21:24). When an actual historical event 
is recorded, a past tense of the indicative is used as dype fs quépas 
elonAOev N&e (Lu. 17:27) and aype ov aveorn (Acts 7:18). The 
present indicative can also be used of a present situation as in &xpus 
ov TO onpepov kadeirac (Heb. 3:13). If the matter is still in the 
future the subjunctive aorist commonly occurs as in dype od O49 
(1 Cor. 15:25) and once with a as in dxpis av €6y (Gal. 3:19). 
But the future indicative can be employed (aypu teAecOnoovra, Rev. 
17:17) and once with av (dypr ob ay Hw, Rey. 2:25). 

(b) “Ews likewise ismore common as a preposition (€ws tod Xpuc- 
sov, Matt. 1:17) than as a conjunction. As a conjunction we have 
éws (Matt. 2:9), €ws od (Matt. 14:22), and éws drov (5:25). They are 
all used in substantially the same sense. A past event is expressed 
by the past indicative as és #AOev (Matt. 24:39), gos ob eLuudOy 
(Matt. 13:33), and €ws drov épadvycavy (Jo. 9:18). Where used 
about present time éws has the sense of ‘‘while’’ and not ‘‘until.”’ 
So éws airos drove Tov dxdov (Mk. 6:45) after qvayxacey with which 


172 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


compare the Latin dum. This is in truth the meaning of éws in 
€ws epxopar (Jo. 21:22f. and 1 Tim. 4:13) where the future is viy- 
idly drawn into the present or the speaker mentally leaps into the 
future. Even éws drov occurs once in this sense, éws drov ef per’ avrov 
év tH 600 (Matt. 5:25). Blass indeed contends for the sense of 
‘until’? here also (Grammar of N. T. Greek, p. 219) and even in 
év & €pxouat (Lu. 19:13), a rather severe strain on the Greek idiom. 
For events in the future only the aorist subjunctive seems to be 
found though in éws drov cxa~w (Lu. 13:8) and éws ob dvareulo 
(Acts 25:21) the form is the same in the future indicative. “Av is 
not used with éws od and éws drov, but is very common with éws (as 
€ws av tdwow, Lu. 9:27), but not always (€ws zpocevéwyar, Mk. 14:32). 
In Rey. 20:5 axpr reAcoO7 is still future though preceded by énoav. 

(c) Meéxpe is less used both as a preposition (expe THs ojpepov, 
Matt. 11:23) and as a conjunction (only three times in reality, 
Mk. 15:50, Gal. 4:19, Eph. 4:18). Once (Eph. 4:13) the form is 
péxpe and in the other passages we have pexpis ot. In all three the 
aorist subjunctive is the construction and without av. 

(d) IIpé (five times zpiv 7 as Acts 25:16) appears thirteen times 
and always with the infinitive save twice in negative sentences. 
One of these has the subjunctive with av referring to a future event, 
pay ideiv Odvarov mpiv 7 av i8y tov Xpworov xvpiov (Lu. 2:26). The 
other has the optative with the same idea, but in indirect discourse, 
mpi... . exo (Acts 25:16). Both of these idiomatic construc- 
tions are in the writings of Luke. The rest are like mpiv yevérOa 
(Jo. 14:29). 

(e) Akin to zpéy is the use of apo rod and the infinitive of which 
there are eight examples in the New Testament. See xpd rod tds 
aitnoa adtov (Matt. 6:8). 

(f) ’Ev dé comes to be used much like a temporal conjunction 
with one sense of éws (while). So in Mk. 2:19, év & 6 vupdios per’ 
aitav éoriv, Cf. also John 5:7 (év & €pxoua). "Evy 6 may also be 
local (Rom.2:1), causal (Rom. 8:3), or instrumental (Rom. 14:21). 
Cf. Thayer. With this use of év 6 may be compared the very fre- 
quent use of év 7@ with the infinitive in temporal relations as év ré 
édaivew (Mk. 6:48). 


TEMPORAL CLAUSES. His 


(g) °Ad’ ob calls also for a word of comment. In Lu. 13:7 a¢’ ob 
épxovar presents no difficulty, but in 13:25 a¢’ ob ay éyepA7 reminds 
one at once of éws and indeed aq’ ov here has the resultant sense of 
‘‘when once’’ (cf. until) and so the construction of é#s when used 
of future events. 

3. The other constructions may be treated together somewhat 
loosely. 

(a) “Hvixa is only found twice, both times about the future, once 
with a and the present subjunctive and once with éay and the aorist 
subjunctive. Both examples appear also in 2 Cor. 3, one in 15 
(jvixa av dvaywwoxytar), the other in 16 (jvixa eav éemiotpepn). 

(b) “Ezeé of itself has nearly vanished as a temporal conjunc- 
tion in the New Testament; only once as a marginal reading in 
WH. (Lu. 7:1). But ézay with the subjunctive is found three 
times (Matt. 2:8; Lu. 11:22,34). So ézav eipyre (Matt. 2:8). The 
only temporal use of éredy is the text of Lu. 7:1 (ered) erAjnpwoer). 

(c) WH do not read érore at all, but some MSS. have it in- 
stead of ore in Lu. 6:3. 

(d) But ore and orav are the commonest temporal conjunctions 
in the New Testament. Perhaps little trouble will be found with 
ore which is freely used with any tense of the indicative as ore 
érehecey (Matt. 7:28). “Oray on the other hand is equally frequent 
with the subjunctive (usually aorist). So orayv idyre (Matt. 24:33) 
and occasionally the present as oray eiofepwow (Lu. 12:11). Occa- 
sionally also the future indicative is found as érav décovew (Rey. 
4:9), the aorist indicative as oray dye éyevero (Mk. 11:19), the im- 
perfect indicative as éray atrov éewpow (Mk. 3:11), and even the 
present indicative as orav ornxere (Mk. 11:25). As with the relative 
clauses we observe two kinds of temporal clauses, the definite and , 
the indefinite. “Av is more common, of course, with the indefinite 
clauses, but sometimes as in Rey. 8:1 it is found with the definite 
temporal clause (orav qvogev). 

(c) ‘Os deserves a word also. As a temporal conjunction ds 
commonly has the indicative as as érAno@yoay (Lu. 1:23) and with 
dv aS ws av nyeoGe (1 Cor. 12:2). But it sometimes appears with 
the subjunctive as in ds kaipov éxwpev (Gal. 6:10) where the state- 


174 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ment is indefinite, and a few times with av also as as dv ropevwpas 
(Rom. 15:24). 

(f) In Matt. 9:15 we have é¢’ ooov, in Mk. 2:19 ooov xpovoy, in 
Rom. 7:1 é¢’ ovoy xpévov in the temporal sense, and several other 
times also. In Heb. 10:37 ocov ocov is a Hebraism (LXX) though 
not unlike the papyri examples. 

(g) Mera 76 and the infinitive is found a few times with the sense 
of ‘‘after.’? So pera ro rapadoPpvac (Mk. 1:14). 

4. Participles very often occur with the temporal resultant idea, 
The participle in itself does not express cause, condition, or time, 
but the context frequently suggests such conceptions for the cir- 
cumstantial participle. Whether this resultant idea is when, as, 
which, after, etc., only the context can decide. As an example 
take adro@vyoxwv (Heb. 11:21). The aorist participle may suggest 
antecedent action as eiceAOov (Mk. 1:21) or simultaneous action as 
doracapevor (Acts 25:13). But more of this when we come to the 
participle. 


CHAPTER XXVIII. 


COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 


1. These clauses are not always given adequate treatment in the 
grammars, but the number of conjunctions that are used call for 
separate discussion. They are chiefly modifications of a few basal 
forms. 

2. The relative pronoun occurs with xara as xa66, xa6a, xabdrep. 
Kafo is found only four times and with the indicative as xa6o de 
(Rom. 8:26) save once with the subjunctive and éay as xa6o édv 
éxy (2 Cor. 8:12). Ka6é we have only once and that with the in- 
dicatiye, xa0a ovvéeragey (Matt. 27:10). Kaéarep is more frequent, 
but always with the indicative as xadzep yéypartar (Rom. 3:4). 

3. Ka6or is a comparative conjunction twice only in the New 
Testament (Acts 2:45; 4:35) and both times with the same con- 
struction, av and the indicative; xa@ore dv tis xpecay eixev. Cf. drrov 
av eiceropevero (Mk. 6:56). 

4, Four times in Hebrews we find the classic idiom of the com- 
parative with coos. It is significant that here only does it occur. 
Hebrews aims to set forth the superiority of Christianity to Juda- 
ism. In Heb. 1:4 we read dow duadopustepov rap adbrods KexAnpovounkev 
dvona; in 8:6 dow Kal Kpeitroves éorw dSiabyKys pecitys; in 10:25 rocovrw 
padrdrov oow Brérere. The fourth example is in 3:3 xa& dcov mXelova 
Tyuny éxer TOD otxov. The correlative tocotres occurs only once in this 
connection. In Heb. 7:20ff. (xa6’ dcov.... Kata tocotro) the 
comparative is not in the relative clause. 

5, The various forms of és are far the most common in compara- 
tive sentences. Kafds is yery frequent indeed with the indicative. 
So xabws yyaryoa tpas (Jo. 13:34). It is usual in the idiom kafas 
yéyparrac (Rom. 1:17). The correlative otrws (2 Cor. 8:6) is rarely 
used with xafws. See also Lu. 24:24. Kass is a late word, but 


176 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


is frequent in the papyri as in the New Testament. Kaésorep 
appears only once (Heb. 5:4 xa@domep xai “Aapdv) save in 2 Cor. 

3:18 where WH giye it in the margin, text xafarep. Sometimes 
xafws Shades off towards a reason (causal sentence) asin Rom. 1:28. 

‘Qs is so common as to require little comment, but its uses are very 
numerous. Its use asa temporal and final conjunction has already 
been discussed. It is as a comparative conjunction, however, that 
it has its widest range. Usually as is used with the indicative 
expressed (as Oédes, Matt. 15:28) or implied (otk éoeaGe ws of iroxpi- 
tai, Matt. 6:5). But occasionally the subjunctive occurs (és ay- 
Opwros Bary, Mk. 4:26) and also with ay or édv (as éav tpodos Oddy 
Ta éavtis téxva, 1 Thess. 2:7). See Rom. 5:15 for ds... . otras. 

The instances of és with adverbs (as tayuora, Acts 17:15), with 
adjectives (as wpato., Rom. 10:15), are like Latin quam. This last 
is exclamation like our ‘‘how.’’ ‘Qs with the participle gives the 
alleged reason (as péAAwv, Acts 23:20). In Lu. 9:52 we have as 
éroaoa (inf.) according to WH. ‘Qeeé (és, ei) appears without a 
verb in the New Testament. Take Matt. 3:16 as an example, cde 
mvevpa Geod xataBaivoy doe repiotepav. “Qozep is used either with the 
indicative (eo7ep of broxpital zowtow, Matt. 6:2), with a participle 
(Gorep hepopevys rvons, Acts 2:2), or without a verb (do7ep ot €6vixol, 

Matt. 6:7). ‘Qozeped is found once only (1 Cor. 15:8) and without 
the verb, domeped Ta Extpwdparte, 


CHAPTER XXIX. 
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


1. The Greek originally used no mark of interrogation and it is 
sometimes doubtful whether a sentence is a question or not. In- 
terrogatory particles were not always used. Take as an example 
1 Cor. 1:18. WH punctuate peuépurrac 6 Xpioros. The margin 
reads Xpurrés; But as a rule the context makes it clear even if ne 
interrogative particle nor pronoun is used. But dpa, «i, od, and py 
all appear in direct questions. 

2. The mode in direct questions calls for little comment. The 
indicative (any tense) is, of course, the most frequent as ov ris ef; 
(Jo. 1:19). The delibrative subjunctive is common in questions 
of doubt as damev 7 py dopey (Mk. 12:15). The optative with dé 
appears in a direct question as the apodosis of a fourth class con- 
dition (potential optative). So Té dv Odor 6 oreppodoyos otros Néyeuv; 
(Acts 17:18). The mode in the indirect question is usually the 
same as it was in the direct either the indicative as 7/ qv (Jo. 2:25), 
the subjunctive as ré daywow (Mk. 6:36), or the optative as ré dy 
Gado. (Lu. 1:62). Sometimes the indicative becomes optative 
according to classic idiom in indirect questions as tis ety (Acts 
21:33), but it is here followed by té éorwv wemrounxes. See further in 
chapter on Indirect Discourse. 

3. The kind of answer thatis expected is sometimes, though not 
always, indicated. The inquiry may be colorless in form as Suvjx- 
ate tatta mavta; (Matt. 13:51), even when the particle dpa is used 
as"Apa ye ywooKas & dvaywdoxes; (Acts 8:30). But if od occurs, 
the affirmative answer is indicated as Ovx eiué éAevOepos ; (1 Cor. 
9:1). When py is used, the negative answer is expected as Mj 
drwcato 6 Oeds Tov adv aitod; (Rom. 11:1). Sometimes a great 
deal oe is suggested, of scorn (Jo. 7:47, wy wat duets werAd- 


178 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


vnobe ;), of sympathy (Jo. 6:67, pip cat tpets Oercre brayew;), of sup- 
pressed excitement (Jo. 4:29, wy te obrds éorw 6 Xpiords;). For 
further examples see chapter on Negative Particles. 

4. The interrogative pronoun usually found in the New Testa- 
ment is tis. We have it by itself as ris brederéer tpiv ; (Matt. 3:7), 
but it is common also with dpa (as Matt. 24:45), with ydp (Matt. 
9:5), with otv (Lu. 3:10). For wa ri see Matt. 9:4. In Mk. 
15:24 we have the double interrogative ris ré dpy. In Lu. 16:2 
tovro is used predicatively with té (rf totro dxovw wept cod;). In 
1 Pet. 1:11 we find both ris and wotos. Tlorazos like tis and zroios 
occurs both in direct and in indirect questions. In Lu. 7:39 it is 
used with rés. Té is frequently an adverb in the sense of ‘‘why”’ 
(cf. da ré, Matt. 9:11 and eis ri, Mk. 14:4) as ré pe A€yets dyabdv; 
(Mk. 10:18) or ‘‘thow”’ (ré 67, Lu. 2:49). For awéaos (Mk. 6:38) 
and the other interrogative pronouns see chapter on Pronouns. 
But note ré éué izrovoeire etvac (Acts 13:25). 

5. There is a certain amount of confusion between the interrog- 
ative and the relative pronouns in the New Testament as in the 
older Greek and in most languages. Cf. Blass, Grammar of N. T. 
Greek, p. 175. See also Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 93. So tis ap- 
pears where the relative would be more usual as in Jas. 3:13 ris 
coos Kai émuotypwv ev tpiv, dagarw. In Mk. 1;24 we have oida oé ris 
é which may be so explained or as the prolepsis of ev and change 
to accusative. Compare Jo. 8:25 ot ris @; In the New Testament 
the direct interrogative pronoun is usually present in indirect 
questions. Butin 1 Tim. 1:7 we have @ A€yovow and epi rivwv dufe- 
Baotvra. On tiand z cf. 1 Cor. 14:35 and Acts 13:25. Once (Acts 
9:6) we have 6re so used and several times dézoios (1 Cor. 3:13). Once 
also érws occurs in an indirect question (Lu. 24:20). On the other 
hand WH admit 67 (from dems) as a direct interrogative in Mark 
2:16; 9:11,28. It may fairly be questioned, however, if this is not 
an abbreviation of ré 6m. But 67 in Jo. 8:25 is more difficult still. 
In Matt. 26:50 (ératpe éf’ 6 dpe) we meet a hard problem also. 
Here we may either like Chrysostom supply an imperative and 
have the usual relatiye, or treat é as a demonstrative (Noah K, 
Davis), or treat the relative 6 as interrogative (incredible according 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 179 


to Blass). Certainly the relative is used in indirect questions a few 
times as drayyeAov aitois 60a 6 Kiptos cou weroinxey (Mk. 5:19). The 
difference between interrogative and relative comes out well in Jo. 
13:24 (cizé ris €or mepi ov A€ya). Cf. also 2 Tim. 1:12 (6 wemiorevxa). 

6. The interrogative conjunctions are freely used in the New 
Testament. So wore (Matt. 25:38), €ws more (Matt. 17:17), zod 
(Lu. 8:25), ras (Lu. 10:26). They are common also in indirect 
questions (Matt. 24:3; Mk. 15:47; Matt. 6:28). °“Ozws appears in 
indirect questions alone in Lu. 24:20. 

7. Elliptical phrases are frequent also. So wa ri (Matt. 9:4) 
where yévytat has dropped out (cf. da ré, eis td); ré dre (Lu. 2:49) 
with which compare ré yéyovey orc in Jo. 14:22. A similar conden- 
sation is observed in ti dpa Ilérpos éyevero (Acts 12:18). Cf. also 
Acts 5:24; Lu. 1:66; Jo. 21:21. The use of ei in direct questions 
as ei eeorw toils cdBBacw Oeparedoa (Matt. 12:10) is parallel to ¢ in 
indirect questions like d&wxw e xaradkaBw (Phil. 3:12). Cf. also Acts 
17:27 where aim and expectation enter in. One may compare also 
the use of ef as in Heb. 3:11 in a negative sense (strong oath) 
where there is really an ellipse. The same thing (ellipse) is true 
with the use of « in direct questions which is rather common in 
the New Testament. 

8. Alternative questions are not very frequent in the New Testa- 
ment. In fact we have only one example of zorepov. ... . 7 (Jo. 
7:17), and that in an indirect question. Often 7 is used in the 
second member of the question without the interrogative pronoun 
asin 1 Cor. 9:8. Sometimes we have ris... . 74 asin Matt. 9:5. 
Sometimes # precedes rés and refers to the preceding sentence 
(Matt. 7:9). 

9. Exclamations are usually expressed in the older Greek by the 
pronouns olos, éroios, dcos, but occasionally the interrogative forms 
are so used. So aéca in Mk. 15:4 and aydécos in Gal. 6:11. Cf. 
also ré Oédw et 45n avyd6yn (Lu. 12:49). Cf. also és epatoe in Rom. 
10:15. 

10. Interjections are frequently used in exclamations. Those 
in the New Testament are detre, eu, te, idov, ova, oval, &, etc. For 
dete as an interjection see Matt. 21:38 (detre, droxte(vonev). In Lu. 


180 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


4:34 we have an example of éa as éa, té qpiv wai oot; In Jo. 1:29 
(iSe 6 dpvos Tod Oeod) ise, as often, is found with the nominative. 
With the accusative it is the verb. “Iéov is used absolutely (Matt. 
11:10) or with the nominative (Matt. 17:5, idob vepéAn). It is very 
common. In Mk. 15:29 (ova 6 xaradvwv) odé occurs with the nom- 
inative. Ovad is used commonly with the dative as ovat cot (Matt. 
11:21). But it twice occurs with the accusative (Rev. 8:13, rods 
xatouxoovtas ; 12:12, ryv yqv). Itis also used absolutely asin Rey. 
18:10). Once it is repeated three times (Rev. 8:13). 7 is not 
often used. The vocative is usually alone as avOpw7e (Lu. 22:58), 
but sometimes & is added as & ywvar (Matt. 15:28). 


CHAPTER XXX. 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


1. Direct discourse is far more frequent than indirect in the 
New Testament. This is true also of the Old Testament and of 
most popular writers, Prolonged indirect discourse as in Thucy- 
dides or Livy is labored and artificial. The Greeks had no quota- 
tion marks, but dz often seryed this purpose. This use of ore is 
called recitative 67: and is very abundant in the New Testament as 
in the Septuagint. So Mk. 8:28 ére “Iwavyy tov Barticryv, Jo. 10:36 
ott BAaopyuets. But this pictorial use of oratio recta rather than 
the long oratio obliqua of the Greek historians is not dependent on 
ort, Often the direct quotation appears alone: @eAw, xabapicOyre 
(Matt. 8:3). Note also 6 dudacxadros and 6 xvpios in Jo. 13:18). 

2. The tense as a rule remains unchanged in the Greek indirect 
discourse. In Latin and English we find sequence of tenses in 
this class of sentences. But in Greek this is seldom the case. 
Some examples occur in the New Testament as in the older Greek 
where the imperfect in the indirect seems to represent a present in 
the direct. So Jo. 2:25, airés yap éyivwoxey ti jv ev To avOparw. 
Commonly the tense is preserved as in Jo. 11:13, ekeivor 8@ &oav 
OTL TEplL THS KosyTEws TOD Urvov Acye, Ina case like ore cidov (Jo. 
1:50) the tense was aorist in the direct discourse. So as to jy in 
Jo. 9:18. The future infinitive in indirect discourse as xwpyoev in 
Jo. 21:25 stands for the future indicative of the direct. So the 
perfect infinitive likewise as te@vyxevar in Acts 14:19. 

d. The person of the verb may or may not be changed accord- 
ing to circumstances. Take Matt. 6:31, for instance, where Ti 
daywopev is the direct question. In the indirect question (Matt. 
6:25) this becomes t¢ ddynre. Soin Mk. 9:6 od yap nde ri dcroxprOy 
was 7é droxp.96 in the direct. In Acts 1:4 the person of the direct 


182 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT, 


address is retained after the infinitive: mepysevew ripv éxayyeXiav Tov 
matpos Wv Hkovoure pov. But more of this mixture now directly. 

4. The mode in indirect discourse may be changed. This . 
change of indicative to optative or subjunctive to optative after a 
past tense was never obligatory and gradually died out with the 
passing of the optative. It was often not done in the older Greek. 
It is only in the writings of Luke that it occurs at all in the New 
Testament. Even so it is only in indirect questions that we find 
it with one exception. This exception (Burton, N. T. Moods and 
Tenses, p. 133) is in Acts 25:16 and is after zpiv7. But curiously 
enough in the same sentence ov« éorw is retained. The sequence 
of the verbs in the sentence is therefore dzexpiO@nv tt ovk éorw... « 
mpivy?.... exo.... Te... . AdBo. So also in Lu. 22:23 we 
have 76 tis dpa etn, but in 22:24 76 ris airay Soxet. The presence of 
the subjunctive in an indirect question simply means that the sub- 
junctive was used in the direct. So Lu. 22:4 16 was airois wapado 
aitév. If davis found with the optative in an indirect question, that 
shows that it was there in the direct. There is a distinct differ- 
ence therefore between ris etn (Acts 21:33), where the optative is 
due to indirect discourse, and ré av ety (Acts 10:17) where the op- 
tative with ay was so used in the direct. Cf. Acts 17:18 where ré 
av Oédo occurs in the direct question as the potential optative 
(apodosis of fourth class condition). Cf. Lu. 15:26 (ré av ey 
TavTa). 

5. There are three kinds of indirect discourse: indirect asser- 
tion, indirect question, and indirect command. An example of the 
first is Pewpd dre rpopyrys el ov (Jo. 4:19), of the second is trodeiEw 
ipiv tiva poByOjre (Lu. 12:5), of the third is elwév airy iva po ow- 
avtiAdByra (Lu. 10:40). These represent the normal classes. They 
require separate treatment. 

6. Indirect assertions once more fall into three classes according 
to the construction that is used. 

(a) There is first the infinitive. This was in the old Greek the 
commonest usage and it is still found in substantial accord with 
ancient practice. The tense, of course, is the same as the direct 
discourse. It is usual to say that this infinitive has the accusative 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 183 


as the subject, but this is an inadequate explanation. The accusa- 
tive is by no means always used and when it is we cannot call it 
the subject from the Greek point of view. ‘The infinitive, like the 
participle, is not a finite verb, has no personal endings. The idiom 
does in a general way correspond to a érz clause in Greek or a 
‘that’? clause in English, but it is not in fact a 6m clause. The 
infinitive in indirect discourse still has to be considered an infini- 
tive and explained syntactically as an infinitive. If the pronoun 
or adjective used with the infinitive refers to the subject of the 
principal verb, it may be in the nominative by apposition as 
packovtes eivar Topol éuwpavOnoav (Rom. 1:22, cf. Matt. 19:21 réAeos 
elva); or it may be unexpressed as 7AGav réyovcae Kal drraciav 
dyyéAwv éwpaxévar (Lu, 24:23); or it may be in the accusative of 
general reference as réroBas ceavtov ddnyov elvar rupAGv (Rom. 2:19). 
Cf. also Phil. 3:13; Lu. 24:23 (Aeyovow airov fjv). The same prin- 
ciple applies when the infinitive is used with a preposition and the 
article, both of which have to be conserved in any true syntactical 
explanation of this accusative. It is ridiculous to think of a ‘‘sub- 
ject”’ with such an infinitive with the article as éyw év ré éravépxer Gai pe 
arodéow co (Lu.10:35). Note we, not the reflexive. When the refer- 
ence is not to the subject of the principal verb, the noun or pronoun is 
normally in the accusative of general reference as of A€yovow adrov 
fyv (Lu. 24:23). The same explanation applies to two accusatives 
like werewpevos yap éotw ‘Iwavnv rpopytny civar (Lu. 20:6) where one 
is in apposition to the other. Ina case like dd ye 7d rapéxew por 
Komov THY xnpav TavTyv (Lu. 18:5) one accusative is the object of the 
infinitive, the other is in the accusative of general reference. Note 
the article. Indeed three accusatives may appear with an infini- 
tive as in Heb. 5:12 (WH): rod diddoxey ipas twa 7a ororxeia. Here 
Twa is accusative of general reference and the other accusatives the 
objects of diddacxev. The negative of this accusative is sj as ofrwes 
Aeyovew avdctacw py eva (Mk. 12:18). 

(b) “Or and the indicative is in the New Testament the com- 
mon way of expressing indirect assertions. The optative is not so 
used save in the case of zpiv 7 once (Acts 25:16) which is depend- 
ent on dzexpiOnv ott. ‘Qs does not so appear though in Acts 10:28 


184 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


(érictacbe ws abeuurov éotwv) it approaches the ancient usage. Cf. 
also Lu. 24:6. “Orc is used with almost every variety of verbs of 
thinking and saying. Blass (Grammar of N. T. Greek, p. 230 ff.) 
has a careful discussion of the construction of each verb and phrase 
in the New Testament. As to verbs of thinking most of them take 
either construction (infinitive or 67.) and some the third also (the 
participle). So with xara\ayuBavw we haye the infinitive in Acts 
25:25 (€yw 8& xarehaBounv pydev aéov adrov Oavarov wexpaxévar), but in 
Acts 10:34 ore (xaradapBdvopat re ovk €orw). On the whole the use 
of the infinitive in indirect discourse is much more common in 
Luke and Paul (and Hebrews) than elsewhere in the New Testa- 
ment though not frequent even there. This applies to verbs of 
saying also. *Azokpivoya:, for instance, is used with the infinitive 
in indirect assertion only in Luke as Acts 25:4, daexpi6n rnpeto Oat 
tov IlatAov. For 6re see Acts 25:16. In 1 Cor. 10:19 ére is used 
after dynpé as is occasionally true in the older Greek. A good 
example of the use of the tense is found in Gal. 2:14 (dre edov dr 
ovk épForodotew). So also note évopscav Ste wActov Anppovrar (Matt. 
20:10. In Jo. 9:32 we have 7xovcbn dr qvewgev, but the tense is 
that of the direct. Only the context can tell whether 67: is declara- 
tive or causal as émvyvots 6te“Pwpaids éorw Kat ote aditov jv Sedexuis 
(Acts 22:29). Blass (Grammar of N. T. Greek, p, 231) calls as ore 
(2 Cor. 11:21) ‘‘unelassical.’? In 1 Cor. 15:27 dAov dre is used 
almost like an adverb as in ancient Greek. 

(c) The participle is sometimes used according to the ancient 
idiom with verbs of knowing, perceiving, showing, ete. This con- 
struction is generally found in Luke and Paul. Take Lu. 8:46, 
eyvov Sivamy efeAynrAvOviav ax’ €uod, as an example. Cf. also dxovoas 8& 
‘TaxwP dvra ovria (Acts 7:12), dp@ oe dvra (Acts 8:23). "Axovw is thus 
used with the participle, the infinitive, or with on. Likewise 
ywookw and ola may be used with either construction, @ewpéw 
occurs with ore or the participle. 

(d) The construction with xat éyévero calls for a word of com- 
ment. We haye kat éyévero. . . . €&\axe (Lu. 1:8) without any con- 
junction. So 1:41; 2:1, ete. In Matt. 9:10 «at follows xat éyévero 
almost in the sense of ore (like Hebrew wav), kai éyévero . . « « Kat 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 185 


iSov . . . . cvvavecceyto). Cf. Lu. 24:4. In Mk. 2:15 the infinitive 
is used with yiverat, cai yiverar kataxeioOa adtov. Cf. Lu. 3:21; 6:1, 
etc. In Luke xai éyévero with the infinitive is common. Cf. Jo. 
14:22, ri yéyovey ore yuiv peAXets. 

7. Indirect questions do not present so many complications. 

(a) The tense, as already explained, remains unchanged as a 
rule. So Mk. 15:44 we have 6 d€ TeAdros eOavpacer ci dy TeOvynker. 
This is the ancient use of ei after @avyalw. In the same verse the 
aorist follows: érynpwryce aitov «ci on arébaver. The point lies in 
the difference between the two tenses. However, the imperfect 
indicative is sometimes used where the present was the direct 
(sequence of tenses like Latin and English). So Jo. 2:24 (ré jv) 
and 6:6 (q8e ri eueAAev woreitv). Thus also in Acts 19:32 rivos evexa 
ovvedyrAvOacay after ovk ndecar. 

(b) The indicative may be retained in an indirect question as 
WArOov idety ti €otw To yeyovds (Mk. 5:14). But in Luke the optative 
is found as éxvuvOdvero ti ein Totro (Lu. 18:36). The indicative is 
never changed into the subjunctive in such a sentence as in Latin. 

(c) Whenever the subjunctive appears, as it often does, in an 
indirect question, it was there in the direct question. It is usually 
retained in the New Testament as od yap 48a ti droxpi6y (Mk. 9:6), 
but in Luke a few times the optative occurs instead of the sub- 
junctive as «i dpaye WyAadyoeay airov kal edpoev (Acts 17:27). In 
Matt. 6:25 7¢ paynre occurs in an indirect question. In Matt. 6:31 
ti hayopne ; is the direct question. The mood is the same in both 
cases and for the same reason, a deliberative question. 

(d) Sometimes the optative is found in the indirect question 
because it was in the direct (cf. indicative and subjunctive). This 
is true of all the examples with av and the optative like 76 tis av en 
peilov airov (Lu. 9:46). Cf. Lu. 6:11. Cf. also ré ay Oédou (Acts 
17:18) in a direct question with 76 ré dy @éAo (Lu. 1:62) in the 
indirect. 

(e) The indirect deliberative question may be dependent on a 
verb like éyw which does not often have a question as object (Bur- 
ton, Moods and Tenses, p. 185). So ov« exer rod tiv Kepadyy Krivy 
(Lu. 9:58). Ch. ox@ ré ypdyw (Acts 25:26). So too dzov is found 


186 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


(Mk. 14:14) with the subjunctive (é7ov. . . . ddéyw). In Lu. 3:15 
fy) more avdros ey is indirect question. 

(f) Luke is rather fond of the article with the indirect question. 
So 16 mas... . mapada (Lu. 22:4), ro ris ely (22:28), rd ris... . 
Soxe? (22:24), 

(g) Once indeed Nestle (1 Pet. 5:8) has the infinitive in this 
construction ({yrav tiva katameiv), but WH properly omit ta and 
have twa in margin (not riva). 

8. Indirect commands are expressed in three ways. 

(a) The infinitive is common with the same tense as the direct 
command. The negative is pj. So &ceyov &a& tod zvevparos py 
émBaivav (Acts 21:4), A€ywv py wepirepve (Acts 21:21), darjyyeAAov 
petavoety (Acts 26:20), Bodvres pi Setv adrov nv (Acts 25:24, note 
two infinitives). 

(b) Conjunctions (iva and ézws) are also used with a finite verb. 
So rapyyyerev adrots iva pndev aipwow (Mk. 6:8). Observe retention 
of the subjunctive after secondary tense. So also drws petaméupyrat 
(Acts 25:3). 

(c) Sometimes an indirect deliberative question with the sub- 
junctive represents a command or prohibition. In Luke 12:5 
brobdetEw Tiva poByOjre was originally (see yery next verse) PoByAyre. 

9. There is not infrequently mixture of the direct and the 
indirect discourse in the same sentence. The change may be from 
the indirect to the direct as in mapayyetAas pydevi éxAadAnoat OTe TadTa 
evepavicas mpos eve (Acts 23:22), or from the direct to the indirect 
as in etrev Eromacate ... . xtyvy Te mapaornoa (Acts 23:23). In 
Acts 14:22 we have 6m... . de parallel with éupevev. And in 
Acts 27:10 érv is even used with peAdAav, a mixture of the infinitive. 
and the ore constructions. 

10. The subordinate clause retains as a rule the tense and mode 
both of the direct. So ooa éye in Matt. 18:25 (éc&Aevow airov 6 
KUpios mpabjvat Kal Thy yuvatka Kal Ta Teva Kal doa éxer). So in Matt. 


14:22 we have jrdyxacey . . . « mpodyav . . « « ws ov drodvoy. 


CHAPTER XXXI. 
THE INFINITIVE. 


1. The origin of the infinitive is clear from the analogy of the 
Sanskrit which had a great number of pure verbal substantives in 
various cases with no yoice and no tense. The Greek ddfevar 
(Sotvac) is in the same case as the Sanskrit devané, for instance. 
The infinitive in -at, -oOa1, -vac are in the dative case while the form 
in -ew (-ev) is possibly in the locative. So originally this verbal 
substantive was used chiefly with the dative idea. In Homer the 
dative idea is still the more usual one, although already the form 
is no longer regarded as datiye, but merely a set form that is inde- 
clinable, and the infinitive is beginning to be used as the object 
and subject of verbs. In Matt. 11:7 this original dative idea is 
preserved, as is true wherever the infinitive has the idea of pur- 
pose: Tc é&ydAOare cis tiv épnpov Oedoacha; In Sanskrit the noun 
idea is dominant over the verbal, but already in Homer the verbal 
idea is on a par with the nominal conception. . 

2. The idea of the infinitive in Greek is that of a verbal sub- 
stantive with emphasis on both terms. It is évoya fyyaros, but is 
still évoua. The infinitive is non-finite, not limited, and so ex- 
presses undefined action. The infinitive has no manner of affirma- 
tion and is not a mode, but is always both verb and substantive. 
It is the most general and indefinite form of the verb. The point is 
that the Greek infinitive has to be looked at each time both asa sub- 
stantive and asa verb. It no longer has inflection as most sub- 
stantives have and so is an indeclinable substantive. It never de- 
veloped personal endings like the modes and so has no subject in 
the strict sense of the term. 

3. The history of the infinitive is very interesting. Burton 
(N. T. Moods and Tenses, p. 143.) has an excellent sketch of this 


188 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


matter. He marks four stages which I here enlarge and change 
to five: 

(1) When the infinitive was used only in the sense of the dative 
(or locative) case. This was in prehistoric times (cf. Sanskrit). 

(2) The infinitive begins to be used without regard to the im- 
port of the dative (or locative) ending. The same form occurs as 
subject or object of verbs. Thus in Homer. 

(8) The infinitive is used freely with the article and without it 
in yarious cases and with the force of the cases. This from Pindar 
on. A great many uses of the infinitive. 

(4) In the xowy the infinitive begins to disappear before tva and 
om. In the Septuagint and the New Testament there is the counter 
increase in the use of rod and the infinitive as a special side develop- 
ment. 

(5) In the modern Greek the infinitive has vanished save that 
after auxiliary verbs it exists in a mutilated form as 6a Avoa. In 
the Pontic dialect the infinitive continues to flourish. 

4. The use of the article with the infinitive has given rise toa 
deal of misapprehension. Even Winer (Winer-Thayer, p. 323) 
speaks of the article ‘‘making’’ the infinitive a substantive. The 
infinitive is always a substantive and like other substantives may 
or may not use the article according to circumstances. What the 
article does do with the infinitive is to make clear that it is defi- 
nite. Homer does not use the article with the infinitive, although 
Pindar does. The article does not make the infinitive a substan- 
tive. Itis always a substantive and in a case whether it has the 
article or not. In Homer the article is not used much with any- 
thing. In general the infinitive uses the article much as any other 
abstract neuter substantive that occurs only in the singular. So- 
7) yap Oedav (Rom. 7:18). In Heb. 2:15 was is used with the 
infinitiye, 5a wavrés rod iv. 

5. Cases of the infinitive. As an indeclinable substantive, the 
infinitive may be in any case, though the vocative naturally is not 
used. When the article occurs with the infinitive, the inflection 
of the article makes the case plain. Thus in xaddv ool éorw ceive Oetv 
(Matt. 18:8) the infinitive is in the nominative case as plainly as 


THE INFINITIVE. 189 


in To OedXew mapaxetat po. (Rom. 7:18). In A€yw tpiv py dpooae 
(Matt. 5:34) the infinitive is just as truly in the accusative as in 
ovy dpraypov yyynoato TO evar iow Ged (Phil. 2:6). So the infinitive 
may be in the genitive as in éAaxe tod Oywaioa (Lu. 1:9), the abla- 
tive as in pay Kwddvere aita e\Ociy we (Matt. 19:14) and karetyov adrov 
Tov py mopeverbar (Lu. 4:42), the instrumental as in ro pi cipely pe 
Tirov (2 Cor. 2:18), the dative as in oldare. . . . dddvax (Matt. 7:11) 
and 7AOomev rpooxvvyoa (Matt. 2:2). The infinitive, like the sub- 
stantive, may be used in apposition. So rovrwy trav émrdvayes, 
aréxeOar (Acts 15:28), the ablative. 

6. The common use of 70d and the infinitive in the New Testa- 
ment (as in the LXX) calls for special remark. It may be in the 
ablative as in éekparotvro rot py émyvavae (Lu. 24:16), but as a rule 
it is the genitive (cf. Heb. infinitive construct which idiom partly 
explains its frequency in the LXX). It exists already in the older 
Greek to express purpose in the genitive and this is the commonest 
use in the New Testament, as in fyrety rod dmodeoa (Matt. 2:13). 
See Lu. 1:76 where érouacar and rod Sodvac both express purpose. 
It is even held by some writers that rod with the infinitive occa- 
sionally expresses result in the New Testament. But this may be 
doubted. All the examples given (Matt. 21:32; Acts 7:19; 18:10; 
Rom. 7:3) betray purpose if the article is closely observed as it 
must be. Tod and the infinitive may be used with nouns (geni- 
tive) as éAmls tod owlerOa (Acts 27:20), adjectives as Bpadeis tod 
moredoa (Lu. 24:25) and verbs as pereweAnOnre Tod muocredoa (Matt. 
21:32). But strangest of all is it to see rod and the infinitive as the 
subject of a verb as in dvévdexrov éorw Tod. . . . pay eADetv (Lu. 17:1). 
Cf. Acts 10:25. Just as the dative and locative endings lost their 
force with the infinitive, so tod sometimes comes to be regarded as 
a fixed idiom. 

7. The infinitive can be used with verbs as dwvarat. . . . SovAcvew 
(Matt. 6:24), with substantives as épyy tBpica (Acts 14:5), with 
adjectives as ixavés Xdoar (Mk. 1:7), and with prepositions as ev 7a 
etvae (Lu. 9:18). 

8. The infinitive is so frequent with prepositions that a special 
paragraph is called for. The article is uniformly present with this 


190 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


use of the infinitive to show that the preposition is not in compos- 
ition with the infinitive. The cases of the infinitive are those com- 
mon in the New Testament with prepcsitions. The prepositions 
thus found with the infinitive are mainly dyri, eis, év, evexev, é€, Ews, 
did, pera, zpos, mpd. Take an illustration of each: dytt rod Neve 
(Jas. 4:15), eis 7d elvae (Rom. 1:20), é&y rG elvar (Lu. 9:18, very 
common in Luke), &vexey tod davepwOjvar (2 Cor. 7:12), ek rod exew 
(2 Cor. 8:11), €ws rod éAbetv (Acts 8:40), dia 76 rapexew (Lu. 18:5), 
peta TO Seervnoa (Lu. 22:20), rpos ro dev (Lu.18:1), zpo rod pe rabeiv 
(Lu. 22:15). The infinitive with prepositions is used just like 
indirect discourse. So pera 70 éyepPjvai pe mpoagw (Mk. 14:28). 

9. The infinitive in indirect discourse was sufficiently treated in 
that chapter. But the confusion on the subject will justify a few 
further remarks. It is not strictly correct to say that the infinitive 
has a subject in indirect discourse. That is to put the idiom of 
the English finite clause into the Greek infinitive clause. The 
Greek infinitive clause is not a finite clause at all, and is not so 
conceived in Greek. The infinitive itself is the object of the verb 
of saying or thinking, and not the substantive, as Hadley and 
Allen argue in sec. 943. The infinitive in indirect discourse is 
thus simply the direct object of the principal verb. The subject 
of the verb in the direct discourse is then treated variously. If it 
is the same as the subject of the principal verb, it is simply re- 
tained in the nominative. If the subject is different, it is put in 
the accusative, the case of extension (‘‘accusative of definition,”’ 
Green), or is in apposition with another word in the sentence; the 
action of the infinitive is true as far as so and so (whatever the 
substantive may be). So also if the pronoun refers to the subject, 
it may be in the accusative as in Lu. 24:30 (airév). This is in-- 
deed ‘‘yirtual predication’’ (Monro), but it is not technical (syn- 
tactical) predication, and should not be so explained. In the 
modern English idiom we reproduce such instances by finite 
clauses, but it is truer and simpler to treat the Greek idiom accord- 
ing to the Greek genius. The infinitive in indirect discourse is still 
a verbal substantive, and not really different from the infinitive 
elsewhere. The participle, being a verbal adjective, can have no 


THE INFINITIVE. 191 


subject. The infinitive, being a verbal substantive, can have no 
subject. The use of an accusative of general reference with the 
infinitive does not change it into a finite mode. Nestle against 
WH reads fnrév tiva xarametv in 1 Pet. 5;8. See chapter on Indirect 
Discourse for examples. But Matt. 17:4 is a good one, xadov éorw 
nuas ade etvaz, Sometimes the dative is found with the infinitive 
(due to the verb, not the infinitive) as in éreragev atrois dvaxAOjva 
(Mk. 6:39). The predicate adjective in such a case may be either 
the dative “Pwpyaios otow (Acts 16:21) or in the accusative as éxXe§- 
apevous (Acts 15:22), but note -os in 15:25 (text of WH). 

10. The infinitive was limited as an object clause on the one 
hand by ore and on the other as an expression of purpose by ta. 
The infinitive carries both ideas and more too. But it was gradu- 
ally squeezed out between these two conjunctions. Signs of the 
non-final use of ta are abundant in the New Testament as éav 
Oernre iva roGor (Matt. 7:12). It is not strange that the infinitive 
gradually gave up the fight. 

11. The infinitive is common for the expression of purpose as 
xatadioa (Matt. 5:17). It may be questioned if the infinitive by 
itself was ever used to express clear result. 

12. But éore with the infinitive, which once was used for pur- 
pose, came to be used in the New Testament chiefly for result. 
So bore py xpeiay exew (1 Thess. 1:8). But design is also expressed 
by gore (Lu. 4:29). ‘Qs is only used twice with the infinitive in 
the New Testament, os éroudoo (Lu. 9:52), as eros cizxeiv (Heb. 
7:9). Once also as av éxpoBeiv (2 Cor. 10:9) 

13. The infinitive may be used absolutely in strict harmony 
with its origin as a non-finite verbal substantive. Thus in greet- 
ings as xatpew (Jas. 1:1). As an imperative the infinitive presents 
the idea as an absolute idea. The connection suggests the duty or 
the command. So kdaéew (Rom. 12:15), oroxetv (Phil. 3:16). 

14. The negative of the infinitive is always p7 in the New Tes- 
tament even in indirect assertions (Mk. 12:18). Sometimes od is 
found with the infinitive, but it really goes with a single phrase 
rather than with the infinitive. So xat od kata tiv taéw ’“Aapov 
AeyerOar (Heb. 7:11). 


192 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


15. The infinitive may sometimes be periphrastic like other 
forms of the verb as in év 7 divas atrov zpocevxdpevov (Lu. 9:18). 

16. The voices of the infinitive. Originally as in the Sanskrit, 
the infinitive had no voices. Voice in the infinitive was a later 
development of the language. But all three voices come to be 
used freely with the infinitive and with the usual significance. 
But voice is a distinct addition to the original infinitive. Note 
elrev Sobnvat airy payev (Mk. 5:48). 

17. The same remark applies to the tenses of the infinitive. 
Tense in the infinitive has no time except in indirect discourse. 
The infinitive has the aorist as a matter of course and when the 
present tense occurs it is to accent the idea of incompletion. Note 
both in the same sentence: jvdyxace Tovs pabyras éuBnvar. . . . Kat 
mpoayew (Matt. 14:22). The perfect does not often occur and 
always to express completion. Cf. dmrAAdy@a (Lu. 12:58) and 
arodertvoba édvvato 6 avOpwros ovtos (Acts 26:52). Cf. also Mk. 5:4. 
Mé\Aw, however, generally has the present infinitive as padre Lyrety 
(Matt. 2:13), sometimes the future infinitive due to the future idea 
in pAdAw as peddrAaw everOar (Acts 11:28; 27:10), and only seldom 
the aorist as juedAe zpocayayeivy (Acts 12:6). Burton remarks 
(Moods and Tenses, p. 53) that no instance of the aorist infinitive 
representing an aorist indicative appears in the New Testament. 
The aorist infinitive in its usual timeless sense does occur, how- 
ever, aS in yeyparta mabey tov Xpiordv (Lu. 24:46). The future 
infinitive in indirect discourse also appears as in 00d’ avrov omar Tov 
Koopov xwpyoew (Jo. 21:25). So also the perfect infinitive, vopi- 
lovres avtov tebvnxevae (Acts 14:19). *Av with the infinitive is not 
found in the New Testament. 

18. The idiom zpooéero wepmpa (Lu. 20;11 f.) while explicable 
as Greek, is probably due to the common Hebrew construction. 


CHAPTER XXXII. 
THE PARTICIPLE. 


1. The participle has its most perfect development in the Greek 
language. Already in the Sanskrit the participle had developed 
voice (active and middle) and tense (aorist, present, perfect, and 
even the future). But the aorist participle did not survive in San- 
skrit (cf. its absence in Latin). The Greek, however, revived the 
aorist participle and made it flourish. Already in Homer the 
aorist participle is abundant. In modern Greek the participle is 
little used, conjunctions displacing it. The English participle is 
much like the Greek in its freedom and adaptability. The Greek 
is a ‘‘participle loving language’’ (Broadus) and thus has a great 
advantage in flexibility over the Latin. 

2. The participle is a verbal adjective. The participle (pars, 
capio) takes part, participates, shares in both yerb and adjective, 
as the infinitive shares in both verb and substantive: It is always 
both verb and adjective. Like the infinitive the participle is also 
non-finite, undefined action. The participle makes no affirmation 
and is not a mode. It is a verb in exactly the same respects that 
the infinitive is. It has voice, tense, and governs the cases that 
the verb takes. 

3. There are other verbal adjectives, as there were many verbal 
substantives (cf. the Sanskrit), which are not called participles. 
The verbals in -ros and -réos, for instance, are verbal adjectives. 
They do not have voice and tense as the participle does. The 
verbal in -ros partakes more of the adjective idea and that in -réos 
more of the verbal. The form in -ros is very common (in both the 
active and passive sense) in the New Testament as 6 dyamynrds (Matt. 
3:17). There is only one example of the verbat in -réos which is 
Ts SON and governs the case (accusative) of the verb, otvov véov 


194 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


cis doovs Katvovs BAnteov (Lu. 5:38). The verbal in -réos is not found 
in Homer. 

4. The difference between the participle and the infinitive is to 
be sharply noticed. The difference between infinitive and parti- 
ciple lies wholly in the fact that one is a substantive and the other 
an adjective. We found that the infinitive is an indeclinable yerbal 
substantive, a fixed case form (dative), though used freely in any 
case, however, and in the singular only, either with or without the 
article. The participle is declined in both numbers and all the 
genders and all the cases and is used freely with or without the 
article. The infinitive as an object or subject verbal substantive is 
connected immediately with the verb while the participle is related 
to a substantive. Soin Lu. 16:3 see what a different idea éraray 
would present. ézatév would describe the man as a beggar who 
is ashamed of it; éwaureiv presents one who is ashamed to beg and 
does not become a beggar. So likewise explain participle with 
gaivoyor in Matt. 6:16. Compare infinitive with ofa (Matt. 7:11) 
and participle with «dev (Acts 3:9). See also Lu. 5:4 (ératcaro 
AarAGv) and Acts 14:18 (karéravoay tod pH Ovev). The infinitive in 
indirect discourse is the direct object or subject of the verb. The 
participle in indirect discourse is merely an adjective agreeing with 
the substantive. Like the infinitive the participle can have no sub- 
ject. See Heb. 13:23 (ywaoxere Tycbeov amodrcdvpevov) 1 Jo. 4:2 
(Sporoye? “Incotv éAnAvOora). See difference between John 12:18 and 
2 Thess. 3:11 (one infinitive and one participle with dxovw). 

5. The participle like other adjectives may be used with or with- 
out the article, may be definite or indefinite. So we have tédwp av 
(Jo. 4:10), but 7d tdwp 75 Gav (Jo. 4:11). In ti éorw 7d yeyovds 
(Mk. 5:14) we haye a good example of the attributive participle. 
If the article is used, we know, as with other adjectives, that the 
participle is attributive. The article sometimes appears with the 
participle when it is not used with the substantive. So godiay.... 
tiv amoKekpupperyy (1 Cor. 2:7). Often the participle, like other 
adjectives again, occurs without any substantive as 6 «Aérrev (Eph. 
4:28). This use is practically equivalent to a relative clause. We 
even find was 6 dpyfopevos (Matt. 5:22). But if the article is not 


THE PARTICIPLE. 195 


used, the participle may be either predicate or attributive. The 
case of vdwp Lov (Jo. 4:10) is attributive, but the predicate use is 
well shown in Prézere éyyifovoay tiv qucpav (Heb. 10:25). Cf. also 
€Jewpovv Tov Satavay wecovra (Lu. 10:18) and note tense. 

6. The predicate participle is more complicated and calls for 
more discussion than the attributive which has more of the adjec- 
tive and less of the verbal conception than the predicate. The 
predicate participle is more common in proportion than other pred- 
icate adjectives because of the verbal force of the participle. Both 
the predicate uses of the participle (circumstantial and supple- 
mentary) are very common, as frequent indeed as the attributive 
participle. 

7. The supplementary participle. The supplementary partici- 
ple is freely used in the New Testament and with «izé more com- 
monly than in the earlier Greek, periphrastic construction. So 
Luke in particular (Lu. 13:10f. jv &idacKwv, jv cvvKirrovea). In 
Lu. 23:12 we find zpotzjpxov wore.  dpxova is not used with the 
participle in the New Testament, but only with the infinitive, as 
Matt. 4:17, or absolutely, as Lu. 24:27. For the participle with 
éxw see Lu. 14:18 f. (exe pe wapyrnmevov). mavouar is used only with 
the participle or absolutely (Acts 5:42; 1 Cor. 13:8). For redo 
with the participle see Matt. 11:1 (éredcoer dtatadcowv). In Matt. 
6:16 wa davoow vyoredvovres is a good illustration of the supple- 
mentary participle. tvyxavw in the New Testament is not used 
with the infinitive or the participle, nor is #@dévw (special sense of 
come or come before, Phil. 3:16). However, zpop6avw in Matt. 
17:25 (mpoepbacey d€Eywv) is used with the participle according to 
ancient usage. AavOdévw is once (Heb. 13:2, érabov Eevicavres) used 
with participle according to the ancient idiom. No example of avy 
with the participle appears in the New Testament. 

8. The circumstantial participle is practically an additional 
clause added more or less loosely. It is not essential to the lead- 
ing clause. By means of the circumstantial participle a sentence 
can be strung out indefinitely. Cf. 2 Pet. 2:12-15 (Brardypodrres, 
ddikovpevor, Hyovpevor, evtpuportes, etc.). The circumstantial parti- 
ciple does not of itself define its relation to the principal or sub- 


196 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ordinate clause in which it occurs. The connection is, of course, 
with some noun or pronoun. The context may be one that sug- 
gests time as dxovwy 6 “Avavias reciv éfafvéev (Acts 5:5), occasion as 
dxovovres (Lu. 4:28), means as épyaciav wodAjy mapetyey pavrevopevyn 
(Acts 16:16), manner as aérpAOev Avrovpevos (Matt. 19:22), cause 
as evxapiorotpev axovoartes (Col. 1:4), purpose as éAnAVOe rpooKvvyjcwv 
(Acts 8:27), condition as kpwe? 7 axpoBvoria reAotca (Rom. 2:27), 
concession as Kal ye od paxpay ad évds Exdotov uav tmdpxovta (Acts 
17:27). Itis not proper to say that the participle means cause, 
condition, etce., but the context implies such an idea and the par- 
ticiple admits it. 

9. The so-called genitive absolute is merely a circumstantial 
participle agreeing with the substantive in its case. In Latin the 
so-called Latin ablative absolute is either ablative, locative, or in- 
strumental, according to circumstances. The Sanskrit uses the 
locatiye thus. Modern Greek uses the nominative. The ancient 
Greek is either genitive or ablative, or possibly now one and now 
the other. Usually the substantive is one that does not have close 
connection with the principal sentence, but this is not always so. 
See Mk, 8:1 (aodXod 6yAov dvros). The so-called accusative abso- 
lute does not occur in the New Testament, unless Acts 26:3 (yréorny 
ovra) be an example. Cf. also rvydv (1 Cor. 16:6). In Acts 2:29 
éoriv is probably to be supplied with éfdv. Cf. egdv jv in Matt. 
12:4 and déov éoriv in Acts 19:36. Sometimes the genitive absolute 
is found where there is a noun or pronoun in the sentence for it to 
agree with. So radra dé abrod evOvynfévros idod a&yyeXos Kupiov Kat’ dvap 
eddvy aitd (Matt. 1:20). See also Matt. 21:23. Cf. the nomina- 
tive absolute in Rev. 2:26, 6 vuxédv Kat 6 rypdv Sécw aird. The par- 
ticiple sometimes carries on the sentence loosely without a verb as 
imotacoopevor (Eph. 5:21). In Mk. 7:19 xafapiZwv is due to ana- 
coluthon. Cf. Rey. Sometimes the genitive absolute is used 
without a noun or pronoun as éA@dvros Kat «povoavros (Lu. 12:36). 

10. The Septuagint uses the participle as one translation of the 
Hebrew infinitive absolute as an intensive expression. This reap- 
pears in the New Testament as etdAoySv etAoyyow oe (Heb. 6:14). 
Cf. Oavdrw reAevtéty (Matt. 15:4), another method used to translate 


ie 


THE PARTICIPLE. 197 


the same Hebrew idiom. So also zapayyeXia rapyyyetAapev (Acts 
5:28). 

11. As to adjuncts with the circumstantial participle, they do 
not alter the true force of the participle at all, but merely sharpen 
und make clear the idea. So coedOotca evOvs (Mk. 6:25); dua 
eAmifov (Acts 24:26); xairep dv (Heb. 5:8); ws (giving the alleged 
reason which may or may not be true), as Lu. 16:1 (és diackopzi- 
lov); 2 Cor. 5:20 (as aapaxadodvros); Acts 27:30 (as pedXovtwyv) ; 
dorep hepopevys (Acts 2:2). Cf. ov more émuotpeas (Lu. 22:32). 

12. The participle in indirect discourse was sufficiently treated 
in the chapter on that subject. One example may suffice here, 
doa Hxovcapev yevoueva. (Lu. 4:23). In Eph. 5:5 (tore ywdoxovres) 
the participle has an intensive force and is hardly in indirect dis- 
course. Note both verbs for knowing here used (oida, ywooxw). 

13. The voice in the participle calls for nothing distinctive. 
The voice as in the infinitive merely follows the routine verbal 
function. Moulton (Prolegomena, p. 203) even says. that the 
infinitive has ‘‘no voice distinction.’? That was true originally, 
but the Greek infinitiye and the participle did come to have both 
voice and tense. Take évecOe pucovpevor (Matt. 10:22) as an example 
of the periphrastic future passive. Note évecOe Aadodvres (1 Cor. 
14:9) where middle and active combine in the periphrastic future. 

14. The tense in the participle, however, calls for some discus- 
sion. Like the infinitive the participle has no time in itself. It 
gets its time from the verb with which it is used. Thus an aorist 
participle may be used with a future verb as 6 tmopetvas owOyoerat 
(Matt. 10;22), a future participle with a past tense of the indica- 
tive as €AnAVOea rpooxvvyjcwv (Acts 8:27). Time with the participle 
is purely relative. The aorist participle is very common and is 
either simultaneous as xatyyrycav doracdpeve (Acts 25:18) or an- 
tecedent as rwdyjoas jveyxev (Acts 4:37). The aorist participle does 
not express subsequent action. The present participle gets its 
time from the principal verb and expresses incompleted action. So 
mwdovvtes Ehepov (Acts 4:34). In Jo. 9:25 (ruddAds dv apte Brérw) 
by the use of dpre with the verb the present participle is made to 
have the force of- an ‘‘imperfect’’ participle. The present parti- 


198 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


ciple likewise may be used with the future tense as éveoOe pucovpevor 
(Matt. 10:22). In Acts 25:10 we have éords eu as a periphrastic 
present, not perfect in idea though so in form. The perfect par- 
ticiple accents the idea of completion as xexomuxds (Jo. 4:6), eiAndas 
(Matt. 25:24, cf. AaBov in verse 20). The future participle, it 
should be added, is very rare in the New Testament and almost 
entirely in Luke. The article is occasionally found with the future 
participle as 76 éodpevov (Lu. 22:49). The future tense of the 
participle was more developed in the Boeotian dialect. In Eph. 
4:18 we have a periphrastic perfect participle, éoxoriepevor ovres. 

15. The negative of the participle in the New Testament is py, 
unless a very emphatic negative is desired, when od is used. In 
the older Greek od was the common negative with participles, and 
py only in special cases when condition or concession was suggest- 
ed. In the modern Greek 7 is alone used with participles. The 
New Testament usag@shows the progress in that direction. Thus 
in Acts 17:6 y} etpovres is in accord with the common usage of the 
later Greek. The papyri give some examples of ov as we have in 
the New Testament. Perhaps Luke and Paul respond to the old 
Greek feeling for od to some extent. In general od is only found 
with the participle when a distinct and strong negative is desired. 
So in Lu. 6:42 od Brérov. In 1 Pet. 1:8 we have ovx idovres and py 
épOvres and the distinction can be seen. 

16. Sometimes the participle like other adjectives, becomes a 
substantive (cf. 73 dya@dv, for instance). In Matt. 19:21 the pos- 
sessive genitive is used with it, reéAyoov cov ra brdpxovra. Cf. the 
belongings in English. In Heb. 8:9 the participle is almost like 
the infinitive, but here it is to be taken as agreeing with pov after 
all, év qpépa émiraBopevov pov tis xepos ad’tav. Cf. Heb. 11:32, 
emrcier pe yap Supyovpevov 5 xpovos. 


CHAPTER XXXII. 


NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


1. Greek has two negatives that are used either simply (cd, pu) 
or in various compounds (ovd€, obre, oddets, ovGels, oixert, odzrore, etc., 
and so for compounds of jj, pyde, etc.). Latin has three negatives 
(non, ne, haud). The Sanskrit has na and ma. Greek did not 
use na (ne) and Latin did not use py (ma). Haud and ov are 
probably the same word (cf. Zend ava). Inthe Boeotian dialect 
ov never was employed. In Homer indeed py was freely used with 
the indicative and od sometimes with the subjunctive. The history 
of ov and py has been the constant increase of the use of wy. In 
the modern Greek de (for otdev) is only used with the indicative. 
Perhaps the earliest use of 47 was to express prohibition. For the 
form ot#e see 1 Cor. 13:2; Acts 19:27. 

2. In general the New Testament uses the negative od and py in 
accordance with the idiom of the earlier Greek. The distinction is 
well obseryed between the outright negation by ov and the subtle 
and subjective wy. In the Sanskrit the same distinction existed 
between na and ma. In English we have to depend on the tone 
of voice for the difference, but we all know the difference between 
‘no’? and ‘‘no.’’ Ov is direct, positive, categorical, definite; py is 
doubtful, indirect, indefinite, hypothetical. Misa negative with 
a ‘‘string tied to it.’’ Ifa girl should say ov to a proposal of mar- 
riage (especially ovx/), there would be little hope. But py would 
leave room for another trial. The bluntness of ov in its strength- 
ened form ovxé is well shown in Luke 1:60. On the other hand 
pote in Jo. 4:29 (unre obdrds éorw 6 Xpioros ;) but dimly conceals the 
woman’s real conviction about Jesus. 

' 8. With the imperative therefore py is the logical, even the nec- 
essary, negative as mj poe Kdrovs mépexe (Lu. 11:7). This is uniform 


200 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


except where parenthetic clauses or sharp contrast is brought out 
(cf. infinitive). In 1 Pet, 3:3 after éorw ovx is set over against 
aX. So also in 1 Pet. 2:18 we haye ov povov.... dAdAa Kai. But 
in Jas. 1:22 (as elsewhere) py povov is read. In 1 Cor. 5:10 ov wav- 
tws is a parenthetical expansion of pi ovevapiyroba. Soin 2 Tim. 
2:14 as to én’ ovdev xpyomov and pj Aoyopaxev. In Matt. 5:37 od ot 
is the predicate of éorw and with the accented form instead of ov. 
In Rev. 22:9 (dpa wy) py is a conjunction used without the verb. 
Cf. our ‘‘lookout.”’ 

4. With the subjunctive py is also naturally the negative. But 
in Homer, before the subjunctive was sharply differentiated from 
the future indicative ov was sometimes employed with the subjunc- 
tive. The truth seems to be that py displaced ov with the subjunc- 
tive, just as it did finally with the participle. Let py dane (Mk. 
12:14) serve as an example. Cf. Jo. 11:50. Ov, however, is used 
with the subjunctive, when py is a conjunction, for the sake of 
distinction. So doBotpar py mus €AOwv ovx olovs Hédw etipw tas (2 Cor. 
12:20). So also the marginal reading of WH in Matt. 25:9 (pajrore 
ovk dpxéoyn), but the text has pyrore ov py. 

5. With the optative both ov and yw appear in the older Greek, 
ov in the conclusion of the fourth class condition, elsewhere 7. 
As a matter of fact the optative in the New Testament has no neg- 
ative save in the case of wishes where it is always py. So wy yévort0 
(Rom. 3:4). 

6. The negative of the infinitive in the New Testament is py, 
even in indirect discourse (Mk. 12:18, wi eva), save in fixed 
phrases, repeated negatives, or when single words are negatived. 
In Mk. 7: 24 o¢ is used much like ancient idiom in indirect dis- 
course, ovdéva OA” yova. But in Lu. 20:40 the compound neg- 
ative of the infinitive is repeated like that of the principal verb, 
ovkéere yap eroApwv erepwrav avtov ovdév. In Rom. 15:20 ovx drov 
évopdcOn Xpiords is a parenthetic clause with eayyaALerba. So xai 
ov after SovAcvew (Rom. 7:6). Usually we have ov pévov with the 
infinitive as in Jo, 11:52 with dro@joxev. For the peculiar 
position of od pdvov see Rom. 4:12,16. The New Testament does 
not use p% ov with the infinitive, but simply wy. So with a verb 


NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 201 


of hindering, podu Karéravoav tots 6xAovs TOD pH Ovew avtois (Acts 
14:18). But »# (redundant 7) is not necessary in this use of the 
infinitive as évexorropunv Ta oA Tod EAOety (Rom. 15:22). When 
the principal verb of hindering is negative, the simple infinitive is 
used as in py KwAvere aira €AOcty (Matt. 19:14) or wy may be employed 
as py Te TO BOup Sivatar KwAdoal Tis TOD py BarticOqvac (Acts 10:47). 
Note rod sometimes. In 1 Cor. 14:39 observe 76 AaAeivy py Kwdvere. 
In Acts 4:20 both negatives retain their value, od dvvduea yap ...- 
py AaXe?y. 

7. With participles pj is commonly used contrary to ancient 
custom, but not contrary to the undefined action of the participle; 
for instance, Matthew has y7 with the participle 18 times and od 2, 
Luke has p7 28 times and od 2, John has py 11 and ot 1. See the 
difference. between od with the participle and yy with the parti- 
ciple in 1 Pet. 1:8, ot« iSovres and py dpSvres, one a definite case, 
the other a general statement. With the article and the participle 
py is also the usual construction as 7& py dudKxovta (Rom. 9:30), but 
ov appears for a strong negative as in tiv ovK yyarqpevqvy (Rom. 
9:25). Cf. tov ov Aadv in the same verse. Cf. 6 ovx ov (Jo. 10:12). 
In the modern Greek py alone is used with the participle. 

8. With the indicative the matter is much more complicated. 
In the modern Greek 8& is confined to the indicative, and py is 
used elsewhere. But the New Testament still uses wy.a good deal 
with the indicative, though less than in the older Greek. A study 
of the various aspects of the indicative must therefore be made. 

(a) In ordinary declarative sentences (simple or compound) 
the negative of the indicative is od. This is in direct harmony 
with the idea of the mode. So 6 morevwy cis adtov ov xpiverar (Jo. 
3:18). 

(b) In causal sentences likewise od is always found unless the 
reason is subjective or regarded as specially speculative. The only 
example of ére wy in the New Testament is in Jo. 3:18, 6 py muotevwv 
on Kéxpitae Ott py Texioterxey. With this compare 1 Jo. 5:10 where 
drt ob reriorevxey is read, the usual idiom. Cf. also Heb. 9:17 
éret pay Tore ioxva, Which may, however, be a question. 

(c) Conditional sentences usually had ¢ 7 and ¢ ov rarely in 


202 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


the older Greek. In conditions of the second class (determined as 
unfulfilled) «& »» is uniform even in the New Testament (as «i py 
qv, etc., Jo. 9:53) except in Mk. 14:21 (Matt. 26:24) where we 
find ei ov. Here e ov« éyevvy$y brings out strongly the force of ov. 
But in first class conditions (fulfilled), leaving out the elliptical 
use of e& py (Mk. 9:9) and «i pa dé, ef od is much more frequent in 
the New Testament than e py. In the older Greek e od was used 
when a single word was negatived or there was sharp contrast. 
Such examples occur in the New Testament as & tis rvedpua Xpurrod 
ovx €xee (Rom. 8:9), ef yap 6 Oeds . . . . otk efeioatro (Rom. 11:21). 
So ei xat Tov Bedv od PoBodpar ovdé avOpwrov evrperopar (Lu. 18:4). CE. 
Jas. 1:23 (kai od rounrys), 1 Cor. 9:2 (ei otk cii). Cf. Jo. 1:25. 

(d) In relative sentences with the indicative od is the usual 
negative as Os od AapBéve. (Matt. 10:38). But a few examples of py 
appear in indefinite relative sentences as @ py dt (Tit. 1:11), 6 py 
mapeotiv tavta (2 Pet. 1:9). So also text of 1 Jo. 4:3 (WH), 6 py 
dpodroyed (mar. 6 Ave). Cf. Os ov éorw (1 Jo. 4:6). 

(e) With expressions of purpose 7 is the usual negative as iva 
py pvovotcbe (1 Cor. 4:6), cxora py éeorivy (Lu. 11:35), Brerere py 
mote €orat (Heb. 3:12). 

(f) With verbs of fearing ov is the negative after wy, but no 
example occurs in the New Testament save 2 Cor. 12:20 where py 

. ov is found with the subjunctive. In Greek as in Latin py 
(as ne) follows the verb of fearing for the positive idea. 

(¢) In questions py expects the answer ‘‘no’’ as Mk. 14:19 
(uy Te €y®;), while ov requires the answer ‘‘yes’’ as Lu. 17:17 (ovx 
ot dexa exabapicOnoav;). In 1 Cor. 9:8 we have both in different 
parts of the same question, pi) kara dvOpwrov Tadra AarG, 7) Kal 6 vomos _ 
Taira ov réeyer; cf. also wy ardoaro (Rom. 11:1) and ovk« drwcaro 
(Rom. 11:2). Sometimes ov py is found in questions as ov pi rio 
avrd; (Jo. 18:11) where the answer is in accordance with ov, The 
negatives do not, of course, express the wide range of feeling and 
emotion in different situations. In a question like py ovk éxouer ; 
(1 Cor. 9:4) py is the negative of the question and ovk of éxomer. 

(h) When the indicative is used in prohibitions ov occurs as in 
ovK érvopxnoes (Matt. 5:33) or ov py as in ov pi €orae (Matt. 16:22). 


NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 203 


(i) In indirect discourse, where the indicative is used, the neg- 
ative of the direct is retained as ads ov voetre 6tt ov rept aptwv eirov 
bpiv (Matt. 16:11). Burton (Moods and Tenses, p. 181) properly 
notes the redundant ov after the verb ‘‘deny,”’ 
"Ingots ovk éorw (1 Jo. 2:22). Cf. French ne. 

(j) The succession of negatives in Greek merely strengthens the 
first negative if the second is a compound form like ov8é, pndeis, ete. 
This use (just like the old English idiom that survives here and 
there) is not remarkably frequent, yet a number of examples occur 
as ovk épuyey ovdey (Lu. 4:2), pndevt pndev ddetrere (Rom. 13:8). 
Even three or more negatives may be found as ob ov« jv oddeis ot 
xeiwevos (Lu. 23:53), ovxere ov py miw (Mk. 14:25). But some- 
times tis follows ov as ovx dpraca tis (Jo. 10:28). Cf. 1 Thess. 
L:8. 

(k) But when the second negative is a single negative, it 
retains its force. So ov wapa todro ovK éote &k Tod adparos (1 Cor. 


e's , ca 
O GpVvOoupevos OTL 


12:15); ov« éxouev eLovoiay py epyaciay (1 Cor. 9:6); py ovK jKovcay 
(Rom. 10:18); 6 py moretwy 757 Kekpurae Ott py reriotevkey (Jo. 3:18). 
Cf. ovdey yap eorw Kexadvppevoy 0 ovK aroxaduPOyncerar (Matt. 10:26), 
and ov py adeby Ode... . Os ov KatadvOnoera (Matt. 24:2). See 
1 Cor. 6:9 (ov... . ov). Cf. also pn wore ov py (or py Tore ov, mg.) 
in Matt. 25:9. In Matt. 18:29 ot, py wore... . expiLwonte each 
_ negative has its full force. Cf. wy, wy wore (Mk. 14:2). Cf. Mk. 
12:24 for ov wy in question and py with participle. 

(1) The use of ov py calls for a special note. The usual con- 
struction is with the subjunctive as in ov py adeO7 above (Matt. 
24:2). The future indicative is read in ov py état cot TodTOo (Matt. 
16:22) and is doubtless the correct text in o¥ pi tysnoe (Matt. 
15:6) and a few other places (Matt. 26:35; Mk. 14:31). No satis- 
factory explanation of the origin of this use of od yj has been found. 
They do not neutralize each other, but each retains its force 
as in mi od in questions (Rom. 10:18). Cf. od A in questions 
(Lu. 18:7, ob pH rowjon;). Does this use throw any light on the 
problem ? 

(m) The redundant negative as in 1 Jo. 2:22 (see above) and 
Lu. 24:16 (éparotvro rod py emcyvOvac) after a verb of hindering (a 


204 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


negative conception) appears stranger to us now than it would 
have done some generations ago before we dropped the repeated 
and double negatives in English. Compare Shakespeare on this 
point. Compare this vulgar sentence ‘‘Hain’t nobody seen noth- 
ing of never a hat nowhere about here?’’ Cf. ob py ce dvd odd od 
py oe éyxatadirw (Heb. 13:5). 

(n) The form ovxé adds fresh point to the negative ov, especially 
when contrasted with éAAd as in Luke 1:60. The position of the 
negative may also give new emphasis as pi woAAol diddoxaror yiverOe 
(Jas. 3:1). In Rom. 3:9 od zavrws means ‘‘by no means,’’ but 
in 1 Cor. 15:51 (aavres 0d KowunOyodpeba) od goes with the verb. In 
Heb. 11:3 py goes with the participle, not the infinitive. Litotes 
is not infrequent in the New Testament as od pera wodAds (Acts 
1:5)=érj(lyas. Cf. Lu. 15:13. 

(0) For ox dr... . ddAAd see Jo. 7:22. For otx ta... . adda 
see Jo. 6:38. For aAX’ ov in the apodosis of a condition see Mk. 
14:29. For ob povov.... dda wai see Rom. 5:3. See Jo. 4:11 
ovre....xal. For ovd€.... ovre see Rev. 5:3, and ovdcis.... 
ovre (Rey. 5:4). For otdé.. . . ovd€ see Rev. 9:4. For pydt.... 
pydé see Matt. 10:9. For pyre... . pyre see Acts 27:20. For 
ovre. .. . ovre see Matt. 12:32. For pydé.. . . dddAad see 1 Pet. 5:2. 

As is usual in ancient Greek, xat od (Col. 2:9,19), not ovd€, fol- 
lows affirmative clauses, 


CHAPTER XXXIV. 
INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 


1. The term particle, as Winer well observes (Thayer’s edition, 
p- 856), has neyer been satisfactorily delimited. In one sense all 
adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, interjections are particles. 
They are nearly all originally adverbs. They belong to the de- 
velopment of the sentence from simple to complex. 

2. Intensive particles have usually a very obscure origin. The 
etymology of most of them is unknown, but they are as a rule very 
old. Indeed the New Testament writers do not use them with 
anything like the frequency of the older Greek writers. But when 
the intensive particles are used in the New Testament they deserve 
notice. 

3. The Greeks not simply had fine shades of thought and emo- 
tion, but they preferred to express them in the sentence by the 
particle. In modern languages such distinction and emphasis 
depend upon the voice and manner. Compare a German’s use of 
his hands in speaking and a Frenchman shrugging his shoulders, 
etc. The New Testament Greek is more like the English and 
leaves most of this emotion to be brought out by the reader him- 
self. : 

4. Té (enclitic) is of very doubful etymology (cf. Doric ya, 
Sanskrit gha, and éyav). It is used thirty-three times in the New 
Testament. It usually occurs with some other particle like a\Ada 
ye (1 Cor. 9:2), dpa ye (Matt. 7:20), dpa ye (Acts 8:30), & ye (Gal. 
3:4), ef d& py ye (Matt. 6:1), cad ye (Acts 17:27), Kairor ye (Jo. 4:2), 
pevoovye (Rom. 10:18), prteye (1 Cor. 6:3). In Phil. 3:8 note dddra 
pev ovv ye xa. In itself ye adds nothing to the sense save by way 
-of intensifying the idea of the word or clause. This may be to 
minify as in Jo, 4:2 or to magnify as in Rom, 8:82. 


206 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


5, Ilép (enclitic) is probably a shortening up of epi (cf. perfect) 
and so would have the idea of thoroughly. But others get it from 
mépav. In the New Testament we find it with ds in the Text. Rec. 
of Mk. 15:6, but WH have dropped it. Elsewhere it only occurs 
with the particles dizep (1 Cor. 8:13), edvrep (Heb. 3:14), cirep 
(Rom. 8:9), éradjrep (Lu. 1:1), grep (Jo. 12:43, text of WH, 
mg. imep), xabdrep (Rom. 3:4), xairep (Heb. 12:17), domep (Matt. 
6:2). The idea is uniformly the same. 

6. Ay (surely, therefore, possibly shortened form of 78) is used 
sparingly in the New Testament but in harmony with the ancient 
idiom. The simple form appears five (possibly six, Acts 6 :3 mg. ) 
times and with the same idea each time. See 1 Cor. 6:20, dofacare 
3) tov Ocov ev TH oopate ipov. Once we have 67 rov (Heb. 2:16). 
The passage with 87 wore (Jo. 5:4), has dropped out of the critical 
text. 

7. Tod is of uncertain origin; either the locative of the demon- 
strative rés (on this ground) or the ethical epic dative roé (co? ). 
In the New Testament it does not occur alone, but is found in 
composition. So #ro once (Rom. 6:16) kairo twice (Acts 14:17; 
Heb. 4:3), pevro eight times (as Jo. 4:27), rovyapoty twice (1 Thess. 
4:8; Heb. 12:1), rot three times (Lu. 20:25; 1 Cor. 9:26; Heb. 
13:18). 

8. Me is from epic pyv, older epic and Doric pay. "H ppv 
became 7 pev, and then we. It means surely, of a truth. Me is 
far the most common of the intensive particles in the New Testa- 
ment, but it is nothing like so frequent as in the older Greek. All 
degrees of emphasis are presented by this particle, from the slightest 
emphasis (Acts 17:12) to sharp contrast (Matt. 3:11). The con- 
trast even with 8€ is often very slight and not to be translated. 
The original use by itself still survives in the New Testament as in 
2 Cor. 11:4 («i pév yép) where is no thought of a corresponding 6¢€ 
or dAAd. So Acts 5:41 (of peév ody éxopevovtro). Mevotr is found once 
(Lu. 11:28), pevotvye three times (Rom. 9:20; 10:18; Phil. 3:8), 
pevror eight times (see above). 

9. The aflirmative particle vaé is found over thirty times, simply 
as yes (Matt, 18:51), or meaning verily or yea (Matt. 11:9) in 


INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 207 


contrast with ot (Matt. 5:37), with the article as subject (2 Cor. 
iculeye) 

10. v7 as a strong affirmation with the accusative is found only 
once, Ka? yyuépay droOvyoKw vy THy byerepay xavynow (1 Cor. 15:31). 
Ma. does not occur at alt. 


CHAPTER XXXvV. 
FIGURES OF SPEECH. 


1. These are not as a rule peculiarities of Greek idiom, but be- 
long to the nature of speech and so occur in the New Testament 
as a matter of course. The mind does not work like a machine. 
Speech is merely the expression of thought. Hence it is not strange 
that the lapses, interruptions, and sudden changes in mental pro- 
cesses should be enbalmed in language. They are especially fre- 
quent in popular speech and the language of passion. On both 
grounds the New Testament furnishes numerous examples of 
broken structure. Paul shows much emotion and especially in 
2 Corinthians does his language struggle for expression. One can 
almost hear his heart beat there. 

2. In Reyelation there are grammatical lapses due to various 
reasons. Some are on purpose as in the case of dad 6 ov (Rey. 
1:4) to accent the unchangeableness of God. Note also in the 
same sentence 6 jv. Others are due to the vividness of conception 
in the book as xai 7AOev kal eiAnde (Rev. 5:7). Cf. also Rey. 10:8-10. 
This mixing of tenses is common also in Mark. The use of cases 
without regular accord is found elsewhere, but is more common in 
Revelation. So tis Kawis Ispoveadnp, 7 xataBatvovoa (Rey. 3:12). 
The visions add to the excitement and confusion. Cf. nominative 
and accusative in Rey. 4:1,4. It is possible that the book may have 
been dictated and probably like 2 Peter lacked careful critical 
revision. But these non-literary traits, some of which appear in 
the non-literary papyri, do not prove the author an ignoramus. 

3. Some examples of the leading figures of speech may be given. 
Ellipsis of the copula eat is seen in Matt. 5:3 (jaxdpote of rrwyxol ) 
and of twés before r4v pabyrav (Acts 21.16). Brachylogy is shown 
in xdpts TH Ged Ste Hre SovrAot THs Gpaptias bryxovoare Sé€ (Rom. 6:17). 


FIGURES OF SPEECH. 209 


Zeugma is well illustrated by yada tpas érérica, od Bpdpya (1 Cor. 
3:2). Aposiopesis is found in « éyvws ev tH jyépa tavry Kal od Td 
apos eipnvyv (Lu. 19:42). A good example of anacoluthon appears 
1 Cor. 9:15 (Otdx éypaya 8€ tatra iva otrws yerntar év epot, Kadov ydp 
pot parXov arobavely 7- To Kavynud pov ovdels Kevooan). Paranomasia 
is used in ¢uaey ad’ dv érabev (Heb. 5:8). Annominatio is found 
in pydty epyaLopevors, adrAa mreprepyaLopevovs (2 Thess. 3:11). Pleo- 
nasm is exhibited in js eiyev 76 Ovyarpiov airas (Mk. 7:25). Hy- 
perbaton we see in Heb. 7:4 (@ewpetre ryAtkkos otros 6). There are 
a few poetical quotations in the New Testament as Acts 17:28; 
1 Cor. 15:33; Titus 1:12, and in Heb. (12:13) a hexameter line is 
found in some MSS. but WH read zoveire instead of romoare and 
we lose the hexameter. In Matt. 6:28 prolepsis of the subject is 
found as very often in the New Testament, xatapdOere ta xpiva Tod 
dypov 7s aigavovcw. 

4, Rhythm meant much to the Greek, but it is difficult for us 
always to appreciate (see position of airot, cov, and pov in John 
9:7,10,11). It has been denied that there was any rhythm in the 
New Testament writers. It is not probably to be found according 
to Attic standards, but the later Greek writers in general except the 
Atticists had different tastes in such matters. The New Testament 
writers are not artificial. What rhythm they have is chiefly due 
to passion and exaltation of spirit. So especially in Paul, Hebrews, 
and John. 

5. The New Testament writers do not use the stately periods of 
the Attic orators and historians with their long rolling sentences. 
But sometimes shorter sentences in the New Testament deserve 
the name of period. See Lu. 1:1-4, Heb. 1:1-4, Acts 1:1-3, 
2 Thess. 1:3-10, Eph. 1:3-14. 

6. The words in a Greek sentence were arranged for rhetorical 
effect rather than according to stiff rules (not like Latin). In the 
Greek sentence the most emphatic position was the beginning or 
end of the clause. Cf. 73). . . xetrac (Matt. 3:10) and ov in 1 Cor. 
1:17. The Greek genius was freedom and life. In this was its 
glory, and, when tempered by the Hebrew spirituality, the Greek 


became the best yehicle of the world for the expression of God’s 
14 


210 A SHORT GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT. 


revelation in human speech. The Greek Testament remains the 
treasure of the ages, and should be the vade mecum of the preacher 
that he may come és éxfyvwow Tod pvotypiov Tod Bot, Xpuorod, év d 


a8 , c ‘ a , ‘ , ae 
cicly ravtes of Onoavpot THs Topias Kai yvwoews aroKpvpot. 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


(Books in order of Westcott and Hort.) 


MATTHEW. 

PAGE PAGE 
Me Oecmieiesheisieielalaisistsialsie/eleisiaicitels OU Othe 1) 505,000, LOG. tadent4o 206 
ilgili ise: Goacedaneoon are sisieeies isis NO OP Or US oon. scissors fs ue caterer ate ovehalorerale 110 
Ns LD hrarareie cve¥oie.eisie sso icles Udy OO LOO Mean chalthcy sicko safeiay at rossicyalcjatelle 14, 141 
PEGI ee er airadeyavaveletore «sy efsiers aster erasers Seer oistl Oia ereeka oe ctemicretente 135, 140, 176 
BAK aijarena tera cesvere ueieis "oso\ oi fueheseuere NO AS Sis Gtesneers skorecaia,evats, sretelens erase 119, 166 
mLecHH ear entate siesaletarsene relic lel sais eistoue LOS Stihe wrsteee ayer eres 74, 91, 138, 193 
eNOS arc clei ‘susleisis «Os Sens a ote O eh OO, i SAt -oxts 2 ore.) orelonePa\si ciels| cheicve. senate 106 
is DOs vatetaiw wie eveveuers rer OA ol OGT eared ce ctaroie arepeieiaie es dusietele, siehsisveises 124 
UR DTM cay ais slate avers ie secera avs CSAS ela Oe 4: ice cralslelsisie sl olevsialetelsie(e everstsiieist sis 28 
AD Oe warakel sy sisvexciacete ct exe! ois UP UPL ES. ORR) eo nes Gob abo UOOROOS Ste tlereversis 73 
MDS a voles one a ieiafela erssnvetareteie eo evers NOP -<lgGhs Se nice Shaves atereaveiate cimererene are 149 
Ube idimraytey cers iavencveretere s © eie-"e:e.¢, sep s)'s. 3 TO CASTS, << ccveis is sussetels cusre disteiascetaeua ar 145 
vireo stercteyo¥oie eves olctol6. eis: 6 vis ile} yaks) Chel S Goioaoo sievevetens Several fteralaicesis 112 
PAS) BEG OOR OO OECOE siarstaietstaus DOW 24 TT. AMG) csie si siereresisicie sisie siwisle e-aierars 94 
Dis dence) cietiellet avers Seteveiereiolenehersie MO See ORs al er eararavele clretaieichet are) oucreteieteronstas 195 
DG itewlevetoiereciee soddoc0ooHDODOUS ED ON UB ies caietste o'eleisiere oie obs ove eveleisescers 122 
Oe teeveratsrevere pecmekcrstovers Waxaleveireie WU: 308 ee CKO aisle leuGieiexe.sfeseceye 117 
DID reraies ahey eshatstouaketere ors) oLel suereievevevolers AG Den sO re caieve oreie sverateyeicxsverevave entrees 95 
QBs seiatareraicia relate Oa od pel So eto omnrs women sels siehereia ctelereieieitelsietereret ars 105 
LG Ue cPacetes <lareiele Gis ele eee oleveisletee A he Oy alnsenauae tr Sev eneta ayatarererereveve 70, 118, 120 
PAR IIS) ha, Tad SOOO CIO are spol DU Os Oiveoite oletclorevsteleystevetersreieis . 107, 208 
PABLO", SOG ee Sfakoeists Neve isdie “OOo Pers eiexeleneie srara si eue el nuclensretehatens 107 
PARED A alee HS On tee Son dolls mises, QOSIIgG ogoaosncehoccou 124, 164, 166 
Scull.” caver arevencteveroreve-ato ia e'erc lois Sie SOS aR ES Gc oo odbooDONGOOONOHES 117 
Dia anwer ah ofelovensionesetsneeuewelerateraie Aer Ase Ohl Oly otk cxekar steve eleteicrostarsicielekmiel ete 11, 98 
Bis 5 vais crataererseit iain ister eet ea as TO MEG HOE c/a a clerks tehalees wicis iG ats «. = 105, 116 
SSO! reo avsteratcheretarcr hoarse aveteromiiotoce OS OT asic ctapersteerete ore 138, 140, 148, 191 
Si OPemcisvecekeversieie 25 766 LOS AO Ay SVD se arcisieie ers ci diys sie oldies Aerays 128 
DN HAAIEE civ eV ol avsice cate ay evavereverseererete HAM Pae A, Symmes lig: ser aveksl cies vilelieyesteneliassim = 41, 67, 112 
Soe Om aims stereieveverev's,\6 winverare Siehererstere ace NOP BeBe Ss godadc 78. 101, 117, 169, 194 
Selo) seavooscagoncoo00 TM Al Bes POE GIRPhS AES aoppoete 45, 140, 171, 172 


NTIVINWAWAIANIDWAIATA ADA ANARAAAMRAAAMRAAAAAMRAAAMRAauaIUIaantaAaaaa&a»a&»na 


DRED, Mekaweke cena 102, 148 
Bara eee oie scene 105, 119 
Sie 8 RAS Bare MBE eiretatnte ny: «| 203 
Bsc es eee ee 189 
BG ht eee 36 
87s is SR ee 200, 207 
BS aN ee Vcr eee 119 
89 ed eee Pere eet ee 169 
PO Re ce eer eh ee 132 
ES rycen ee 129 
Lege rd Oya ee ge 70 
REG eee ene ener ec nee ..79 
(RR Aaa hee SAAR Sa 113, 205 
SENS 124, 140, 152, 176, 206 
Biri LEAT LEE REE EE ABE SS 143, 176 
"Reig Nene RE Cee CPA 176 
SES AZ RE SN ONS SAAN ASE Mes 172 
10%, Seeee nthe rene 47, 121 
tg SEEDS A We Cena Re ie 112 
Be ag Seattle 66, 119, 131 
| as a a eae tae 194, 195 
Cie AR Mesa eee ab Sa 152 
it WeRPRAR LA ERERO ARS Ach ES, Ae Be. 80 
CORY SERGEANT ELAN, 85, 148, 189 
Dai AE Fee Renee 112, 181, 185 
Doe thi LAE pets At POE een 105 
TR SSS IA SORE ESD RR 179, 209 
Ba CSAS ARE SAE MS £9) See 104 
DOLLS AO te en ah Die Ean 118 
Aa ean eget ete .. +181, 185 
RPO RSIS Lae LEA aieas) 80, 83 
Re Seth Lake UIT ks We ease 
BL LACAN CARE EAL Aa aa te 112 
VIET Ie Cr ne 95, 179 
Blakes Moshe nits Ramee 189, 194 
Me Da ot ht) Aiea E 82, 170, 191 
ae 8 So 28 ee 83 
orb etek Le eee ...26, 160 
BO RAL p eek s td Ceerneah 205 
Bs cote rae che oo ere ae 85 
ah ee ees Te! SP 76 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


TeOp seteu ants wa" S ers wale oie .. 41, 146 
TED ic nity olereietela ane eater sisistemicie 00 
MSA 2): orateib rata steele never Biele eleva mien aac 
OS ingilsietaicletc an siecle BAO AOR Oe 
SS. a eis ate eis cuvala lees teint ..02, 181 
BEd fe aslccca sees ss abe wie A! 
8:8 5 buskeyen> soessee Eee 79 
Bisti2h cvarciete wists 6 cie.wie sictelacc/sloereeee 27 
Sri S use care ermsie’etetats Streleras fecveried 18 
SiS is a catevaw avers rca nieiete eieiaereteiierae 98 
ISIS. Samoan oeonas cipavee e eteieteee 68 
SisZro \neateres vole atsie ne evaete aoe ong 
Se ZAr sms steactetelarctileps ete Peon 78 
OR SA Gan Be afaicite ete s eiiaicccieleces 156 
Si:25  ecveis.stoie. sigie sis ate ele Came eee 121 
Bed ckce wotetatetldieierstale od eieietersieteletan 121 
Soba esa civ om seis ce ale ste 77 
Bisa a wars isie sisvie elevesece Wiens era cleo 169 
De Be SSSR Oh Rene 83, 120, 178, 179 
Di vers ovsin'e siete wiordinters os see Spee 
9210 5 werereisis ainte Aa ctiatetsre ee a a tafe pel Oe 
Die Te tesa elaretahateruatave arene inte . 83, 178 
DIT vowmentalatelevats ae er Scaeterota' eee 174 
Osta a ectnirs AB Oe se aratate 138 
De we minisiaieleieie ata eats eye Glial cna telat caatenes 
DBAs. tate sis aieieie wrerde ciiclets -103, 141 
OO ais temiataleme ci iots cie aie 103 
9:28 . Kaine niete esatetehonctcte Aa AL. 
DieBO! ehiatale: ale wlalateinrsveistate cies 41, 85 
9:31. anBe 06's Sane ee 
Os 38a co's evoratoielalesinteletn clateve aerator 
LO ei taieiaelaicla aias 5 colie 
LOD aamtete ciate iulateteietevas etuialalale mice 100 
AUD) OSS ere alatetely re alae. 0x0'G accretelelete Maite 97 
OD re etate.<'s o.sts se ee nietatvnee 135, 204 
HOU Se SaaS éwacciergtateretatele tena 149 
UG) ee SRA GSC a's Ciamsapateete 105, 116 
10:16 © ee eereereee Boece cecseces 77 
Oe US Siete id icine avaietee te ittans tei iateee 102 
YH I PS ef SPOR Ss. win arate ete 84 
10; 28. cae a otvanee 81, 143, 197, 198 
LOS 2H -a cols enisrvieslvin unis See 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 213 


LEC EGOS Ee ew EC REE eee 66, 113 
ibe Ae Perey MEE ier 96, 135, 203 
RSAC ees taatee tts: 119, 135 
Ge ANS OR Uwe age e 85, 116 
BO RVC ME ee ne fe 169 
i Ope ORD ont 5 irons ea eee 202 
2 SoS Pg nen de 195 
(os al 6 Bea), a Nea to Tt 123 
1D abe We, bres, Sone ae et 187 
iS Ris Peas NI ee ne 206 
CED yrecp aye hia eee ee 180 
51.620 yl er oo Oe ee eR 27, 104 
RAE eee Socket ee 41 
350" 2 Re ei erg ree ere 37, 142 
BESO oe ares coin eae: 163, 180 
ie cet his ca anck 117, 172 
(50h i) Seen eee 77, 92 
MSI Stee e sss 555530 84, 96, 118, 131 
MP AMON or 555 32 soo bes esis 17, 107 
(Ciel ene RIE eR eRe ere 196 
PROM MNS Bose stows 179 
MAMA ys vga xionanccose ocak 41 
{Capi ieee a 38, 143 
a oatadaannncs ost 120 
LDU, OARS o= Bei ee 79 
1227 Ae | pares 161, 162 
BZBIR GPE ns 138, 149, 162 
5 GL G21 eile Na we 101 
A ee oe te i Get 204 
BEI cin se RE kana t 148 
BE AGEs ie aheewia cae cs ate 70 
EAMES Caio eierciens aE OR ae r 120 
BFAD shock: Uapee ic a: 22 
ji a ae en Beers 3 ee oe 28 
1 Boa ep ae ee: es hh aes 72 
| ot a eae Peete nate ees. 81 
5 oe el aes bee oe alee Sa 37 
SPOON tei o eee 111, 116, 203 
[250 ee spat setae 155 
ES G2 ee h amen nenes 171 
Fi 5 Tae ae aA 105, 117 
1.35 SS a a eee wo 98 


MeDea Grinch rope tevorors leks ts voterorenc reivicus, sin esi 63 
MSZ Glee ar. ete wke setae cielo te <vie oieser tee 145 
sD Gt le Sorta aa OCCeT ACoe 177, 206 
LSS De of waxcievei Li eiclessiossieicioecegevel ors: tre 18 
Oe) GGA DE OORACAT SIRE Oe 103 
SLA FU SSier ettagece\obeuetenoysieheeueieaciseeterat veto 106 
Ue RICO IORI IORI IC PGS 22 
RSLS Mr srasSeacrsietes-qoperore\oacioseneved stove Ces 69 
2 rewaiaderd sce eaters £715, 18650192 
af APs Oi 55 se uchie¥eteihe iokohoss ie te veksnayeps'iews s5e5e 107 
Serer ences Coeckelexshsiovevelecoucusisisiercas 103 
Ase rem ea cicleeiete esis eae eels 109, 196 
IES - Gives acas tenonesercuceisuouevovebste tore oyster OS: 
MPLA avg cyoucisasusksisicusscxcisteasaesocerr eile 118 
PDS way creyarevcsscievewisiseacieieies creas 81 
1 ORR 3 Se ONO AC CRRCELEION 36, 117 
DE LEN reT aay ee ancvelcl casas eveusvekelensheTapcheie 112 
DS Orib tek syavehe ate wie wins eae o oate siete 105 
TES ORAS ES" RRC GPO CAG OOCICIOC 176, 180 
WDGOL fou she ciovaialeiers die.e Ae leisieiels 84, 91 
nia) Ears ens SO COW ROOT OAD OO 74 
NGG Ar re ene 22, 102 
AGS Lad: Stace ere oi eres iy Ge orex ct haat aa ters 203 
USSG Bossa ae OS ope scones 73 
UGS se wiajsterccte ois siete erevsia islets tote 72, 90 
UG L OF aa 2 eicic cies cls cv eislo ee 2 clears 146 
HN Gin Beacctan tore nensiieieseie eps 26, 143, 203 
HG Week aes ele me ca Sie SY 
GAG ice iciss eceveteyexs oles deveveiens oieet =v 96 
GLA seg clare vie oo ore/bieceis Sele sole LZ SESE 
SE UiclO ys Fae AowsicnshoveveievesoachaleiejekeveyeterersTore 180 
Ges ar Genctstomactercrtericrbolcreee iclensyohaes 11 
MTHS Tie cesvsastevarehelaucietensnerehcuscoe erehelare 178 
WUSZON sate ac eeclass area tek els 
ISI as sa ote leke vies Cioteie esteleists ‘erste 27 
ESSA recs Ses Wotiscrskoletese toheqase lelecue wets ee 82 
US Gras pasate tPatelorststenegciucretkeseisic cis, 153 
USS Meese were eicatere cisls oe 113, 188 
sls cn deve iaie totems takatsiepeio's slo wicteye ck 112 
Sis Silce ecttels cote o ocal s EOC ICC 164 
PS FaL Ad aso totet Sec eer oietay of wal chcccie revere 164 
SILO wen otere ieieireionereieiem ie rererelorereele 81 


214 

UG e hice sons a's a wpe naa Siem ates 73 
FLINCH et chin aisisto enews canto icles 148, 186 
US CAO. el ets al vis cimacininel ciaeeiice 112 
NORG % cs nce s ose ween etnies slave 149 
HO eink, Fore ena ei neteleterete seve imtace 189, 201 
tt a Bes PES Sry sero Ome aS 71 
ORDA scrote le aN Adacsade 183, 198 
LQ Dr tate las wovlaleie a tare teeta le seus eats 196 
ORS: a. Ustnstarcreteivielatersjoisiatsrstorsm sre 189 
PAN BS OST O OU GOO SOOO Ror 66 
DO iret wien ess ASO. slates ee folenete 94 
OB voarers ois lise steleretele isis levevstsie/e ee 94 
BOM ccc swe dies ete steven fo ie orsiaiste Oe 
74 16 PP aos otn Se Mo Steee ee mer .-109 
DOA. ce aie sielsssie cic) evere wicieseeievevenets 158 
PSO eeeerestetcte ra ae etatetereie SAAC 107 
QO SZU Ne. ole saya wrote, stones o ste Citete meter 84 
QO AB Sv eselelsieserasinieieys sere 58, 102, 119 
BOLSO Pew scis wisiewsicteisssie wee siceetels 98 
AUS BG ab OSOF SOS DEO Soot 154 
SS Sires Orem sieciewine culenisteta ce 24 
Cte or atefetele otelnioversiare wicustereiarercerke 117 
Ls BP -vevovs tausvece ieuslevetavsustererehe 24, 63, 80 
ENS NY oats ets aletaral eta) alclets wie eet ore otek 72 
LR OLE 6 dover ccieietereereisinlaneceismeccysiets 170 
UL 2e ite seis oiate, eroistolaia severe telerers 149, 189 
Oe DS Vethorae witvcvsiarelcte sre stetere siete eters 95 
LSU a eisietate witha eiccinie mes kickers 122 
Die SIL) 6% cvatcusorealaic se pretiin s eeew iene 83 
DHS Die sdistecsicitrocsfettkerstore aretererecsesveus 189 
DBS. o¥- eras ate Sissel tiete oe aie we eines 196 
De OT ey a's is-acoy ore so Bie retavere re nie etait 96 
VOB. ip tie este ara wete nimieien eo ete iets 179 
CLR 7 wore bsstave'stersleiemintate 38, 120, 143 
CUBA Go. Ny otcie/eicisselesin soles ete eens 95 
Lies Gpnst ss isie's ale cide «pute clare ere athe 60 
Deka ete asle.w bix's'a aie a's cee eareens Se 138 
PASH SSS GR ACTA PA ch as See 154 
Doll ee Peers ais ciie aik ance arb ete 83 
BD AGIDs wie hese rata ite tetote brea 129, 141, 162 
PID es stg ccoterslase te minvetsterehereie 20, 102, 109 
PO LOOP wa vase Vekiote a ets Rtn ee een are 163 


. 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


D529) ci caes cee eee ee 110 
5 EE 5 SN Meme eg rey 131 
DB eB d (ose Page Sok 22 
S335) i... we can shanan eee 102 
23-37 .. ash ber eee ees eS euee ees 
7 a ee eh pi 203 
DESL eta Aes te oie eee 179 
PAST 0 ost tea’ «ves eee ee 85 
SRO)” 8 TS shee eee eee 100 
2 Ty nee tabs a tan eee 67 
DADA Soca ate core Coe e eee 154 
ORG pe nt eee ..108, 173 
PASSB .. aman eae ee eae Bee 
Ba BOS. sais cistets <ctsteee enema Rai lyf 
EI ISTOEYY i aphenga oe et . 84 
D448) 5. ach es cakes Cae 163 
PLAST au pee cee So Necsee Sou08 
DE bOnt?. ak Gs en ee nee eee .81 
SO ILC Tare 2s, eee eee 138, 141 
PoC (aici Cee 77, 100 
DES <, .ccoceee Pe hy oy. 140 
2559. 3 eae Re 55 Seer: 200, 203 
Ob 1Ghi dann pec eeniae ste ere 41 
OPIN Soh oer eee cake see ee 145, 198 
LO lg RR per pel ie 145, 198 
DEH Linco as vanteee ee eee 3180 
PLT, Venreee eg ts rr 104 
A580 sy cns ue toc eee Sree 46 
25838) i) Ciicceoes eee sa teres 
BEAD nas see eee Os) 
DGB. beac d ed eee eee nee ty ae 72 
BELO, tena cee SO Prac ee pauses 103 
SIO, ae ec cette ter saehaceee 148 
SEE Bhar pean visa hae 76, 81, 98, 140 
DOOD ise ss 04s faces cee 85 
[LE REE er 108, 120 
CS, ae ese ys - .162, 202 
DG738 |... 4G chee ee eee 162 
DOISS. ..cnacveneh pene keen ane 203 
26:42 . schaeukeesaeemeneene 167 
26:48. .6 ons Oeome ene 146 
26:50... cnvatenwecteene sae 84, 17 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 215 


Di Gite eee ict desea NUN CUS Aan eat ee 141 
GR Sere eget ck se 5ar FAS Oy CER igs Sy ee ee ee 140 
DGc anwar ak ADTRAN, ap OAs? oh enemas oe 73 
TERS BPN i ee TT ot2y Pe A aa rahe ean ee 73 
cI OLR an 6 slot ea ABHOR Adie eine ea eee es 123 
CL an a ee 5p ip ee ISS OT AGE re aac oe aes 20, 76, 92 
SGI eee ee ae Rarer UG ALY (ARN PR inet ass Ae 131, 143 
DN MeN EIS OG aici: «cele 103 a OTGOL 5 Mateos oh ce eee ts . 72, 73 
Cyl -onie eee ee Ramp) sll sfonde. Po ent eee sere 116 
Dip eem ee se avs tio nia HO Meets llren an We uree em cnee 28, 117 
Goo oh eee aa Sane Sr geht) a eee ee ens 102 
DTA RAL. 78, 129, 131, 135, 143 
MARK. 

Da Den caste ae: E Ssictenies aan Pee SOM See sees Renta coe 102 
TANS, ee a LODZ OSs ene cute ee eae 82 
ity {RS ee HQ9 4 Oncor me mm aac eae 176 
Tio Seer ee Move Ve ee Ole kee ete oe con aes 105 
LO) c 9 Cate en oe LOO pea Sie eects ete ao end eee 155 
AMORA ENG Ne ec aates LOG ebOIe GAC BRU ays Noe eRe costa tS 141 
TSS gale een ee eam ae NORA NO se aan a Ray a: 45, 145 
SloTile, eee ache) aaa 174 5:4..72, 110, 119, 124, 145, 160, 192 
“Lily 2 “5S a este Sr aan ee MTS occa Nase sea eae cima can eet 119 
TLaTIG) NPS ee TANS) a2 Glad Bie Shed sak aero es oe 141 
eT es ee ee arena TT a 30H 2 Re ne ioe 185, 194 
LTE a ee Te ia ty Or lag aleen Lars aera ears 145, 179 
ADA pies eae RA MES GATOR amills oo Stns wanes cies 73.81 
SONA BS os Ge i ea a ABO OK darn t. Mee er wen eee See esta 12 
MAA ye MRR Re nse sie a whsps S ctote BO Reaty Oot west acs Shc cares 154 
DT aig aaah tere se aap ones Me TUT) FSS, Rn A Be ie. Ca ee 21, 92 
LSU SRS Rs ee ee TRS D ESO, cee he mcr Ere 139 
DGS eee eee LUBE gyeddnees, Cheer eae eas 77, 92 
DEMS SERA oa cistes 5 x47uc ae I SBe gh doce Soe Tua eane Scot neuen en 139 
SIG) Pee Te ee R72 ATAY epee 8 ease Sree eee 192 
ISDS le AAs lel a a 168) “Osa cae eee eR tess Pe 76 
CIDA CE Need ie Ps Se TARY Coke aoe Sees tices Peet 26 
OBS 2 Gates, LV Re erate 5 1558 6G ee eet eee es coe ts 186 
Lp NR MORE LRT Outs SN TOWGs Ite een toe aes 105, 117 
Ee as. ancl te a ay aa TS PACER (eae a Ps Se eames 
Belle foc an, 8) ds eee aes ASW ROTOR tro nee, boys ae 110 
idee tee ch ee a ae FAT, SIs ge SR ea ee 107 
FOLD 5 a eae a eae Re AEs SEE SCD, Si ee eer 26 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 


GBs2Br ees ak sono bo siiale a c,> sib tis lore 197 
Gaerne & 5c ooo e te o se cheats 177 
Grns Ge oka costs Std -onielats 84, 178 
GrSouc i sts take Sees ok bee Sein 191 
Grau. 6s Sch ae heehee aaee em 91 
GLAD 5. sisreroqbatelatatoteteteteleteds’etets neve 171 
Gr48 yh Ge nces eck wicte eters 113, 172 
Gade Ses nad Ad ectsichdie sold sisiees 123 
6256.7 c2cc he asen ees 128, 169, 175 
LS ohne sat onaidal late Net icl schekdvewlale tiers 74 
REL: § reve cicndicl diddidicleites.e 64, 196 
Vi De alateloare ais staiaracte eigicte wicioier 200 
M2 asians es sie eee ie retateielti ere sualane 209 
CIOL dete es teats eiezs «Topeasin eisteccsetiets 98 
VEO oy eta es wees bbe ce avelee tinted 27 
Sti sees taeaes e wisie are Mies Ruse ieee 36 
Sr) ce isd sce oacee ta cle espe bie 166 
SH ca cut hees ease cckeree beats 153 
Sr280. sh s us cceaba scan Dees 181 
Broa este acs chad ties tosis scareteiee’ 169 
ONES tar ctatateletatehatate tatet stone te’etelole O's 169 
SSS del have eyctet otha Sse sehotaiaie ts siete 6.0 tay 42 
SSGr 53 o7.00 cece cease ace wens 96 
Qn GBs iroticc wretch teetestoestete 181, 185 
EH tre Wy srchiete<atata tats tote lehatefotete eta letetniais 102 
DO are a.2 5 cae ae esis-artiovse 152, 202 
LEE RATER Renee PRR ree et 83, 178 
Des 6.63 dda Fai eideilea qe dels ess 112 
Qe 20 ese sera vias ded seichecuamid side are 112 
Deno t tare toe talalatatate a lnte eis feletate tein si n.s 36 
aS a hace ddaddsdeadedcdcesas val 
Da DBF) watctekatatel olatetctetatalebeteicte’s 41, 178 
DE LOY. & xed oto Hoidutomet etic selee eee 83 
DESO screw srreecdecsdccemeepe 153 
DISD & di bo ord bide ob siviche’ did Soe ninth’ ieic 168 
DRED ae pid odd civic slatste dtemeters 124 
DAL or Fetal ohate’votet cia! atsiol el eluate otavials 96 
542s Shariah beahhnuk se sa aets 122 
DAF ia tatctat dial ataliataale' e'e'p n'a oretatele a ioe 59 
LOB LS de: pasta atelaitnsetatelaietve nislsin da 112 
LOU sa: ruis*n'ataahalatntetatate atatatslatatacd ase 83 
LOSS -c wisunp ORS a NOS bee 59, 178 


TORO Cees afonelels sioism ie eisterast ae 
1030) sera tt eee -- +122, 164 
LOTS see ee 288A eee 131 
TOD cone merece Sciaee ever acer 85 
10:38 . Stole Sia wi eels etelete erareaT 
1OS407 3s Ye sinte clnicreroiers eta 
TORADMs 6s Reet ees oe eich eects 103 
OAS ARE a see oie See eran ere ee oalod 
NOSAS Fis Shere acme cree orcioraevete 110 
ORDERS Se SE eee oreaete ate ert 118 
DM Ae ro Ae Se een 45, 157 
ad br A Ney share Sei iets eiatetomere eaters 128 
ADO, eve cree al ouriuieiateleietsieker terete 14 
DS es ioe Sit iosats Sian oases ichepenetetoe eran 101 
PTB Rated we dickens aareieete 141 
DY 2Aa ecm alc valstoaniea oe etele 138 
TODS hassle evict oe eros 121, 173 
LESS Bote ot i clatavensis televolete revs tonetonens 84 
a La Ds 1 Eee ee Re Raa ahs ey 2 - 112 
Misi IITA oF. vote tava rete lots tora tone tae 35 
TOA: 6. ace eel peso eeer 200 
TOA Sees he Se eee lence 177 
Lei Te Sc betatectoletotetcresccater terete 72, 101 
WAS hE Sih A sca 183, 191, 200 
Dena Hie craters terra aleretatactnee eine 203 
Una! ie Sadie of cxeieis ete tte nls eet 73 
ATG Na, ote vorrei biota ieee eee 141 
LG 8 ae AE rte bac 0 2, © 44, 132 
LOSLOV AES RNR eee 108, 120 
DD eA O Ns git.t oases dee eee ees 82 
AZ 220 8+ Corcidd etalon eee a wie 119 
LISSO NS SARS ee eek rs 172 
ISSO WS Fee neces. Dede nitgee eo 152 
tL ras Baer eee five Secenreere .152, 203 
if. ry OSA ard mene Jdsawete 178 
LEED BF Peetu iivore cee ee 202 
SOE) +k Sahel aiataa tp 6k ee 154 
AES 8 tt te ee 170, 186 
AE SED «.! AG rater mete 28, 116, 202 
TSA 1F +. tuiveteteteetatets sah atte ake 108 
LEED) *,'telc'eis elute ae itera tate eet eee 202 
14285 Mosier a harneie ates Pit 203 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 7 


PE DGE Ay cis ctersevetetersiereaiepase eee se. OU Alife er ee etcsa renovate eros ierere’ eke lons)s 141 
OES ararestie cheteelele tel ole ie-s <1 aher-c PAD be ling? beers omni icant 84, 179 
12 la ga ae eA Q058 15-6 fees esas sensei 141, 206 
ASO A rovcishcholevctete rele eierealatanedave Dae NO Ocracoke dyed ereasrere 81, 117 
AR SOL se Sac erie ears si cis Sere eals Eieyoree or ehh Sa Ace. a eae eae 95 
ARAM ERS Rey etn sce Sineie eee ere ers GB  dIReBs snd diaco rit cade aOOCC 141 
ete 5 as ddcusucadedodduouno a pe a Sa 2 Sa na eer aa 83, 85, 178 
ANA A reareds oie aie iate exerssara ei oiere. rsuel-s MAGS AZO E ee ortaatat Net clstel ato acterrrisves 180 
ATA farceret crave tere Were ie csi aus oie ce, diss) llbgee! . Gocbocecbbooupoent 145, 166 
IES oS ODE HOG GDOG DCO AtC LA ye Acieaed Versio ie iuas oreo ecintoere eo etoheiatere 179 
WARGO chine siolee cies sisie se so e.0'5 slo's MS Meal Gi Durem era ccs wrehec chersieys levers skal sic 28, 146 
LUKE. 
ble eects ciate SEAnDC Hadscesa ears 159 2:14. sievorale: siecere Madhernaes bode 
gS)! Gatn GetInG DOD GOD OE OMIT IPAS 2816 SRS sir ichniricreiceacriicockoa 85 
TLOG SS Go SerticiG Dicha CIP I RCre RoI N aRCE IES SORE = Did Garages ecsterars teers eres noite iors 147 
Mi Guia Wasi ol ct sdk sessed Sabet (SA ONG OHV Saco dadac deacon on Ocans 81 
11g! he. ee PUP IABAL F290G Le ss Sa aeesalsscadsaccones 98 
TBO) ee GOGO OOO CIGC Oro a oIron USO OR OTS so pete ralatcit tele daicvestae 97, 102 
WIE ea lave cise soe a ticle Bae eieiesleros PDO Qi BOs atelotatcleiclatelelsucisietetaieste 100, 105 
mPbsSL Der as/e 5 are aaicorh a ced eos tale UNG HL SBieie 3-tiens hace coe Seren gee 107 
HF DO Pate ses <fetete) ofsielsietstere ts! ede BG) s Peet OL oo einoadopomdabcc once nc 107 
HN SOME sare Srarave co.5°5 4 erbceis Seid So 8.3 MATES DAGS Sore soos sie 8 tis sie ie eremaieetio 98 
MDP eee tat tatale¥arstetatetsveletsts More ISMEA S G scr AO) sat bacsstetstacichstorotal oratcieton 12, 139 
iL ob petaahattatctele TAG AG IOUTS: “Hed 2 boca terete 83, 178, 179 
MOG oF) See dada 62-38 .508 2 S-0%.00e6 DON Shapers sich haves ordre el oreo ara oer ale 83 
LEE os: SASSER RCI AIc COO CIS OSHS Ak aac ele eles ciate wie soto A Ae 121 
ESO) co teriete Shasatatalovotototeteteltoletsrc POMS e, LOTR SAAT hekstet satel awl lets ctaters 131, 178 
DATO Sy rat ah otal otal atefstels} of'ct als LOR SADR ee sae es MO tE Ss tps. o bes 4. 5c 186 
DE Onde tet otat al ccslatel etal elctetel avelcters ies AS Gest eres sae as Sine ayeiit ae arava 106 
7 SCD ee ee ee G5tc190" 2NEEE Sola dss shoe sues saeeie 185 
WIG OR Ai alle ciatolelstetotals! <fobetelel cts SUA sss aS eR eR IE hn acne 203 
Us G6teaccwasscnsanss hs aesd eed: dU a Sets alee Waar RRO Ae errr ait ie tentes 162 
Ms TOS sis 5.3 ale is.cie5ia.0e 68.018 3s be QOU TL ALGOMA acre! tater olsteteratcholsintoleters alae 145 
0 ORC SERIO CEE CID DIDI OOo InICne gt Ee oe Sa eee irec a aiioicic 1654165174 
Ges (5 sais deces PS1Se ELSES SS o's GON. AtshAe 5 sk Sa eve tists tise ae ais oe 121 
7 AOS: Ssaees Saha he SAS AP Rides a seston tote teatoteterers e's aa 116 
DAS 15.) Solalototaletolatelatetetstelatatads SHITE OOY ARO De Son t hettattatclalatcl sfcte‘stcte!<!cte 70, 79 
QDs assvadicaasese eiiio dies BSOb As 23. sts ade SOA ned eee css eee ses 197 
QT si sssaadesadadseassddess le MD ae D8s ee Fs sis Sa Aaa aos 2 disereddeis.s 196 
Di Swed 4.600 s00.48ebd0b8 5434 5 08 cles 1 ey: C0 Oe ae 146, 155, 191 
Beha vesasedssss OCS RC UCICHES IO IGIGICRC AMR A BAe Se 5. 35, Sierd farsi cicechis causes exe) © 179f 


218 


COMO OODWNWIAININAINAINANAINANNMAAANARAAARADAAAAAIarAIAIaaa&aaaa»n se 


rh Reais ree ee aaa epider 63 
Li A ie are meri, 189 
Eee hi sin kaon seen eee 194 
Fag Ramet, fein en 81 
CL ep ee ae Se rary 71, 112 
EA aE eer Cn UNL ge 105 
TT. Seis otek te eee 146, 148 
AD etre ve dee ete 67, 100, 117 
BD J Lickin ess nen eee wae 
Bsa ret ite eee At wey 80 
a LOO ae oe 145 
BOI Sete nee ee Seana 145 
BOL le seat 97, 194 
Be Nee, Dae ane Sete ec, 148, 185 
BAAR oe ih en see A Ne 173 
Bee Seats ets aD 78 
agi a Ore, ce eee 107 
BOL hs A kot ace ee 44, 185 
1S! & eee een a ee es 70 
cL A ee cy a ee 70 
IA SRR Seem eae 149 
TER RE A A De aera 116 
BB ks Nate teenie een 95 
BAS) a onig koraci eee 152 
SulheeG cet ces reaoe te eee 25848 
3 ee ea Re ee CE 132 
Cane a ee 45, 121, 154, 198 
Bs Sek area ea eaten cee .173 
ee eae cis enanieee Roe 170 
Bticiia teeta eee sen E 82 
es as a aes et es 113, 123 
1D Sarat ata cuate eat n Maan 83 
OY IPA eat AR ESA 170 
ea sent a AS NM: ..108, 110 
Bokeh 2c fonts on eee 163, 178 
Bene ohn ak 123 
Ee aN 81, 82, 151 
Crea ec ctsves soe deer ene 121 
ea ees eee aye 
AS 2 ese eee Ree err ata ace aey 59 
15 nh ag eaeenae te fegtae 170 
BOG Sines chaueeeantnnetearees 47 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


Res Taye Aeteereeete 112, 156, 178, 179 
Bi 26r ovo 2 ve estes eee ak lye 
CY GaN me artAarce irri occ. 109 
B29 aac eee ee ere 24, 109, 146 
Eb) eR REE TORI OOIO ION Ta 50 
BiB Oc Lye iaete wade erates eohacaeetone etene 121 
Bet x. Mac eae serra se nae 184 
OTE UN etin'ete cracls s teem 85 
OR Ih Pe ete Gra po Os och < 164 
ial Bis cis aks ele eis ois Cee te 189, 190, 192 
Pd GeO OOROOST OOS ao) 172 
Dr AGie lero sietclerateislereteerase 131, 165, 185 
G50) fale bre wisiesese steele ovefetemenetetees 170 
Oe Dain die nicis wterstem neta aly foyy aK 
Di GAT se ots ateveeiersje estate ete 64, 131 
9356 io Wiiars s:ccas s oiae sic eee eee 85 
OF Se sk rave sais (eterno etic de ere eters 118 
UL eS RAGE EEO Arr 70 
AOERD Shee cess Ueto alas 
LO SLT: cue. jcierepene cit state ere 148 
nb ARCO Da cD oaGa Aaa - 195 
LORLS Sve halonie-s mice beeen 68 
OS 26 ache wae te cieisiei teres eter iers 179 
OSS: ¥en Berto ts lsioican e's career ern 132 
NOSSO fob ieree Sak cele cites e eens 106 
TO co Te em cles ueye/Sinyerb aero pne ieee 119 
TOSS Laces casrecieceiesle meres 103 
LOGO Be 7 vccictesrerroo eae 31, 82, 183 
TNE SG oacse ate Bicieis ee ple eit eee 96 
LOS O oe cretcieraia miele ote heiie tenet 122, 182 
NO 42 becoeiricisieicrntete siete eine otatete 169 
THER Aadaggse eictate Rintein cin sto stots 170 
iL Nie iataeatevereeatersyeteyeiave. cus teteremacieuare 199 
UB UG) OS CR SBC CROCE roc. 121 
ib TO DE OSC Rhus ies Src 80 
1 AE ECR ces Ooo F505 Lee 173 
ih) BAR R49 Otto ro Se 102 
ab C1. BAe ry ee eho ee 206 
OS wis, wxcjaieletaiaete hniainiteieeanan 124 
SL's BA, chesecateiaconn einieleieiereieneeeerets Lis 
LU BB. steve atarecai cee nieces teres 202 
LESS o.,- he eeoeteiate mt ieiininn alae 22 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 219 


TRIG 4 fee es een ile SD See ee eee 109 
Oeste 2 Le Oe acc Gen Were ae Oe ny ene ee 30 
[se ae ee BITAOS $15: twas Pee ae toate ese 146 
deny heer eke 3s 5 Sa: ASD ISG: 15 Oey erotz sede see 182 
SC: ee AAZRIGO —15 OOM ose core cae eee 94, 112 
OOS Scene Jateaicies cle ets 120 a. MIGEMN eta s cerieahs tae 160, 197 
Cs eae ere ie Tite se ka (cy Ve Ree ea ae ee 178 
TEE Rosas soi ih xe eee PONG Oe 8 leone ce rk 95, 148, 194 
ADP ODE OEE «We ts ve Gaeeads Iie STS) did (ee Se oe nee aN Ree RB 139 
122255 oe Ba Saat fees TI0Y See 8 Eels eee ene ae 28, 101, 124 
(DEE eae ae Serene ers Go eG lOve ta eupetcr eens. kss QT, 74 
(DES ee ene Sct aisleans « 7a Gee (cd ae ee 83 
ADE SOs ad Soe ee LOGE MAO STDs aise ranean Petes 23, 85, 102 
AD SS Io sce.. Re cena ear one GT UG S20 nol evies baie eaeteces .41, 146 
MORAN A OS Melee oat itr TGS HAG 204 phen eaices ap SOO 77, 100 
OR a eee ee ene ap one erate GGt PG Soo Ae inate ace Sr nee 46 
HOA OR Rive ot cals sic Search oea BC 1Ge2O reeset eee 117, 145 
TOAD. 25s a ee eee Covent heel ol 7 eae een Sere ene A 189 
SEES, a aa FTO de Dies Sac ahbrcheah Speers eet: 122 
MOR SIMS a lars safaioieaitaaatiow soe PAGE TG ate Nees oe ser 141, 163, 165 
(WEG Reece oer Sleeve LOOK IBIS Pet ennhuaen aise Sees 37, 46, 142 
BES eo Saas ee eee VARIGT. SAIN ae gsc ah oe 141 
AMEE Mere Starved eee ans 173° GUPALL tose aderd Pt0TaS 119 
DO e ies duds wusoueensa te ii en | oy ae ne ee eh et 202 
EO MRE RRR Ce oa SU STO UTOL ns. eke eset utes vel 102, 116 
Aes CRIS cS Saas dooce: EY eae y(cy eee ee ee ca 141, 171 
Hee1D es phe hs Me ray ts Math ret 17RD SN ae eee OM petra (i 
GO ie a Ue ERI GG SE Too iS ee Leia coal Ne 169 
Meee OFy aig Tele ant ht eases Sa 173 18:1. aes ee ae oe 190 
AOC tere a ataue Vie soa wiciae ne AOA RIB Mids fho tees ewe Ss 167, 202 
LOS ee ee Ss ah bt eee et ean .183 
HOB IG WSs cist ota hcdee des rhe (Oral Seer Seer er ..107, 204 
DAES eden eee eee 79 “aS Osa yo Saetlas spin 12 
en eee hE eee ee Lt WASSIT ce Aner at ee eres 123 
MARE eee ee lan Se hs Gee’. MFR IAG: SAB AG.2 Mots eae sae oe oy 100, 141 
PESISY) Tec ree hate pan CEG. PASO. AR EMpa cen sisenciits tae a: 70 
ET Re a Re or Ce ee 105) US:1RC tah ee: A Leer ree 81 
pp) eee Be aetna eeu oe (ea CEC SRG os a eee ee 112 
BASSO Ss ccasiaran Bea te oi PONIES 3G feo ih Me sctcre UH. lee 185 
Tet ORO EE ket See RE ad Sea ees SNe ROE ET 79 


220 INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


LEFT cati ce vase sara elavereiets ic tarsi fetets ois’ of gee: Se AA AS A 141, 182, 186 
MS hen te iarase ovars dha’ steeper ee Way DBS OT. eS ees ieee Pieew bene ee 71 
ROD eh Bias tore Rese bik bie ae gs)! ey 7 4: be eS © (ete 246, 49 
cf 1 Ce er Te nse eC, Oi SBMA ete aiesade 120, 166, 198 
OSV ciccctere crete oatetlatale BOS TAG) Stes? BS a tae Pea ea eee 122 
a2 pa be DPR ers 8 5 od gy 5 TO, DTS BAO ie wisn winta is elatot stale otate atalete wale 34 
POUT. vers ettalam teresa aeeea a 132, S20  -25508 o scat nance seat eee 180 
LDS. PS ane eee a eae hae So) (S512. 2: Soot t eae eer nee oe 141, 195 
1920) 5, cccaeeenneeakRe serene se SD SLO tia volale shctat let etathatl Aatecte 110, 113 
1921. 33. Sus.cavaaanoas Fat ods Ge 5S: DELLS ve wrcterororeveteretetaptebethebicete ate 110 
UM: ABES wee elo cls cle hae Mae Fe lvoe 166) 9 2519 ea cer broveratoVale lnfote feta tain aa 139 
WDEAO conten cewek 30,146, 262) ZBL Ss cssaseecuadasidsseuyen 131 
a ec RR ere ee SALA ERARE A Cede DODGE {ZB edak toil oa hetokarorererateteloleleveteteta lever eels 69 
SO CALES  claiciscelsia 8 stele, vs wistate aie ETO” | ZBI O cy vsisteteclcvetctotet toler taker ko eater 59 
TRATES bcc ks eeanees rete saat GW LEDS: tar \oretaye cralvicletol oes hebeloreteras 203 
TOWAG. Moyrcteves tote toretare cena eleree cee arom BD OSA tos fevereioks eltarelceetl eres ive ebaetata 98 
QUA SEES eases nase te nec a Sao: os ee rrr rer irk ey a ee 26, 107 
BOG Sere hoe es PRION ARE DAS, ESS EE orn intc oral aatelct cit acteone 148, 185 
PAD Oras, volaiars tae ere larerers a talaveis ae’ 15D. DEO, a. cas otras) hee aaa 149, 184 
r4U nib) SRSA AS tas Toa 135, 92° 24310" 2) occ cewcweweneeaen oeite 100 
QU A cke tA aAAAT AG Ae AIM AAG ware SESS we wietlceiloche ake mentee tae 112 
PAPUAN 758 <a ete vadebuls inte ra veletolevetewatee¥orate tb. DLAC A roo eea tree as aaa 105, 189 
DUA Havin iscsi Rima alee totetekeintetaiaes OG: -2esieeieces omecet srhend .119, 139 
ZOFAONA, cys eeca en ee eeicGe stents DOO!) SEAS) cp stan inc thus Reka oie i e euG 
QUST s Mtoe teed cate od Ad eee eats 10)  2ESLO pesca chs echnkh chi mernen 63 
CS Soro icra ante aclettie cera neeeebte aie Ae 0 crak eae a 152, 178, 179 
DSL O Tila icecleselotaatewice rah lee states AS, ea os cietwke etek Sicreeicmters 183 
DOA Se Ricaea eh ee eek Reese Te 2H cis eee eRe eS Eee 175 
DEPOD ae adie dan cea eo aae Cade s 72, 200 DEA. cicecs knw gesneeeunene 78 
PEA: SOE ee ses tere TA; 13%, 182,486: 2826... .ckc dances ee make 141 
DNs Sait as orev die sl anten see 105; O40, . 288300, sc saeceonamadaeadene te 190 
DOD 2! Boca clatdstore) Wa eacateiade.s 1S BAB ee Se ones ae eae ee vie wee 78 
BOLL si 6% eo se auaeiak eet ee hus 5 d169S “SARtO Mere ee Lee ea ae eek cs i chee 20 . 
BOP. nese wee meee ae BOE ne 102 S24 Pe hoes as oo she ce O 119 
SLE aie 'nina a) t'elalalela’e slaimiaete Po LGM PEPER ONS Gyn: Gla,'w Gis: wim wis te akarareeites 192 
BEOLeL Ss puss Sk pus obs Sone Re Oleee Abi ee on a pg dpa sia mts 119 
SRR Bess i), 131, 141, 182, 186 
JOHN. 

5 i oP Ney. AL yarn te (Fee 028 a Ls i RP sac eau ewe RieO 
1: SP Pee ET oy Perey hed ee HG UTD. so ae inlet ee ine eae 71 
TS y fiox icc oer en G4: B94 ic cages comes 13, 67, 102 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


FW Giie dco are aire ole, c)6 oiare/s o.a%s else overs 16 
DSi G nos Spsiousi eis lamas tellavereieceial stave 119 
AT Qe cupatacteuetanahoue neveeeusieveieralaierese Salen 
MLO ois aiskelevareveioielerorclele:s .-167, 202 
TD Uilaos pebeuroaste bebe te teks chess wewia le abe’. fe 170 
EDD. Hrsrerege covetstete seuateusisieemse te Gonewss cose 180 
at Ashe coca tatetey nice joie ce RT a ne 66 
4 eens Medevelcicisis bles weet (ei 
GUA Shoe goveseus sucisterelesesesavouasaiess ann els 124 
Tip7llt) on. oem od oo'od On a [sicyors ae eNs 73 
Met) O Mera see fereioueveir Sisieusysisjeuieren eeiare 181 
ISG HA orotate cis elove caves sieeve wars yen eiel’s 118 
HIS eee Svaveiss svoleveverstsvesrevers (oats eae 102 
Piss ence olorers ioleiere sheieie.s ove e's 76, 80 
TiN Bian schoiorpeisseversyeorecen eee ee Ae 149 
eet OR ay Lor choys) siosys.s.sisie\s,cioiveie Sait os 132 
DisD0 isp cia vis Sotete atelawatot 41, 109, 138 
Ne rebtneelac hove lors versicibsreleis].sjehsy oksicle Seals 120 
ie La a Oa 30, 80, 160, 185 
ISZON ot i-c os meee sess 160, 177, 181 
eS istl O Karcmneywayekeveyexaloyersvarch cy <xevere cl sverease 75 
ical Sets FobexsicnsreGisvtvsieveleksie ornare 141 
Biol Gidegusreictsyalale\evs eysvorsieouewws’ so 85, 155 
SSA Siercrag te iavenanes oie ie sists 159, 201, 203 
ESL Dac sole ieravaieieleswis ie'b ois Siain\ evecare 148 
Dea tal roloneis Gialis oobi Sir cie wie wiaislsasing 148 
Sa ics ae fas craven neces eveieh cnsi ct sieleisiois) 6 store 116 
Sara Prat Waiey oven span aici svaxecousiaversisys aya orsie 122 
Asc Dinesh oy cVexol ovcucievexsVelsicjavsiorsheiereeke ¢ 205 
1 UR ee si eiieteeeia Sore e eis sneedad 
Ain ern isis a be wis 1s seks Glsiae wale" .102, 117 
ASSERT iefal cieieieie iS sieves nie b cieteiecs 189 
ATs MES eVed sy ated ok ckcrok oh aveashes sisi aysrmy sfeieus 33 
ASQ ex cies isis ose iapewiele'e e046 194, 195 
NS Seioesieasns 63, 148, 149, 194, 204 
ANTON onus agersieiel hevevetn tarsi acrseia 6 .. 149 
ANON. intone terete raore hare siaweve laste oe 182 
AO ind kauarare se ssuete leis ors tatenciersvorcretaiers 120 
AGES SoS SA SOA shiaieiees 63, 148 
Akay Civics sic cee cc aeiee -..42, 206 
B29) Scie asin sje seus wie ies eteatoTs 178, 199 
OG ae wiciee sles ainiate Sivisieis siete soo cacy 


en or cr or > 


OmMWAWIANADWGNYNDANNAADAAAATDTDGAGAAGAAAIHRDAQ aAtianaaan»anaacacn 


SO Wee herch caste oasieleacnsvakshatexsisisrrels cies 74 
DO eicthe te eretaiataiaie etcnale o//ee, 0 eve 93, 94 
CR EEE ORC OR OOOO OS 83, 206 
QUES os leletereiehs ais wieiete ln eue aie) otters 83 
SUL oy cia ares le visio ale Wistotem ettene .69, 81 
EL Oe Svatnsvencweielcxese¥axsh lex Neraistoustererete 164 
AO tretes craves sy spevak oxeh on shovsversvenepeyeserenerere 12 
DD cya shay crsday snetsn sstusktepayetckelouctererene 100 
Wa pccvevedetsnstessusdsicueieuscele(ekeleus) ate oto 
sO Kcuciaredsdarekarsrexcbeyine atepevensrorecoete 79 
Oly erasustaistessicioieisnavaudsets olessuone opetels 81 
DOV ep are oicieicins sieves sis vere (eee .13, 145 
SO lesg croneis ais iste inrstore se teieie aye . 44, 129 
A DWN aslsteds acvie ve seuere ine eats 40, 145 
AG ane seca sicioisyrciele Wisiets ones 81 
A Tera harciscansisieterscisieterenekoier ne siete 167 
SO BERS, = ctevoystsycicusyssevelousssaeysione. shatoiele 90 
Pe GH BG OODE DUR eb Osorno cD UabiC 54 
Oa Bal sp patisi'axe) siehsi srsvelsversyolenel arsteve 185 
UO ee Fexsysasvenoushssvorsheverevancispslovcrs ohare 97 
Ul Gaol sain syov oye) exch cveystsickek sisters: o tere 146 
TAP a 3 5 car 5 ok 5 ciavos ketsney stuavetore ae 146 
LOM waa aa voviehevare lelelsiadersiaxelersis sronsiervere 94 
So rs; Be shelsie si disvaielehapehes stone repens 148 
DOW corcra clerelster dexeysiel of terevelernaeere 148 
DSi oe aTs) ap oves oh syaicysxexe) sy eh erepsicteretetene 204 
See favevey vei sfetes svelsvetermoterevsiepore exe 118 
LEC CC CO OSDOODU BOS COE GOGE 104 
A igs Neo eR Rio asreie stele ils 64, 66 
Pilea ie Bite ic tote as ove polis alicia Sie tn evens wend 148 
GTAG Nig sa si ctovclevare) si stelsy si evelevens saiece 
CORE ieastorcte fered Gusieis wratene'ssayererene off 
Gi Pc rat'ns grav eral sheravoisievaceasnereveneteretecs-c 74 
Sie ga wi ofei slain sreketolevel sheterslSeralereete: ¢ 80 
WBE ss al oceyar sveiapsteisea shaeceual evs simi 98 
UTireancieree sick 37, 84, 142, 164, 179 
DIR secre vg qreretarerons eretalicer em ais 16 
DOr owe chcieratel sis} sh cl shai sie) a.syarereisateece 204 
BU cet catels oisiswueus erage s wine wrens 50, 164. 
(aS SIERRAS a RET Hele 
TOR oe xecieo sail ont Sree 121 


222 


BBO eee wcc ws hase ome uh 6 aio eters 120 
Joel apagenneoragoo tc 67, 83, 97 
RED TiiaPie avevs faci rele myow oatsioie asclotaronale 94 
OC Re E RPE heer hr mde taz 66, 113 
BSL) rans cdeisewieicmeeatenes . 165 
Bead: oy ches bocce t en cc em stint 38 
Sad. We achinict wisiiviah eicieie tinteiate 55 
Beblversc cccn cuts ee eee eines 164 
By Eyk eure lose tates ais beiee ie oteie ie ieietotaratate 66 
SrOd vucee hehe bic hie lewis Serbs 40 
OSGi eck ce cee ee eee awn se ces 79 
DET eowareterceiatdicleiets/afoiereisintefeisials inte 209 
OE O Waiter: ciciaistersiviv steieistetoisicievers siete 109 
OM OR Caicicseisocetectoemecen 79, 209 
eh Mivas racctetclarsrelchoteciote oie orels 79, 209 
RUNG iste cla rotelerstate (eleteicievoleclefetetens 79 
Delshags aaa tk cnee ee 31, 171, 181 
OPED ian wicieletersieteie'sis Aaeieevane 197 
OBO Pie aaie.ac awe wielesiecisie tiene 184 
DED OteEE Scan cece ccc meitiniete 202 
A creer e veto aio eveieis feveinierevele wistoten Ut 
EB San acannsooo otic acmodas 148 
MOST ys cee wrote eis e'e eietalererareta (fh ey 
UO) SRCS ahve ote elle teteoioletevetateteletereisic’s 201 
MUO! Given tioricielsiospicicleieiewictoreletete 148 
MSE eat seveloiete lelaie raieleletefarelateteloteteters 24 
ND Bisa a tclaioewsicistelen isis teieteielersle ef 203 
MOS Oe starere eketetotareveteieiereieicicle iaterere 63 
MOP SO eon cee wie clara echo ciseiote 141 
BNRG sc poses cata teaee 73, 181 
MOSS G5; rave tonesoie vets ove Tetetoaclote love toretoks 167 
MOSS sua scctek acces ssateevecen 138, 141 
1 bt RAH a ASA AS Se atin e 18 
Uta FF > it ve ta Valin eto tate to euctclelavetotatateletatere 168 
1h SS SAO OAC ond coho Sec 148 
ORES. tates ietaie evoteramiens Cite 181 
MDE Zick, Pears a estis sicieleeinidiclacte aeie aera 28 
BUT PANEER Wav ets (eis id is fats io tn le tosis (ole un tals usrets 119 
jy Bet ce ee ee I IO 63 
IY © a as er rene 96, 146 
GAT: Go. ccroe ie etate ria tavetnin nine tna ats, a 129 
UN SAD: cites wie othe Va ta trv GORI Wlede’ ofecetare 83 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


11°50: Soc on eee 124, 200 
1S1BS  caccterasaescs eee 201 
TE=50... -wccreseks sheet eee 124 
cE EL Ree er ese! 105 
AIH, x:eu ode concauopne eer 53 
199-2, tinsiseul was teepeeee 73 
Le eee oe He AEN, oe eae 73 
12516 «nc sees deetane eee 66 
HDeSD : 2 st daba dew eeneeeeeee 164 
1349. oi cveucacbenckepercneceue 148 
1Ds45 2. cceanetenceceee ene 206 
as I ee ome NG oO 90, 181 
WSsTE .. chcnancakvucekeceeeiee 175 
18216: oct otas tee eee 104 
NS AT. Coctesstnrehisetins 2 eceee eee 164 
19390 <3 ack moses aenee eee 169 
AB eOI de 6S aroncnke ead eee 151 
MASOB ch coukakanmconeeeen eee 151 
19-897. ooh .0sce voeeeeer eee 151 
ie) eer ePr rere os 151, 179 
ISE25  caseseeceneece aaa 151 
[Coy Em yas. ke 151 
132908. a isess ie Soe 80 
$862) Oo REE eSBs ween eee 44 
WANS foes. Sieasseeaeee 80, 166 
WAS <b 2 cawas'< cance Caeeaeee 37, 141 
ASE. -cskcie keclaidlacieh OE ee 85 
TA=19<  <cnce bane eee 169 
PAVE. devia buen ene 169 
PAROS. fe ae ee 83, 179, 185 
PACOG LE. Os aa ocmieieteta shat ciate 95 
T4508... Uc dee aunea nes 26, 163 
ARS et haps keae nec kaeteie 172 
RSE ao Sie dice v vn dc eee ee 153 
Peeks, pt 05ek. hae eee 76 
| Ee, Rep eee 162 
16222 .. .cscaxnneeeeeeeenen 36, 162 
NB a4 ....-senak eee 36, 162 
iy Teer re 112 
16:25 ... cs axnensumenee cee 164 
16:28: ....0cest@eeeawaesneee 145 
Yee Pare fe ek 21, 91 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 223 


We Ae swat cv ccetetai anes arscateversteiers exer arse CD el GAL OLS ev erercroeNclot dataleteretehoiess oa e2 121 
Gis Ole tM ate evel exetel voles eveh el cloves =! <'hae QE a DD roeheyshteteterotenetenstepoys st overeat ai ts 145 
NUGG SObdw cyevetertrep toners ce srevcrorsiere svertios TAS PUG Oba oo flea vlete cis oc toiere s 74, 108, 122 
RX Ti ones ct crateteretarcrets aren eter overer tess SOLOS BOG si eencrcveres cvoveverctoscvert fereyeres eee 81 
ASAIN wap mara stenevevensrlersiererctershsy eve Ste a AT REG SG row ax crcrstaversy or otctcvel cl anetotrert.ctoime 20 
Tis Dan Se tysvarchchaisvetetcistetsestorses.sycre cies DUAR w 20 sd e-oictis sreosterertwre vroreporeienions 27, 66 
Ui: Lower ng a ole¥orel ste! ysl ererstor sjeretaes,< ils Ro lA) 2a oy my Seensy sh okeneter sie] steretey keveto eh eteRets 66 
SIE avaxakcrsxat evers <ahaetefaroberererevers evel e AGH ee OT es ercactercracstenere ie sieiette 108, 123 
IS 2 Gis arch svotot svstsyerohcneker ete et Watered eters OG HIZO DAS ges cecoteraretereieiole en forersteie cher a PAL 
US SUE gcreusiet shatoxeietetersrereiev ons SETS AOA ee: pavexctonPet ater ciel heleterevelare ot eater 13 
ESS VO ee Neroysh oF etel she¥eha) ctopererahase a erete UDA MAO sO oki terera-eiie va wie ieeve/6.a;8 5016's 20, 92 
US Zon eri cise caw Sewrese Be Bete LOM MALTS eo woteccpatexatoiVevelclolelereysionats as oe 106 
TSS Oconee stow cree wears Bore Ose LG i memO LSS ot wehccass aren stctele} Sefot sfetet atest ein, e 141 
USS OW kay stavesciovereistsveters-aterato organs AN Aes Oey senarelov os cseveia: steal cles hetehel cy ortie 179 
WD = aoe tyorercrore Ueve.cietere-visiereeis one Oe lic AD aus satay et cio) nl eiehcteso} atetsnclels/sisiere 171 
RS Sie tics GEISOIe CAE OG eee BOL WALLA es crste. cvs 3 oiele sree eistiia'e 120, 172 
EUG MAD a tacky chor ay oh 212} are! st si sistare's aie ae; IGE} ALES oe eiSarcte ay esa otersieyeters ie 181, 192 
UMD a ouagarey ovedatsneVe>stetsteysicrelele-e\a.el ate 119 
ACTS. 

eo th amem tar syerer sie syelsid(a.s2 oiseisieveaters DD ee MGS aa ayerei co overall at shela,. overs e oss eters 22 
UP RS oy aorersvetevot srorstete?sicis ateletele stein sie 2O PE StLSs Bo sadass desde aseoone aees 169 
Ay cteera ctsieycie Go e's.s 215.6 Stes ODES) PA ta lk pores wis weer oe) avin clevereie aes 35 
bre shes 5, «crs 3:6 POP SU, LOK, dee AO4 SECO CS yo corn oraimishai clot setsteeel oS eo ale 101 
MESMED rw crak ctcncielstatatersteletslaterete.c's sie:s 6 1G. 2413S vaxssssrncvere sislev ochetofetchal so. site/ets 80 
MESED Ds or hispatayshetets taretetoratotetate tera chevsie\ s DA BAS ZO ak os aire closers oc icreta! Voreperern sieeve 201 
bce ES Ra waves hey sheret ol ako) avo! cha) Sic) o''d.ctc 01s WAGGA DO eh cteict crakchoierevefel eer eheielevakeeny oe 83 
cise ol Meeaatonsy cectelst c1ofel sl clobescteisi see ci BUR BE Sila Wercieratoleteraiorsieveyareyereiel orere eters 36 
WSQD, avo cesar noes S sevalsiave ners SOR a SA roc accssyeicveieversis are avelcroiskcrarstorets 197 
Dison cate Sis) shee leisiersteiscs IGO: 106. 197, (435 eee cece A POGeenne ae 159, 175 
CUE ta ck vekcyoh cr abet ctevetoh are e¥ svete! ote) s) orsiele, Smee OO mer tel ercioteroiaierevactsh etch oreleve iarerere 109 
Oi an palotetatst chafahsbatatetoveretetand asisicia's ANG Ata i erkeretoyenersictovelcrersich rel cxereeerere 197 
I OMAR eh Fanfics c1ek shave) <Fetat axavoi sheers w ste NOG BES SI oh sare ovalels ep esclerayccevoletsre hate ators 18 
Did: Nem eireye els siavelnis snes, ois: 514%. 4. 046-3 6 MOOE ok SD wer ekcrcchosersyel hetonster cera atet eis 196 
DESO a chk ei ahercel cl hols day oreieie sale oosie:S ADA: GOEDAT Sao cea cee end ee ween 179 
DAS s wonsice ter AA Ae hate alee ohio c TIO. APS 2S ieee wcencici basi dercierasiol oslo Seas 197 
DEAD ooo s ayccvcicrciane, evelevepsietel eicretaie. UTS POIBC ia vac ct eacietes ccc w 14, 83, 112 
PAGES cic tocerav sie oso sistaicisiaie ons A or Gish etn Sete Bot Or AREA: 164 
Bay ae rararereyercwacieyavalevevereine ereteyens ae i, UB e re rie CECE See 69, 206 
BeSi aim cclvatesletetald ese sisfeisere eas 2 SAMMONS A ed Seco eve te oa a /ete e)o.0 sce, afe sactereNe 195 
Didibcts aieit o <ieiciein a. Wierais 0.0 e e/eieie nets IQ Sime GeO ciincs avon ev eri ciaishaze cs shale) ei viel teins 206 
EDD oun csi 9) kel of hovel sys on shat eve. sleverstels te OAs Gee ara o1vic, « 6.9/6.0,0 Oem ale cienoe 124 


(f-1 Rreyc Sirisae Wisse cise sutetes 184 
Fw en neck ee bee pC rR epee Bali ks3 
Send Os Via tista: os wicioomapesndey sini! ede eee 103 
7b EP Ayres Sie, - Aa lei 
(fil Ramee grades sarc cpieseoe 
[ESR ULAR rie sie sietalecin stash sine ietats 113 
WS a. oe ones Gee web eeeewe meets 28 
ere) Berane AI CREAD Aral ls; 
CAO Ee oe ataletatavante epee ere 91, 112 
Miao Pais piste wis eta Rusts cis avers iLilyg 
Geli cutscene caare Seren s 6 er wets 117 
Selle Pees eee ss seis w bee wack 109 
EAD meepcey pore acins AS AO Oe 157 
BD cae se Be wo we ais wee Be oseie elate 149 
BAAS Ho. ce crete canicjesistaveis teenie scare eas 184 
BOT onc cinaeannaes 154, 196, 197 
BeSO leh we:cceteea alelcate 118, 177, 205 
BcSd ig srevarciniayorovarstaretter store 149, 165 
SPaBe s cctastete rc steels oleic ee 120 
BAO skictsisisnteuste ols erateve stereos 190 
OF Chie on p beers aout eae 102 
Sas Seen Oo aco Tao a aCOne 112 
RE Fe tee Save ua ata es ara etaie ae en ie 84, 178 
TET focaty A Tee PA OT SaurenteD 
OF 31 Auhcwaweh eer ewan eee anor 107 
DBS cher cl Sucla cee eer aaeronre 102, 116 
MO soo aideGaccckats skew acacia 18 
10a Ais wee pice ea eee cis cisieete 93 
ND eyes 2 oie Goat wise ee we aes 122 
MOST FE ene pints Caren caw ee a mee 182 
LOTR yo ce es hare ener ners ..206 
1DAR? c. giekuimorree ere ee ce aicients 183 
ND Ba od a telaw srariere sPanitieccios 59, 184 
1D*AS . comes ceeetes eee eee nrae 96 
SD CAM ® 1: la fol sie otetssie nee ier 81, 201 
MCLG Se icone stleckeeeeee se 0 SRO 
MT Scshan-e'c dais ois. wacdlanemtena ae 162 
TO Cece wann bacon beakee nae 121 
LG Ta atoms anacsiniocuscisis ss iesccctate felt 60 
TGS, cawonwiaasceashl, 142) 098 
NODS Aha tne ee anes hee sis 110 
DAO uvicelan Matmaeuidiaaae ste 123, 192 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 


12:8" c. ces omen ere ewe Pee 135 
MOLLE os, wise eb Gal ewe rie hetene 38 
De TR! 2.5, 5 sian tataremt kale aa 12, 179 
DD Gls tga sienna lceia cists ieee eerie 102 
1310 cuca baemerek>e ee Retina 92 
13 5203: cee see eerneser a islasvonste 109 
1B 82D a aiseiew aslo einai 83, 178 
1 33 Bereta alee ai aeee ween 101 
14-4 3 Eiiovar seep sees anes 69 
14:5 Sl auwcebeessserree ab eae 189 
aL’: GN 3 Ne wisio's ie aie Wise ects wine ieee 18 
IAS os Caas velcsuvvayen vier ele ee 
1: Sa ane Hormone mona acc: 106 
14217 Shanes ase sista sta 206 
118 Se eee aie tiselete oe 194, 201 
Toe I eee are pisisv eielemieinate 181, 192 
De ihaieiter ck ence een tee 186 
a ee A Gryycr cee eek ab sia 146 
159A ae ee ae a eyelslace cores 40, 123 
MOD G \clesisisteus ere siete eee plone 
Le DOF. 5 ion amee emer 64, 191 
DEAD cy eeu eetieee sina alate inc etch 191 
aN yo IRCA APTA Ear oo tie ae 
D526)? & tis hiceiiaclasa acs ale arene 72 
G21). sae ose res poE ee ena eee 123 
Gs oo ose ewe es Oe eh oe 66 
BLD 5S siewtepeeceisls cs tioeieseiete Eyed Bs 
GG. Gee eee serene anemia .196 
WG 2, «1,5 creceuee topes aneie ete eee 191 
WGs2ZO? 5. cicidix <a waren ame eataceeene 82 
16°34 5: ew coane a wnde als mie otete 110 
NG 336" <ficistoe ime oem eats oer 55 
USB U ASOaryseae ron 110 
GROMER ate cle t aa Ge Cahiers as 1820 
BUEN a Sie (os 2 0.055 Pe 206 
BIIES SLED cai se ive sy'n wis selage ete eine es eee 176 
17:18 . ..80, 82, 83, 131, 165, 177, 
182, 185 
BT 22S ee ene Sele ES RRS yr rr: 91 
17:27....44, 165, 179, 185, 196, 205 
NV 28, acetiene hic y a wane. ate es OosieUs 
1828 i; wis ieee mie ites bs oie tele 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 225 


HL ys Ae me rercreyerevetei core. Ss ove wiel's cela 141 
BLS 3 Oeameeepet easier cre): eiaelove sicessi siete 189 
tS oP Aram orctsieic is ote's \c'sale.e's' cs: 91, 163 
SOM Mape ee fs crease cayolclelstere cies lene 122 
WO |e yee ojelsiercue isis el elersysrerejeva eece's er 147 
Deel he emmrayekerereic sVe.ccefeteeievaversere a's 76 
NOGUG <6 WS4a Gece OE ROE Ore 23 
UST, Lath eae ee 80, 99 
OS MEM raie (e cisveyeie @.osscestyeciesie.ecs 199 
MO 3 ite, forelexeishe a\e\oi eres 0ie'e'e.a 01s 85, 185 
Os OMpehe c ce-vcisise sacs see 8 Sle lecrers 196 
MGA OF ep naversieialels\o,s.c) sueforsiareavene,8 ana 103 
DA aiever Vere cf sicko cicie, aveier Ge 'st yee" eerie 109 
PAE Ole nie haters sy ove, aeXeree\ the 2 ti vlesere.a a, « 94 
SO UVHIED Et weter sate eve, sitsjioieioustevevaretisveretel eve 116 
2c er 146, 166 
ZAM ST Ar Gi Aone GOI GROCER ORE EIC aT 
PD cas ete less Mrs jees ei eves, sr 8a caves! evs 152 
YA) S25). le Cia OO CRO IC RCEOIORSICT ORR 189 
SAS ee veh era tererrsie hessieinieo ere risus 75 
DOP SO ah telstele erste ai meena ce 78 
Pa Loe ONS SCISIG TOC ieee 20 
eA nines cists oivie, eisis ees S.0\ea)Ss 186 
PO eta rerctst-veloieis sistas, oie ine Sere eee 28 
AGS Po iat 6 101, 208 
sD 1Re IDM reae cous sai svoxete ia sis: «18 107, 186 
PPO G tra therecctters acirek es cevin ese oa el 
NCIS tress Yoel tei scoceisitisis os 109, 146 
EOE ies cy wereraves he Sie ela eee ws 146 
mS Sapaihelsteejalsrsielorete sole ses 177, 182 
POD Olu uaetaess)aycte sb erscters alesse aieeveners 75 
232) 6 SOOOnEIECOn AOE sQ0000D0 D6 14 
Pie OMe MMaveiat ec apcieinisio's sia site's sieve see 95 
BASTR 6 G6) GGOB CUO DOME Erne 105 
Gre as seis ce Site .. 14, 44, 132, 135 
ecb awa eral eve rotelctebors rela 6;5.9.% 141, 162 
ESO re sce os RACAL OOS easiest S 
De MPa ta.a'ste ei si sysnols, era state re eerste 184 
QD Oey isles 0:86 5 osc Oe asa Sslele ele sits 95 
Os Dias ate: ok 68:83 6 [oe s:0 «ai sveistererelone 166 
Ns os ee sealeislncleys.cielsla seers 123, 176 


15 


ST SSC ean sHoy Siti cites, cr ejveheye/o © o o.8 ee 186 
BEN SPEs Guia y Scop OOM aS Con Deere 186 
DAS Dalen aval Srarepbetete te Si ciauet eee ss Eiesake 110 
De ON oon syave-chnrer oper aotsyare to eiorn tae. 165 
DA Dee ak io tate ws ig otros 35, 76, 80 
DA OD mee Vas ereiete a5 ates ae 118 
QE AGU ee San een ioiel o.oo 109; 1105: 197 
POA ANS ate te TWP E SE yy A Scars 22 
Dome Mcesrersiessie a0 ees Ce 186 
Sse aey cohcicls iste Sye-siie ey creators eislevors 184 
MO) 2010). 3 SBE es nos GeDE OOO OE Sc 198 
Oe OMe, Peicts iets to sreiete eae: 174, 197 
Aol Gioereks wie aie osc 172, 182, 183, 184 
PAD OUR SERRA rice hort acme ore 85 
PAS RTH Ly RAS MIGROS rooiG ox. 172 
SOA 5 SCRE AE RCIOTS or 129, 158 
DO A ee EE cle ot are, SOE eS Te 186 
DOI AO be cielo stave veieie SierSteree oe Gaede 184 
Oe Gireme crovereucre everevers, oece onetereter nies 185 
AG Ors ceie vere seis se glen 98, 121, 196 
DG: Lamaictercs ce erotarsisinichoie ine 39, 51 
GOs Desterersis oreo cietere sa areeteias 27, 66 
AG's WOE tora oroleusis ona coevelese ereterews oc 113 
DGOiZ20) seu stevels aisle. c.creneretoee cere ciel 186 
DOE 2Era sia, cvs-s si visiassroeiectcke eet sete 75 
DG 2 icy cars sete 84, 131, 157, 165, 166 
DOO aire elecelerete areterete carotene 162, 192 
DUO tay.icte scleicine clectens -.186, 192 
Dal Tatars riciorseie cattiers ot aielotares 153 
DiUbcSn seteretetarsiclelevela cresvetciey lereterets 141 
QUT 208 Sse cvsls pice reveretets ..189, 204 
PASE PN ES OOO DOO OOEOAGE 71, 94, 105 
BUSOU cy tiaers deren Werte se ate 160, 197 
Dr Bae irene caeretos si ciessteiereere state 105 
PAIGESY si eescis OOO COR UIOOOE 165, 166 
PARE BIE SS cra codlCCOOObDE OBOoC 105 
7A DBs eo ho SOC OO RECT Aee 66 
CEN BPAD ER 253 GODS ORO OR CIDE Onc 97 
SS Ceher sae aete tata eletereiere atsyc\s)sic sesinieye 102 
PASE G GOGO BDUODSOOC DO DOOl UTC 35 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 


JAMES. 
BONNE ee tiie <6 4 OG) «0 ohare BA AOL SLO s ievscterstetste seta tee ake oterare 169 
Ral tha tro a msase Bete sata arene 77,407 225... 2c dee en ceeeaneeeee 106, 109 
Bes aia en's eee ee RE LOD Dts Pare alalsternterele cietslole ate rane 204 
At Meme aries se StS Sc 108 2 OS aT aes cateerelas pate ee 110 
BGA y itdcaa hase ee eine 139. 3210) ¢siccnaweweass eae ene 56 
fee bs Sg SrA Ee ee ents Sy oS LOE: Seda ol 22k ey aos ace ae eee eee 178 
UNS Seite ote shots s cranial Oo" Arde. okt ease eee ee nae 45, 81 
a hoe ee AA a os ere a bie Is Ra: ot E: See eee a 74 
DAE tba Jicte ale iremae tole Samet als siete PU a Al 7 eR oe en Pe yr 190 
DOS ie Atay Naheotveteemetete stele sretone ates BOR 12 nt ose nm hao Sree 94, 123 
De gedarn sale, waptetare «horas 84, 189, 145 S218. cn dacs oaaa alate ae 42 
Ses Ole seca tetaneiatetetetenetere overszates ere cievers ATS: BELG ccatoeser ace oe sates ee 109 

I, PETER. 
Bests oA ean esis xaos 198, QOL Cs 220 ee eieeie ws cies e ee 105 
Nt ee Mi ye Ss ene Oy > fama: 3! AS Seay Sn eS Coe San 110 
We LG. ci ptciaiare aeiptae atte meratare pean DASE OE SGire ics siseice sO Se eer eee 109 
Pet RE ae Reese co pees DDO SC200 AAD Gey eievere:ctc seoreiens or tere ne ae eee 59 
ems es ede statue wi car wae Sis ieee, ima shee 72 SBS)... xsscee aleldeea ee eer 73 
Batten ees frciee ceee BieieseteveKetaes ere 4D “Bie aise anda eee A ir ae 204 
CREE Sie Lice skp piaus ees Snare ee 200-2855 ee aes ee 186, 191 
SHC ee Soper so Sto oo aan anon Do at 16S) VOID it oie wemio ame mae oe 102, 150 
3 iY Be Avi ODye Se ete ee 1655 Sosa misters’ «ix ain wis) eit minh eee 

II, PETER. 
aE ee ee einaiiolelsisieleisacsiie sheldeh) . QU et in win’ pcaieo te eRe ea os «1D, 195 
ST ate ot pass etme Siri 27,66, TE B:19 a nan esiswnencinmmenee ween 110 
Bee igen e akia soa aint LTO; 7202 Sa ORs te ateriersttactote BAAR RS BS 5 75 
GD: Satta ainieaiainiaini hoisinlel oa se ie =i TH S80.) Lc ancacenac sequences 105 
ILI hr et es Sang LATS OO RO DES ee hag igi le 5 haa Aa BA es 113 
BATA “harass ove tnt ca gen eta ote ee es dO aS WIIG A BR RSs Aaa S SPA By 74 
BO cre coin Site's ee uate np anime LUV RIS Sh Shao ee siren Sire Gonene 75 

I. JOHN. 
Tab Aer ATRIOS eieeteenverata AE lel ws bs vc puaa. saat snes ae 53 
EE Fane ck Faia oni ov eh onsen ine ee Des ease han e a's o's s'est nt an ee ee 75 
De rae ere tecvietats oS oo Gun cone are eae SH FSC y's a's pple Uuteis ie ech cle te eae taateiene 2 
PAS Sas PA SED ee Sei nS TN Te ESD... t ddn teen 170, 202 
ede vas sae tide ee ee om ee RO G8: SG |S. siatatelgioteietalets einen ect ene 202 
ee Ae SENS CNS orkriee MVE he ewe 168. 4:16 ... Aicicesgenewssenen eee 75 
Pe alates ccs eintee ite ete aie DOS L048: 418. cae weamite aie Py, 71 


cr en on 


www wwwwwwwnoNndnNnDNNnOHHHYHHH eee eee 


ed 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. Pipatl 


pA 5 catalecsisisleiels 8.5 eisieusieus. aa, s1a-6 8 NS WRO Sled tecturcystelchelcrsvereversicne'e7s/syohers sere" ay 16 
Sul OL Atet rerereretoieterstanets sisvsion ys WELL PURE ABS S sanecoodcundoeneOnOUnome 95 
gilt 5 gaoomo0000 BatchstarNeierecteiste Ih ANeAon esqaanondpoucgdoa0OUUmOL 152 
III. JOHN. 
JUDE. 
eitetalelctetelelelaletetersiehateretercts AGHOron Dopemmee Obrmateteretss oheloheleie tel Netolcuctototer stcketers 27 
ROMANS. 
Gree cherererevcievceterc| crore cre olcreis steve AS AL ay cvevrerererets oceveisrs a eretels ere 106, 201 
OW heeeSe CROTCH Sides sew siete siete G SB Act Bercy vce reversveyier sicvevecove te nieiiene oe erae 122 
SS RrcWesiclereiote titer clctels servers lero reyerete bem A SOM e ope Sy cvesvnysers. c otee vos rervevereneterekers 122 
MO Meni cvarcus rarevckoras Giese cre wie eis ules IGG 6 Log eye CEE Ory Sipmsin cts Ao OC 131 
11 eG ery ROR MCE ee aeRO Se IGY eS SOR Ta a Re EM GO a aS Bacon 204. 
116}. nie SOC GRO ED SOR CC ODI OSE 4D: Paseauyoecacks ror ase aaiciatenvete er 110 
igo AR SIC ODIG GOPeInae MOA BUDS ROSS ecnbecs cyeteleterssersuts  ove's teva elereieteiere 79 
DOM caacusts clover sve! oneteroveversiev ees Sten DO} SrA ee ewan raveysver ovsveuesVelore sjsravevaveneks 35 
DO Sd Tialeravalela: Gare es) a we ev ahalsvsis ahs MG SimmetOe LOly avegevoverclovanerecsbavelesetenchctorevelaris 176 
7 EA ANe, CUCRCNCT EN CT CRCICRCACIP NICO EC A Dies Mei awed tcheserat ere teaucislataecrctete 112, 160 
Risley PG OIRO AGI OI Reena MTG DG Ale cw ate fevsiacs co ovarors “s oieve orsiotenes 74, 101 
OMe encte re aietensieicicus’osisis alels aioe EM Oc 16's Bae Sosa cusreienevertrorsreite neler cine 101 
1 ne She eeeee SOO Oo et lett Deleon, Gil ONeire erereteneis -telslaieiocinie's ois 95, 112 
Aen acreisials A CIOOCOD OO AG eiete sievers DAP OO LS So ero.o,m ais eiaieveroresene we netorene setae 79 
WG CGH 0 DAEHN GUOSOOOGLO DOD OL Mae AOU) Socaia\averorers event rsteisuonas ores ehoreTon 83 
Sree he rstase scrote) sreverst olareie/exave rere 's UD Ole = GisllGe ck ocersteetalere «ore Sp etessiares 148, 206 
A rar cicvsi aioe layoteraysysrets) 91888 Soe: See Gy VULLe (etree crocker erouste re caietelerersvot 81, 208 
DU liken rcrsslaiove: slaverecatchate’n:s sjataterata MOG S HaGsstnee caso wo cated arevusietecsiels ce eters 174 
CiveyMateravaverelcrerare seer sretehersce Sle clove QO OTE USO ens ciettewte Cece e vines . 153, 189 
A ect teceionctseversints MO Con cOU p AUG) oni: Glet ois slcisjacloisislerle eicictolstelelen Ole 
*\Gitctacs isis Biplelptstsieheie eisaete’ < isiate: eis AOE Mell OMe oreiets AO OOO DOG soocc0 08s 
OR ert etereters teks clevene: 7 soisiersrere AQAS. wadhc Olio asteleusrelaietoiete letererore Bieter cieternre 81 
Da RC RICA AE EO Save sisted se DOR Wel Na fosvareysteveletonsneie eg indkeiin Afey 
DOM ere crete ekae ete et te ne ccbve wie ate Sor Dae reser arse cietoloreene Oy ais rerstorene sie 91 
Dt ar aelatatecetthans eioerekeh Weroee ns HOG OLSOS ie SON tow we yotemieterteretertete’ ofelers Sooo BOC 79 
A: valets ray evekaveyeuerexeie¥eiere DR OMEL ATM IG). MSL A sticiete «ieee ect a'e'e oe «5/6 Sb0000US: 
QO Bie casa alata a aroha teen GOS rere tercteiie eesieitielercieiererwlalvaiererete 74 
GIs teatsisvacateseve tomers le tevsiorewele mists Gils Oil aivarst aya ci cvctere ahsio's) Scie ok 74, 98, 172 
DOs ecetiaaoaesisds cas oe ees SAO GG te Sis Sing ya rcvelchaisievaveicitielsilcsersrevers stereke 112 
hive g eases rasecycte neve ataie Che vousicfene eee ANG Me Sie Qi cok ver etreNentey obeiu cers ooeierate 202, 206 
Div Sin Seetaa el aconevsle ievoreeiereteiee AOU Oil i aye snake aye ra aie ialateveharesecoverstcierere 149 


228 INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


Shins cee sae Soe ese ees vietis 166) -ADESO. 6-02. cent esas Aceiicy oe 
SlBrerew a ck cake bee. cee ook W42y (10336). é 6525.5 eee 119, 120, 121 
SEG Ee hava s vawe cues ae RhS ae ok Me Nes Hen oem earch ares eines APSA SIE 
Bea re oui wisn cine eee ciclo 19, S19" AAtGE |} ones wan ee ate ete SEAR ALS 
eee es. ao cin See Stee eee easier TUG Ae OP circles tele cetera aia a eisooie hale tee 66 
BO 2's: avewie etetaraletcvererfereteteiele 19; ATS Sod OWei keus haves ens ate y 191 
SON oF Sees niateloterestetcuetepsic ole tee UOTE Ls VG as acs losatereatasGoitc ane ae ears 201 
BBS corinwe vismeniele 1035 132.156. 20b | EARS. ACh cin oases pelea ee 98, 121 
BS el utes ete at le einen eon 1400 T3S7. Sb teats See eee ee Rete 71 
Dd eta pris cloetelekciere ceretoiteiere P29 108s Clb dele «icisrchois o ereretatnide cy stares --203 
UO een Bos aSrinhd. ai Ae TOA PRES Foe aiac.ci ole sa gis einai -69, 81 
DGS teracs cea sia we ara ore ctaterdiehea eon he 82. AA Ae ieee nak eon e aetere wate 
OeLOF cece ce cee eaete ps cecceees 206) © tA or ne ces el pacaielen.e Rb ES erets 69 
Dee, ors ore aun cla arerae'e wits dete, os cece ZO eta ee ccc slelcwicie wise ResiMer Re 2b. 
QR ete oe a,c e Staal cca) See e wie hemes DDY FeO Tees cw cain csiors iste Cie seer 172 
GED O SS Fe Maclets ave ane Soe iets Rise ZOD) » Dee aos, ohare ag siete he.e Soe ee 79 
NOMA Seals ic statelarn o! aavemin ete, 0 ote eee SI Vata cc ica cost oe bes eae oe 139 
LOST. react setarcnere cate cere: 116, TIS. ~ ABO aoc oma ewleninrniteaiveidnen 200 
AQPAB Mote cleanin eccee 203-205 LSGae, ie hs os chsh el sch cee -201 
UOMO eno aie eis © «vse als'a'a'a/ O's a's ate ence BOs ES  crstn tela coer omer 149, 174 
RNA riche icici es <berek opehai st heyere AL, TTT, 208" ASc3) 2 ise wowancaenaces eat eee 102 
HUMES ames acs tya anatlas er mvavel sian eickonay’sr eco sl 202) AGSGR eshte cere aeons hae vena 
A ULES Peeters eis at cia ef pvatriatatate steteiaiar eel ciate DH: MGMT Sore gra tesinis ctkrete case ikiee Sea 26 
BIO FNL oa tetas ct ofa alee aiickovare che opera chen cinte 60 AGHAST So iereeeeaodyrel 76, 82 
1 A enor: SiclDanisiee ee cto me TAD Gal ee we ete cai cic.e PPP 
SE er ee SAAB DiI OOD HOmAe ZOD PT IG s25 ve cece wee clare cis metal Catt aiee 
LD De veto. al eresarelatncerete alelorenerateslarets 14 


I. CORINTHIANS, 


AE «Rai dnialniKainn olaleterna niceties ofela SOL kee einer velel eles ccveccccdcuscede sty OO 
6 OE <a err re hornet UT. SsB ow Ai enwlacsacssannuekeuaee 
LST. oi wea evelaenacddcotseasesGlal tO) 6) dure eminenpr enya. tis Et 73 
Bees an een cee one Sede aue cee csiedh -SelOre daluestea Wart ss ea dua ts es 6h 73 
BO Des cc kvre eee nee seks SS, 143 BtTB le ce vevteccecs a ceaecnnate 178 
a eae a awicly ents as sale wie ~ ine MRD r ae che <a at AP OY ind cnn 
LO A ene ee hee od aus ET bic ens ves cane ee ne 72, 148 
AS te te Eye 150, 158) 426. cw ccasccstusuneswus 85, 202 
Bit re claeeuine yy iarae bee 2 Sate ktoel Bee aihe inka ve: 6: aie\penihastans weed ie ee 
B27 oaks eee cea eiae bis ati a he ANS sh WNC ey ee err ery 82 
Ye Rs ach ere Pewee AS OB". s sievcisibemmaleeretaetaeieata tare 73 
Di Tac Wud «c's lee ermerutimvtwiclelas anes C6’ - 528% o> ois drens cee me eaeete mren 155 
ede se ceurd inde ae ree ean eis C0). -Bi10.. viiciasaanmenaeeeeaee 202 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 229 


Ocul tras aecies Cees ial aie talereneceravens 135 
GieSiawarnsterlers cletetsieieceielotes eters 1S 205 
GieGiaze Loceser a orstauateV ocelot aual’e see S05) LOD 
Gigs Sec ers eck elevovareeiers atoteroreteKs 203 
GeSinec ctercteleyer cies elecetec-areis losis anave 80 
Odds Sea sie cis Sfeitrererst exons sqo0soduc 135 
6:18 Rreritieniereiemielersiccieievereie ier OO 
6:20... Shi elete sloteloreiesieicieetec UO 
UfSbyes sSisastoc SOOOOC etshe mele sie lOO 
ies lkaten tu hataieis les Bie ere ere a Seis shovel 129 
iB al conetet Moresotvevstere 35, 139, 164, 165 
MiciBIL Gaerese wis 8 ais/ahe ie arssale wiereveis onatetohs 93 
Us BObres aorloterersrereress svete Bega 
Sila Foamerore stoerese eialetelatereleveleic ters (ctels 123 
8:9 Bieise civiele sverote Sreleravsisiel siecle 153 
Sill Goeeteereieieraieicrserwleleleie sielaie . 206 
Dl eles isvoace MOCO OC GOOE eile Op neue, 
Dantes a eeiielsts sa eieistais 1 Oi, 202, -200 
DAT. relevereletelereiercverereve Momroortaan 203 
OIG irs Crcicterveveiets Reiseiae Atico.caons 203 
883 6 sonosooooscoonosons llth Ae 
OAL Airen wi oir Biofeleveleicie is 555050000. UR: 
cello arcade retetarc ie vovs ranele wie Sie16.6 0 erereiie 107 
DIES ay vonete wre case iare 's Sogo 7 SooDoOUS 209 
QT, avarveceteien 56000594 Breve osohsels 96 
Di erealrrenesteisus ie 9) sie eG fleet siereees 53, 101 
DerPARES. SOdde aictereichetovenalecsisveversrerels 206 
9:27 sisealaweusvetereharereve'c . 152 
DLO 5 eteveiere choverelevere - 155 
OG Sirens Siomjerieiciersicisie stra 
OSU s<ana6occ00npG00c aieteleleiateieloo 
IL Oot O ercicr svenciesokever xe Sieweversiovs (erovers 184 


iE moricconocon sodeKdeDCRS Boctenl 
Us)iG Ssoocc 5005905" jon0s5e0e¢ 145 
IONE ecceciawieco COS CLO mIaIOd dic 148 


VSR ean 40, 102, 159 
ULSD comroyetete tole a¥erersisiaicieveneteis sa cusueve 109 
De Se gh, teiere ts olevetslistetetevsnetatarersisvs ssi 80 
MS ie AS afie's crt ahaa ceohereroenererens 81 
WAS 2 Biss, alld busy siaus soles soeleic cternelere res 105 
MIA s, 9.6 eisie's' sisie's so elaiete istrerere 173 
DSUs Sie taiele\ssaraleleteie ete eisverate oetete 110 
Fal D er jevciolaie wihistotintalectecesemtendtet 203 
UBS 6) idlaGoocac ASIGOIM On OCIOO Ne 199 
US ivabiek siaieisisi as avele sibietereonteoister ote 52 
LS is(Mies tes, cretatesscie\eveyeislare.o: suave: st elereters 64 
MS Sirei ee at siale eisrereiaiecern ernie s exeioisere 195 
Soe wares ote siersteteles wee eters 47, 135 
MSDS es, sisiesawiers crevele Sielejolaieterciereiets 66 
HED eta o re aiaelsievstaverersteloctalolevreretee outs 
WN E= 2 Oe operovevoieyacaiove aincelstetenolersteleteiete 107 
WA 2 [iar tevin lsOnietelsieisis cis oeelera ere 118 
aE AOR Ve GA BOO AB OOOO URCOE 72, 178 
MS OW cares a; cic cisveveieleus ats ereisteres 201 
ISA Leroi eC OT OOO OOGE no oeer4 
LGB 8 Ss OCOC OOD CCCI sere elAd 
WS a Steleve cia wvce aoa 14, 166, 176 
WS OS 5 eve ec sous wuskars eqelets Sie ASO OO 
AS OU are oisrartae cou cketiee Grete atee tees . 148 
MSGS SS ce lesin ag ea sects etn seers 162 
We AO. cdecescascojece-eioksveiyorstacaiserelere 148 
TSOP A Re OOS CEAEIC ae Sees me 184. 
MSIE 1s Vere ea iencieraitiatedste ects eve cekers 207 
1S 1G8 Bile ERE GIO Ne ROC RTO IIe Ore 209 
2 ERB Y GIES IOCIN GOOD Cee 165 
Lis AD rae crets ceca ators ts eieterarebeveie 44, 148 
MO DUN erersiaiecsleveversieerevsitals's 47, 204 
PTD Omen eitete sievesters svausie terete! ssi 18 
IGS Gi cw eis lererelersicters SA TIORIIC 98, 196 
Gi Bee septs teieteterescts soa p0600DO OO 


AG cetmege tere oleperetele(erainia’ ee o/s\w'a's! [sao 


TY, ee ispoteieeyere fers svaiovere,s shavens levers 207 
Omer aver arerer es svetere 8 sh eres ievele ereretele 11 
i Giaes Maret o sea chek oh sy 5:81 81) alee reelerans 113 
Dead. Satya eerie err dsts hi erote natant 112 


bo 
JU) 
oO 


el el el el 


NNN HOH oc Or OP PP CO WH & & PD 


PFPWOWWOWWONNNNNN NH KH eH 
pat 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


La Se ee: 419° 826 «oi ate seececee eee eee 175 
BEMIS foes we os hes eke ee 110 “82105. cecnc ea eeneeeeee eee 107 
Serer renee aes 472. Bekb tle atooat ceases 190 
BAG. kedlg peer eere 122 TTR BIBS. cscs taco ee eee 175 
NG) «sop ticest eee ne 97, 128.476": Bs88 iso scd2ucec ve seen ee 97 
BA, sk Sides Weegee ees eee ahd BUG eee i oat aati 26 
<i Mee eae er OY 347 GO Qedee rcs cence. 5c eA 113 
IGT ere eee 108° 26:1 = f6s5.2; Pr et 90 
A Pyne ene rae st Uae a PY eR ec 7 113 
PIE) cee ares De 110: -40°9,'s 285k. aaa See 191 
PUA ee’ pea eee 10% 198.1 108" sO ISee 20 Aes ee 63 
SU GEAr do 7 pees ame 105 Gtk s<0 seat ee 157 
Te iene Peis ork eI 197) died oS. PRO SHY A 85, 206 
DAG pr ikea eet eae 45000. Eee To: Deck, ee 184 
Breder acer et teeers et 166 SBeB soo 8 one ae ee 116, 123 
ATE evi it ice tek eee eee cs: Same ee Ceasers Seana 107 
AR ene NT EES | 190 12:20. ..... seseeesell0, 200, 202 
GALATIANS. 

Giver eccrerrest secure ae B53 AIO eee et ee: .172 
Sere es eka eee ens 157 . A-One ey. 12, 129, 158 
HEN 20s: re es 149. BOs So Fed ee eee 85 
ieee reee Gt rt here: Jaf LED “BESS ee cee eee 71 
Bouse iecteces eee ee ne MOT Sere. e BER er. - 26 
fp POE EE ee hore cme 67,185 AB oor beac sacs ee 96 
Beketra. Loreuiens eee eoee 110 ek 2 orcs ces See 105 
Bhi cerewsenecs chen duh Sehee HG, eden teecde. Je eee 131, 157 
IIe donot areal ees iO pabe Geese Pe ee 101 
1D SEAT ore ATE {52° 0:0 cure eet PS - 82 
iaoerer ese Van Detach ed 18> Waetien verccoees en 1 ae 173 
Site le etre Parte st S05: BIT. 2. oe erence 84, 179 
Lee ee eng te et tenes fs 12k. MENT 50 Seek eee nk oe 110 

FS PEE NOR wets. 5. 49, AVl= BAA Reo ccecs acu dh SStee 
SRM Acca ns it Feito vat GPA SAGES ies accu owtae senate .100 
TS Soares Glee heeee eee 153 

EPHESIANS. 

oh PRR a ge cas See PRE SA 900 “wizI8 | \..csatabaseae eee areeeee 17 
a uRG A eURatenL tek axche eee 417. B58 ... ...cannuceeeee ee 109 
ae YY 25 5u) SCEREP EINER os Cee 1S > Men. ayueee Per es te) 95, 96 
ob MN Bes a4 Py ee = $2. SIR. sig keener eee 104 
stY Gia: ad Ce oak: tos ee a arse oe eee 117 


ns 


ex 


BRP PPP Pw WW 


DDNONYDNYDNYNHHHH PH 


DorHH 


RwWwWwrnre Re 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


231 


Di ce iacelareitatesarsvaehars eels aie piaiciolss MO peme AOD ed ap atenreereicre sieves) stors.ereres 24, 132 
UG ies. os ohecateret cna vaaia ai stetatotetslane se ciel Ae LOS) tae Oto GPO DOD aICOn COO CLEC 194 
LO Foe fere SRCGee oa eke Saha Seer shoals Tet ORL ee orernigocanpoen a0 00 DUCE 154 
DOM eee Ra ataas sarcyererec Sees = ay) AUN) RBs. Ss i opiacnapacoaagodec ctgatnn 112 
hirer ose si steitievenla fel sieae,d7ore a aie as Ns iy bi Ce ce ercyatets: cveleie cierece} leveleteretene 141 
Oran cin cepeictsre ce cieretete Sin icicteisiets ier (Le Dslr ssetcreteheie cverete lave 82, 131, 132, 197 
LADD Scie evans eleterciene s,c.ete Wisse sate wate Sy rly We cutrerer terete) ero cieveselcreretersverevee LO 
ATs ows. Shes tel uss areas) 6 aus. avevevetshanmvete GAs Di DNOe SE fare crc ceieve <ieverore vis eteiereiotene 196 
ey 4 ut POO OOD EEE OO MO ome te) Sime cnc Omeuiatsleaicte le svclels s/sleinieters elareters 107 
DDIM ole ore aoe at stare iejavevs)is a jsversilaiere ets Ce MMOD Vel, cveinsieo Gre cise savers wi ateretere 132 
Dara clcte si sleie ee seis sis aise ele enscaie PA) (ED 6 SebooGo SOGOU OOOO OONOOOOe 59 
PHILIPPIANS. 
AUD) es sieyataza ois !e isis leis: ai solar so eesva a QAO E heats, areie.ers wars Biota teisteters@ sieners 170 
WSR ohone Cs Force io) o elovelo ss, wrote ler aiet BE SAB Shiva ss areteis 8 O08 orereuers ieee Oravats 12 
Uy Meet oY cpcgeistov a sisusisiene susvere acautves!a SOry GD Oile cubwtcusystois aie eistorcarclo ala eiecnorere ways 
US tec esis stele ster anes ose OO etl SNS Ot eta celeuote vert ereter cictots ctelolerotexeiere 22 
CAC eater oRecO-n CaS IODC COLO OO SOI Si Oia say creer suoversielaclsie: Severe Saree cll 191 
GR sa aysteuchn e seToratets ie ioc eceireys. oe PLE USE vised -o Go ea Coa O CO EOS 205, 206 
Sarat a ctetiracetvsnersialeteisieiere' aie eee/Sies HNO feeds iO smtetay er vey's aleie, aie) on ecayevsverensk susiersiers 80 
Qa Toto (cidiesierevs) axe eaifara'e setae MO SMD Pi Sree sataie ee veteve weno eters 164, 179 
WA emrercnsisie ies! <i sv wer sraneieiaia spears TAQ 23) See sisyereisre sos eronraisie 95, 102, 183 
WN rey ctessiista Site 6 aiets foves avers ofees SOM aoe UAS 5 a stave oislee cteticie © elslern o/sye 59 
Se Movere-cleveusiavels slareieisie@'s. ove leieve DUDE) es) sei a'cle ol sinie 6.0 siacslavecteisiate ore ors 82 
COLOSSIANS. 
MES ote cists oiars sre/ere'sl oleje’s Seas heisiel s OG Es SOA eete cers afarefeteyeisi sieiei'e doopao oly 
Os aniers tess s atercreleve atare cists olereveyetss YS) ASPBS S GGoa5ndc eiencststs srevclecateieloets 59 
U® og s6c000000b05000008 sot WOH Biel 6 sboGbooGHeoosooGdo0KCsac afl] 
OM ae efetetsiaiereisielsicteleicielsictetereierolciers 75 
I. THESSALONTIANS. 

Divreroiaietetesiate tere euevnrstetostareveicrevecsi ene SO As Sue 2 iicrencrevcietal stevie stoi S asia ave. ove 206 
Sie Sere erase re narrate ioicreroee eas aor As OIE oo seere eta tere e se even eiele Rhea ores 79 
Tass getarate aiovars talovacarerer ea ere enaerecedé MY Gimeno G cusererctevede’ <'ats a eretcie ts areokelers 74 
Mach ees aVatnein-a eretevere eke ielelavess ie MOGI ROOM ser Praesens: otteic at cater wanes 101 
ite iGyovers Teun closers cus bole slat ates ayenene ND RE OS SOM See ee cae ar severela'eis areretorare ners 191 
SW cio eopeusheveletss crstovaic tore arsievetaretore GR OL OMe esp crtovs tere, Cinie sie atom canisters 122 
BP Nas fatavars elev ebeies crsicietclelsvele.s ooetste SO POR LOL wie aera s aralevele: oi) nereroreloereters IIS 7/ 


aie aR loere\"e'e la 'elaslavo ue lalete ohec ie eiete BODE REGS oli aotety siete ata tatels 35 
MOAT wien 'o''> alaleletoiererereterek: eteiatoiete OO U ABUL hss ot wareees cristae 194, 209 
71 |G AO Arar doc 96, 135 
HEBREWS. 

i py |: OAR COR AOR aS RM YS oe 209, TLS (." ei atetete om aveivteteteiw siete eee 67 
MicA yeaa co cara eer 82 ADZ MD -PIOT sa Utara slate ote es ee ae 124 
Ot Fo sotcratale ates oketate chon metre cictatel ate OO ABS2y 3. <5 aatclevaevctave oyateters verano oes 81 
Py Nie PA eA PRE h Gok ODN Beau eects eyara serrate 151, 154, 169 
7A UE ot SEVERE ON A chee AS ee Ate ITS") SGieas Ae ce «oes Sees ..06, 175 
Dalla. Acai Uae 39) SAB. 18d coca ee ee ae ..198 
tl: em Ae RO ye or ot LOS, (Sis pecv craves cteletorarastatcteotchetarste ate ..39 
eh toe Be aike vista ie ears alee sels TSS* 19ST on cei eome elt datoere eee 100, 169 
GY RE et Le De etetararon Coral QOG), Dede ey. cis cieteieoe bene 159, 202 
Delt S St oteiet talent rsciatte eierereaiete OF. Sra wk oes se hs Cae aw eee aie ree 28 
SS Leics er RD: Ae IO) Oa ce 149, 159, 166 
Sd A AAA ACS RED OM OAC oE LSS LOAD A. Aerovcts cnntroraetepiets 149, 159, 166 
DHLO: Ree. a ee eS eRe ae FGO'> MDOT Sc cnie-welenoictelac de ao meee setae 100 
=i ieee eee eae 156/168; 179" A0c85, . 2.0. eee 110, 195 
BRI ee ohn Ht 153,202 AG ab. Sk 110 
LIE Ahearn yey aor op ATI LOPS = ance cde cena cee ee core 176 
eM ehee wisn citcunacarencie mesete ern 2OGS OST ae water tomtanheree Riese tete ae 82, 174 
AMES Fiske turclotet cic eres eee WHat LORZO a: eee ch te ek oie eer « 195 
ts Aa eee eR ees mcr ea VSG = ASB SG eieravcetives ceiereeree ees 204 
Ae oe ua ts Boe eid eis Gee oo eT rete DT USO eno ocala ratert es Riarewretene ee aes 41 
BG | 2 ar york eto cine mre eR tere DO MD eM comievcielec:cievelse wie elete len tamtces 163 
Bee aeestavete ove uahei, avnic ie e aCareterae takers 159° WUC O . eae Cente cienoee eae eee 174 
SO: on ta iia ae een samy sie chae fa L7G: AUS 2 i. wwamieah eh talem ete tee 198 
3 el «Pan erin, ay og ey oa Mir E76; TOT. A209" UUs BS wea rors win ei tnlee intale ee eet 143 
BOE! SAR, lope eiscacnarete ee mie ase BG Were SS Petar creda ieuetatein tate .149, 206 
Diy peta erirce ocerstene ereiae merece iets 96. 1 TSO aS aaluiskaertewies ss og 103, 119 
Ro. ek ae 97.145, The ya eee we tein as eles 103 
PIA as ote stati atte aie ree ke ere ete 1D elie Wel Grs Kvm'N wo'-ale ss Rielle CE 160 
oct F< a ene ree iat re Ao TO PRT i: was we wien mice eee eee 105 
Lott Ap ES OE TRE re Alri 112 tess 1 IS IEA NGAI cir ac 209 
Lf HAS ers i ee EEA aT SEO AG 7 AAS LI: s nsca cee eee eae - 206 
OLE eis ta a stars ate e a ark ans 154101 URsI8 . . wena hea enere een 112 
(EN LAA Sehr En ty OR Ne AN 191 Glad .. a:cacdie Wikies Mem wie Sine eeieeets 102 
ab > <1, ke eee OH450' 178 1B-ee., ccs eens 25, 112 
Ly OE Ta Se VR CEE pee te eo 168, 169, 170 
TER COs PE a vasana alae eta 66,76 “1d:2 5 «c0wnsnuecwawnacaneies 95, 195 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES, 


Il. THESSALONIANS. 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


Sietetseieieteveiere nie eile eeierer ayes 204 


US213 2 cevecess iewreleteisieleleleraier= 206 


Sr DH HH HE 


& 


:16 e eee eeeeseeeeeeesesneves 


i, TIMOTHY. 


Gere aares Pema sath 105 
/ Gea a eite See ies 84, 178 
$e eee cts Mea tes 74 
Cateree eens. DEP er 70 
lcs Ga ae ne 124 
Brac asee: Foes sso Ss: 26, 158 
Itsove Noe sen tae Ranches 102 
GREE Sony Acs Cha ces ork 143 


BISSIG ey plete teeate estcttetete ictolote terse ec 110 
MB Dy cdreveleteroteteteteletstoletatste’a tes se, s 194 
AeA 51h ie ete wrotete.tole te tots le/e eae steels 105 
EAE Ke. “ctctatetolaletateleitetetetete's ‘stale tarele 6s 166 
Die Sivek tal stata atst ovelslatetovetglaterslabalertals 103 
ENT: os sateratetotoietetetetate/stelelolelaie's 59, 103 
Np Ae Sanosoar Grataletatateotetetotwctete 166 
DA eiss toleteis ke lelate'e'a's sieve" le'slete we 102 
IUZO tat faletetaloto te tete|'s Tove tslels sletelete lets » 24 
Gis wer wetele?atalator (oats ’otetate atale oratevaletere 59 
GrOictesitricis ccs sadiee secs ecoGs LUO 


II. TIMOTHY. 


Pel estes ete sate OL LS Oirak a ssans Sara eyermciesre sich cicaiste 148 
ALG iene P's 5.1b.5/5.6;5.818.0.3.6 1 018/50, 0%e e's Tt eel RSS aoa OIG OO GEOMECOOROC 717 
MoM Ge cess esss siete Sisissath eves sees 123 (4:28. 224.5% 5% este Talay te loite ee alle cies 66 
4 COSC $5.5 balebbieiaes oes CAV ® 252113 BES Sais Se CITI CnC Gmc 172 
DNSL1O) oy Velolalalalevetelstelatetelshelerslels LOZ OS acid mem tlelers SGe SoU OOOIAAeGOO'T 16 
TITUS. 
ELL atsiale isis Fibs 24 2b b's U5 PAP, aI a Sac Sdiguddas cGoddUacoS 113 
BLE) ciais sivisis o50 5.685 ad sae a0 PUN) ee Boe ais SEs aceite aera aeresetoiee he 75 
QeBee. s sisiis ais Sasi aaisid eros aves elses MOIS clotialee sialersi oie arain oi ieeniceeione 113 
ITER. ay olete's, ota Sineslecajsieiess Vet syeusie are SOE Bee Mel FAW ctetehstelceretetelaratecsletst craters sie. 59 
PHILEMON. 
13 mioteieiarsvevalcrstete cleterciciate Reuse OA we OO lan. sictetcre aaleree aicieieseve\efsters\e/evsteve 102 
Ges a ciaiee 3. Sicpenshevereletersreicieieetsote 98 
REVELATION. 

Miata xeyareetsiate’s/s15 047,09, 92, 90, 20S) 250 6 os /ee sales Bistcrelolarelelio otaversiereye's 36 
BLES crassa icistetes a averelete oe eysie aveieveie o-< GON DON seevevaietelorerere eustavele orereceieoiers 74 
GOB aye cere niave erevors\siaicrare ote, eyare arate’ s Meee LA re cvale cucreuerevereletetaieyaielersr sixes ee: s 94 
1:81 RACE GO Cc oGr OC Ore acre 2G or ZAGER aye) ctaperevctom Pelee eer sie "8 2S 
LOSERS OC CROC OTIC OCS ro. ABEL, © SARTO A cre alo 6 cco gniCIn GEICIIcOeae 105 
Fa: ont sr eye.sre makers. aiesee eysie-e heroes Ms SIE 2 Oia eee te tenet c ra ato exe) shevererans/eeieeis 36 
78S) AOC CR ORO OCI. okie BM) AGRA Sry Un ROCIO eRe NORE 171 
Sie. akties <fatarejereieve te avel win) ete erslalenros ei). -SRo4 oe G ae Oe can eRe Dre cron oc 93 
DEO oe ara is: cei wlerere sale erelsis slece austerets SVAN OES a iter cate vorei'e.s) 6:6 Sal o\sslererene eo eie 39, 96 
DOr as ele ars ate 6 aretes caveie’e'o Oe eis Mee LOGI aie. Fe cd eaters eens BS AOR OC 


bo 
ie) 
—_ 


INDEX TO NEW TESTAMENT PASSAGES. 


5 fp a Cee eR ree BA Wisi ee i ieaene 56 
“ELD ee ea ee 20; OU 208° “ALIS peek eee 101 
Es hiss cae eee WA. UIT, cAvcveeia ee 53 
“i | ae ry ppp 31) A577 124 Scenes 55 
| ae Cc lgeuene dct 75 AQMIG A. .. Ba sa cae toeee 180 
) Need Pidet bree Shs 8 01 aed cy, ce ee 169 
. tid Aree, olshh Sauiro a een 66 
Base eee bot, ae BR aay. 9420 ceo eee sak ie 105, 116 
DORs eae Rune ore tte 173: 74500. Pe acceane ae eee 109 
SD engi ants Aner eRe os 5 ee (A bas Lt Pes cer » she eee 92 
Bye ie oh eee oe O04 16218" > foes So ee 82 
ee ee SO eet ite 204 - 16:19 . i. <i. sacs renee 
BS dcatecs ier 7c eens tee OR GB Ud hee eee 
Tec giles’ bosch aentaO, (Aas CAS Melee ape ese,’ 167 
cs Pacey Oe ang a se ee 22 100 NT A ar eee isn So ee 
8 
1 
1 
1 
2 
9 
1 


-_ 
° 
is 

ot 
bo 
Oo 
nq 


cudcldsoréecmdenenseascdlindQ0 (S53 ec. 6. ene eee 54 
BF on ature ho eee ee Oo ASIG 4° : Sons veeeaneeen snare eaee 
(Se ee RCE e ante Ae Cee Che | ae Sead ane ee hae: 82 

ce Mp erate ao a ee Dy alls fs eee men eB reas 76 
19:3 Git. 50hcel sees oe 39 
eae Seen ae ee D6. 20:85: snc eons ce ee 171 


. 
. 
. 
a 
or) 


Sat eo Pere eat oe 160, 173. BAOeh co. eek soko: Ae 172 
a Ss Se DR a eps eee 130“ Pi Oe Soe 28, 83, 116 
1 Re AA REALS da! AQ") 82290, co. sacs cata 200 
PaO O cae cate eee 208. BAD -5 .. sala eee 
1:9 


HH OMONNNAAGRA IAI HP PP PH | WH & H & 


INDEX OF SOME IMPORTANT GREEK WORDS. 


(For alphabetical list of verbs see chapter on Principal Parts of 


Verbs. 
sitions. 


For alphabetical list of prepositions see chapter on Prepo- 
The minute Table of Contents at the beginning of the 


volume will enable one to find easily the subjects treated as well 
as the various Greek words in their proper place and order. It 
remains only to giye here various isolated Greek words that de- 


serve special compilation. ) 


PAGE 
ai Siete CAS Loe Ampaapanoonee a 92 
sia eee Cea are 58, 59 
LAGI Baio 00 ae SA OB UBM 24 
GETS “669.66 SAR DOUEO BOLE COOEE AOC. 45 
TET TEESS 5 SSE AGRA OO ROO EEDOO OA 60 
Tp GSO omc DD AGS LOBE DUC OLDE OCU: 58 
Tih Bothospas 56 6 sD eOBOORD DOE Ooo 27 
LEON ioreehalatehs eleletaretocctatelery) leteiw'e'e 23 
GIGIVLOS cr eccisiecerele tors siersle'aie. 6 else 3 26 
CMUPED osobeecacpenannaaonnodT 40 
axpiBéoratos ealaters Greve eievetelte 27, 66 
GNNDNGYictsteratetele = cielo/-ie c's = ale =e 31 
GAAOTPLEMLTKOTIOS «+++ 0-2 eee eee 59 
is ee ies hee 19, 108, 110 
DpLDISy~ <'2'0''0'6 Giateioatelelafoye em mieeats 19 
GUL GIOT.EPOU- folatoleialn'= fale =!n/ala)-le)s'-i= 23 
ZUG Whaaod Gbamoncope Abougsanes 23 
thi c 13, 128, 162ff, 169 
BO OO set eta aleta acetal sta stob ni eee 45 


PAGE 
avrurapnAbev IOOO DOO OORGOGOSOOE 60 
amrexarertabn Mi Ah dicvatcucseerste eld diets 41 
I COTANKEY, Ce avet eas Woy 55 
MTOUAVOUNOL: <<). etre en 38 
EC ROR E SRR ss 20, 60 
VAGRONNWPLOSS Ses SSOP 60 
amrorX®, dmrgréow....... Sets tatofots ete 38 
GMONUTPOGIGS Hee neers 58 
ORCA oeelS Nec ae ean 149 
QAO oe ees Se ie ee ee 177 
Opmd epee alanis ein 26 
Eppa Bavecnteck cere ole ee 11 
GON Yee cans iiniateinine osha ater 67 
a yc ea em Ae ce 26 
GUTOKOTEKPUTOS elo wetateljele'-/e-5 c's 6 59 
ae Naina race eee 30, 78, 79 
HOUTEN) ono AOD CO BGOREOOe ECS oe 41 
ECS e atsinreiaiayeoivore a's/ay8 cicisiciaees 36 
Cayo foie DAP OOBEDODE ODO De 12 
THEN o> oo oobboobaCAoodbHNOnG” 38 


GG Gites wine sis CREA RS 45 
ROU TOR ao 53's oc ke eae ve 39 
apnKes Siu Slelslouelatalntatatalalatel anets 35, 39 
BOLO: os vaskin cess serra nes 12 
vy amet Belk a ebro 34, 37 
ONAL ais ceo aka desc oa SEN 171 
Baan? ist mnt SsGre obey aces 24 
Bibtins kas i eeiemeeex eee 26 
Bawrilia Faved eae 60 
Beware sist Acris eh 14 
BARTOW Lia's pie de ee ted AEs 38 
Bacrrevs acai e talel el oiataralahatar a’ f® 22, 23 
BO haryieienic's\nae saves eee ee 24 
BUDE wesw eine oti eeew Aucke ae 19 
BODE ce tn on everett denen 18 
MaUN EL 2s ay ash reas ae ee 46 
2 eae eon: Oe ya La 149, 159 
9 ROE OPEL Or oe 205 
WEVOMUE bios ce Cuore <u tee 38 
YEYPAGG 22+ eer evccecccsecs 38, 40 
YEVOS «a/v,» «0.n:0;>,».>jvin's) sine pin ace 22, 23 
MEBIOD Taf pape s vr ea wuReEE gece 23 
WH Lee pie sees pe se aes 72 
MGI Ge plea ax eeate’s ene wees eke 36 
SUIDOME: cid Se Meee ees Sees 36 
YORE BNA ep Vag wens es vex eee 50 
VOVVULD asi pie vss raos mapenaas 60 
VALPLNOTOUS ss 5's bote ca nea esas Om 22 
OOO. hn 0s aowkbne eee oem 21 
Oi i ac 3 + vo a wis ConA o7 
CRYIN icin win casos acetate 57 
GSlie te eae eke once oaat 57 
Signs (3) see ke 31, 81 
Ser is, Sud cis ied eee eRe ee 24 
(Ot EVER TEV eye 179 


INDEX TO SOME IMPORTANT GREEK WORDS. 


Dit Ss fit emeer eee 206 
Onpogig: sv anu tees ea ae 110 
ROO sbi tices cies eos 34 
Siciibe (63 s-k ee 58, 59 
SUIT WIY oi sat eke eae meee 58 
DURNCOG) Sess a's Cae oe ee 58 
Oinalipe iniccha gece dee aes 58 
Sixales! tne ak See ee 58 
Oikaiamts: ss cs ee Bee 58 
OUKOMITYS Lic. ceslealecee eee 58 
BURGAS si's/c0's' sa Se 58 
Dips aba eo ee 57 
Oe dee eee eee 149 
Sing ees weiks een ee ten 159 
OUT NOUS’ «a kveShs eee ee 59 
O00 - ssi s iG es be pee ee 42 
Sos” Sours chad dee ee 45 
DUS soe sos 2 Pa ee ee 58 
DUVOUGL cosa ron en robes e eee ee 34 
D0). Ges bate ho ee a Dee 23 
dun and Soin ....-..+- cee ueee 50 
OUPELY <x. 55 space h eee ee Se 152 
Che Pease sepawand ob eaee one 179f 
tes conan 13, 128, 161, 169 
EGER GTO. she rece reees peeee eee 41 
EeniOun dee eee oe 35, 47 
EYVOKG ee 40 
Ce EEE Tor 34 
SD eG ae 29f., 45, 78 
ZOoALOUaGY 53.08 e bad verb RE EEE 36 
i: Me rey yr eee 35 
CHAP pyoKia, oo cscevessevscees 59 
24) , suntan Recon 161, 1624, 177 
rh eh, ) Sere e Lr 39 


ey 


INDEX TO SOME IMPORTANT GREEK WORDS. 


SIKOWE, Gols cra ees 28 ecco 6 iS vs" 23 
GAWPG sinccacesvecicesesesue 40 
Elbit aie = cre ee enyes eens Nobreee 37 
CUS EO see uses estes h ss ss 68 
CIN odio tn ks 408 ae ee8eSn tires 35 
CSOT aida ce 6 ss De Sess 6% 6%'s o's 35 
CEC CORON COCO ICE 149 
RCo eters air stcta cle otaascrere's eis, 36 
ER VOOUI eels Meteo ties waclotele 36 
‘Exatovtapxns Rains oak 18 
ExaTovTapXos DR sas tere sino kee is 18 
EREIVOG) eis oa ae visas 6 S:cfe ss 30 
EKEKMUGUE asa Jue dses ses os. 35 
EKA MOMs fas 3nd 25984 24g cK 3 72 
ERNEM ER ooo eas oaeeaee ne ae ass 38 
€AdxuoTos 5. AORN. AbD CrGCrOcor 27 
ehaxvorotepos Selah staderetatets a tec ete PH h 
ERB cc kat oe soos s wae 38 
CTC. Ona a ee ee ee 12 
CPUMENN DEES Yet ie waa Hac 358 85 8s 11 
PUTO 2 SORE 11 
io) Ea Ae ee 35 
eEarepos OcooocobeéeoseoosoDoOCE 27 
Cr pOPHTEVTEY +o. eee cess ceeeees 41 
EpnjLos So Gop Terr OR OO UDC DOr S 26 
CTE BOC eae Ea Eee eae ae 11 
COR! nGo ODD t HAO Bee ner 173 
Ig BSB eae ee eae 159, 173 
longo tee 159 
erevOnTrep 5 GoD tS0 GOODS oaCta me 159 
REIN Aoi iovehelancvessis attain svoateels 45 
ePIRITIEMEON Reet eos, 5 ats a as 0 hale 38 
nn See 26 
Ewpaka, EOpaka .........--- 40, 54 
“ie. cl.) SASSO Gaeta saa eee 171 


f) SIUn BOR OUOHSACUEe DIOROOG Oe 148 
SUD OT tetas ais ie ected ainin eis os 2 = 41 
KG) cee Sone eee Sratetete 38, 52 
WYROGU: ses cacses ses saa ea eevee 35 
WNGS 4.0 3 oa..siee Vs 3/4 ae de qdddn 72 
YPAPTHOA «..00% dad esdnaee 35 
PPTEAOS sc cksccdsas Sdalakeeeee 30 
STS ooo So eateooscsote on 26 
DLOUMMUEGE 62s a2. oS oie eee 30 
MRUROME Se eden oc rok cee emia 173 
MVEONOVTOW: = 2654568 desc cesd nes 41 
MP YVQGM On teli<0.s0 Ja awake tee 41 
pEipaotavasies +: 4225 ce5cce ee 60 
7pwoTovy AR IEICE DOGO OB OUOOL 36 
QUE: cee nis twee 65 Uk ewe oie 0's 37 
Gandara ison cc k ste eee 72 
GENane to so 5 ed dso eto ee 12 
Cece ct aee toss ha aace ae ye eee 45 
GUyaTAp. asia e sess s ws Desiee os 21 
LOCA ee ci cases 14, 44, 179 
BOL G 220s) foveal fot cre pa\otorsh ta htetahaters 110 
DOROS ames ess vos a korea hen othe 31 
FOO OMEN era Aa Oe 179 
MEAG ONUNS, 65 Fei s ss csseses 20, 24 
Be OVC ANT IE xa 33k on-state 20 
lv i iecne CaoneR OD nae enoke pos 20 
Se ONS sa RAM Ne AG 26 
Ci le age are ae eae ee 152ff. 
figs di ee eee SOBTICE Toe CEL ree 39 
EGTEVOS wha SAI tatoos: < ele 34 
E (Cet) OMIKELU sate iatetefoletsfaiciiaisfele sce 52 
EMM ORR hansen cate 22 
ROME RR ate Ss Sere & Rae eSEN 175 
Gilt Soc00ns Ssopgene oboe 175 


Kabapos 


238 INDEX TO SOME IMPORTANT GREEK WORDS. 


sane eo er rs Mort hs 175. \jadreccteg © een eee 26 
papeetioe ho |. aes L5G; VANS: . jubynin ss soa eee 27 
RAGES saves eun aenweaneeee eee WG5 pe orepos.ca ees on see enna <6 27 
Kabwomep + +++ +++ cette eee e eens LIS? “petlenes occat'e cae ai win ee ta gun aie 
ROL Jaan anineitaes AO ee ort LET CO acre pate 0 arnwaeamauate cue 
MORVOG an quan a aie enia mats atte es BS BeARe seb saccecsee eee 37, 139 
RULACD - vasn Gann cele wade = atelte BGT “Revers anche os a nig Gials 5 ain aw eee 
WURETO wie ee saleid aeiweds vein wiarg% 38 py --152, 167, 170, 177, 198, 199ff. 
KANO-SOATKAAOS eee eeseeeeeee 7 pmdé and other compounds -199ff. 
KONOSS Gis eee sieve ere aie reve''e aw 58, 59 HukpOTEpos OOM IO ice rr 27 
Kamepvaovp ......00- hain ete Li. povodbad pos, .Acnnn costo 59 
KavOnowvTat a njapalalajainuesa gis malate 52 Movo7s Cor eeeee cere cccceccace 18 
KEKOTTLAKES alae tial aaee Wiale dia fie 39 vat 90,5) 60,660, 6,0,00,6,0 Ceevcccoece 206 
KexpaSovowv aig ta techalte Sevan sa ianmn de ata ee 39 vavs ecceccces 2.0, 815) )6e.selnie eevee 22 
Reis et tie: Ss Slee is 2A Oe eo Ok ca aa samagnsoaeane o.o0 a8 
KeponOnowvrat ee cceccceescccce 42 vi rr i ares 207 
Kephadndw Lt teary Se ee : 19 VIKY] «es ceccccccens sinrasetatet oa 18 
oo Rane eee ries Sar SOL STKOG Reason eee catene 18 
BONES ts, fei 50c)d. <,ccace BURRS ae SRE 21) SPGANENOIG Fs, s'o'sis cic lee eee 65 
JOA) a wo hw: ood wid son 2 eld ate eo BG: ~HOUS cada. cyee suahee ole alee pee 20 
KOT NOS hs paca cen pee momreee 12) PRETOP, Gini ieee eee 20 
TANGA Sein hee sedintalsta etnias ae epee 1106, , TO+- eee eee ee eee e neces 68ff 
RDN hic wip eee > ORE SRE EE TOG: | 6GE SoU. laanSarcilane eee ee 30 
et ose wnw.c rena cwacee avenge 20 (G80S si,s,sisiicesinhadneleven Eee 20 
WSLIBE loiaisi dai ol doicies eval sso Ne AS -GOUNGOUL ooecs oicwavnanca ashen 46 
DUE aie a ic clea yet tte asin arciaeat Tl: FOLD PeV. szsccoeten are ee eee 39 
DR ONINEy o :0i7 épa cece o tm nenee 59 solxadapiyOyy) <asiaca05 sens saeeeee 41 
PIT 8 aya eis cram sigyole aie iae Mn ee 1B; AguCae ee cc® Jato cane xe eee 72 
INANIT OUR o's co 9'aid a.alcteeets Bn eee BA” NGRIR siete 4 a's v0.3 ae eee 30, 179 
PP ek nave sas wea BB, OAl ys 25-5 '..24 ss senna See 12 

GAECITEL TS ciaih oe ole pose siece neler anes 27 bpooyounevws eres te cn 65 
paddov SNe etal ar ah wie hoe ne ote al ot ee DT | Gr Ole a s.c cae eee eek eae 31, 179 
eeiiis ros sera eae ac acy eee AB. Owe. «vases nak nena 152 
Mapia Virwiwe vue eer ee Te 1 8 Opewv ee eececerceeeoneceenetesece 22 


INDEX TO SOME IMPORTANT GREEK WORDS. 


BOLI REN ee Geeks Lede bees 26, 58 
GOOpE awe araas Cee es ceat es 175 
OT OSH Tana Ele coset nore e olacake 31, 179 
GOT OLE ae aera oi etaie Sas bees 20 
OO TUS ea nr teareie sletoersss 31, 169f. 
OTA Es owas wees ee Saisie sieielersaae 
OTE ssoec Kes Mea Nae aiee se RLee 
OTE vesocecede ces 149, 156, 181, 183 
Be ies Aserearsi tc ce 177, 198, 199ff, 
Gua Ahnu ceeieton's Rhicyole evctsterone 179f 
GUke ieeetsn errs BECO in 179f 
ovdé and other compounds - -199ff. 
UVa ease ee Sacecaes a sicteloe eo 
OUPGV Osis fe disie: classe Aeritecceee Hho 
OUTER ase ses Fateh ACOA ey 
DULOS [seats dadadedae les sivewsian 00 
on Sid potion domo Gunaine AS annie au 
CUNEO Ee Merc! SIAR AE OOS Se Sees 42 
CPENOURP ere A eek a ka 130, 157 
OPOadpodovAlO, .... 2. cess eee 59 
CITIES hes ee ee 110 
MLV NDOER cso hs hod ec adisis oes 110 
COTE, <i Ae eee ee 19 
BOVE) Oo on vono coo obor coBoacade 110 
TUL) Cook od GOsu Ses OE sHocd 109 
TD RMS COONS SO Pte ee lrg 
TO PENE GOT AV) «12 sis se! ss oo! swale 35 
EAU EVIE es <i ss stele visreie' on" 41 
CELINE GS Oren Ge et eee 21 
FREUDELT |LOG We eoele cs «fas seks ses e+ 60 
REL ES rate Macnee ators 33, 54 
9b Re eae 26 
REM TUIKOEUS Servet lermciarete sare 54 
MLETRTUOREG? ee eeate Grete a cle sin ia Re 54 
PEEGIEILGNT 0) totes scorers: -hereias shorere sisiere 45 


SAR OOo Re 27 
Mee cr Nore ee Sy aaevelatet alata o3's eh 206 
WET OV PLL ieveralctage Ccakelets isle sial-isietelat 38 
TEN NUROS « wrere\e aici a sia sista nie aye 179 
LET OU Ae'sisialasteleiaiala'e ddidate hee 46 
WOUMALL fa1kdie: ciate eieieleleieid aeainiete lotto 37 
TANS DODDS Sielel elctaielslc cere sierevets 27 
mAnpodv * Sho Obbab conc to ee 33 
TWNOUTOG EAs oie ies 0 dic easel (Sie 

ROT ec ec ise 21 
TLOLOG Mie eile os! ors PEP Pr er re bcice 30 
TONS vse cees Bilcistohsee cert 21, 22 
Ge EROS AER E Recon oragasocor 18 
TOTOS ».205 SPA A URAC ee 31, 179 
MOTE o ciasialsts Sele ores wise are Oareiate 179 
WOTEPOV ee oceisiveie oc Yam stersrners sere 179 
WPETBUTEPOS «were ses eocecssoves 60 
BE Sik pees pate 
TpooTlOnpe WEUWAL «+++ ee eeeeee 7 
ST ees ret cet 41 
MPOTWTOANMLTTNS ++ 200eereesees 59 
AC cEROS ase 27 
MPT OS ess axis ei 28, 66 
LEE ROD: cea arty 179 
POVTULO' osaistereaie st neistieiod fees 60 
Tap Garon ice dee ete: 17 
GELUTOU nies oes oho aton boise 30 
GG sod cons on bobodanEN 166n 58 
CKEVOGNOV eae ee eae 57 
GEES ENTIG olson Ssh oon ee eee 59 
OP Grsi}) Gao batec Oob SOURED OC 59 
OKOMAT Aero ele koe ois os ahaieee 59 
ROTO ee oes es 59 
GIN <6 oaccoc beens baboon sess- 59 


Foe Oe i ie Mere 18 
IRR i Rv in atv nie 8 wo arie eiigteeee 36 
OUP ASSEORP OPE fot once 29f., 45, 78 
TUYYEINS  vavteneawaue auieace 11, 26 
ovyyevis Sip 0 ele. n 8 Sie oie s\n 5. 0" gin pe wile 26 
FU YCOURWOS oa nina ceenaas ea 60 
ovvedvins aieieisievs aieraisio oteiiisicacisisi 18 
GUVLOUO LU sec. alte sicisiercieie alee einieicle 37 
TWTETXW ..+.-- Seruatans. ones 11 
CxUaiitoaeemiceear Riaetorsis cisseearals 45 
TOP vosccecsees Sp osc aeseacoc 23 
TONG. 600s ans eu cise seiee= ss 108, 110 
Taxvov (€Lov) sietavateveletateret a nualaintcecee 27 
oa Ae Ba A bY AGERE Be Et 
TeOewediwto cialelaiatateletertiuiels (ele iatslars 41 
PENIS a 50 nci0's5 10 Stee eta 5 ca heloiee 58 
TETTAPES oo csscccecscccsceces . 28 
TETTEPA oes eeees eee ve 13, 28 
TETOEPAKOVTG se eeeeeeees eee 28 
TETTEPUKOVTGETHS se eeeeceeeee . 28 
TETHPYKGY os ccc ccncvcnavescens 39 
Tega peeve Src eaters ne 31 
BUS seis waste Gary <wekivexols Lispoaae 
Gk cine siaae A OCR en re 206 


TOLYA POUR: ¢ S54 ya ee eee eee 149 
WOLVOE 2s Svc bona twee eee 149 
POLOUTUG ss. ovals one coe eed 30 
TOMMITEPOS ++ ss eeeeececeeceeee 27 
TODS “ah sas 0.0is ase eee 30 
TOTOUTOS 2s ccceee TE He 31 
re OMIT ee re 98 
Pap ide aie a iueca SoRaeEeeee 23 
Sudeenos © * 4ss 45 20s near aeeene 30 
DM QUTOY =~ <> oes 2602 sweaealone 30 
barepexrrepiraov eres 117 
PVETEE ifm «an ne eee ee 46 
PayOnes 6a dino cx ee Cee 37 
RUUNUEL co > sin 5 Rian kia pine me se 19 
XGPLS oo e0ee Seared oon ea 22, 65 
NEACOP casio cle» stawnie ne eee 22 
MECDOy ois nin nn eeh Seka eee 20, 22 
RT TUVOS | «<5 wt Bs os Oe ee 60 
DUES WS akin: dinles cle ee ean 14 
XPUTGY ++ eee cree eee e eee eeeees 26 
Dosa a Sales oe ae meee 179f. 
cue est 152, 155, 156, 160, 173, 175 
QUTES 55 eaicce ann etes ata leree Go) OmiarS 155 





j 


» 


# 
a 


* 


= 





nm 


GENERAL LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA—BERKELEY 


RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 


This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the 
date to which renewed. 
Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 


RECEIVED 
27)an55 JLB JUN S'6G => pM 
manapezsyy | GOAN Perr, 

, J1[hov Ooty 
NOV2 9 1985 CP pu enc of SFE NG Cporett + WAY aT 

SU Ci ic giisr 4 p LN 
ast | DEC 2 6 1985. | 
REC'D LD [CUE 25-198F | | 
JAN 2 4°64-12 ME | x 


. v 
9 9 ,OCg c 
is 7 iJIUe VU 














LD 21—100m-1,'54(1887s16) 476 


| we Oe ( 
¢d panne’ 
[No | 
GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 


OT EL 


0 





SAIS ae ee oS Se 2 i Bri a OR et ed 
eS Resa Sn a Stee WAR be Ag Se > Spe Sia ae SOR 


. : Sets 
eo 2e-" ‘ —* 
2° ee a pean ser 


ea RII eA ee ESE ae REN REAR 


A 
ns Soa rs 
Sete 


~*~ 


+= oe 


se 


bt 





SS 


